Galilei, Galileo Discorsi 1665 London Salusbury, Thomas en galil_disco_01_en_1665 069.xml

MATHEMATICAL DISCOURSES AND DEMONSTRATIONS, TOVCHING Two NEW SCIENCES; pertaining to THE MECHANICKS AND LOCAL MOTION:

BY GALILÆVS GALILÆVS LYNCEVS,Chiefe Phylo&longs;opher and Mathematitian to the mo&longs;t Serene GRAND DVKE of TVSCANY.WITH AN APPENDIX OF THECentre of Gravity Of &longs;ome SOLIDS.

Engli&longs;hed from the Originall Latine and Italian, By THOMAS SALUSBURY, E&longs;q;

LONDON,Printed by WILLIAM LEYBOURN, Anno Dom. MDCLXV.

GALILEUS, HIS DIALOGUES OF MOTION.

The Fir&longs;t Dialogue.

INTERLOCUTORS,

SALVIATUS, SAGREDUS, and SIMPLICIUS.

SALVIATUS.

The frequent re&longs;ort (Gentlemen) to your Famous Ar&longs;enal of Venice, pre&longs;en­teth, in my thinking, to your Speculative Wits, a large field to Philo&longs;ophate in: and more particularly, as to that part which is called the Mechanicks: in re­gard that there all kinds of Engines, and Machines are continually put in u&longs;e, by a huge number of Artificers of all &longs;orts; among&longs;t whom, as well through the ob&longs;ervations of their Prede­ce&longs;&longs;ors, as tho&longs;e, which through their own care they continually are making, it's probable, that there are &longs;ome very learned, and bravely di&longs;cours'd Men.

A De&longs;cription of the Ar&longs;enal ofVenice.

It is a large field for Wits to Philo­&longs;ophate in.

SAGR. Sir, you are not therein mi&longs;taken: and I my &longs;elf, out of a natural Curio&longs;itie, do frequentlie for my Recreation vi&longs;it that place, and confer with the&longs;e per&longs;ons; which for a certain prehe­minence that they have above the re&longs;t we call ^{*} Over&longs;eers: who&longs;e di&longs;cour&longs;e hath oft helped me in the inve&longs;tigation of not only won­derful, but ab&longs;truce, and incredible Effects: and indeed I have been at a lo&longs;&longs;e &longs;ometimes, and de&longs;paired to penetrate how that could po&longs;&longs;ibly come to pa&longs;&longs;e, which far from all expectation my &longs;en&longs;es demon&longs;trated to be true; and yet that which not long &longs;ince that good Old man told us, is a &longs;aying and propo&longs;ition, though com­mon enough, yet in my opinion wholly vain, as are many others, often in the mouths of unskilful per&longs;ons; introduced by them, as I &longs;uppo&longs;e, to &longs;hew that they under&longs;tand how to &longs;peak &longs;omething about that, of which neverthele&longs;&longs;e they are incapable.

* Proti.

The Opinion of Common Artificers are often fal&longs;e.

SALV. It may be Sir, you &longs;peak of that la&longs;t propo&longs;ition which he affirmed, when we de&longs;ired to under&longs;tand, why they made &longs;o much greater provi&longs;ion of &longs;upporters, and other provi&longs;ions, and reinforcements about that Galea&longs;&longs;e, which was to be launcht than is made about le&longs;&longs;er Ve&longs;&longs;els, and he an&longs;wered us, that they did &longs;o to avoid the peril of breaking its Keel, through the mighty weight of its va&longs;t bulk, an inconvenience to which le&longs;&longs;er &longs;hips are not subject.

Great Ships apter than others to break their Keels in Launching, accor­ding to &longs;ome.

SAGR. I do intend the &longs;ame, and chiefly that la&longs;t conclu&longs;ion, which he added to his others, and which I alwaies e&longs;teemed a vain conceit of the Vulgar, namely, That in the&longs;e and other Machines we mu&longs;t not argue from the le&longs;&longs;e to the greater, becau&longs;e many Mechanical Inventions take in little, which hold not in great. But being that all the Rea&longs;ons of the Mechanicks, have their founda­tions from Geometry; in which I &longs;ee not that greatne&longs;&longs;e and &longs;malne&longs;&longs;e make Circles, Triangles, Cilinders, Cones, or any other &longs;olid Figures &longs;ubject to different pa&longs;&longs;ions: when the great Ma­chine is conformed in all its members to the proportions of the le&longs;&longs;e that is u&longs;eful, and fit for exerci&longs;e to which it is de&longs;igned; I cannot &longs;ee why it al&longs;o &longs;hould not be exempt from the unlucky, &longs;ini&longs;ter, and de&longs;tructive accidents that may befall it.

SALV The &longs;aying of the Vulgar is ab&longs;olutely vain, and &longs;o fal&longs;e, that its contrary may be affirmed with equal truth, &longs;aying, That many Machines may be made more perfect in great than lit­tle: As for in&longs;tance, a Clock that &longs;hews and &longs;trikes the Houres, may be made more exact in one certain &longs;ize, than in another le&longs;&longs;e. With better ground is that &longs;ame conclu&longs;ion u&longs;urped by other more intelligent per&longs;ons, who refer the cau&longs;e of &longs;uch effects in the&longs;e great Machines different from what is collected from the pure, and ab&longs;tracted Demon&longs;trations of Geometry, to the imperfection of the matter, which is &longs;ubject to many alterations, and defects. But here, I know not whether I may without contracting &longs;ome &longs;u&longs;pition of Arrogance &longs;ay, that thither al&longs;o doth the recour&longs;e to the defects of the matter (able to blemi&longs;h the perfecte&longs;t Mathe­matical Demon&longs;trations) &longs;uffice to excu&longs;e the di&longs;obedience of Machines in concrete, to the &longs;ame ab&longs;tracted and Ideal: yet not­with&longs;tanding I will &longs;peak it, affirming, That ab&longs;tracting all imper­fections from the Matter, and &longs;uppo&longs;ing it mo&longs;t perfect, and unal­terable, and from all accidental mutation exempt, yet neverthe­le&longs;&longs;e its only being Material, cau&longs;eth, that the greater Machine, made of the &longs;ame matter, and with the &longs;ame proportions, as the le&longs;&longs;er; &longs;hall an&longs;wer in all other conditions to the le&longs;&longs;er in exact Symetry, except in &longs;trength, and re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t violent inva&longs;i­ons: but the greater it is, &longs;o much in proportion &longs;hall it be wea­ker. And becau&longs;e I &longs;uppo&longs;e the Matter to be unalterable, that is alwaies the &longs;ame, it is manife&longs;t, that one may produce Demon&longs;tra­tions of it, no le&longs;&longs;e &longs;imply and purely Mathematical, then of eter­nal, and nece&longs;&longs;ary Affections: Therefore, Sagredus, Revoke the opinion which you, and, it may be, all the re&longs;t hold, that have &longs;tu­died the Mechanicks; that Machines, and Frames compo&longs;ed of the &longs;ame Matter, with punctual ob&longs;ervation of the &longs;elf &longs;ame proporti­on between their parts, ought to be equally, or to &longs;ay better, pro­portionally di&longs;po&longs;ed to Re&longs;i&longs;t; and to yield to External injuries and a&longs;&longs;aults: For if it may be Geometrically demon&longs;trated, that the greater are alwaies in proportion le&longs;s able to re&longs;i&longs;t, than the le&longs;&longs;e; &longs;o that in fine there is not only in all Machines & Fabricks Arti&longs;icial, but Natural al&longs;o, a term nece&longs;&longs;arily a&longs;cribed, beyond which neither Art, nor Nature may pa&longs;&longs;e; may pa&longs;&longs;e, I &longs;ay, al­waies ob&longs;erving the &longs;ame proportions with the Identity of the Matter.

Many Machines may be made more exact in great than in little.

Great Material Machines, al­though framed In the &longs;ame proportion as others of the &longs;ame Matter that are le&longs;&longs;er, are le&longs;&longs;e &longs;trong and able to re&longs;i&longs;t external Im­petu&longs;s's than the le&longs;&longs;er.

SAGR. I already feel my Brains to turn round, and my Mind, (like a Cloud unwillingly opened by the Lightning,) I perceive to be &longs;urprized with a tran&longs;cient, and unu&longs;ual Light, which from affar off twinkleth, and &longs;uddenly a&longs;toni&longs;heth me; and with ab­&longs;truce, &longs;trange, and indige&longs;ted imaginations. And from what hath been &longs;poken, it &longs;eems to follow, that, it is a thing impo&longs;&longs;ible to frame two Fabricks of the &longs;ame Matter, alike, and unequal, and between them&longs;elves in proportion equally able to Re&longs;i&longs;t; and were it to be done, yet it would be impo&longs;&longs;ible to find two only Launces of the &longs;ame wood, alike between them&longs;elves in &longs;trength, and toughne&longs;&longs;e, but unequal in bigne&longs;&longs;e.

A Wooden Launce fixed in a Wall at Right-Angles, and reduced to &longs;uch a length and thick­ne&longs;&longs;e as that it may endure, but made a hairs breadth big­ger, breaketh with its own weight, is &longs;ingly one and no more.

SALV. So it is Sir; and the better to a&longs;&longs;ure you that we con­cur in opinion, I &longs;ay, that if we take a Launce of wood of &longs;uch a length and thickne&longs;&longs;e, that being fixed fa&longs;t (v. g.) in a Wall at Right Angles, that is parallel to the Horizon, it is reduced to the utmo&longs;t length, that it will hold at, &longs;o that lengthened never­&longs;o-little more, it would break, being over-burthened with its own weight, there could not be another &longs;uch-a-one in the World: So that if its length (for example) were Centuple to its thickne&longs;&longs;e, there cannot be found another Launce of the &longs;ame Matter, that being in length Centuple to its thickne&longs;&longs;e, &longs;hall be able to &longs;u&longs;tain it &longs;elf preci&longs;ely, as that did, and no more: for all that are bigger &longs;hall break, and the le&longs;&longs;er &longs;hall be able, be&longs;ides their own, to &longs;u&longs;tain &longs;ome additional weight. And this that I &longs;ay of the State of bear­ing it &longs;elf, I would have under&longs;tood to be &longs;poken of every other Con&longs;titution, and thus if one Tran&longs;ome bear or &longs;u&longs;tain the force often Tran&longs;omes equal to it, &longs;uch another Beam cannot bear the weight of ten that are equal to it. Now be plea&longs;ed, Sir, and you Simplicius to ob&longs;erve, how true Conclu&longs;ions, though at the fir&longs;t &longs;ight they &longs;eem improbable, yet never &longs;o little glanced at, do depo&longs;e the Vailes which ob&longs;cure them, and make a voluntary &longs;hew of their &longs;ecrets nakedly, and &longs;imply. Who &longs;ees not, that a Hor&longs;e falling from a height of three or four yards, will break his bones, but a Dog falling &longs;o many yards, or a Cat eight or ten, will receive no hurt; nor likewi&longs;e a Gra&longs;hopper from a Tower, nor an Ant thrown from the Orbe of the Moon? Little Children e&longs;cape all harm in their falls, whereas per&longs;ons grown up break either their &longs;hins or faces. And as le&longs;&longs;er Animals are in proportion more robu&longs;tious, and &longs;trong than greater, &longs;o the le&longs;&longs;er Plants better &longs;upport them­&longs;elves: and I already believe, that both of you think, that an Oake two hundred foot high could not &longs;upport its branches &longs;pread like one of an indifferent &longs;ize; and that Nature could not have made an Hor&longs;e as big as twenty Hor&longs;es, nor a Giant ten times as tall as a Man, unle&longs;&longs;e &longs;he did it either miraculou&longs;ly, or el&longs;e by much alte­ring the proportion of the Members, and particularly of the Bones, enlarging them very much above the Symetry of common Bones. To &longs;uppo&longs;e likewi&longs;e, that in Artificial Machines, the greater and le&longs;&longs;er are with equal facility made, and pre&longs;erved, is a manife&longs;t Er­rour: and thus for in&longs;tance, &longs;mall Spires, Pillars, and other &longs;olid figures may be &longs;afely moved, laid along, and reared upright, with­out danger of breaking them; but the very great upon every &longs;ini­&longs;ter accident fall in pieces, and for no other rea&longs;on but their own weight. And here it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that I relate an accident, worthy of notice, as are all tho&longs;e events that occur unexpectedly, e&longs;pecial­ly when the means u&longs;ed to prevent an inconvenience, proveth in fine the mo&longs;t potent cau&longs;e of the di&longs;order. There was a very great Pillar of Marble laid along, and two Rowlers were put under the &longs;ame neer to the ends of it; it came into the mind of a certain In­gineer &longs;ome time after, that it would be expedient, the better to &longs;ecure it from breaking in the mid&longs;t through its own weight, to put under it in that part yet another Rowler: the coun&longs;el &longs;eemed generally very &longs;ea&longs;onable, but the &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;e demon&longs;trated it to be wholly contrary: for many moneths had not pa&longs;t, before the Pil­lar crackt, and broke in the middle ju&longs;t upon the new Rowler.

Truth upon a little Courting, throweth off her Vail, and &longs;hews her Secrets maked.

Great Animals receive more harm by a fall than le&longs;­&longs;er.

Nature could not have made of mea­ner Hor&longs;es bigger, and have retained the &longs;ame &longs;trength, but by altering their Symetry.

A great Marble Pillar broken by its own weight, and why.

SIMP. This was an accident truly &longs;trange, and indeed preter &longs;pem, e&longs;pecially if it were derived from the addition of new &longs;up­port in the middle.

SALV. From that doubtle&longs;s it did proceed; and the known cau&longs;e of the Effect removeth the wonder: for the two pieces of the Pillar being taken from off the Rowlers, one of tho&longs;e bearers on which one end of the Column had re&longs;ted, was by length of time rotten, and &longs;unk away; and that in the mid&longs;t continuing &longs;ound, and &longs;trong, occa&longs;ioned that half the Column lay hollow in the air without any &longs;upport at the end; &longs;o that its own unweildy weight, made it do that, which it would not have done, if it had re&longs;ted only upon the two fir&longs;t Bearers, for as they had &longs;hrunk away it would have fol­lowed. And here none can think that this would have faln out in a little Column, though of the &longs;ame &longs;tone, and of a length an&longs;we­rable to its thickne&longs;&longs;e, in the very &longs;ame proportion as the thick­ne&longs;s, and length of the great Pillar.

SAGR. I am now a&longs;&longs;ured of the effect, but do not yet compre­hend the cau&longs;e, how in the augmentation of Matter, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance and Strength ought not al&longs;o to multiply at the &longs;ame rate. And I admire at it &longs;o much the more, in regard I &longs;ee, on the contrary, in other ca&longs;es the &longs;trength of Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction to encrea&longs;e much more than the enlargement of the matter encrea&longs;eth. For if (for example) there be two Nailes fa&longs;tned in a Wall, the one twice asthick as the other, that &longs;hall bear a weight not only double to this, but triple, and quadruple.

SALV. You may &longs;ay octuple, and not be wide of the truth: nor is this effect contrary to the former, though in appearance it &longs;eemeth &longs;o different.

A Naile double in thickne&longs;&longs;e to another being fa&longs;t­ned in a Wall, &longs;u­&longs;tains a Weight octuple to that of the le&longs;&longs;er.

SAGR. Therefore Salviatus, explain unto us the&longs;e Riddles, and level us the&longs;e Rocks, if you can do it: for indeed I gue&longs;&longs;e this mat­ter of Re&longs;i&longs;tance to be a field repleni&longs;hed with rare, and u&longs;eful Con­templations, and if you be content that this be the &longs;ubject of our this-daies di&longs;cour&longs;e, it will be to me, and I believe to Simplicius,very acceptable.

SALV. I cannot refu&longs;e to &longs;erve you, &longs;ince my Memory &longs;erveth me, in minding me of that which I formerly learnt of our Accade­mick, who hath made many Speculations on this &longs;ubject, and all conformable (as his manner is) to Geometrical Demon&longs;tration: in&longs;omuch that, not without rea&longs;on, this of his may be called a New Science; for though &longs;ome of the Conclu&longs;ions have been ob&longs;erved by others, and in the fir&longs;t place by Ari&longs;totle, yet neverthele&longs;&longs;e are they not any of the mo&longs;t curious, or (which more importeth) proved by nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;trations deduced from their primary, and indubitable fundamentals. And becau&longs;e, as I &longs;ay, I de&longs;ire de­mon&longs;tratively to a&longs;&longs;ure you, and not with only probable di&longs;cour­&longs;es to per&longs;wade you; pre&longs;uppo&longs;ing, that you have &longs;o much know­ledge of the Mechanical Conclu&longs;ions, by others heretofore funda­mentally handled, as &longs;ufficeth for our purpo&longs;e; it is requi&longs;ite, that before we proceed any further, we con&longs;ider what effect that is which opperates in the Fraction of a Beam of Wood, or other Solid, who&longs;e parts are firmly connected; becau&longs;e this is the fir&longs;t Notion, where­on the fir&longs;t and &longs;imple principle dependeth, which as familiarly known, we may take for granted. For the clearer explanation whereof; let us take the Cilinder, or Pri&longs;me, A. B. of Wood, or other &longs;olid and coherent matter, fa&longs;tned above in A, and hanging perpendicular; to which, at the other end B, let there hang the Weight C: It is manife&longs;t, that how great &longs;oever the Tenacity and coherence of the parts of the &longs;aid Solid to one another be, &longs;o it be not infinite, it may be overcome by the Force of the drawing Weight C: who&longs;e Gravity I &longs;uppo&longs;e may be encrea&longs;ed as much

as we plea&longs;e; by the encrea&longs;e whereof the &longs;aid Solid in fine &longs;hall break, like as if it had been a Cord. And, as in a Cord, we under­&longs;tand its re&longs;i&longs;tance to proceed from the mul­titude of the &longs;trings or threads in the Hemp that compo&longs;e it, &longs;o in Wood we &longs;ee its veins, and grain di&longs;tended lengthwaies, that render it far more re&longs;i&longs;ting again&longs;t Fraction, then any Rope would be, of the &longs;ame thickne&longs;&longs;e: but in a Cylinder of &longs;tone or Metal the Tenacity of its parts, (which yet &longs;eemeth greater) de­pendeth on another kind of Cement, than of &longs;trings, or grains, and yet they al&longs;o being drawn with equivalent force, break.

By Accademick here, as in his Dialogues of the Sy&longs;teme, Galile­us meaneth him­&longs;elf.

Ari&longs;totle the fir&longs;t Ob&longs;erver of Me­chanical Conclu&longs;i­ons, but they nei­ther not the mo&longs;t curious nor &longs;olidly demon&longs;trated.

SIMP. If the thing &longs;ucceed as you &longs;ay, I under&longs;tand well enough, that the thread or grain of the Wood which is as long as the &longs;aid Wood may make it &longs;trong and able to Re&longs;i&longs;t a great vio­lence done to it to break it: But a Cord compo&longs;ed of &longs;trings of Hemp, no longer than two, or three foot a piece, how can it be &longs;o &longs;trong when it is &longs;pun out, it may be, to a hundred times that length? Now I would farther under&longs;tand your opinion concern­ing the Connection of the parts of Metals, Stones, and other mat­ters deprived of &longs;uch Ligatures, which neverthele&longs;&longs;e, if I be not deceived, are yet more tenacious.

SALV. We mu&longs;t be nece&longs;&longs;itated to digre&longs;&longs;e into new Specu­lations, and not much to our purpo&longs;e, if we &longs;hould re&longs;olve tho&longs;e difficulties you &longs;tart.

SAGR. But if Digre&longs;&longs;ions may lead us to the knowledge of new Truths, what prejudice is it to us, that are not obliged to a &longs;trict and conci&longs;e method, but that make our Congre&longs;&longs;ions only for our diverti&longs;ement to digre&longs;&longs;e &longs;ometimes, le&longs;t we let &longs;lip tho&longs;e Notions, which perhaps the offered occa&longs;ion being pa&longs;t, may never meet with another opportunity of remembrance? Nay, who knows not, that many times curio&longs;ity may thereby di&longs;cover hints of more worth, than the primarily intended Conclu&longs;ions? Therefore I entreat you to give &longs;atisfaction to Simplicius, and my &longs;elf al&longs;o, no le&longs;&longs;e curious than he, and de&longs;irous to under&longs;tand what that Cement is, that holdeth the parts of tho&longs;e Solids &longs;o tenaciou&longs;ly conjoyned, which yet neverthele&longs;&longs;e in conclu&longs;ion are di&longs;&longs;oluble: a knowledge which furthermore is nece&longs;&longs;ary for the under&longs;tanding of the coherence of the parts of tho&longs;e very ligaments, whereof &longs;ome Solids are compo&longs;ed.

SALV. Well, &longs;ince it is your plea&longs;ure, I will herein &longs;erve you. And the fir&longs;t difficulty is, how the threads of a Cord or Rope an hundred foot long &longs;hould &longs;o clo&longs;ely connect together (none of them exceeding two or three foot) that it requireth a great violence to break them. But tell me, Simplicius, cannot you hold one &longs;ingle &longs;tring of Hemp &longs;o fa&longs;t between your fingers by one end, that I pulling by the other end &longs;hould break it &longs;ooner than get it from you? Que&longs;tionle&longs;&longs;e you might: when then, tho&longs;e threads are not only at the end, but al&longs;o in every part of their length, held fa&longs;t with much &longs;trength by him that gra&longs;peth them, is it not apparent, that it is a much harder matter to pluck them from him that holds them, then to break them? Now in the Cord, the &longs;ame act of twi&longs;ting, binds the threads mutually within one another, in &longs;uch &longs;ort, that pulling the Cord with great force, the threads of it break in&longs;under, but &longs;eparate and part not from one another; as is plainly &longs;een by viewing the &longs;hort ends of the &longs;aid threads in the broken place, that are not a &longs;pan long; as they would be, if the divi&longs;ion of the Cord had been made by the &longs;ole &longs;eperating of them in drawing the Cord, and not by breaking them.

What that Cement is that Connecteth the parts of Solids.

How a Rope or Cord re&longs;i&longs;teth Fra­ction.

In breaking a Rope the parts are not &longs;eparated, but bro­kon.

SAGR. For confirmation of this, let me add, that the Cord is &longs;ometimes &longs;een to break, not by pulling it length-waies, but by over-twi&longs;ting it: an argument, in my judgment, concluding that the threads are &longs;o enterchangeably compre&longs;t by one another, that tho&longs;e compre&longs;&longs;ings permit not the compre&longs;&longs;ed to &longs;lip &longs;o very little, as is requi&longs;ite to lengthen it out that it wind about the Cord, which in the twining breaketh, and con&longs;equently in &longs;ome &longs;inall mea&longs;ure &longs;wels in thickne&longs;&longs;e.

SALV. You &longs;ay very well; but con&longs;ider by the way, how one truth draweth on another. That thread, which griped between the fingers, did not yield to follow him that would have forceably drawn it from between them, re&longs;i&longs;ted, becau&longs;e it was &longs;tayed by a double compre&longs;&longs;ion, &longs;ince the upper finger pre&longs;t no le&longs;&longs;e again&longs;t the nether, than it pre&longs;&longs;ed again&longs;t that. And there is no que&longs;tion, that if of the&longs;e two pre&longs;&longs;ures, one alone might be retained, there would remain half of that Re&longs;i&longs;tance, which depended conjunctive­ly on them both: but becau&longs;e you cannot with removing, v.g. the upper finger take away its pre&longs;&longs;ion, without taking away the other part al&longs;o; it will be nece&longs;&longs;ary by &longs;ome new Artifice to retain one of them, and to find a way that the &longs;ame thread may compre&longs;&longs;e it &longs;elf again&longs;t the finger or other &longs;olid body upon which it is put; and this is done by winding the &longs;ame thread about the Solid. For the better under&longs;tanding whereof, I will briefly give it you in Figure; and let A B and CD be two Cilinders, and between them let there be di&longs;tended the thread E F, which for greater plainne&longs;&longs;e I will repre&longs;ent to be a &longs;mall Cord: there is no doubt but that the two Cylinders being pre&longs;&longs;ed hard one again&longs;t the other, the Cord E F pulled by the end F will Re&longs;i&longs;t no &longs;mal force before it will &longs;lip from between the two Solids compre&longs;&longs;ing it: but if we remove one of them, though the Cord

continue touching the other, yet &longs;hall it not by &longs;uch contact be hindered from &longs;lipping away. But if holding it fa&longs;t, though but gently in the point A, towards the top of the Cylinder, we wind, or belay it about the &longs;ame &longs;pirally in A F L O T R, and pull it by the end R: it is manife&longs;t, that it will begin to pre&longs;&longs;e the Cylinder, and if the windings and wreathes be many, it &longs;hall in its effectual drawing alwaies pre&longs;&longs;e it &longs;o much the &longs;trai­ter about the Cylinder: and by multiplying the wreathes if you make the contact longer, and con&longs;equently more invincible, the more difficult &longs;till &longs;hall it be to withdraw the Cord, and make it yield to the force that pulls it. Now who &longs;eeth not, that the &longs;ame Re&longs;i&longs;tance is in the threads, which with many thou&longs;and &longs;uch twinings &longs;pin the thick Cord? Yea, the &longs;tre&longs;&longs;e of &longs;uch twi&longs;ting bindeth with &longs;uch Tenacity, that a few Ru&longs;hes, and of no great length, (&longs;o that the wreaths and windings are but few where­with they entertwine) make very &longs;trong bands, called, as I take it, ^{*} Thum-ropes.

* Fu&longs;ta.

SAGR. Your Di&longs;cour&longs;e hath removed the wonder out of my mind at two effects, whereof I did not well under&longs;tand the rea­&longs;on; One was to &longs;ee, how two, or at the mo&longs;t three twines of the Rope about the Axis of a Crane did not only hold it, that be­ing drawn by the immen&longs;e force of the weight, which it held, it &longs;lipt nor &longs;hrunk not; but that moreover turning the Crane about, the &longs;aid Axis with the &longs;ole touch of the Rope which begirteth it, did in the after-turnings, draw and rai&longs;e up va&longs;t &longs;tones, whil&longs;t the &longs;trength of a little Boy &longs;ufficed to hold and &longs;tay the other end of the &longs;ame Cord. The other is at a plain, but cunning, In&longs;trument found out by a young Kin&longs;man of mine, by which with a Cord he could let him&longs;elf down from a window without much gauling the palmes of his hands, as to his great &longs;mart not long before he had done. For the better under&longs;tanding whereof, rake this Scheame: About &longs;uch a Cylinder of Wood as A B, two Inches thick, and &longs;ix or eight Inches long, he cut a hollow notch &longs;pirally, for one turn and a

half and no more, and of widene&longs;&longs;e fit for the Cord he would u&longs;e; which he made to enter through the notch at the end A, and to come out at the other B, incircling after­wards the Cylinder in a barrel or &longs;ocket of Wood, or rather Tin, but divided length­waies, and made with Cla&longs;pes or Hinges to open and &longs;hut at plea&longs;ure: and then gra&longs;p­ing and holding the &longs;aid Barrel or Ca&longs;e with both his hands, the rope being made fa&longs;t above, he hung by his arms; and &longs;uch was the compre&longs;&longs;ion of the Cord between the moving Socket and the Cylinder, that at plea&longs;ure griping his hands clo&longs;er he could &longs;tay him&longs;elf without de&longs;cending, and &longs;lacking his hold a little, he could let him&longs;elf down as he plea&longs;ed.

An Hand-Pully or In&longs;trument in­vented by an ama­rous per&longs;on to let him&longs;elf down from any great height with a Cord with­out gauling his hands.

SALV. Aningenious invention verily, and for a full explanati­on of its nature, me-thinks I di&longs;cover, as it were by a &longs;hadow, the light of &longs;ome other additional di&longs;coveries: but I will not at this time deviate any more from my purpo&longs;e upon this particular: and the rather in regard you are de&longs;irous to hear my opinion of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of other Bodies again&longs;t Fraction, who&longs;e texture is not with threads, and fibrous &longs;trings, as is that of Ropes, and mo&longs;t kinds of Wood: but the connection of their parts &longs;eem to de­pend on other Cau&longs;es; which in my judgment may be reduced to two heads; one is the much talked-of Repugnance that Nature hath again&longs;t the admi&longs;&longs;ion of Vacuity: for another (this of Va­cuity not &longs;ufficing) there mu&longs;t be introduced &longs;ome glue, vi&longs;cous matter, or Cement, that tenaciou&longs;ly connecteth the Corpu&longs;cles of which the &longs;aid Body is compacted.

Why &longs;uch Bodies re&longs;i&longs;t Fraction that are not connected with Fibrous fila­ments.

I will fir&longs;t &longs;peak of Vacuity, &longs;hewing by plain experiments, what and how great its virtue is. And fir&longs;t of all the &longs;eeing at plea&longs;ure two flat pieces of either Marble, Metal, or Gla&longs;&longs;e, exqui­&longs;itely planed, &longs;lickt, and poli&longs;hed, that being laid upon one the other, without any difficulty &longs;lide along upon each other, if drawn &longs;idewaies, (a certain argument that no glue connects them,) but that going about to &longs;eperate them, keeping them equidi&longs;tant, there is found &longs;uch repugnance, that the uppermo&longs;t will be lif­ted up, and will draw the other after it, and keep it perperually rai&longs;ed, though it be pretty thick, and heavy, evidently proveth to us, how much Nature abhorreth to admit, though for a &longs;hort mo­ment of time, the void &longs;pace, that would be between them, till the concour&longs;e of the parts of the Circum-Ambient Air &longs;hould have po&longs;&longs;e&longs;t, and repleated it. We &longs;ee likewi&longs;e, that if tho&longs;e two Plates be not exactly poli&longs;hed, and con&longs;equently their contact not every where exqui&longs;ite; in going about to &longs;eparate them gently, there will be found no Renitence more than that of their meer weight, but in the &longs;udden rai&longs;ing, the nether Stone will ri&longs;e, and in&longs;tantly fall down again, following the upper only for that very &longs;mall time which &longs;erveth for the expan&longs;ion of that little Air which interpo­&longs;eth betwixt the Plates, that did not every where touch, and for the ingre&longs;&longs;ion of the other circumfu&longs;ed. The like Re&longs;i&longs;tance, which &longs;o &longs;en&longs;ibly di&longs;covers it &longs;elf betwixt the two Plates, cannot be doubted to re&longs;ide al&longs;o between the parts of a Solid, and that it en­tereth into their connection, at lea&longs;t in part, and as their Concomi­tant Cau&longs;e.

The fir&longs;t Cau&longs;e of the Cohorence of Bodies is their Re­pugnance to Vacu­ity.

This is proved by the Coherence of two poli&longs;hed Mar­bles.

SAGR. Hold, I pray you, and permit me to impart unto you a particular Con&longs;ideration, ju&longs;t now come into my Mind, and this it is; That &longs;eeing how the lower Plate followeth the upper, and is by a &longs;peedy motion rai&longs;ed, we are thereby a&longs;certained that (con­trary to the &longs;aying of many Philo&longs;ophers, and perchance of Ari­&longs;totle him&longs;elf) the Motion in Vacuity would not be In&longs;tantaneous; for &longs;hould in be &longs;uch, the propo&longs;ed Plates without the lea&longs;t repug­nance would Seperate; &longs;ince the &longs;elf &longs;ame in&longs;tant of time would &longs;uffice for their &longs;eparation, and for the concour&longs;e of the Ambient Air to repleat that Vacuity, which might remain between them. By the Inferiour Plates following the Superiour therefore may be gathered, that in the Vacuity the Motion would not be In&longs;tanta­neous. And al&longs;o it may be inferred, that even betwixt tho&longs;e Plates there re&longs;teth &longs;ome Vacuity, at lea&longs;t for &longs;ome very &longs;hort time; that is, for &longs;o long as the Ambient Air is moving whil&longs;t it concurreth to replete the Vacuum: for if there did no Vacuity remain, there would be no need either of the Concour&longs;e, or Motion of the Am­bient We mu&longs;t therefore &longs;ay that Vacuity &longs;ometimes is admit­ted, though by Violence or again&longs;t Nature, (albeit it is my opi­nion, that nothing is contrary to Nature, but that which is im­po&longs;&longs;ible, which again never is.) But here &longs;tarts up another diffi­culty, and it is, That though Experience a&longs;&longs;ures me of the truth of the Conclu&longs;ion, yet my Judgment is not thorowly &longs;atisfied of the Cau&longs;e, to which &longs;uch an effect may be a&longs;cribed. For as much as the effect of the Seperation of the two Plates, is in time before the Vacuity which &longs;hould &longs;ucceed by con&longs;equence upon the Separa­tion. And becau&longs;e, in my opinion, the Cau&longs;e ought, if not in Time, at lea&longs;t in Nature, to precede the Effect: and that of a Po­&longs;itive Effect, the Cau&longs;e ought al&longs;o to be Po&longs;itive; I cannot con­ceive, how the Cau&longs;e of the Adhe&longs;ion of the two Plates, and of their Repugnance to Separation, (Effects that are already in Act) &longs;hould be a&longs;&longs;igned to Vacuity, which yet is not, but &longs;hould follow. And of things that are not in being, there can be no Ope­ration; according to the infallible Maxime of Philo&longs;ophy.

Vacuity partly the cau&longs;e of the Cohe­rence between the parts of Solids.

Of a Po&longs;itive Ef­fect the Cau&longs;e is Po&longs;itive.

Non-entity is at­tended with Non­operation.

SIMP. But &longs;ince you grant Ari&longs;totle this Axiome, I do not think you will deny another that is mo&longs;t excellent, and true; to wit, That Nature doth not attempt Impo&longs;&longs;ibilities: Upon which Axiom I think the Solution of our doubt depends: becau&longs;e there­fore a void &longs;pace is of it &longs;elf impo&longs;&longs;ible, Nature forbids the doing that, in con&longs;equence of which Vacuity would nece&longs;&longs;arily &longs;ucceed; and &longs;uch an act is the &longs;eparation of the two Plates.

Nature doth not attempt Impo&longs;&longs;ibi­lities.

SAGR. Now, (admitting this which Simplicius alledgeth is a &longs;ufficient Solution of my Doubt) in per&longs;uance of the di&longs;cour&longs;e with which I began, it &longs;eemeth to me, that this &longs;ame Repugnance to Vacuity &longs;hould be a &longs;ufficient Cement in the parts of a Solid of Stone, Metal, or what other &longs;ub&longs;tance is more firmly conjoyned, and aver&longs;e to Divi&longs;ion. For if a &longs;ingle Effect, hath but one &longs;ole Cau&longs;e, as I under&longs;tand, and think; or if many be a&longs;&longs;igned, they are reducible to one alone: why &longs;hould not this of Vacuity, which certainly is one, be &longs;ufficient to an&longs;wer all Re&longs;i&longs;tances?

SALV. I will not at this time enter upon this conte&longs;t, whether Vacuity, without other Cement, be in it &longs;elf alone &longs;ufficient to keep together the &longs;eparable parts of firm Bodies; but yet this I &longs;ay, that the Rea&longs;on of the Vacuity, which is of force, and con­oluding in the two Plates, &longs;ufficeth not of it &longs;elf alone for the firm connection of the parts of a &longs;olid Cylinder of Marble, or Metal, the which forced with great violence, pulling them &longs;treight out, in fine, divide and &longs;eparate. And in ca&longs;e I have found a way to di&longs;tingui&longs;h this already-known Re&longs;i&longs;tance dependent on Va­ouity, from all others what&longs;oever that may concur with it in &longs;trengthening the Connection, and make you &longs;ee how that it alone is not neer &longs;ufficient for &longs;uch an Effect, would not you grant that it would be nece&longs;&longs;ary to introduce &longs;ome other? Help him out, Sim­plicius, for he &longs;tands &longs;tudying what to an&longs;wer.

SIMP. The Su&longs;pen&longs;ion of Sagredus mu&longs;t needs be upon ano­ther account, there being no place left for doubting of &longs;o clear, and nece&longs;&longs;ary a Con&longs;equence.

SAGR. You Divine Simplicius, I was thinking if a Million of Gold per annum, coming from Spaine, not being &longs;ufficient to pay the Army, whether it was nece&longs;&longs;ary to make any other provi&longs;ion than of Money to pay the Souldiers. But proceed, Salviatus, and &longs;uppo&longs;ing that I admit of your Con&longs;equence, &longs;hew us how to &longs;e­parate the opperation of Vacuity from the other, that mea&longs;uring it we may &longs;ee how it's in&longs;ufficient for the Effect of which we &longs;peak.

SALV. Your Genius hath prompted you. Well, I will tell you the way to part the Virtue of Vacuity from the re&longs;t, and then how to mea&longs;ure it. And to &longs;ever it, we will take a continuate matter, who&longs;e parts are de&longs;titute of all other Re&longs;i&longs;tance to Separation, &longs;ave only that of Vacuity, &longs;uch as Water at large hath been demon­&longs;trated to be in a certain Tractate of our Accademick. So that when ever a Cylinder of Water is &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed, that being drawn we find a Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t the &longs;eparation of its parts, this mu&longs;t be acknowledged to proceed from no other cau&longs;e, but from re­pugnance to Vacuity. But to make &longs;uch an experiment, I have imagined a device, which with the help of a &longs;mall Diagram, may be better expre&longs;t than by my bare words. Let this Figure C A B D be the Profile of a Cylinder of Metal, or of Gla&longs;s, which mu&longs;t be made hollow within, but turned exactly round; into who&longs;e Concave mu&longs;t enter a Cylinder of Wood, exqui&longs;itely fitted to touch every where, who&longs;e Profile is noted by E G H F, which Cylinder may be thru&longs;t up­

wards, and downwards: and this I would have bored in the middle, &longs;o that there may a rod of Iron pa&longs;s thorow, hooked in the end K, and the other end I, &longs;hall grow thicker in fa&longs;hion of a Cone, or Top; and let the hole made for the &longs;ame thorow the Cylinder of Wood be al&longs;o cut hollow in the upper part, like a Conical Superficies, and exactly fitted to receive the Conick end I, of the Iron I K, as oft as it is drawn down by the part K. Then I put the Cylinder of Wood E H into the Concave Cylinder A D, and would not have it come to touch the upper­mo&longs;t Superficies of the &longs;aid hollow Cylinder, but that it &longs;tay two or three fingers breadth from it: and I would have that &longs;pace filled with Water; which &longs;hould be put therein, holding the Ve&longs;&longs;el with the mouth C D up­wards; and thereupon pre&longs;s down the Stopper E H, holding the Conical part I &longs;omewhat di&longs;tant from the hollow that was made for it in the Wood, to leave way for the Air to go out, which in thru&longs;ting down the Stopper will i&longs;&longs;ue out by the hole of the Wood, which therefore &longs;hould be made a little wider than the thickne&longs;s of the Hook of Iron I K. The Air being let out, and the Iron pull'd back, which clo&longs;e &longs;toppeth the wood with its Conick part I, then turn the ve&longs;&longs;el with its mouth downwards, and fa&longs;ten to the hook K a Bucket that may receive into it &longs;and, or other weigh­ty matter, and you may hang &longs;o much weight thereat, that at length the Superiour &longs;urface of the Stopper E F will &longs;eparate and for&longs;ake the inferiour part of the Water; to which nothing el&longs;e held it con­nected but the Repugnance again&longs;t Vacuity: afterwards weighing the Stopper with the Iron, the Bucket, and all that was in it, you will have the quantity of the Force of the Vacuity. And if affixing to a Cylinder of Marble, or Chri&longs;tal, as thick as the Cylinder of Water, &longs;uch a weight, that together with the proper weight of the Marble or Chri&longs;tal it &longs;elf, equalleth the gravity of all tho&longs;e fore­named things, a Rupture follow thereupon; we may without doubt affirm, that the only rea&longs;on of Vacuity holdeth the parts of Marble and Chri&longs;tal conjoyned: but not &longs;ufficing; and &longs;eeing that to break it there mu&longs;t be added four times as much weight, it mu&longs;t be confe&longs;&longs;ed, that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of Vacuity is one part of &longs;ive, and that the other Re&longs;i&longs;tance is quadruple to that of Vacuity.

How to mea&longs;ure the Virtue of Va­cuity in Solids di­&longs;tinct from other convenient Cau&longs;es of their Coherence. Water a Continu­ate Matter, and void of all other a­ver&longs;ion to &longs;eparati­on, &longs;ave that of Va­cuity.

SIMP. It cannot be denied, but that the Invention is Ingen­ous: but I hold it to be &longs;ubject to many difficulties, which makes me que&longs;tion it; for who &longs;hall a&longs;&longs;ure us, that the Air cannot pene­trate between the Gla&longs;s, and the Stopper, though it be clo&longs;e &longs;topt with Flax, or other pliant matter? And al&longs;o it's a Que&longs;tion, whe­ther Wax or Turpentine will &longs;erve to make the Cone I, &longs;top the hole clo&longs;e: Again, Why may not the parts of the Water with­draw and rarefie them&longs;elves? Why may not the Air, or Exhalati­ons, or other more &longs;ubtil Sub&longs;tances penetrate through the Poro&longs;i­ties of the Wood, or Gla&longs;s it &longs;elf?

SALV. Simplicius is very nimble at rai&longs;ing doubts, and, in part, helping us to re&longs;olve them, as to the Penetration of the Air through the Wood, or between the Wood and Gla&longs;s. But I moreover ob&longs;erve, that we may at the &longs;ame time &longs;ecure our &longs;elves, and with­all acquire new Notions, if the fore-named doubts take place; for if the Water be by Nature, howbeit with violence, capable of ex­tention, as it falleth out in Air, you &longs;hall &longs;ee the Stopper to de­&longs;cend: and if in the upper part of the Gla&longs;s we make a &longs;mall pro­minent Bo&longs;s, as this V; in ca&longs;e any Air, or other more Tenuous or Spirituous Matter &longs;hould penetrate thorow the Sub&longs;tance, or Poro&longs;i­ty of the Gla&longs;s, or Wood, it would be &longs;een to reunite (the water giving place) in the eminence V: which things not being percei­ved, we re&longs;t a&longs;&longs;ured that the Experiment was made with due caution: and &longs;ee that the Water is not capable o&longs; exten&longs;ion, nor the Gla&longs;s permeable by any matter, though never &longs;o &longs;ubtil.

SAGR. And I, by means of the&longs;e Di&longs;cour&longs;es have found the Cau&longs;e of an Effect, that hath for a long time puzled my mind with wonder, and kept it in Ignorance. I have heretofore ob­&longs;erved a Ci&longs;tern, wherein, for the drawing thence of Water, there was made a Pump, by &longs;ome one that thought, perhaps, (but in vain) to be thereby able to draw, with le&longs;s labour, the &longs;ame, or greater quantity of Water, than with the ordinary Buckets; and this Pump had its Sucker and Value on high, &longs;o that the Water was made to a&longs;cend by Attraction, and not by Impul&longs;e, as do the Pumps that work below. This, whil&longs;t there is any Water in the Ci&longs;tern to &longs;uch a determinate height, will draw it plentifully; but when the Water ebbeth below a certain Mark, the Pump will work no more. I conceited, the fir&longs;t time that I ob&longs;erved this ac­cident, that the Engine ____ had been &longs;poyled, and looking for the Workman, that he might amend it; he told me, that there was no defect at all, other than what was in the Water, which being fallen too low, permitted not it &longs;elf to be rai&longs;ed to &longs;uch a height; and farther &longs;aid, that neither Pump, or other Machine, that rai&longs;eth the water by Attraction, was po&longs;&longs;ibly able to make it ri&longs;e a hair more than eighteen Braces, and be the Pumps wide or narrow, this is the utmo&longs;t limited mea&longs;ure of their height. And I have hitherto been &longs;o dull of apprehen&longs;ion, that though I knew that a Rope, a Stick, and a Rod of Iron might be &longs;o and &longs;o lengthened, that at la&longs;t, holding it up on high in the Air, its own weight would break it, yet I never remembred, that the &longs;ame would much more ea&longs;ily happen in a Rope, or Thread of Water. And what other is that which is attracted in the Pump than a Cylinder of Water, which having its contraction above, prolonged more and more, in the end arriveth to that term, beyond which being drawn, it breaketh by its foregoing over-weight, ju&longs;t as if it was a Rope.

The Nature of the attraction of Wa­ter by Pumps.

Water rai&longs;ed or at­tracted by a Pump ri&longs;eth not above eleven yards.

SALV. It is even &longs;o as you &longs;ay; and becau&longs;e the &longs;aid height of eighteen Braces is the prefixed term of the Elevation, to which any quantity of Water, be it (that is to &longs;ay, be the Pump) broad, narrow, or even, &longs;o narrow as to the thickne&longs;s of a &longs;traw, can &longs;u­&longs;tain it &longs;elf; when ever we weigh the water contained in eighteen Braces of Pipe, be it broad or narrow, we have the value of Re&longs;i­&longs;tance of Vacuity in Cylinders of what&longs;oever &longs;olid matter, of the thickne&longs;s of the propo&longs;ed Pipes. And &longs;ince I have &longs;aid &longs;o much, we will &longs;hew, that a man may ea&longs;ily find in all Metals, Stones, Tim­bers, Gla&longs;&longs;es, &c. How far one may lengthen out Cylinders, &longs;trings, or rods of any thickne&longs;s, beyond which, being oppre&longs;t with their own weight, they can no longer hold, but break in pieces. Take for example a Bra&longs;s wyer of any certain thickne&longs;s, and length, and fixing one of its ends on high, add gradually more and more weight to the other, till at la&longs;t it break, and let the greate&longs;t weight that it can bear be v. gr. fifty pounds. It is manife&longs;t that fifty pound of Bra&longs;s more than its own weight, which let us &longs;uppo&longs;e, for example, to be one eighth of an Ounce, drawn out into a Wyer of the like thickne&longs;s, would be the greate&longs;t length of the Wyer that could bear it &longs;elf. Then mea&longs;ure how long the Wyer was which brake, and let it be for in&longs;tance a y ard; and becau&longs;e it weighed one eighth of an Ounce; and poi&longs;ed, or bore it &longs;elf, and fifty pounds more; which are Four Thou&longs;and Eight Hundred eighths of Ounces; we &longs;ay, that all Wyers of Bra&longs;s, whatever thickne&longs;s they be of, can hold, at the length of Four Thou&longs;and Eight Hundred and one yards, and no more: and &longs;o, a Bra&longs;s Wyer being able to hold to the length of 4801 yards; the Re&longs;i&longs;tance it findeth dependent on Vacuity, in re&longs;pect of the remainder, is as much as is equivalent to the weight of a Rope of Water eighteen Braces long, and of the &longs;ame thickne&longs;s with the &longs;aid Bra&longs;s Wyer: and finding Bra&longs;s to be v. gr. nine times heavier than Water, in any Wyer of Bra&longs;s, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction dependent on the rea&longs;on of Vacuity, importeth as much as two Braces of the &longs;ame Wyer weigheth. And thus arguing, and operating, we may find the length of the Wyers, or Threads of all Solid Matters re­duced to the utmo&longs;t length that they can &longs;ub&longs;i&longs;t of, and al&longs;o what part Vacuity hath in their Re&longs;i&longs;tance.

To what length Cy­linders or Ropes of any Matter may be prolonged, be­yond which being charged they break by their own weight

SAGR. It re&longs;teth now, that you declare to us wherein con&longs;i&longs;ts the remainder of that Tenacity, that is, what that Glue or Reni­tence is, which connecteth together the parts of a Solid, be&longs;ides that which is derived from Vacuity; becau&longs;e I cannot imagine what that Cement is, that cannot be burnt, or con&longs;umed in a ve­ry hot Furnace in two, three, or four Moneths, nor ten, nor an hun­dred; and yet Gold, Silver, and Gla&longs;s, &longs;tanding &longs;o long Liqui&longs;i­ed, when it is taken out, its parts return, upon cooling, to reunite, and conjoyn, as before. And again, becau&longs;e the &longs;ame difficulty which I meet within the Connection of the parts of the Gla&longs;s, I find al&longs;o in the parts of the Cement, that is, what thing that &longs;hould be which maketh them cleave &longs;o clo&longs;s together.

SALV. I told you but even now, that your Genius prompted you: I am al&longs;o in the &longs;ame &longs;trait: and al&longs;o whereas I have in gene­ral told you, how that Repugnance again&longs;t Vacuity is unque&longs;ti­onably that which permits not, nnle&longs;s with great violence, the &longs;e­paration of the two Plates, and moreover of the two great pieces of the Pillar of Marble, or Bra&longs;s, I cannot &longs;ee why it &longs;hould not al&longs;o take place, and be likewi&longs;e the Cau&longs;e of the Coherence of the le&longs;­&longs;er parts, and even of the very lea&longs;t and la&longs;t, of the &longs;ame Matters: and being that of one &longs;ole Effect, there is but one only true, and mo&longs;t potent Cau&longs;e; if I can find no other Cement, why may I not try whether this of Vacuity, which I have already found, may be &longs;ufficient?

There is but one &longs;ole Cau&longs;e of one &longs;ole Effect.

SIMP. But when you have already demon&longs;trated the Re&longs;i­&longs;tance of the great Vacuity in the &longs;eparation of the two great parts of a Solid to be very &longs;mall in compari&longs;on of that which con­necteth, and con&longs;olidates the little Particles, or Atomes, why will you not &longs;till hold, for certain, that this is extreamly differing from that?

SALV. To this Sagredus an&longs;wereth, That every particular Souldier is &longs;till paid with money collected by the general Impo&longs;i­tions of Shillings and Pence, although a Million of Gold &longs;ufficeth not to pay the whole Army. And who knows, but that other ex­ceeding &longs;mall Vacuities may operate among&longs;t tho&longs;e &longs;mall Atomes, (even like as that was of the &longs;elf-&longs;ame money) wherewith all the parts are connected? I will tell you what I have &longs;ometimes fancied: and I give it you, not as an unque&longs;tionable Truth, but as a kind of Conjecture very undige&longs;ted, &longs;ubmitting it to exacter con­&longs;iderations: Pick out of it what plea&longs;eth you, and judge of the re&longs;t as you think fit. Con&longs;idering &longs;ometimes how the Fire, penetra­ting and in&longs;inuating between the &longs;mall Atomes of this or that Me­tal, which were before &longs;o clo&longs;ely con&longs;olidated, in the end &longs;epa­rates, and di&longs;unites them; and how, the Fire being gone, they re­turn with the &longs;ame Tenacity as before to Con&longs;olidation, without dimini&longs;hing in quantity, (at all in Gold, and very little in other Metals,) though they continue a long time melted; I have thought that that might happen, by rea&longs;on the extream &longs;mall parts of the Fire, penetrating through the narrow pores of the Metal (through which the lea&longs;t parts of Air, or of many other Fluids, could not for their clo&longs;ene&longs;s perforate) by repleating the &longs;mall interpo&longs;ing Vacuities might free the minute parts of the &longs;ame from the vio­lence, wherewith the &longs;aid Vacuities attract them one to another, prohibiting their &longs;eparation: and thus becoming able to move freely, their Ma&longs;s might become fluid, and continue &longs;uch, as long as the &longs;mall parts of the Fire &longs;hould abide betwixt them: and that tho&longs;e departing, and leaving the former Vacuities, their wonted attractions might return, and con&longs;equently the Cohe&longs;ion of the parts. And, as to the Allegation made by Simplicius, it may, in my opinion, be thus re&longs;olved; That although &longs;uch Vacuities &longs;hould be very &longs;mall, and con&longs;equently each of them ea&longs;ie to be over­come, yet neverthele&longs;s their innumerable multitude innumerably (if it be proper &longs;o to &longs;peak) multiplieth the Re&longs;i&longs;tances: and we have an evident proof what, and how great is the Force that re&longs;ul­teth from the conjunction of an immen&longs;e number of very weak Moments, in &longs;eeing a Weight of many thou&longs;ands of pounds, held by mighty Cables, to yield, and &longs;uffer it &longs;elf at la&longs;t to be over­come by the a&longs;&longs;ault of the innumerable Atomes of Water; which, either carryed by the South-wind, or el&longs;e by being di&longs;tended into very thin Mi&longs;ts that move to and fro in the Air, in&longs;inuate them­&longs;elves between &longs;tring and &longs;tring of the Hemp of the harde&longs;t twi­&longs;ted Cables; nor can the immen&longs;e force of the pendent Weight prohibit their enterance; &longs;o that perforating the &longs;trict pa&longs;&longs;ages be­tween the Pores, they &longs;well the Ropes, and by con&longs;equence &longs;hor­ten them, whereupon that huge Ma&longs;s is forcibly rai&longs;ed.

Mo&longs;t &longs;mall Va­cuities di&longs;&longs;emina­ted and interpo&longs;ed between the &longs;mall Corpu&longs;cles of So­lids the probable cau&longs;e of the con&longs;i­&longs;tence or connecti­on of tho&longs;e Corpu&longs;­cles to one another,

Innumerable A­tomes of Water in­&longs;inuating into Ca­bles draw and rai&longs;e an immen&longs;e weight

SAGR. There's no doubt but that &longs;o long as a Re&longs;i&longs;tance is not infinite, it may by a multitude of mo&longs;t minute Forces be over­come; in&longs;omuch that a competent number even of Ants would be able to carry to &longs;hore a whole &longs;hips lading of Corn: for Sen&longs;e giveth us quotidian examples, that an Ant carrieth a &longs;ingle grain with ea&longs;e; and its cleer, that in the Ship there are not infinite grains, but that they are compri&longs;ed in a certain number; and if you take another number four or &longs;ix times bigger than that, and take al&longs;o another of Ants equal to it, and &longs;et them to work, they &longs;hall carry the Corn, and the Ship al&longs;o. It is true indeed, that it will be needful that the number be great, as al&longs;o in my judgment that of the Vacuities, which hold together the &longs;inall parts of the Mettal.

Any finite Re&longs;i­&longs;tance is &longs;uperable by any the lea&longs;t Force, multiplied.

SALV. But though they were required to be infinite, do you think it impo&longs;&longs;ible?

SAGR. Not if the Mettal were of an infinite ma&longs;&longs;e; other­wi&longs;e ----

SALV. Otherwi&longs;e what? Go to, feeing we are faln upon Paradoxes, let us &longs;ee if we can any way demon&longs;trate, how that in a continuate finite exten&longs;ion, it is not impo&longs;&longs;ible to finde infi­nite Vacuities: and then, if we gain nothing el&longs;e, yet at lea&longs;t we &longs;hall finde a &longs;olution of that mo&longs;t admirable Problem propound­ed by Ari&longs;totle among&longs;t tho&longs;e which he him&longs;elf calleth admirable, I mean among&longs;t his Mechanical Que&longs;tions; and the Solution may haply be no le&longs;&longs;e plain and concluding, than that which he him&longs;elf brings thereupon, and different al&longs;o from that which Learned Mon&longs;ig. di Guevara very acutely di&longs;cu&longs;&longs;eth. But it is fir&longs;t requi&longs;ite to declare a Propo&longs;ition not toucht by others, on which the &longs;olution of the que&longs;tion dependeth, which afterwards, if I deceive not my &longs;elf, will draw along with it other new and admirable Notions; for under&longs;tanding whereof the more exactly, we will give it you in a Scheme: We &longs;uppo&longs;e, therefore an equilateral, and equian­gled Poligon of any number of Sides at plea&longs;ure, de&longs;cribed about this Center G; and in this example let it be a Hexagon A B C D E F; like to which, and concentrick with the &longs;ame mu&longs;t be di&longs;tributed another le&longs;&longs;er, which we mark H I K L M N; and let one Side of the greater A B be prolonged indeterminately towards S, and of the le&longs;&longs;e the corre&longs;pondent Side H I is to be produced in like manner towards the &longs;ame part, repre&longs;enting the Line H T, parallel to A S; and let another pa&longs;&longs;e by the Center equidi&longs;tant from the former, namely G V. This done, we &longs;uppo&longs;e the greater Poligon to turn about upon the Line A S, carrying with it the other le&longs;&longs;er Poligon. It is manife&longs;t, that the point B, the term of the Side A B, &longs;tanding &longs;till, whil&longs;t the Revolution begins, the angle A ri&longs;eth, and the point C de&longs;cendeth, de&longs;cribing the arch C que &longs;o that the Side B C is applyed to the line B Q, equal to it &longs;elf: but in &longs;uch conver&longs;ion the angle I of the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon ri&longs;eth above the Line I T. for that I B is oblique upon A S: nor will the point I fall upon the parallel I T, before the point C come to Q: and by that time I &longs;hall be de&longs;cended unto O after it had de&longs;cribed the Arch I O, without the Line H T: and at the &longs;ame time the Side I K &longs;hall have pa&longs;s'd to O P. But the Cen­ter G &longs;hall have gone all this time out of the Line G V, on which it &longs;hal not fall, until it &longs;hall fir&longs;t have de&longs;cribed the Arch G C. Having made this fir&longs;t &longs;tep, the greater Poligon &longs;hall be tran&longs;po&longs;ed to re&longs;t with the Side B C upon the Line B que the Side I K of the le&longs;&longs;er upon the Line O P, having skipt all the Line I O without touching

it; and the Center G &longs;hall be removed to C, making its whole cour&longs;e without the Parallel G V: And in fine all the Figure &longs;hall be remitted into a Po&longs;ition like the fir&longs;t; &longs;o that the Revolution being continued, and coming to the &longs;econd &longs;tep, the Side of the greater Poligon D C &longs;hall remove to Q X; K L of the le&longs;&longs;er (ha­ving fir&longs;t skipt the Arch P Y) &longs;hall fall upon Y Z, and the Center proceeding evermore without G V &longs;hall fall on it in R, after the great skip C R. And in the la&longs;t place, having fini&longs;hed an entire Conver&longs;ion, the greater Poligon will have impre&longs;&longs;ed upon A S, &longs;ix Lines equal to its Perimeter without any interpo&longs;itions or skips: the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon likewi&longs;e &longs;hall have traced &longs;ix Lines equal to its Perimeter, but di&longs;continued by the interpo&longs;ition of five Arches, under which are the Chords, parts of the parallel H T not toucht by the Poligon: And la&longs;tly, the Center G never hath toucht the Parallel G V except in &longs;ix points. From hence you may compre­hend, how that the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon, is almo&longs;t equal to that pa&longs;&longs;ed by the greater, that is the Line H T is almo&longs;t equal to A S, then which it is le&longs;&longs;er only the quantity of one of the&longs;e Arches, taking the Line H T, together with all its Arches. Now, this which I have declared and explained to you in the exam­ple of the&longs;e Hexagons, I would have you under&longs;tand to hold true in all other Poligons, of what number of Sides &longs;oever they be, &longs;o that they be like Concentrick, and Conjoyned; and that at the Conver&longs;ion of the greater, the other, how much &longs;oever le&longs;&longs;er, be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to revolve therewith: that is, you mu&longs;t under&longs;tand, I &longs;ay, that the Lines by them pa&longs;&longs;ed are very near equal, computing in­to the Space pa&longs;t by the le&longs;&longs;er, the Intervals under the little Ar­ches not toucht by any part of the Perimeter of the &longs;aid le&longs;&longs;er Po­ligon. Let therefore the greater Poligon, of a thou&longs;and Sides, pa&longs;s round, and mea&longs;ure out a continued Line equal to its Perimeter; and in the &longs;ame time the le&longs;s pa&longs;&longs;eth a Line almo&longs;t as long, but compounded of a thou&longs;and Particles equal to its thou&longs;and Sides, but di&longs;continued with the interpo&longs;ition of a thou&longs;and void Spaces: for &longs;uch may we call them, in relation to the thou&longs;and little Lines toucht by the Sides of the Poligon. And what hath been &longs;poken hitherto admits of no doubt or &longs;cruple. But tell me, in ca&longs;e that about a Center, as &longs;uppo&longs;e the point A, (in the former Scheme) we &longs;hould de&longs;cribe two Circles concentrick, and united together; and that from the points C and B of their Semi-Diameters, there be drawn the Tangents C E, and B F, and by the Center A the Pa­rallel A D; &longs;uppo&longs;ing the greater Circle to be turned upon the Line B F, (drawn equal to its Circumference, as likewi&longs;e the other two C E, and A D;) when it hath compleated one Revolution, what &longs;hall the le&longs;&longs;er Circle, and Center have done? The Center &longs;hall doubtle&longs;s have run over, and touched the whole Line A D, and the le&longs;s Circumference &longs;hall with its touches have mea&longs;ured all C E, doing the &longs;ame as did the Poligons above; and different only in this, that the Line H T was not touched in all its Parts by the Perimeter of the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon, but there were as many parts left untoucht with the interpo&longs;ition of &longs;alts, or skipped &longs;paces; as were the&longs;e parts touched by the Sides: but here in the Circles, the Circumference of the le&longs;&longs;er Circle, never &longs;eparates from the Line C E, &longs;o as to leave any of its parts untou cht; nor is the parts touching of the Circumference, le&longs;s than the part toucht of the Right-line. Now how is it po&longs;&longs;ible that the le&longs;&longs;er Circle &longs;hould without skips run a Line &longs;o much bigger than its Circumfe­rence?

Ari&longs;totles admi­rable Problem of two Concentrick Circles that turn round, and its true re&longs;olution.

Mon&longs;ig. Gueva ra honourably men­tioned.

SAGR. I was con&longs;idering whether one might not &longs;ay, that like as the Center of the Circle trailed alone upon A D toucht, it all being yet but one &longs;ole Point; &longs;o likewi&longs;e might the Points of the le&longs;&longs;er Circumference, drawn by the revolution of the greater, go gliding along &longs;ome &longs;mall part of the Line C E.

SALV. This cannot be, for two rea&longs;ons; fir&longs;t, becau&longs;e there is no rea&longs;on why &longs;ome of the touches like to C &longs;hould go gliding along &longs;ome part of the Line C E, more than others: and though there &longs;hould; &longs;uch touches being (becau&longs;e they are points) in&longs;i­nite, the glidings along upon C E would be infinite; and &longs;o being, they would make an infinite Line, but the Line C E is finite. The other rea&longs;on is, that the greater Circle, in its Revolution continu­ally changing contact, the le&longs;&longs;er Circle mu&longs;t of nece&longs;&longs;ity do the like; there being no other Point but B, by which a Right Line can be drawn to the Center A, and pa&longs;&longs;ing through C; &longs;o that the greater Circumference changing Contact, the le&longs;s doth change it al&longs;o; nor doth any Point of the le&longs;s touch more than one Point of its Right-Line C E: be&longs;ides, that al&longs;o in the conver&longs;ion of the Po­ligons, no Point of the Perimeter of the le&longs;s falls on more than one Point of the Line, which was by the &longs;aid Perimeter traced, as may be ea&longs;ily under&longs;tood, con&longs;idering the Line I K is parallel to B C, whereupon, till ju&longs;t that B C fall on B R, I K continueth elevated above I P, and toucheth it not before B C is on the very Point of uniting with B Q, and then all in the &longs;ame in&longs;tant I K uniteth with O P, and afterwards immediately ri&longs;eth above it again.

SAGR. The bu&longs;ine&longs;s is really very intricate, nor can I think on any Solution of it, therefore do you explain it to us as far as you judge needful.

SALV. I &longs;hould, for the evincing hereof, have recour&longs;e to the con&longs;ideration of the fore-de&longs;cribed Poligons, the effect of which is intelligible and already comprehended, and would &longs;ay, that like as in the Poligons of an hundred thou&longs;and Sides, the Line pa&longs;&longs;ed and mea&longs;ured by the Perimeter of the greater, that is by its hundred thou&longs;and Sides continually di&longs;tended, is not con&longs;iderably bigger than that mea&longs;ured by the hundred thou&longs;and Sides of the le&longs;s, but with the interpo&longs;ition of an hundred thou&longs;and void &longs;paces interve­ning; fo I would &longs;ay in the Circles (which are Poligons of innu­merable Sides) that the Line mea&longs;ured by the infinite Sides of the great Circle, lying continued one with another, to be equalled in length by the Line traced by the infinite Sides of the le&longs;s, but by the&longs;e including the interpo&longs;ition of the like number of intervening Spaces: and like as the Sides are not quantitative, but yet infinite in number, &longs;o the interpo&longs;ing Vacuitics are not quantitative, but infinite in number; that is, tho&longs;e are infinite Points all filled, and the&longs;e are infinite points, part filled, and part empty. And here I would have you note, that re&longs;olving, and dividing a Line into quan­titative parts, and con&longs;equently of a finite number, it is not po&longs;&longs;ible to di&longs;po&longs;e them into a greater extention than that which they po&longs;­&longs;e&longs;t whil&longs;t they were continued, and connected, without the inter­po&longs;ition of a like number of void Spaces; but imagining it to be re&longs;olved into parts not quantitative, namely, into its infinite indivi­&longs;ibles, we may conceive it produced to immen&longs;ity without the in­terpo&longs;ition of quantitative void &longs;paces, but yet of infinite indivi&longs;i­ble Vacuities. And this which is &longs;poken of &longs;imple lines, &longs;hould al&longs;o be under&longs;tood of Superficies, and Solid Bodies, con&longs;idering that they are compo&longs;ed of infinite Atomes not non-quantitative; if we would divide them into certain quantitative parts, there's no que&longs;tion, but that we cannot di&longs;po&longs;e them into Spaces more ample than the Solid before occupied, unle&longs;s with the interpo&longs;ition of a certain number of quantitative void Spaces; void, I &longs;ay, at lea&longs;t of the matter of the Solid: but if we &longs;hould propo&longs;e the highe&longs;t, and ultimate re&longs;olution made into the fir&longs;t, non-quantitative, but infinite fir&longs;t compoun­ding parts, we may be able to conceive &longs;uch compounding parts extended unto an immen&longs;e Space without the interpo&longs;ition of quantitative void Spaces; but only of infinite non-quantitative Va­cuities: and in this manner a man may draw out, v. gr. a little Ball of Gold into a very va&longs;t expan&longs;ion without admitting any quan­titative void Spaces; yet neverthele&longs;s we may admit the Gold to be compounded of infinite induci&longs;&longs;ible ones.

SIMP. Me thinks that in this point you go the way of tho&longs;e di&longs;­&longs;eminated Vacuities of a certain Ancient Philo&longs;opher ------

SALV. But you add not: [who denied Divine Providence:)as on &longs;uch another occa&longs;ion, &longs;ufficiently be&longs;ides his purpo&longs;e, a cer­tain Antagoni&longs;t of our Accademick did &longs;ubjoyn.

SIMP. I &longs;ee very well, and not without indignation, the malice of &longs;uch contradictors; but I &longs;hall forbear the&longs;e Cen&longs;ures, not only upon the &longs;core of Good-Manners, but becau&longs;e I know how di&longs;a­greeing &longs;uch Tenets are to the well-tempered, and well-di&longs;po&longs;ed mind of a per&longs;on, &longs;o Religious and Pious, yea, Orthodox and Ho­ly, as you, Sir. But returning to my purpo&longs;e; I find many &longs;cruples to ari&longs;e in my mind about your la&longs;t Di&longs;cour&longs;e, which I know not how to re&longs;olve. And this pre&longs;ents its &longs;elf for one, that if the Cir­cumferences of two Circles are equall to the two Right Lines C E, and B F, this taken continually, and that, with the interpo&longs;i­tion of infinite void Points; how can A D, de&longs;cribed by the Center, which is but one &longs;ole Point, be &longs;aid to be equal to the &longs;ame, it con­taining infinite of them? Again, that &longs;ame compo&longs;ing the Line of Points, the divi&longs;ible of indivi&longs;ibles, the quantitative of non-quan­titative, is a rock very hard, in my judgment, to pa&longs;s over: And the very admitting of Vacuity, &longs;o thorowly confuted by Ari&longs;totle,no le&longs;s puzleth me than tho&longs;e difficulties them&longs;elves.

SALV. There be, indeed, the&longs;e and other difficulties; but re­member, that we are among&longs;t Infinites, and Indivi&longs;ibles: tho&longs;e in­comprehen&longs;ible by our finite under&longs;tanding for their Grandure; and the&longs;e for their minutene&longs;s: neverthele&longs;s we &longs;ee that Humane Di&longs;cour&longs;e will not be beat off from ruminating upon them, in which regard, I al&longs;o a&longs;&longs;uming &longs;ome liberty, will produce &longs;ome of my conceits, if not nece&longs;&longs;arily concluding, yet for novelty &longs;ake, which is ever the me&longs;&longs;enger of &longs;ome wonder: but perhaps the car­rying you &longs;o far out of your way begun, may &longs;eem to you imper­tinent, and con&longs;equently little plea&longs;ing.

SAGR. Pray you let us enjoy the benefit, and priviledge, of free &longs;peaking which is allowed to the living, and among&longs;t friends; e&longs;pe­cially, in things arbitrary, and not nece&longs;&longs;ary; different from Di&longs;cour&longs;e with dead Books, which &longs;tart us a thou&longs;and doubts, and re&longs;olve not one of them. Make us therefore partakers of tho&longs;e Con&longs;iderations, which the cour&longs;e of our Conferences &longs;ugge&longs;t unto you; for we want no time, &longs;eeing we are di&longs;engaged from urgent bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;es, to continue and di&longs;cu&longs;&longs;e the other things mentioned; and particular­ly, the doubts, hinted by Simplicius, mu&longs;t by no means e&longs;cape us.

SAIV. It &longs;hall be &longs;o, &longs;ince it plea&longs;eth you: and beginning at the fir&longs;t, which was, how it's po&longs;&longs;ible to imagine that a &longs;ingle Point is equal to a Line; in regard I can do no more for the pre&longs;ent, I will attempt to &longs;atisfie, or, at lea&longs;t, qualifie one improbability with another like it, or greater; as &longs;ome times a Wonder is &longs;wallowed up in a Miracle. And this &longs;hall be by &longs;hewing you two equal Su­perficies, and at the &longs;ame time two Bodies, likewi&longs;e equal, and placed upon tho&longs;e Superficies as their Ba&longs;es; and that go (both the&longs;e and tho&longs;e) continually and equally dimini&longs;hing in the &longs;elf­&longs;ame time, and that in their remainders re&longs;t alwaies equal between them&longs;elves, and (la&longs;tly) that, as well Super&longs;icies, as Solids, deter­mine their perpetual precedent equalities, one of the Solids with one of the Superficies in a very long Line; and the other Solid with the other Superficies in a &longs;ingle Point: that is, the latter in one Point alone, the other in infinite.

The equal Super­ficies of two Solids continually &longs;ub­&longs;tracting from them both equal parts, are reduced, the one into the Circumference of a Circle, and the o­ther into a Point.

SAGR. An admirable propo&longs;al, really, yet let us hear you ex­plain and demon&longs;trate it.

SALV. It is nece&longs;&longs;ary to give you it in Figure, becau&longs;e the proof is purely Geometrical. Therefore &longs;uppo&longs;e the Semicircle A F B, and its Center to be C, and about it de&longs;cribe the Rectangle A D E B, and from the Center unto the Points D and E let there be drawn the Lines C D, and C E; Then drawing the Semi-Dia­meter C F, perpendicular to one of the two Lines A B, or D E and immoveable; we &longs;uppo&longs;e all this Figure to turn round about that Perpendicular: It is manife&longs;t, that there will be de&longs;cribed by the Parallelogram A D E B, a Cylinder; by the Semi-circle A F B, an Hemi-Sphære; and by the Triangle C D E a Cone. This pre­&longs;uppo&longs;ed, I would have you imagine the Hemi&longs;phære to be taken away, leaving behind the Cone, and that which &longs;hall remain of the Cylinder; which for the Figure, which it &longs;hall retain like to a Di&longs;h, we will hereafter call a Di&longs;h: touching which, and the Cone, we will &longs;ir&longs;t demon&longs;trate that they are equal; and next a Plain being drawn parallel to the Circle, which is the foot or Ba&longs;e of the Di&longs;h, who&longs;e Diameter is the Line D E, and its Center F; we will demon&longs;trate, that &longs;hould the &longs;aid Plain pa&longs;s, v. gr. by the Line G H, cutting the Di&longs;h in the points G I, and O N; and the Cone in the points H and L; it would cut the part of the Cone C H L, equal alwaies to the part of the Di&longs;h, who&longs;e Profile is repre&longs;ented to us by the Triangles G A I, and B O N: and more­over we will prove the Ba&longs;e al&longs;o of the &longs;ame Cone, (that is the Circle, who&longs;e Diameter is H L) to be equal to that circular Su­perficies, which is Ba&longs;e of the part of the Di&longs;h; which is, as we may &longs;ay, a Rimme as broad as G I; (note here by the way what Mathematical Definitions are: they be an impo&longs;ition of names, or, we may &longs;ay, abreviations of &longs;peech, ordain'd and introduced to prevent the trouble and pains, which you and I meet with, at pre­&longs;ent, in that we have not agreed together to call v. gr. this Super­ficies a circular Rimme, and that very &longs;harp Solid of the Di&longs;h a round Razor:) now how&longs;oever you plea&longs;e to call them, it &longs;ufficeth you to know, that the Plain produced to any di&longs;tance at plea&longs;ure, &longs;o that it be parallel to the Ba&longs;e, viz. to the Circle who&longs;e Diame­ter D E cuts alwaies the two Solids, namely, the part of the Cone C H L, and the upper part of the Di&longs;h equal to one another: and likewi&longs;e the two Superficies, Ba&longs;is of the &longs;aid Solids, viz. the &longs;aid Rimme, and the Circle H L, equal al&longs;o to one another. Whence followeth the forementioned Wonder; namely, that if we &longs;hould &longs;uppo&longs;e the cutting-plain to be &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively rai&longs;ed towards the

Line A B, the parts of the Solid cut are alwaies equall, as al&longs;o the Superficies, that are their Ba&longs;es, are evermore equal; and, in fine, rai&longs;ing the &longs;aid Plain higher and higher, the two Solids (ever equal) as al&longs;o their Ba&longs;es, (Su­perficies ever equal) &longs;hall one couple of them terminate in a Cir­cumference of a Circle, and the other couple in one &longs;ole point; for &longs;uch are the upper Verge or Rim of the Di&longs;h, and the Vertex of the Cone. Now whil&longs;t that in the diminution of the two So­lids, they till the very la&longs;t maintain their equality to one another, it is, in my thoughts, proper to &longs;ay, that the highe&longs;t and ultimate terms of &longs;uch Diminutions are equal, and not one infinitely bigger than the other. It &longs;eemeth therefore, that the Circumference of an im­men&longs;e Circle may be &longs;aid to be equal to one &longs;ingle point; and this that befalls in Solids, holdeth likewi&longs;e in the Superficies their Ba&longs;es; that they al&longs;o in the common Diminution con&longs;erving al­waies equality, in fine, determine at the in&longs;tant of their ultimate Diminution the one, (that is, that of the Di&longs;h) in their Circum­ference of a Circle, the other (to wit, that of the Cone) in one &longs;ole point. And why may not the&longs;e be called equal, if they be the la&longs;t remainders, and foot&longs;teps left by equal Magnitudes? And note again, that were &longs;uch Ve&longs;&longs;els capable of the immen&longs;e Cœle&longs;tial Hemi&longs;pheres: both their upper Rims, and the points of the contai­ned Cones (keeping evermore equally to one another) would fi­nally determine, tho&longs;e, in Circumferences equal to tho&longs;e of the greate&longs;t Circles of the Cœle&longs;tial Orbes, and the&longs;e in &longs;implo points. Whence, according to that which &longs;uch Speculations per&longs;wade us to, all Circumferences of Circles, how unequal &longs;oever, may be &longs;aid to be equal to one another, and each of them equal to one &longs;ole point.

SAGR. The Speculation is, in my e&longs;teem, &longs;o quaint and curi­ous, that, for my part, though I could, yet would I not oppo&longs;e it, for I take it for a piece of Sacriledge to deface &longs;o fine a Structure, by &longs;purning at it with any pedantick contradiction; yet for our en­tire &longs;atisfaction, give us the proof (which you &longs;ay is Geometrical) of the equality alwaies retained between tho&longs;e Solids, and tho&longs;e their Ba&longs;es, which I think mu&longs;t needs be very &longs;ubtil, the philo&longs;o­phical Contemplation being &longs;o nice, which depends on the &longs;aid Conclu&longs;ion.

SALV. The Demon&longs;tration is but &longs;hort, and ea&longs;ie. Let us keep to the former Figure, in which the Angle I P C being a Right An­gle, the Square of the Semi-Diameter I C is equal to the two Squares of the Sides I P, and P C. But the Semi-Diameter I C, is equal to A C, and this to G P; and C P is equal to P H; therefore the Square of the Line G P is equal to the two Squares of I P, and P H, and the Quadruple to the Quadruples; that is, the Quadrate of the Diameter G N is equal to the two Quadrates I O, and H L: and becau&longs;e Circles are to each other, as the Squares of their Dia­meters; the Circle who&longs;e Diameter is G N, &longs;hall be equall to the two Circles who&longs;e Diameters are I O, and H L; and taking away the Common Circle, who&longs;e Diameter is I O; the re&longs;idue of the Circle G N &longs;hall be equal to the Circle, who&longs;e Diameter is H L. And this is as to the fir&longs;t part: Now as for the other part, we will, for the pre&longs;ent, omit its Demon&longs;tration, as well becau&longs;e that if you would &longs;ee it, you &longs;hall find it in the twelfth Propo&longs;ition of the Se­cond Book De centro Gravitatis Solidorum, publi&longs;hed by Signeur Lucas Valerius, the new Archimedes of our Age; who upon ano­ther occa&longs;ion hath made u&longs;e of it; as becau&longs;e in our ca&longs;e it &longs;uffi­ceth to have &longs;een, how the Superficies, already explained, are ever­more equal; and that alwaies dimini&longs;hing equally, they in the end determine, one in a &longs;ingle point, and the other in the Circumfe­rence of a Circle, be it never-&longs;omuch bigger, for in this lyeth our Wonder.

Lucas Valerius, the other Archi­chimedes of our Age, hath written admirably, De Centro Gravita­tis Solidorum.

SAGR. The Demon&longs;tration is as ingenious, as the reflection grounded upon it is admirable. Now let us hear &longs;omewhat about the other Doubt &longs;ugge&longs;ted by Simplicius, if you have any particu­lars worth note to hint thereupon, but I &longs;hould incline to think it impo&longs;&longs;ible to be, in regard it is a Controver&longs;ie that hath been &longs;o canva&longs;&longs;ed.

SALV. You &longs;hall have &longs;ome of my particular thoughts thereon; fir&longs;t repeating what but even now I told you, namely, that Infini­ty alone, as al&longs;o Indivi&longs;ibility, are things incompre hen&longs;ible to us: now think how they will be conjoyned together: and yet if you would compound the Line of indivi&longs;ible points, you mu&longs;t make them infinite; and thus it will be requi&longs;ite to apprehend in the &longs;ame in&longs;tant both Infinite, and Indivi&longs;ible. The things that ar &longs;e­veral times have come into my mind, on this occa&longs;ion, are many; part whereof, and the more con&longs;iderable, it may be, I cannot upon &longs;uch a &longs;udden remember; but it may happen, that in the &longs;equal of the Di&longs;cour&longs;e, coming to put que&longs;tions and doubts to you, and particularly to Simplicius, they may, on the other &longs;ide, re-mind me of that, which without &longs;uch excitement would have lain dor­mant in my Fancy: and therefore, with my wonted freedom, per­mit me that I produce any wild conjectures, for &longs;uch may we fitly call them in compari&longs;on of &longs;upernatural Doctrines, the only true and certain determiners of our Controver&longs;ies, and unerring guides in our ob&longs;cure, and dubious paths, or rather Laberinths.

Among&longs;t the fir&longs;t In&longs;tances that are wont to be produced again&longs;t tho&longs;e that compound Continuum of Indivi&longs;ibles, this is u&longs;u­ally one; That an Indivi&longs;ible, added to another Indivi&longs;ible, produ­ceth not a thing divi&longs;ible; for if that were &longs;o, it would follow, that even the Indivi&longs;ibles were divi&longs;ible: for if two Indivi&longs;ibles, as for example, two Points conjoyned, &longs;hould make a Quantity that &longs;hould be a divi&longs;ible Line, much more &longs;uch &longs;hould one be that is compounded of three, five, &longs;even, or others, that are odd num­bers; the which Lines, being to be cut in two equal parts, render divi&longs;ible that Indivi&longs;ible which was placed in the middle. In this and other Objections of this kind you may &longs;atisfie the propo&longs;er of them, telling him, that neither two Indivi&longs;ibles, nor ten, nor an hundred, no, nor a thou&longs;and can compound a Magnitude divi&longs;ible, and quantitative, but being infinite they may.

Continuum com­pounded of Indivi­&longs;ibles.

SIMP. Here already ri&longs;eth a doubt, which I think unre&longs;olvable; and it is, that we being certain to find Lines one bigger than ano­ther, although both contain infinite Points, we mu&longs;t of nece&longs;&longs;ity confe&longs;s, that we have found in the &longs;ame Species a thing bigger than infinite; becau&longs;e the Infinity of the Points of the greater Line, &longs;hall exceed the Infinity of the Points of the le&longs;&longs;er. Now this a&longs;&longs;igning of an Infinite bigger than an Infinite is, in my opinion, a conceit that can never by any means be apprehended.

SALV. The&longs;e are &longs;ome of tho&longs;e difficulties, which re&longs;ult from the Di&longs;cour&longs;es that our finite Judgments make about Infinites, gi­ving them tho&longs;e attributes which we give to things finite and ter­minate; which I think is inconvenient; for I judge that the&longs;e terms of Majority, Minority, and Equality &longs;ute not with Infinites, of which we cannot &longs;ay that one is greater, or le&longs;s, or equal to ano­ther: for proof of which there cometh to my mind a Di&longs;cour&longs;e, which, the better to explain, I will propound by way of Interroga­tories to Simplicius that &longs;tarted the que&longs;tion.

I &longs;uppo&longs;e that you very well under&longs;tand which are Square Num­bers, and which not Square.

SIMP. I know very well, that the Square Number is that which proceeds from the multiplication of another Number into it &longs;elf; and &longs;o four, and nine, are Square Numbers, that ari&longs;ing from two, and this from three multiplied into them&longs;elves.

SALV. Very well; And you know al&longs;o, that as the Products are called Squares: the Produ&longs;ors, that is, tho&longs;e that are multiplied, are called Sides, or Roots; and the others, which proceed not from Numbers multiplied into them&longs;elves, are not Squares. So that if I &longs;hould &longs;ay, all Numbers comprehending the Square, and the not Square Numbers, are more than the Square alone, I &longs;hould &longs;peak a mo&longs;t unque&longs;tionable truth: Is it not &longs;o?

SIMP. It cannot be denied.

SALV. Farther que&longs;tioning, if I ask you how many are the Numbers Square, you can an&longs;wer me truly, that they be as many, as are their propper Roots; &longs;ince every Square hath its Root, and every Root its Square, nor hath any Square more than one &longs;ole Root, or any Root more than one &longs;ole Square.

SIMP. True.

An Infinite Num­ber, as it contains infinite Square and Cupe Roots, &longs;o it conta neth infi­nite Square and Cube Numbers.

SALV. But if I &longs;hall demand how many Roots there be, you cannot deny but that they be as many as all Numbers, &longs;ince there is no Number that is not the Root of &longs;ome Square: And this be­ing granted, it is requi&longs;ite to affirm, that Square Numbers are as many as their Roots, and Roots are all Numbers: and yet in the beginning we &longs;aid, that all Numbers are far more than all Squares, the greater part not being Squares: and yet neverthele&longs;s the num­ber of the Squares goeth dimini&longs;hing alwaies with greater propor­tion, by how much the greater number it ri&longs;eth to; for in an hun­dred there are ten Squares, which is as much as to &longs;ay, the tenth part are Squares: in ten thou&longs;and only the hundredth part are Squares: in a Million only the thou&longs;andth, and yet in an Infinite Number, if we are able to comprehend it, we may &longs;ay the Squares are as many, as all Numbers put together.

SAGR. What is to be re&longs;olved then on this occa&longs;ion?

SALV. I &longs;ee no other deci&longs;ion that it may admit, but to &longs;ay, that all Numbers are infinite, Squares are infinite, their Roots are infinite; and that neither is the multitude of Squares le&longs;s than all Numbers, nor this greater than that: and in conclu&longs;ion, that the Attributes of Equality, Majority, and Minority, have no place in Infinites, but only in terminate quantities. And therefore when Simplicius propoundeth to me many unequal Lines, and demand­eth of me, how it can be, that in the greater there are no more Points than in the le&longs;s: I an&longs;wer him, That there are neither more, nor le&longs;s, nor ju&longs;t &longs;o many; but in each of them infinite. Or if I had an&longs;wered him, that the Points in one, are as many as there are Square Numbers; in another bigger, as many as all Numbers; in a le&longs;s, as many as the Cubick Numbers, might not I have given &longs;a­tisfaction, by a&longs;&longs;igning more to one, than to another, and yet to every one infinite? And thus much as to the fir&longs;t difficulty.

SAGR. Hold, I pray you, and give me leave to add unto what hath been &longs;poken hitherto, a thought which I ju&longs;t now light on, and it is this, that granting what hath been &longs;aid, me-thinks, that not on­ly it's improper to &longs;ay, one Infinite is greater than another Infinite, but al&longs;o, that it's greater than a Finite; for if an Infinite Number were greater, v. gr. than a Million; it would thereupon follow, that pa&longs;&longs;ing from the Million to others, and &longs;o to others continual­ly greater, one &longs;hould pa&longs;s on towards Infinity; which is not &longs;o: but on the contrary, to how much the greater Numbers we go, &longs;o much the more we depart from Infinite Number; becau&longs;e in Num­bers, the greater you take, &longs;o much the rarer and rarer alwaies are Square Numbers contained in them; but in Infinite Number the Squares can be no le&longs;s than all Numbers, as but ju&longs;t now was con­cluded: therefore the going towards Numbers alwaies greater, and greater, is a departing farther from Infinite Number.

SALV. And &longs;o by your ingenious Di&longs;cour&longs;e we may conclude, that the Attributes of Greater, Le&longs;&longs;er, or Equal, have no place, not only among&longs;t Infinites; but al&longs;o betwixt Infinites, and Fi­nites.

I pa&longs;s now to another Con&longs;ideration; and it is, that in regard that the Line, and every continued quantity are divideable conti­nually into divi&longs;ibles, I &longs;ee not how we can avoid granting that the compo&longs;ition is of infinite Indivi&longs;ibles: becau&longs;e a divi&longs;ion and &longs;ub­divi&longs;ion that may be pro&longs;ecuted perpetually &longs;uppo&longs;eth that the parts are infinite; for otherwi&longs;e the &longs;ubdivi&longs;ion would be termina­ble: and the parts being Infinite, it followeth of con&longs;equence that they be non-quantitative; for infinite quantitative parts make an infinite exten&longs;ion: and thus we have a Continuum compoun­ded of infinite Indivi&longs;ibles.

SIMP. But if we may continually pro&longs;ecute the divi&longs;ion in quantitative parts, what need have we, for &longs;uch re&longs;pect, to intro­duce the non-quantitative?

SALV. The very po&longs;&longs;ibility of perpetually pro&longs;ecuting the di­vi&longs;ion in quantitative parts induceth the nece&longs;&longs;ity of the compo&longs;iti­on of infinite non-quantitative. Therefore, coming clo&longs;er to you, I demand you to tell me re&longs;olutely, whether the quantitative parts in Continuum be in your judgment finite or infinite?

SIMP. I reply, that they are both Infinite, and Finite; Infinite in Power, and Finite in Act. Infinite in Power, that is, before the Divi&longs;ion; but Finite in Act, that is, after they are divided: for the parts are not actually under&longs;tood to be in the whole, till it is di­vided, or at lea&longs;t marked; otherwi&longs;e we &longs;ay that they are in Power.

SALV. So that a Line v. gr. twenty foot long, is not &longs;aid to contain twenty Lines of one foot a piece, actually, but only after it is divided into twenty equal parts: but is till then &longs;aid to contain them only in power. Now be it as you plea&longs;e; and tell me whe­ther, when the actual Divi&longs;ion of &longs;uch parts is made, that fir&longs;t whole encrea&longs;eth or dimini&longs;heth, or el&longs;e continueth of the &longs;ame bigne&longs;s?

SIMP. It neither encrea&longs;eth, nor dimini&longs;heth.

SALV. So I think al&longs;o. Therefore the quantitative parts in Con­tinuum quantity, be they in Act, or be they in Power, make not its quantity bigger or le&longs;&longs;er: but it is very plain that the&longs;e quantita­tive parts, actually contained in their whole, if they be infinite, make it an infinite Magnitude; therefore quantitative parts, though infinite only in power, cannot be contained, but only in an infinite Magnitude: therefore in a finite Magnitude infinite quan­titative parts can be contained neither in Act, nor Power.

SAGR. How then can it be true, that the Continuum may be ince&longs;&longs;antly divided into parts &longs;till capable of new divi&longs;ions?

SALV. It &longs;eems that that di&longs;tinction of Power, and Act, makes that fea&longs;ible one way, which another way would be impo&longs;&longs;ible. But I will &longs;ee to adju&longs;t the&longs;e matters by making another account: And to the Que&longs;tion, which was put, Whether the quantitative parts in a terminated Continuum be finite or infinite; I will an&longs;wer directly contrary to that which Simplicius replied, namely, that they be neither finite, nor infinite.

SIMP. I &longs;hould never have found &longs;uch an an&longs;wer, not imagi­ning that there was any mean term between finite and infinite; &longs;o that the divi&longs;ion or di&longs;tinction which makes a thing to be either Finite, or Infinite, is imperfect and deficient.

SALV. In my opinion it is; and &longs;peaking of ^{*} Di&longs;crete Quan­

tities, me thinks that there is a third mean term between Finite and Infinite, which is that which an&longs;wereth to every a&longs;&longs;igned Number: So that being demanded in our pre&longs;ent ca&longs;e, Whether the quanti­tative parts in Continuum be Finite, or Infinite, the mo&longs;t congru­ous reply is to &longs;ay, that they are neither Finite, nor Infinite, but &longs;o many, as that they An&longs;wer to any number a&longs;&longs;igned: the which to do, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that they be not comprehended in a limited Number, for then they would not an&longs;wer to a greater: nor, again, is it nece&longs;&longs;ary, that they be infinite, for no a&longs;&longs;igned Number is infi­nite. And thus at the plea&longs;ure of the Demander, a Line being propounded, we may be able to a&longs;&longs;ign in it an hundred quantita­tive parts, or a thou&longs;and, or an hundred thou&longs;and, according to the number which he be&longs;t likes; &longs;o that it be not divided into in­finite. I grant therefore to the Philo&longs;ophers, that Continuum con­taineth as many quantitative parts as they plea&longs;e, and grant them that it containeth the &longs;ame either in Act, or in Power, which they be&longs;t like: but this I add again, that in like manner, as in a Line of ten yards, there are contained ten Lines of one yard a piece, and thirty Lines of a foot a piece, and three hundred and &longs;ixty Lines of an inch a piece, &longs;o it contains infinite Points; denominate them in Act, or in Power, as you will: and I remit my &longs;elf in this matter to your opinion and judgment, Simplicius.

Quantitative parts in Di&longs;crete Quan­tity are neither fi­nite nor infinite, but an&longs;werable to every given Num­ber.

SIMP. I cannot but commend your Di&longs;cour&longs;e: but am great­ly afraid, that this parity of the Points, being contained in the like manner as the quantitative parts, will not agree with ab&longs;olute ex­actne&longs;s; nor &longs;hall it be &longs;o ea&longs;ie a matter for you to divide the gi­ven Line into infinite Points, as for tho&longs;e Philo&longs;ophers to divide it into ten yards, or thirty feet, nay, I hold it wholly impo&longs;&longs;ible to effect &longs;uch a divi&longs;ion: &longs;o that this will be one of tho&longs;e Powers that are never reduced to Act.

SALV. The trouble, pains, and long time without which a thing is not fea&longs;ible, render it not impo&longs;&longs;ible; for I think al&longs;o, that you cannot &longs;o ea&longs;ily effect a divi&longs;ion to be made of a Line into a thou&longs;and parts; and much le&longs;s being to divide it into 937, or &longs;ome other great Prime Number. But if I di&longs;patch this, which you, it may be, judge an impo&longs;&longs;ible divi&longs;ion, in as &longs;hort a time, as another would require to divide it into forty, you will be content more willingly to admit of it in our future Di&longs;cour&longs;e?

SIMP. I am plea&longs;ed with your way of arguing, as you now do mix it with &longs;ome plea&longs;antne&longs;s: and to your que&longs;tion I reply, that the facility would &longs;eem more than &longs;ufficient, if the re&longs;olving it into Points were but as ea&longs;ie, as to divide it into a thou&longs;and parts.

SALV. Here I will tell you a thing, which haply will make you wonder in this matter of going about, or being able to re&longs;olve the Line into its Infinites, keeping that order which others ob&longs;erve in dividing it into forty, &longs;ixty, or an hundred parts; namely, by di­viding it fir&longs;t into two, then into four: in which order he that &longs;hould think to find its infinite Points would gro&longs;ly delude him&longs;elf; for by that progre&longs;&longs;ion, though continued to eternity, he &longs;hould never arrive to the divi&longs;ion of all its quantitative parts: yea, he is in that way &longs;o far from being able to arrive at the intended term of Indivi&longs;ibility, that he rather goeth farther from it; and whil&longs;t he thinks by continuing the divi&longs;ion, and multiplying the multi­tudes of the parts, to approach to Infinite, I am of opinion, that he more and more removes from it: and my rea&longs;on is this; In the Di&longs;cour&longs;e, we had even now, we concluded, that, in an infinite Number, there was, of nece&longs;&longs;ity, as many Square, or Cube Num­bers, as there were Numbers; &longs;ince that tho&longs;e and the&longs;e were as ma­ny as their Roots, and Roots comprehend all Numbers: Next we did &longs;ee, that the greater the Numbers were that were taken, the &longs;eldomer are their Squares to be found in them, and &longs;eldomer yet their Cubes: Therefore it is manife&longs;t, that the greater the Number is to which you pa&longs;s, the farther you remove from Infinite Num­ber: from whence it followeth, that turning backwards, (&longs;eeing that &longs;uch a progre&longs;&longs;ion more removes us from the de&longs;ired term) if any number may be &longs;aid to be infinite it is the Unite: and, indeed, there are in it tho&longs;e conditions, and nece&longs;&longs;ary qualities of the Infi­nite Number, I mean, of containing in it as many Squares as Cubes, and as Numbers.

The Unite of all Numbers may mo&longs;t properly be &longs;aid to be Infinite.

SIMP. I do not apprehend very well, how this bu&longs;ine&longs;s &longs;hould be under&longs;tood.

SALV. The thing hath no difficulty at all in it, for the Unite is a Square, a Cube, a Squared Square, and all other Powers; nor is there any particular what&longs;oever e&longs;&longs;ential to the Square, or to the Cube, which doth not agree with the Unite; as v. gr. one proper­ty of two Square-numbers is to have between them a Number mean-proportional; take any Square number for one of the terms, and the Unite for the other, and you &longs;hall likewi&longs;e ever find be­tween them a Number Mean-proportional. Let the two Square Numbers be 9 and 4, you &longs;ee that between 9 and 1 the Mean­proportional is 3, and between 4 and 1 the Mean-proportional is 2, and between the two Squares 9 and 4, 6 is the Mean. The property of Cubes is to have nece&longs;&longs;arily between them two Num­bers Mean-proportional. Suppo&longs;e 8, and 27, the Means between them are 12 and 18; and between the Unite and 8 the Means are 2 and 4; betwixt the Unite and 27 there are 3, and 9. We therefore conclude, That there is no other Infinite Number but the Vnite. And the&longs;e be &longs;ome of tho&longs;e Wonders, that &longs;urmount the comprehen&longs;ion of our Imagination, and that advertize us how ex­ceedingly they err, who di&longs;cour&longs;e about Infinites with tho&longs;e very Attributes, that are u&longs;ed about Finites; the Natures of which have no congruity with each other. In which affair I will not conceal from you an admirable accident, that I met with &longs;ome time &longs;ince, explaining the va&longs;t difference, yea, repugnance and contrariety of Nature, that a terminate quantity would incur by changing or pa&longs;­&longs;ing into Infinite. We a&longs;&longs;ign this Right Line A B, of any length at plea&longs;ure, and any point in the &longs;ame, as C being taken, dividing it into two unequal parts: I &longs;ay, that many couples Lines, (hold­ing the &longs;ame proportion between them&longs;elves as have the parts A C, and B C,) departing from the terms A and B to meet with one another; the points of their Inter&longs;ection &longs;hall all fall in the Circumference of one and the &longs;ame Circle: as for example, A L and B L departing [or being drawn] from the Points A and B, and having between them&longs;elves the &longs;ame proportion, as have the parts A C and B C, and concurring in the point L: and the &longs;ame pro­portion being between two others A K, and B K, concurring in K, al&longs;o others as A I, and B I; A H, and B H; A G, and B G; A F, and B F; A E, and B E: I &longs;ay, that the points of their Inter&longs;ecti­on L, K, I, H, G, F, E, do all fall in the Circumference of one and the &longs;ame Semi-circle: &longs;o that we &longs;hould imagine the point C to mve conti­

nuallyafter &longs;uch a &longs;ort, that the Lines produced from it to the fix­ed terms A and B retain alwaies the &longs;ame propor­tion that is be­tween the fir&longs;t parts A C and C B, that point C &longs;hall decribe the Circumference of a Circle, as we &longs;hall &longs;hew you pre&longs;ently. And the Circle in &longs;uch &longs;ort de&longs;cribed &longs;hall be alwaies greater and greater &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively, according as the point C is taken nearer to the middle point which is O; and the Circle &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;er which &longs;hall be de&longs;cribed from a point nearer to the extremity B, in&longs;omuch, that from the infinite Points which may be taken in the Line O B, there may be de&longs;cribed Circles (moving them in &longs;uch &longs;ort as above is pre&longs;cri­bed) of any Magnitude; le&longs;&longs;er than the Pupil of the eye of a Flea, and bigger than the Equinoctial of the Primum Mobile.Now, if rai&longs;ing any of the Points comprehended betwixt the terms O and B, from every one we may de&longs;cribe Circles, and va&longs;t ones from the Points nearer to O; then if we rai&longs;e the Point O it &longs;elf, and continue to move it in &longs;uch &longs;ort as afore&longs;aid, that is, that the Lines drawn from it to the terms A and B keep the &longs;ame proporti­on as have the fir&longs;t Lines A O, and O B, what Line &longs;hall be de&longs;cri­bed? There would be de&longs;cribed the Circumference of a Circle, but of a Circle bigger than the bigge&longs;t of all Circles, therefore of a Circle that is infinite: but it doth al&longs;o de&longs;cribe a Right Line, and perpendicular upon A B, erected from the Point O, and produced in infinitum without ever turning to reunite its la&longs;t term with the fir&longs;t, as the others did; for the limited motion of the Point C, after it had de&longs;igned the upper Semi-circle C H E, continued to de­&longs;cribe the Lower E M C, reuniting its extream terms in the point C: But the Point O being moved to de&longs;ign (as all the other Points of the Line A B, for the Points taken in the other part O A &longs;hall de&longs;ign their Circles, and tho&longs;e Points neare&longs;t to O the greate&longs;t) its Circle; to make it the bigge&longs;t of all, and con&longs;e­quently infinite, it can never return any more to its fir&longs;t term, and in a word de&longs;igneth an Infinite Right-Line for the Circumference of its Infinite Circle. Con&longs;ider now, what difference there is be­tween a finite Circle, and an infinite; &longs;eeing that this in &longs;uch man­ner changeth its being that it wholly lo&longs;eth both its being, and power of being; for we have already well comprehended, that there cannot be a&longs;&longs;igned an infinite Circle; by which we may con&longs;equently know that there can be no infinite Sphære, or other Body, or figured Superficies. Now what &longs;hall we &longs;ay to this Meta­morpho&longs;is in pa&longs;&longs;ing from Finite to Infinite? And why &longs;hould we find greater repugnance, whil&longs;t &longs;eeking Infinity in Numbers, we come to conclude it to be in the Unite? And whil&longs;t that breaking a Solid into many pieces, and pur&longs;uing to reduce it into very &longs;mall powder, it were re&longs;olved into its infinite Atomes, admitting no far­ther divi&longs;ion, why may we not &longs;ay that it is returned into one &longs;ole Continuum, but perhaps fluid, as the Water, or Quick&longs;ilver, or other Metall melted? And do we not &longs;ee Stones liquified into Gla&longs;s, and Gla&longs;s it &longs;elf with much Fire to become more fluid than Water?

The difference be­twixt a finite and infinite Circle.

Vnity participates of Infinity.

SAGR. Should we therefore think Fluids to be &longs;o called, be­cau&longs;e they are re&longs;olved into their fir&longs;t, infinite, indivi&longs;ible com­pounding parts?

SALV. I know not how to find a better an&longs;wer to re&longs;olve cer­tain &longs;en&longs;ible appearances, among&longs;t which this is one: When I take a hard Body, be it either Stone, or Metal, and with a Hammer, or very fine File, endeavour to divide it, as much as is po&longs;&longs;ible, into its mo&longs;t minute and impalpable powder; it is very clear, that its lea&longs;t Atomes, albeit for their &longs;malne&longs;s they are imperceptible, one by one, to our &longs;ight and touch; yet are they quantitative, figured, and numerable: and it happens in them, that being accumulated to­gether, they continue in heap; and being laid hollow, or with a pit in the mid&longs;t, the hollowne&longs;s or pit remains, the parts heaped about it not returning to fill it up; and being &longs;tirr'd, or &longs;haken, they &longs;uddenly &longs;ettle &longs;o &longs;oon as their external mover leaves them, And the like effects are &longs;een in all the Aggregates of &longs;mall Bodies, bigger, and bigger, and of any kind of Figure, although Sphærical; as we &longs;ee in heaps of Pea&longs;e, Wheat, Bird &longs;hot, and other matters. But if we try to find the like accidents in Water, you will meet with none of them; but, being rai&longs;ed, it in&longs;tantly returns to a level, if it be not by a ve&longs;&longs;el, or &longs;ome other external &longs;tay upheld; being made hollow, it pre&longs;ently diffu&longs;eth to fill up the Cavity; and be­ing long moved, it continually undulates, and &longs;preads its waves very far. From this, I think, we may very rationally infer, that the minute parts of Water, into which it &longs;eemeth to be re&longs;olved, (&longs;ince it hath le&longs;s con&longs;i&longs;tence than any the fine&longs;t powder, yea, hath no con&longs;i­&longs;tence at all) are va&longs;tly differing from Atomes quantitative and divi&longs;ible; nor know I how to find any other difference therein than that of being indivi&longs;ible. Methinks, al&longs;o, that its mo&longs;t exqui­&longs;ite tran&longs;parency, affords us &longs;ufficient grounds to conjecture there­of; for if we take the mo&longs;t diaphanous Chri&longs;tal that is, and begin to break, and pound it to powder, when it is in powder it lo&longs;eth its tran&longs;parency, and &longs;o much the more, the &longs;maller it is pounded; but yet Water which is ground to the highe&longs;t degree, hath al&longs;o the highe&longs;t degree of Diaphaneity Gold and Silver, reduced by Aqua­fortis into a &longs;maller Powder than any File can make, yet they con­tinue powder, and become not fluid; nor do they liquifie till the Indivi&longs;ibles of the Fire, or of the Sun-beams di&longs;&longs;olve them, as, I be­lieve, into their fir&longs;t and highe&longs;t infinite and indivi&longs;ible compoun­ding parts.

Fluid Bodies are &longs;uch, for that they are re&longs;olved into their fir&longs;t Indivi&longs;i­ble Atomes.

SAGR. This which you have hinted of the Light I have many times ob&longs;erved with admiration: I have &longs;een, I &longs;ay, a burning­Gla&longs;s, of a foot Diameter, liquifie or melt lead in an in&longs;tant; whence I came to be of opinion, that if the Gla&longs;&longs;es were very big, and very polite, and of Parabolical Figure, they would no le&longs;s melt every other Metal in a very &longs;hort time; &longs;eeing that that, not very big, nor very clear, and of a Sphærical Concave, with &longs;uch force melted Lead, and burnt every combu&longs;tible matter: effects, that make the wonders, reported of the Burning-gla&longs;&longs;es of Archimedes,credible to me.

Archimedes his Burning — Gla&longs;&longs;es admirable.

SALV. Touching the Effects of the Gla&longs;&longs;es, invented by Ar­chimedes, all the Miracles, that &longs;everal Writers record of them, are to me rendred credible by the reading of Archimedes his own Books, which I have with infinite amazement peru&longs;ed and &longs;tudied: and if any doubts had been left me; that which la&longs;t of all Father

Buonaventura Cavalieri hath publi&longs;hed, touching Lo Specehio V&longs;torio, (or the Burning gla&longs;s) and which I have read with ad­miration, is &longs;ufficient to re&longs;olve them all.

Buonaventura Cavalieri, the Je­&longs;uate, a famous Mathematician, and his Book en­titled, Lo Spec­chio U&longs;torio.

SAGR. I have al&longs;o &longs;een that Tract, and peru&longs;ed it with much delight and wonder; and becau&longs;e I formerly had knowledge of the Author, I was confirmed in the opinion which I had conceived of him, that he was like to prove one of the principal Mathemati­cians of our Age. But returning to the admirable effects of the Sun-Beams in melting of Metals, are we to believe that &longs;uch, and &longs;o violent an operation is without Motion, or el&longs;e that it is with Motion, but extream &longs;wift?

Burnings are per­formed with a mo&longs;t &longs;wift Motion.

SALV. We &longs;ee other burnings, and meltings to be performed with Motion, and with a mo&longs;t &longs;wift Motion. Ob&longs;erve the ope­rations of Lightnings, of Powder in Mines, and in Petards, and, in &longs;um, how by quickning the flame of Coles, mixt with gro&longs;s and impure vapours, by Bellows, encrea&longs;eth its force in the melting of Metals: &longs;o that I cannot &longs;ee how the Action of Light, albeit mo&longs;t pure, can be without Motion, and that al&longs;o ve­ry &longs;wift.

SAGR. But what and how great ought we to judge this Velo­city of the Light? Is it haply In&longs;tantaneous, and done in a moment, or, as the re&longs;t of Motions, performed in Time? May we not by Experiment be a&longs;&longs;ured what it is?

SIMP. Quotidian experience &longs;hews the expan&longs;ion of Light to be In&longs;tantaneous; in that beholding a Cannon, let off at a great di&longs;tance, the fla&longs;h of the fire, without interpo&longs;ition of time, is tran&longs;­mitted to our eye, but &longs;o is not the Report to our ear untill a con­&longs;iderable time after.

SAGR. True, but, I pray you, what doth this obvious experi­ment evince; but only this, that the Report is longer in arriving at our Ear, than the Fla&longs;h at our Eye; but it a&longs;&longs;ures me not, that the tran&longs;mi&longs;&longs;ion of the Light is therefore In&longs;tantaneous rather than in Time, but only mo&longs;t &longs;wift. Nor doth &longs;uch an ob&longs;ervation con­clude more than that other, of &longs;uch who &longs;ay, that as &longs;oon as the Sun cometh to the Horizon, its Light arriveth at our eye: for who &longs;hall a&longs;&longs;ure me, that its beams arrive not at the &longs;aid term, afore they reach our &longs;ight?

SALV. The inconcludency of the&longs;e, and other ob&longs;ervations of the like Nature, made me once think of &longs;ome other way, whereby we may without errour be a&longs;certained whether the illumination, that is, whether the expan&longs;ion of the Light were really In&longs;tantane­ous; &longs;eeing that the very &longs;wift Motion of Sound, a&longs;&longs;ureth us, that that of Light cannot but be extream &longs;wift. And the experiment I

hit upon, was this; I would have two per&longs;ons take each of them a Light, which, by holding it in a Lanthorn, or other coverture, they may cover, and di&longs;cover at plea&longs;ure by interpo&longs;ing their hand to the fight of each other; and, that placing them&longs;elvs again&longs;t one another, &longs;ome few paces di&longs;tance, they may practice the &longs;peedy di&longs;covery, and occultation of their Lights from the &longs;ight of each other: So that when one &longs;eeth the others Light, he immediatly di&longs;clo&longs;e his: which corre&longs;pondence, after &longs;ome Re&longs;pon&longs;es mutually made, will become &longs;o exactly In&longs;tantaneous, that, without &longs;en&longs;ible variation, at the di&longs;covery of the one, the other &longs;hall at the &longs;ame time ap­pear to the &longs;ight of him that di&longs;clos'd the fir&longs;t. Having adju&longs;ted this practice at this &longs;mall di&longs;tance, let us place the two per&longs;ons with two &longs;uch Lights at two or three miles di&longs;tance; and by night re­newing the &longs;ame experiment; Let them inten&longs;ely ob&longs;erve if the Re&longs;pon&longs;es of the di&longs;clo&longs;ures, and occultations do follow the &longs;ame tenour which they did near hand: for if they keep the &longs;ame pro­portion, it may be with certainty enough concluded, that the ex­pan&longs;ion of Light is In&longs;tantaneous; but if it &longs;hould require time in a di&longs;tance of three miles, which importeth &longs;ix for the going of one, and return of the other, the &longs;tay would be &longs;ufficiently ob&longs;er­vable. And if this Experiment be made at greater di&longs;tances, namely, at eight or ten miles, we may make u&longs;e of the Tele&longs;cope,the Ob&longs;ervators accommodating each of them one at the places, where by night the Lights are to be ob&longs;erved; which though not very big, and &longs;o not vi&longs;ible, at that great di&longs;tance, to the eye at large; (though ea&longs;ie to be di&longs;clo&longs;ed, and hid) by help of the Tele&longs;copes before admitted, and fixed they may commodiou&longs;ly be di&longs;cerned.

The Velocity of Light, how to find by Experiment whether it be In­&longs;tantaneosu or not.

SAGR. The Invention &longs;eems to me no le&longs;s certain than ingenu­ous; but tell us what upon experimenting it you concluded.

SALV. Really, I have not tryed it, &longs;ave only at a &longs;mall di&longs;tance, namely, le&longs;s than a Mile: whereby I could come to no certainty whether the apparence of the oppo&longs;ite Light was truly In&longs;tantane­ous; But if not In&longs;tantaneous, yet it was of exceeding great Velo­city, and I may &longs;ay Momentary: and for the pre&longs;ent, I would re­&longs;emble it to that Motion which we &longs;ee a fla&longs;h of Lightning make in the Clouds ten or more Miles off: of which Light we di&longs;tin­gui&longs;h the beginning, and, I may fay, the &longs;ource and ri&longs;e of it, in a particular place in tho&longs;e Clouds; but yet its wide expan&longs;ion imme­diatly &longs;ucceeds among&longs;t tho&longs;e adjacent: which to me &longs;eems an ar­gument that it is &longs;ome &longs;mall time in doing; becau&longs;e had the illu­mination been made all at once, and not by degrees, it feems to me that we could not have di&longs;tingui&longs;hed its original, or rather the Center of its flake, and extream Dilatations. But into what Oceans do we by degrees engage our &longs;elves? Among&longs;t Vacuities, Infinites, Indivi&longs;ibles, and Instantaneous Motions; &longs;o that we &longs;hall not be able by a thou&longs;and Di&longs;cour&longs;es to recover the Shore?

SAGR. They are things, indeed, very di&longs;proportionate to our under&longs;tanding. Behold Infinite, &longs;ought among&longs;t Numbers, &longs;eemeth to determine in the Unite: From Indivi&longs;ibles ari&longs;eth things that are continually divi&longs;ible: Vacuity &longs;eems only to re&longs;ide indivi&longs;ibly mixt with Repletion: and, in brief, the&longs;e things &longs;o change the nature of tho&longs;e under&longs;tood by us, that even the Circumference of a Circle becometh an Infinite Right-Line; which, if I well re­member, is that Propo&longs;ition which you, Salviatus, are to mani­fe&longs;t by Geometrical Demon&longs;tration. Therefore, if you think fit, it would be well, without any more digre&longs;&longs;ions, to make it out to us.

SALV. I am ready to &longs;erve you in demon&longs;trating the en&longs;uing Problem for your fuller information.

PROPOSITION.

A Right-Line being given, divided, according to any proportion, into unequal parts, to de&longs;cribe a Circle, to the Circumference of which, at any point of the &longs;ame, two Right-Lines being produced from the terms of the given Right Line, they may retain the &longs;ame pro­portion that the parts of the &longs;aid Line given have to one another, &longs;o that tho&longs;e be Homologous which de­part &longs;rom the &longs;ame terms.

Let the given Right-Line be AB, unequally divided ac­cording to any proportion in the point C; it is required to de&longs;cribe a Circle at any point of who&longs;e Circumference two Right Lines, produced from the terms A and B, concurring, have the &longs;ame proportion to each other, that A C, hath to B C, &longs;o that tho&longs;e be Homologous which depart from the &longs;ame term. Upon the Center C, at the di&longs;tance of the le&longs;&longs;er part C B, let a Circle be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be de&longs;cribed, to the Circumference of which from the point A the Right-line A D is made a Tangent, and indetermi­nately prolonged towards E: and let the Contact be in D, and draw a Line from C to D, which &longs;hall be perpendicular to A E; and let B E be perpendicular to B A, which produced, &longs;hall inter­&longs;ect A E, the Angle A being acute: Let the inter&longs;ection be in E, from whence let fall a Perpendicular to A E, which produced, will meet with A B infinitely prolonged in F. I &longs;ay, fir&longs;t, that the Right-lines F E, and F C are equal: &longs;o that drawing the Line E C, we &longs;hall, in the

two Triangles D E C, B E C, have the two Sides of the one, D E, and C E, equal to the two Sides of the other B E, and E C; the two Sides, D E, and E B, being Tangents to the Circle D B, and the Ba&longs;es D C, and C B, are likewi&longs;e equal: wherefore the two Angles D E C, and B E C, &longs;hall be equal. And becau&longs;e the Angle B C E wanteth of being a Right­Angle, as much as the Angle B E C; and the Angle C E F, to make it a Right-Angle, wants the Angle C E D, tho&longs;e Supple­ments being equal, the Angles F C E, and F E C &longs;hall be equal, and &longs;o con&longs;equently the Sides F E, and F C; wherefore making the point F a Center, and at the di&longs;tance F E, de&longs;cribing a Circle, it &longs;hall pa&longs;s by the point C. De&longs;cribe it, and let it be C E G. I &longs;ay, that this is the Circle required, by any point of the Circumfe­rence of which, any two Lines that &longs;hall inter&longs;ect, departing from the terms A and B, &longs;hall be in proportion to each other, as are the two parts A C, and B C, which be&longs;ore did concur in the point C. This is manife&longs;t in the two that concur or inter&longs;ect in the point E, that is A E, and B E; the Angle E of the Triangle A E B being divided in the mid&longs;t by C E; &longs;o that as A C is to C B, &longs;o is A E to B E. The &longs;ame we prove in the two A G, and B G, determined in the point G. Therefore being (by the Similitude of the Tri­angles A F E, and E F B) that as A F is to E F, &longs;o is E F to F B; that is, as A F is to F C, &longs;o is C F to F B: So by Divi&longs;ion; as A C is to C F, (that is, to F G) &longs;o is C B to B F; and the whole A B is to the whole B G, as the part C B to the part B F: and by Com­po&longs;ition; as A G is to G B, &longs;o is C F to F B; that is, as E F to F B, that is, as A E to E B, and A C to C B: Which was to be de­mon&longs;trated. Again, let any other Point be taken in the Circum­ference, as H; in which the two Lines A H and B H concur. I &longs;ay, in like manner as before, that as A C is to C B, &longs;o is A H to B H. Continue H B untill it inter&longs;ect the Circumference in I, and draw a Line joyning I to F. And becau&longs;e it hath been proved already that as A B is to B G, &longs;o is C B to B F, the Rectangle A B F &longs;hall be equall to the Rectangle C B G, that is I B H: and therefore, as A B is to B H, &longs;o is I B to B F, and the Angles at B are equal: Therefore A H is to H B, as I F, that is E F, to F B, and as A E to E B.

I &longs;ay moreover, that it is impo&longs;&longs;ible, that the Lines, which have this &longs;ame proportion, departing from the terms A and B, &longs;hould meet in any point, either within or without the &longs;aid Circle: For­a&longs;much as if it be po&longs;&longs;ible that two Lines &longs;hould concur in the point L, placed without; let them be A L, and B L; and continue L B to the Circumference in M, and conjoyn M to F. If therefore A L is to B L, as A C to B C, that is, as M F to F B, we &longs;hall have two Triangles A L B, and M F B, which about the two Angles A L B and M F B have their Sides proportional, their upper Angles in the point B equal, and the two remaining Angles F M B and L A B le&longs;s than Right Angles (for that the Right-angle at the point M hath for its Ba&longs;e the whole Diameter C G, and not the &longs;ole part B F, and the other at the point A is acute by rea&longs;on the Line A L Homologous to A C, is greater than B L Homologous to B C) Therefore the Triangles A B L, and M B F are like: and therefore as A B is to B L, &longs;o is M B to B F; Wherefore the Rectangle A B F &longs;hall be equall to the Rectangle M B L. But the Rectangle A B F hath been demon&longs;trated to be equal to that of C B G: Therefore the Rectangle M B L is equal to the Rectangle C B G, which is impo&longs;&longs;ible: Therefore the Concour&longs;e of the Lines cannot fall without the Circle. And in like manner it may be de­mon&longs;trated that it cannot fall within; Therefore all the Concour­&longs;es fall in the Circumference it &longs;elf.

But it is time that we return to give &longs;atisfaction to the Intreaty of Simplicius, &longs;hewing him that the re&longs;olving the Line into its in­finite Points is not only not impo&longs;&longs;ible, but that it hath in it no more difficulty than to di&longs;tingui&longs;h its quantitative parts; pre&longs;up­po&longs;ing one thing (notwith&longs;tanding) which I think, Simplicius,you will not deny me, and that is this; that you will not require me to &longs;ever the Points one from another, and &longs;hew you them one by one di&longs;tinctly upon this paper: for I my &longs;elfe &longs;hould be content, if without enjoyning to pull the four or &longs;ix parts of a Line from one another, you &longs;hould but &longs;hew me its divi&longs;ions marked, or at mo&longs;t inclined to Angles, framing them into a Square, or a Hexa­gon; therefore I per&longs;wade my &longs;elf, that for the pre&longs;ent you will grant them then &longs;ufficiently, and actually di&longs;tingui&longs;hed.

SIMP. I &longs;hall indeed.

SALV. Now if the inclining of a Line to Angles, framing therewith &longs;ometimes a Square &longs;ometimes an Octagon, &longs;ometimes a Poligon of Forty, of an Hundred, of a Thou&longs;and Angles be a mutation &longs;ufficient to reduce into Act tho&longs;e four, eight, forty, hundred, or thou&longs;and parts, which were, as you &longs;ay, Potentially in the &longs;aid Line at fir&longs;t: if I make thereof a Poligon of infinite Sides, namely, when I bend it into the Circumference of a Circle, may not I, with the like leave, &longs;ay, that I have reduced tho&longs;e infi­nite parts into Act, which you before, whil&longs;t it was &longs;traight, &longs;aid were Potentially contained in it? Nor may &longs;uch a Re&longs;olution be denied to be made into its Infinite Points, as well as that of its four parts in forming thereof a Square, or into its thou&longs;and parts in forming thereof a Mill-angular Figure; by rea&longs;on that there wants not in it any of the Conditions found in the Poligon of a thou­&longs;and, or of an hundred thou&longs;and Sides. This applied or layed to a Right-Line covereth it, touching it with one of its Sides, that is, with one of its hundred thou&longs;andth parts; the Circle, which is a Poligon of infinite Sides, toucheth the &longs;aid Right-line with one of its Sides, that is one &longs;ingle Point divers from all its Colaterals, and therefore divided, and di&longs;tinct from them, no le&longs;s than a Side of the Poligon from its Conterminals. And as the Poligon turned round upon a Plane de&longs;cribes, with the con&longs;equent tacts of its Sides, a Right-line equal to its Perimeter: &longs;o the Circle, rowled upon &longs;uch a Plane, de&longs;cribes or &longs;tamps upon it, by its infinite &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ive Contacts, a Right-line, equall to its own Circumference. I know not at pre&longs;ent, Simplicius, whether or no the Peripateticks, (to whom I grant, as a thing mo&longs;t certain, that Continuum may be di­vided into parts alwaies divi&longs;ible, &longs;o that continuing the divi&longs;ion and &longs;ubdivi&longs;ion there can be no end thereof) will be content to yield to me, that none of tho&longs;e divi&longs;ions are the ultimate, as in­deed they be not, &longs;ince that there alwaies remains another; but that only to be the la&longs;t, which re&longs;olves it into infinite Indivi&longs;ibles; to which I yield we can never attain, dividing and &longs;ubdividing it &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively into a greater, and greater multitude of parts: but making u&longs;e of the way which I propound to di&longs;tingui&longs;h and re­&longs;olve all the infinite parts at one only draught, (an Artifice which ought not to be denied me) I could per&longs;wade my &longs;elf they would &longs;atisfie them&longs;elves, and admit this compo&longs;ition of Continu-um to con&longs;i&longs;t of Atomes ab&longs;olutely indivi&longs;ible: And e&longs;pecially, this one path being more current than any other to extricate us out of very intricate Laberinths; &longs;uch as are, (be&longs;ides that alrea­dy touched of the Coherence of the parts of Solids) the concei­ving the bu&longs;ine&longs;s of Rarefaction and Conden&longs;ation, without running into the inconvenience of being forced to admit forth of void Spaces or Vacuities; and for this a Penetration of Bodies: in­conveniences, which both, in my opinion, may ea&longs;ily be avoided, by granting the fore&longs;aid Compo&longs;ition of Indivi&longs;ibles.

How infinite points are a&longs;&longs;igned in a finite Line.

Continuum com­pounded of Indivi­&longs;ibles.

SIMP. I know not what the Peripateticks would &longs;ay, in regard that the Con&longs;iderations you have propo&longs;ed would be, for the mo&longs;t part, new unto them, and as &longs;uch, it is requi&longs;ite that they be exa­mined: and it may be, that they would find you an&longs;wers, and powerful Solutions, to unty the&longs;e knots, which I, by rea&longs;on of the want of time and ingenuity proportionate, cannot for the pre&longs;ent re&longs;olve. Therefore, &longs;u&longs;pending this particular for this time, I would gladly under&longs;tand how the introduction of the&longs;e Indivi&longs;i­bles facilitateth the knowledge of Conden&longs;ation, and Rarefa­ction, avoiding at the &longs;ame time a Vacuum, and the Penetration of Bodies.

SAGR. I al&longs;o much long to under&longs;tand the &longs;ame, it being to my Capacity &longs;o ob&longs;cure: with this provi&longs;o, that I be not couzen­ed of hearing (as Simplicius &longs;aid but even now) the Rea&longs;ons of Ari&longs;totle in confutation of a Vacuum, and con&longs;equently the Solu­tions which you bring, as ought to be done, whil&longs;t that you ad­mit what he denieth.

SALV. I will do both the one and the other. And as to the fir&longs;t it's nece&longs;&longs;ary, that like as in favour of Rarefaction, we make u&longs;e of the Line de&longs;cribed by the le&longs;&longs;er Circle bigger than its own Cir­cumference, whil&longs;t it was moved at the Revolution of the greater; &longs;o, for the under&longs;tanding of Conden&longs;ation, we &longs;hall &longs;hew, how that, at the conver&longs;ion made by the le&longs;&longs;er Circle, the greater de&longs;cribeth a Right-line le&longs;s than its Circumference; for the clearer explicati­on of which, let us &longs;et before us the con&longs;ideration of that which befalls in the Poligons. In a de&longs;cription like to that other; &longs;up­po&longs;e two Hexagons about the common Center L, which let be A B C, and H I K, with the Parallel-lines H O M, and A B C, up­on which they are to make their Revolutions; and the Angle I, of the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon, re&longs;ting at a &longs;tay, turn the &longs;aid Poligon till &longs;uch time as I K fall upon the Parallel, in which motion the point K &longs;hall de&longs;cribe the Arch K M, and the Side K I, &longs;hall unite with the part I M; while this is in doing, you mu&longs;t ob&longs;erve what the Side C B of the greater Poligon will do. And becau&longs;e the Revolution is made upon the Point I, the Line I B with its term B &longs;hall de­&longs;cribe, turning backward the Arch B b, below the Parallel c A, &longs;o that when the Side K I &longs;hall fall upon the Line M I, the Line B C &longs;hall fall upon the Line b c, advancing forwards only &longs;o much as is the Line B c, and retiring back the part &longs;ubtended by the Arch B b, which falls upon the Line B A, and intending to continue af­ter the &longs;ame manner the Revolution of the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon, this will de&longs;cribe, and pa&longs;s upon its Parallel, a Line equal to its Perimeter; but the greater &longs;hall pa&longs;s a Line le&longs;s than its Perimeter, the quan­tity of &longs;o many of the lines B b as it hath Sides, wanting one; and that &longs;ame line &longs;hall be very near equal to that de&longs;cribed by the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon, exceeding it only the quantity of b B. Here then, without the lea&longs;t repugnance the cau&longs;e is &longs;een, why the grea­ter Poligon pa&longs;&longs;eth or moveth not (being carried by the le&longs;s) with its Sides a greater Line than that pa&longs;&longs;ed by the le&longs;s; that is, becau&longs;e that one part of each of them falleth upon its next coter­minal and precedent.

But if we &longs;hould con&longs;ider the two Circles about the Center A, re&longs;ting upon their Parallels, the le&longs;&longs;er touching his in the point B, and the greater his in the

point C; here, in begin­ning to make the Revolu­tion of the le&longs;s, it &longs;hall not occur as before, that the point B re&longs;t for &longs;ome time immoveable, &longs;o that the Line B C giving back, carry with it the point C, as it befell in the Poligons, which re&longs;ting fixed in the point I till that the Side K I falling upon the Line I M, the Line I B carried back B, the term of the Side C B, as far as b, by which means the Side B C fell on b c, &longs;uper-po&longs;ing or re&longs;ting the part B b upon the Line B A, and advancing forwards only the part B c, equal to I M, that is to one Side of the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon: by which &longs;uperpo&longs;i­tions, which are the exce&longs;&longs;es of the greater Sides above the le&longs;s, the advancements which remain equal to the Sides of the le&longs;&longs;er Poli­gon come to compo&longs;e in the whole Revolution the Right-line equal to that traced, and mea&longs;ured by the le&longs;&longs;er Poligon. But now, I &longs;ay, that if we would apply this &longs;ame di&longs;cour&longs;e to the ef­fect of the Circles, it will be requi&longs;ite to confe&longs;s, that whereas the Sides of what&longs;oever Poligon are comprehended by &longs;ome Number, the Sides of the Circle are infinite; tho&longs;e are quantitative and di­vi&longs;ible, the&longs;e non-quantitative and Indivi&longs;ible: the terms of the Sides of a Poligon in the Revolution &longs;tand &longs;till for &longs;ome time, that is, each &longs;uch part of the time of an entire Conver&longs;ion, as it is of the whole Perimeter: in the Circles likewi&longs;e the &longs;tay o&longs; the terms of its infinite Sides are momentary, for a Moment is &longs;uch part of a limited Time, as a Point is of a Line, which containeth infinite of them; the regre&longs;&longs;ions made by the Sides of the greater Poligon, are not of the whole Side, but only of its exce&longs;s above the Side of the le&longs;&longs;er, getting forwards as much &longs;pace as the &longs;aid le&longs;&longs;er Side: in Circles, the Point, or Side C in the in&longs;tantaneous re&longs;t of B recedeth as much as is its exce&longs;s above the Side B, advancing forward as much as the quantity of the &longs;ame B: And in &longs;hort, the infinite indivi&longs;ible Sides of the greater Circle with their infinite indivi&longs;ible Regre&longs;&longs;ions, made in the infinite in&longs;tantaneous &longs;taies of the infi­nite terms of the infinite Sides of the le&longs;&longs;er Circle, and with their infinite Progre&longs;&longs;es, equal to the infinite Sides of the &longs;aid le&longs;&longs;er Circle, they compo&longs;e and mea&longs;ure a Line equall to that de&longs;cribed by the le&longs;&longs;er Circle, containing in it &longs;elf infinite &longs;uperpo&longs;itious non-quantitative, which make a Con&longs;tipation and Conden&longs;ation without any penctration of quantitative parts: which cannot be contrived to be done in the Line divided into quantitative parts, as is the Perimeter of any Poligon, which being di&longs;tended in a Right-line at length, cannot be reduced to a le&longs;&longs;er length, unle&longs;s the Sides fall upon and Penetrate one the other. This Con&longs;tipati­on of parts non-quantitative, but infinite without Penetration of quantitative parts, and the former Di&longs;traction above declared of infinite Indivi&longs;ibles by the interpo&longs;ition of indivi&longs;ible Vacui­ties, I believe, is the mo&longs;t that can be &longs;aid for the Conden&longs;ation and Rarefaction of Bodies, without being driven to introduce Pe­netration of Bodies, or quantitative Void Spaces. If there be any thing therein that plea&longs;eth you, make u&longs;e of it, if not, account it vain, and my di&longs;cour&longs;e al&longs;o; and &longs;eek out &longs;ome other explanation that may better &longs;atisfie your Judgment. Only the&longs;e two words by the way, let us remember that we are among&longs;t Infinites, and In­divi&longs;ibles.

A Circle is a Poli­gon of infinite in­divi&longs;ible quantita­tive Sides.

An In&longs;tant or Mo­ment of quantita­tive Time, is the &longs;ame as a Point of a quantitative Line.

Rarefaction is the di&longs;traction of infi­nite Indivi&longs;ibles by the interpo&longs;ition of infinite indivi&longs;i­ble Vaeuities.

Conden&longs;ation, ac­cording to the ope­ration of the Au­thor, proceeds from the Con&longs;tipation of quantitative and indivi&longs;ible parts.

SAGR. That the Conceit is ingenious, and to my eares wholly new, and &longs;trange, I freely confe&longs;s, but whether or no Nature pro­ceed in this order, I know not how to re&longs;olve; Truth is, that till &longs;uch time as I hear &longs;omething that may better &longs;atisfie me, that I may not &longs;tand &longs;ilent, I will adhere to this. But haply Simpliciusmay have &longs;omwhat, which I have not yet met with, to explicate the explication, which is produced by Philo&longs;ophers in &longs;o ab&longs;truce a matter; for, indeed, what I have hitherto read about Conden&longs;a­tion, is to me &longs;o den&longs;e, and that of Rarefaction &longs;o &longs;ubtill, that my weak &longs;ight neither penetrates the one, nor comprehends the other.

SIMP. I am full of confu&longs;ion, and find great Rubbs in the one path, and in the other, and more particularly in this new one: for according to this Rule, an Ounce of Gold might be rarefied and drawn forth into a Ma&longs;s bigger than the whole Earth, and the whole Earth conden&longs;ed and reduced into a le&longs;s Ma&longs;s than a Nut; which I neither believe, nor think that you your &longs;elf do believe: and the Con&longs;iderations and Demon&longs;trations by you hitherto de­livered, as they are things Mathematical, ab&longs;tract and &longs;eparate from Sen&longs;ible Matter, I believe, that when they come to be apply­ed to Matters Phy&longs;ical and Natural, they will not exactly comply with the&longs;e Rules.

SALV. It is not in my power, nor, as I believe, do you de&longs;ire, that I &longs;hould make that vi&longs;ible which is invi&longs;ible; but as to &longs;uch things as may be comprehended by our Sen&longs;es, in regard that you have in&longs;tanced in Gold, do we not &longs;ee an immen&longs;e exten&longs;ion to be made of its parts? I know not whether you may have &longs;een the Method that Wyer-drawers ob&longs;erve in di&longs;gro&longs;&longs;ing Gold Wyer: which in reality is not Gold, &longs;ave only in the Superficies, for the internal &longs;ub&longs;tance is Silver; and the way of di&longs;gro&longs;&longs;ing it is this. They take a Cylinder, or, if you will, Ingot of Silver, about half a yard long, and about three or four Inches thick, and this they gild or over-lay with Leaves of beaten Gold, which, you know, is &longs;o thin that the Wind will blow it to and again, and of the&longs;e Leaves they lay on eight or ten, and no more. So &longs;oon as it is gilded, they begin to draw it forth with extraordinary force, ma­king it to pa&longs;s thorow the hole of the Drawing Iron, and then reiterate this forceable di&longs;gro&longs;sment again and again thorow holes &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively narrower, &longs;o that, after &longs;everal of the&longs;e di&longs;gro&longs;ments, they bring it to the &longs;malne&longs;s of the hair of a womans head, if not &longs;maller, and yet it &longs;till continueth gilded in its Superficies or out­&longs;ide: Now I leave you to con&longs;ider to what a finene&longs;s and di&longs;ten&longs;i­on the &longs;ub&longs;tance of the Gold is brought.

Gold in the gilding of Silver is drawn forth and di&longs;gro&longs;­&longs;ed immen&longs;ly.

* Or Thumb­breadths.

SIMP. I do not &longs;ee how it can be inferred from this Experi­ment, that there may be a di&longs;gro&longs;ment of the matter of the Gold &longs;ufficient to effect tho&longs;e wonders which you &longs;peak of: Fir&longs;t, For that the fir&longs;t gilding was with ten Leaves of Gold, which make a con&longs;iderable thickne&longs;s: Secondly, howbeit in the exten&longs;ion and di&longs;gro&longs;ment that Silver encrea&longs;eth in length, it yet withall dimi­ni&longs;heth &longs;o much in thickne&longs;s, that compen&longs;ating the one dimen&longs;i­on with the other, the Superficies doth not &longs;o enlarge, as that for overlaying the Silver with Gold, the &longs;aid Gold need to be reduced to a greater thinne&longs;s than that of its fir&longs;t Leaves.

SALV. You much deceive your &longs;elf, Simplicius, for the en­crea&longs;e of the Superficies is Subduple to the exten&longs;ion in length, as I could Geometrically demon&longs;trate to you.

SAGR. I be&longs;eech you, both in the behalf of my &longs;elf, and of Simplicius, to favour us with that Demon&longs;tration, if &longs;o be you think that we can comprehend it.

SALV. I will &longs;ee whether I can, thus upon the &longs;udden, recall it to mind. It is already manife&longs;t, that that &longs;ame fir&longs;t gro&longs;s Cylin­der of Silver, and the Wyer di&longs;tended to &longs;o great a length are two equal Cylinders, in regard that they are the &longs;ame Silver; &longs;o that if I &longs;hall &longs;hew you what proportion the Superficies of equall Cy­linders have to one another, we &longs;hall obtain our de&longs;ire. I &longs;ay there­fore, that

PROPOSITION.

The Superficies of Equal Cylinders, their Ba&longs;es being &longs;ub&longs;tracted, are to one another in &longs;ubduple proportion of their lengths.

Take two equall Cylinders, the heights of which let be A B, and C D: and let the Line E be a Mean-proportional between them. I &longs;ay, the Superficies of the Cylinder A B, the Ba&longs;es &longs;ub&longs;tracted, hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Superficies of the Cylinder C D, the Ba&longs;es in like manner &longs;ub&longs;tracted, as the Line A B hath to the Line E, which is &longs;ubduple of the proportion of A B to C D. Cut the part of the Cylinder A B in F, and let the height A F be equal to C D: And becau&longs;e the Ba&longs;es of equal Cy­linders an&longs;wer Reciprocally to their heights, the Circle, Ba&longs;e of the Cylinder C D, to the Circle, Ba&longs;e of the

Cylinder A B, &longs;hall be as the height B A to D C: And becau&longs;e Circles are to one ano­ther as the Squares of their Diameters, the &longs;aid Squares &longs;hall have the &longs;ame proportion, that B A hath to C D: But as B A, is to C D, &longs;o is the Square B A to the Square of E: Therefore tho&longs;e four Squares are Pro­portionals: And therefore their Sides &longs;hall be Proportionals. And as the Line A B is to E, &longs;o is the Diameter of the Circle C to the Diameter of the Circle A: But as are the Diameters, &longs;o are the Circumferences; and as are the Circumferences, &longs;o likewi&longs;e are the Superficies of Cylin­ders equal in Height. Therefore as the Line A B is to E, &longs;o is the Superficies of the Cylinder C D to the Superficies of the Cylinder A F. Becau&longs;e therefore the height A F to the height A B, is as the Superficies A F to the Superficies A B: And as is the height A B to the Line E, &longs;o is the Superficies C D to the Superficies A F: Therefore by Perturbation of Proportion as the height A F is to E, &longs;o is the Superficies C D to the Superficies A B: And, by Con­ver&longs;ion, as the Superficies of the Cylinder A B is to the Superficies of the Cylinder C D, &longs;o is the Line E to the Line A F; that is, to the Line C D: or as A B to E: Which is in &longs;ubduple proportion of A B to C D: Which is that which was to be proved.

Now if we apply this, that hath been demon&longs;trated, to our purpo&longs;e; pre&longs;uppo&longs;ing that that &longs;ame Cylinder of Silver, that was gilded whil&longs;t it was no more than half a yard long, and four or five Inches thick, being di&longs;gro&longs;&longs;ed to the &longs;inene&longs;s of an hair, is prolon­ged unto the exten&longs;ion of twenty thou&longs;and yards (for its length would be much greater) we &longs;hall find its Superficies augmented to two hundred times its former greatne&longs;s: and con&longs;equently, tho&longs;e Leaves of Gold, which were laid on ten in number, being di&longs;ten­ded on a Superficies two hundred times bigger, a&longs;&longs;ure us that the Gold which covereth the Superficies of the &longs;o many yards of Wyer is left of no greater thickne&longs;s than the twentieth part of a Leaf of ordinary Beaten-Gold. Con&longs;ider, now, how great its thinne&longs;s is, and whether it is po&longs;&longs;ible to imagine it done without an immen&longs;e di­&longs;tention of its parts: and whether this &longs;eem to you an Experi­ment, that tendeth likewi&longs;e towards a compo&longs;ition of infinite In­divi&longs;ibles in Phy&longs;ical Matters: Howbeit there want not other more &longs;trong and nece&longs;&longs;ary proofs of the &longs;ame.

SAGR. The Demon&longs;tration &longs;eemeth to me &longs;o ingenuous, that although it &longs;hould not be of force enough to prove that fir&longs;t intent for which it was produced, (and yet, in my opinion, it plainly makes it out) yet neverthele&longs;s that &longs;hort &longs;pace of time was well &longs;pent which hath been employed in hearing of it.

SALV. In regard I &longs;ee, that you are &longs;o well plea&longs;ed with the&longs;e Geometrical Demon&longs;trations, which bring with them certain pro. fit, I will give you the fellow to this, which &longs;atisfieth to a very cu­rious Que&longs;tion. In the former we have that which hapneth in Cylinders that are equall, but of different heights or lengths: it will be convenient, that you al&longs;o hear that which occurreth in Cy­linders equal in Superficies, but unequal in heights; my meaning alwaies is, in tho&longs;e Superficies only that encompa&longs;s them about, that is, not comprehending the two Ba&longs;es &longs;uperiour and inferiour. I &longs;ay, therefore, that

PROPOSITION.

Upon Cylinders, the Superficies of which the Ba&longs;es be­ing &longs;ub&longs;tracted are equal, have the &longs;ame proportion to one another as their heights Reciprocally taken.

Let the Superficies of the two Cylinders A E and C F be equall; but the height of this C D greater than the height of the other A B. I &longs;ay, that the Cylinder A E hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Cylinder C F, that the height C D hath to A B. Becau&longs;e therefore the Superficies C F is equall to the &longs;uperficies A E, the Cylinder C F &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;e than A E: For if they were equal, its Superficies, by the la&longs;t Propo&longs;ition would be greater than the Superficies A E, and

much the more, if the &longs;aid Cylinder C F were greater than A E. Let the Cylinder I D be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to A E: There­fore, by the precedent Propo&longs;ition, the Superficies of the Cylinder I D &longs;hall be to the Superficies A E, as the height I F to the Mean-proportional betwixt I F & A B. But the Superficies A E being by Suppo&longs;ition equal to C F and I D, ha­ving the &longs;ame proportion to C F that the height I F hath to C D: Therefore C D is the Mean-Proportional between I F and A B. Moreover, the Cylinder I D being equal to the Cylinder A E, they &longs;hall both have the &longs;ame proporti­on to the Cylinder C F: But I D is to C F, as the height I F is to C D: Therefore the Cylinder A E &longs;hall have the &longs;ame proportion to the Cylinder C F, that the line I F hath to C D; that is, that C D hath to A B: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

Of Corn-&longs;acks with a Board at the Bottom, made of the &longs;ame Stuffe, but different in height, which are the more capa­cious.

From hence is collected the Cau&longs;e of an Accident, which the Vulgar do not hearken to without admiration; and it is, how it is po&longs;&longs;ible that the &longs;ame piece of ^{*}Cloth, being longer one way than another, if a Sack be made thereof to hold Corn, as the u&longs;ual manner is, with a Board at the bottom, will hold more, making u&longs;e of the le&longs;&longs;er breadth of the Cloth, for the height of the Sack,

and with the other encompa&longs;&longs;ing the Board at the bottom, than if it be made up the other way: As if for Example, the Cloth were one way &longs;ix foot, and the other way twelve, it will hold more, when with the length of twelve one encompa&longs;&longs;eth the Board at the bottom, the Sack being &longs;ix foot high, than if it encompa&longs;&longs;ed a bottom of &longs;ix foot, having twelve for its height. Now, by what hath been demon&longs;trated, there is added to the Knowledge in ge­neral that it holds more that way than this, the Specifick, and particular Knowledge of how much it holdeth more: which is, That it will hold more in proportion as it is lower, and le&longs;&longs;er, as it is higher. And thus in the mea&longs;ures afore taken, the Cloth be­ing twice as long as broad, when it is &longs;ewed the length-ways it will hold but half &longs;o much, as it will do the other way. And likewi&longs;e having a Mat to make a ^{*} Frale or Basket twenty five foot long, and &longs;uppo&longs;e &longs;even broad; made up the long-way it will hold but onely &longs;even of tho&longs;e mea&longs;ures, whereof the other way it will hold five and twenty.

* Or Sacking.

* Bugnola, any Ve&longs;&longs;el made of Rushes or Wick­er.

SAGR. And thus to our particular content we continually di&longs;­cover new Notions of great Curio&longs;ity, and not unaccompanyed with Utility. But in the particular glanced at but even now, I really believe, that among&longs;t &longs;uch as are altogether void of the knowledge of Geometry, there would not be found one in twen­ty, but at the fir&longs;t da&longs;h would not be mi&longs;taken, and wonder that tho&longs;e Bodies that are contained within equal Superficies, &longs;hould not likewi&longs;e be in every re&longs;pect equal; like as they run in­to the &longs;ame errour, &longs;peaking of the Superficies, when for deter­mining, as it frequently falls out, of the amplene&longs;&longs;e of &longs;everal Cities, they think they have obtained their de&longs;ire &longs;o &longs;oon as they know the &longs;pace of their Circuits, not knowing that one Circuit may be equal to another, and yet the place conteined by this much larger than the place of that: which befalleth not onely in irregular Superficies, but in the regular; among&longs;t which tho&longs;e of more Sides are alwayes more capacious than tho&longs;e of fewer; &longs;o that in fine, the Circle, as being a Poligon of infinite Sides, is more capacious than all other Poligons of equal Perimeter; of which I remember, that I with particular delight &longs;aw the Demon­&longs;tration on a time when I &longs;tudied the Sphere of Sacrobo&longs;co, with a very learned Commentary upon the &longs;ame.

SALV. It is mo&longs;t certain; and I having likewi&longs;e light upon that very place, it gave me occa&longs;ion to inve&longs;tigate, how it may with one &longs;ole Demon&longs;tration be concluded, that the Circle is greater than all the re&longs;t of regular I&longs;operemitral Figures, and of others, tho&longs;e of more Sides bigger than tho&longs;e of fewer.

SAGR. And I that take great plea&longs;ure in certain &longs;elect and no­wi&longs;e-trivial Demon&longs;trations, entreat you with all importunity to make me a partaker therein.

SALV. I &longs;hall di&longs;patch the &longs;ame in few words, demon&longs;trating the following Theorem, namely;

PROPOSITION.

The Circle is a Mean-Proportional betwixt any two Regular Homogeneal Poligons, one of which is cir­cum&longs;cribed about it, and the other I&longs;operimetral to it: Moreover, it being le&longs;&longs;e than all the circum&longs;cri­bed, it is, on the contrary, bigger than all the I&longs;operi­metral. And, again of the circum&longs;cribed, tho&longs;e that have more angles are le&longs;&longs;er than tho&longs;e that have fewer; and on the other &longs;ide of the I&longs;operimetral, tho&longs;e of more angles are bigger.

Of the two like Poligons A and B, let A be circum&longs;cribed about the Circle A, and let the other B, be I&longs;operime­tral to the &longs;aid Circle: I &longs;ay, that the Circle is the Mean­proportional betwixt them. For that (having drawn the Semidi­ameter A C) the Circle being equal to that Right-angled Trian­gle, of who&longs;e Sides including the Right angle, the one is equal

to the Semidiameter A C, and the other to the Circumference: And likewi&longs;e the Poligon A being equal to the right angled Tri­angle, that about the right angle hath one of its Sides equal to the &longs;aid right line A C, and the other to the Perimeter of the &longs;aid Poligon: It is manife&longs;t, that the circum&longs;cribed Poligon hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Circle, that its Perimeter hath to the Cir­cumference of the &longs;aid Circle; that is, to the Perimeter of the Poligon B, which is &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the &longs;aid Circumference: But the Poligon A hath a proportion to the Poligon B, double to that of its Perimeter, to the Perimeter of B (they being like Fi­gures:) Therefore the Circle A is the Mean-proportional be­tween the two Poligons A and B. And the Poligon A being bigger than the Circle A, it is manife&longs;t that the &longs;aid Circle A is bigger than the Poligon B, its I&longs;operimetral, and con&longs;e­quently the greate&longs;t of all Regular Poligons that are I&longs;operimetral to it. As to the other particular, that is to prove, that of the Poligons circum&longs;cribed about the &longs;ame Circle, that of fewer Sides is bigger than that of more Sides; but that, on the contrary, of the I&longs;operimetral Poligons, that of more Sides is bigger than that of fewer Sides, we will thus demon&longs;trate. In the Circle who&longs;e Center is O, and Semidiameter O A, let there be a Tangent A D, and in it let it be &longs;uppo&longs;ed, for example, that A D is the half of the Side of the Pentagon circum&longs;cribed, and A C the half of the Side of the Heptagon, and draw the right lines O G C, and O F D; and on the Center O, at the di&longs;tance O C, draw the Arch E C I: And becau&longs;e the Triangle D O C is greater than the Sector E O C, and the Sector C O I greater than the Triangle C O A; the Triangle D O C &longs;hall have greater proportion to the Triangle C O A, than the Sector E O C, to the Secant C O I, that is, than the Secant F O G to the Secant G O A. And, by Compo&longs;ition, Permutation of Proportion, the Triangle D O A &longs;hall have greater proportion to the Secant F O A, than the Tri­angle C O A to the Secant G O A: And ten Triangles D O A &longs;hall have greater proportion to ten Secants F O A, than four­teen Triangles C O A to fourteen Sectors G O A: That is the circum&longs;cribed Pentagon &longs;hall have greater proportion to the Cir­cle, than hath the Heptagon: And therefore the Pentagon &longs;hall be greater than the Heptagon. Let us now &longs;uppo&longs;e an Hep­tagon and a Pentagon I&longs;operimetral to the &longs;ame Circle. I &longs;ay, that the Heptagon is bigger than the Pentagon. For that the &longs;aid Cir­cle being the Mean proportional between the Pentagon circum­&longs;cribed and the Pentagon its I&longs;operimetral, and likewi&longs;e the Mean between the Circum&longs;cribed and I&longs;operimetral Heptagon: It ha­ving been proved that the Circum&longs;cribed Pentagon is greater then the Circum&longs;cribed Heptagon, the &longs;aid Pentagon &longs;hall have greater proportion to the Circle, than the Heptagon: that is, the Circle &longs;hall have greater proportion to its I&longs;operimetral Pentagon, than to its I&longs;operimetral Heptagon: Therefore the Pentagon is le&longs;&longs;er than the I&longs;operimetral Heptagon. Which was to be demon­&longs;trated

SAGR. A mo&longs;t ingenious Demon&longs;tration, and very acute. But whither are we run to ingulph our &longs;elves in Geometry, when as we were about to con&longs;ider the Difficulties propo&longs;ed by Simpli­cius, which indeed are very con&longs;iderable, and in particular, that of Conden&longs;ation, is in my opinion, very ab&longs;truce.

SALV. If Conden&longs;ation and Rarefaction are oppo&longs;ite Motions, where there is &longs;een an immen&longs;e Rarefaction, one cannot deny an extraordinary Conden&longs;ation: but immen&longs;e Rarefactions, and, which encrea&longs;eth the wonder, almo&longs;t Momentary, we &longs;ee every day: for what a boundle&longs;&longs;e Rarefaction is that of a little quan­tity of Gunpowder re&longs;olved into a va&longs;t ma&longs;&longs;e of Fire? And what, beyond this, the (I could almo&longs;t &longs;ay) indeterminate Expan&longs;ion of its Light? And if that Fire and this Light &longs;hould reunite toge­ther, which yet is no impo&longs;&longs;ibility, in regard, that at the fir&longs;t they lay in that little room, what a Conden&longs;ation would this be? If you &longs;tudy for them, you will find hundreds of &longs;uch Rarefacti­ons, which are much more readily ob&longs;erved, than Conden&longs;ati­ons: for Den&longs;e matters are more tractable, and &longs;ubject to our Sen&longs;es. For we can ea&longs;ily order Wood at plea&longs;ure, and we &longs;ee it re&longs;olved into Fire, and into Light, but we do not in the &longs;ame manner &longs;ee the Fire and the Light Conden&longs;e to the making of Wood: We &longs;ee Fruits, Flowers, and many other &longs;olid matters re&longs;olved in a great mea&longs;ure into Odors, but we do not after the &longs;ame manner &longs;ee the odoriferous Atomes concurre to the con&longs;titu­tion of the Oderate Solids; but where Sen&longs;ible Ob&longs;ervation is wanting, we are to &longs;upply it with Rea&longs;on, which will &longs;uffice to make us apprehen&longs;ive, no le&longs;&longs;e of the Motion to the Rarefaction and re&longs;olution of Solids, than, to the Conden&longs;ation of rare and mo&longs;t tenuous Sub&longs;tances. Moreover, we que&longs;tion how to effect the Conden&longs;ation and Rarefaction of the Bodies which may be rarefied and conden&longs;ed, &longs;tudying in what manner it may be done without introducing of a Vacuum, and Penetration of Bodies; which doth not hinder, but that in Nature there may be matters which admit no &longs;uch accidents, and con&longs;equently do not allow roome for tho&longs;e things which you phra&longs;e inconvenient and im­po&longs;&longs;ible. And la&longs;tly, Simplicius, I have on the the &longs;core of &longs;atis­fying you, and tho&longs;e Philo&longs;ophers that hold with you, taken &longs;ome pains in con&longs;idering how Conden&longs;ation and Rarefaction may be under&longs;tood to be performed without admitting Penetra­tion of Bodies, and introducing the Void Spaces called Vacuities, Effects which you deny and abhorre: for if you would but grant them, I would no longer &longs;o re&longs;olutely contradict you. There­fore either admit the&longs;e Inconveniences, or accept of my Spe­culations, or el&longs;e finde out others more conducing to the purpo&longs;e.

Rarefaction im­min&longs;e is that of a little Gunpow­der into a va&longs;t ma&longs;s of Fire.

SAGR. As to the denying of Penetration, I am wholly of opi­nion with the Peripatetick Philo&longs;ophers; as to that of a Vacuum,I would &longs;ee the Demon&longs;tration of Ari&longs;totle thorowly examined, wherewith he oppo&longs;eth the &longs;ame, and what you, Salviatus, will an&longs;wer to it. Simplicius &longs;hall do me the favour punctually to recite the proof of the Philo&longs;opher; and you, Salviatus, to an­&longs;wer it.

SIMP. Ari&longs;totle, as neer as I can remember, breaks out again&longs;t certain of the Ancients, who introduced Vacuity, as nece&longs;&longs;ary to Motion, &longs;aying, that this without that could not be effected; to this Ari&longs;totle making oppo&longs;ition, demon&longs;trateth, that on the contrary, the effecting of Motion (as we &longs;ee) de&longs;troyeth the Po&longs;iti­on of Vacuum; and his method therein is this. He maketh two Suppo&longs;itions, one is touching Moveables different in Gravity moved in the &longs;ame Medium: the other is concerning the &longs;ame Moveable moved in &longs;everal Medium's. As to the fir&longs;t, he &longs;uppo­&longs;eth that Moveables different in Gravity, move in the &longs;ame Medium with unequal Velocities, which bear to each other the &longs;ame proportion as their Gravities: &longs;o that, for example, a Move­able ten times heavier than another, moveth ten times more &longs;wift­ly. In the other Po&longs;ition he a&longs;&longs;umes, that the Velocity of the &longs;ame Moveable in different Medium's are in Reciprocal to that of the thickne&longs;&longs;e or Den&longs;ity of the &longs;aid Medium's: &longs;o that &longs;uppo­&longs;ing v. gr. that the Cra&longs;&longs;itude of the Water was ten times as great as that of the Air, he will have the Velocity in the Air to be ten times more than the Velocity in the Water. And from this &longs;e­cond A&longs;&longs;umption he draweth his Demon&longs;tration in this manner. Becau&longs;e the tenuity of Vacuum infinitely &longs;urpa&longs;&longs;eth the corpu­lence, though never &longs;o &longs;ubtil, of any whatever Replete Medi­um, every Moveable that in the Replete Medium moveth a cer­tain &longs;pace in a certain time, in a Vacuum would pa&longs;&longs;e the &longs;ame in an in&longs;tant: But to make a Motion in an in&longs;tant is impo&longs;&longs;ible: Therefore to introduce Vacuity in the accompt of Motion is im­po&longs;&longs;ible.

SALV. The Argument one may &longs;ee to be ad hominem, that is, again&longs;t tho&longs;e who would make a Vacuum nece&longs;&longs;ary to Motion; but if I &longs;hall admit of the Argument as concludent, granting withal, that in Vacuity there would be no Motion; yet the Po&longs;i­tion of Vacuity taken ab&longs;olutely, and not in relation to Motion, is not thereby overthrown. But to tell you what tho&longs;e Ancients, peradventure, might an&longs;wer, that &longs;o we may the better di&longs;cover how far the Demon&longs;tration of Ari&longs;totle holds good, methinks that one might oppo&longs;e his A&longs;&longs;umptions, denying them both. And as to the fir&longs;t: I greatly doubt that Ari&longs;totle never experimented how true it is, that two &longs;tones, one ten times heavier than the o­ther, let fall in the &longs;ame in&longs;tant from an height, v. gr. of an hun­dred yards, were &longs;o different in their Velocity, that upon the arrival of the greater to the ground, the other was found not to have de&longs;cended &longs;o much as ten yards.

Ari&longs;totle's Argu­ment again&longs;t aVacuum is ad hominem.

SIMP. Why, it may be &longs;een by his own words, that he confe&longs;­&longs;eth he had made the Experiment, for he &longs;aith, [We &longs;ee the more grave] now that Seeing implieth that he had tried the Experi­ment.

SAGR. But I, Simplicius, that have made proof thereof, do a&longs;­&longs;ure you, that a Cannon bullet that weigheth one hundred, rwo hundred, and more pounds, will not one Palme anticipate the ar­rival of a Musket-bullet to the ground, that weigheth but half a pound, falling likewi&longs;e from an height of two hundred yards.

SALV. But without any other Experiments, we may by &longs;hort and nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;trations cleerly prove, that it is not true that a Moveable more grave moveth more &longs;wiftly than another le&longs;&longs;e grave, confining our meaning &longs;till to Moveables of the &longs;ame Mat­ter; and, in &longs;hort, to tho&longs;e of which Ari&longs;totle &longs;peaketh. For tell me, Simplicius whether you admit, that to every cadent grave Body there belongeth by nature one determinate Velocity; &longs;o as that it cannot be encrea&longs;ed or dimini&longs;hed in it without u&longs;ing vi­olence to it, or impo&longs;ing &longs;ome impediment upon it?

SIMP. It cannot be doubted, but that the &longs;ame Moveable in the &longs;ame Medium hath one e&longs;tabli&longs;hed and by-nature-determinate Velocity, which cannot be increa&longs;ed, unle&longs;&longs;e with new Impetusconferred on it, or dimini&longs;hed, &longs;ave onely by &longs;ome impediment that retards it.

SALV. If therefore we had two Moveables, the natural Velo­cities of which were unequal, it is manife&longs;t, that if we joyned the &longs;lower with the &longs;wifter, this would be in part retarded by the &longs;lower, and that in part accelerated by the other more &longs;wift. Do not you concur with me in this opinion?

SIMP. I think that it ought undoubtedly &longs;o to &longs;ucceed.

SALV. But if this be &longs;o, and, it be likewi&longs;e true that a great Stone moveth with (&longs;uppo&longs;e) eight degrees of Velocity, and a le&longs;­&longs;er with fewer, then joyning them both together, the compound of them will move with a Velocity le&longs;&longs;e than eight Degrees: But the two Stones joyned together make one Stone greater than that before, which moved with eight degrees of Velocity: There­fore this greater Stone moveth le&longs;&longs;e &longs;wiftly than the le&longs;&longs;er, which is contrary to your Suppo&longs;ition. You &longs;ee therefore, that from the &longs;uppo&longs;ing that the more grave Moveable moveth more &longs;wiftly than the le&longs;&longs;e grave, I prove unto you that the more grave mo­veth le&longs;&longs;e &longs;wiftly.

SIMP. I find my &longs;elf at a lo&longs;&longs;e, for the truth is, that the le&longs;­&longs;er Stone being joyned to the greater, weight is added unto it, and weight being added to it, I cannot &longs;ee why there &longs;hould not Ve­locity be added to it, or at lea&longs;t why it &longs;hould be dimini&longs;hed in it.

SALV. Here you run into another errour, Simplicius, for it is not true, that that &longs;ame le&longs;&longs;er Stone encrea&longs;eth the weight of the greater.

SIMP. Oh wonderful! this quite &longs;urpa&longs;&longs;eth my apprehen&longs;ion.

SALV. Not at all, if you will but &longs;tay till I have di&longs;covered to you the Equivokes, of which you are in doubt: Therefore you mu&longs;t know that it is nece&longs;&longs;ary to di&longs;tingui&longs;h betwixt grave Bodies &longs;et on Moving, and the &longs;ame con&longs;tituted in Re&longs;t; a Stone put into the Ballance not onely acquireth greater weight, by lay­ing another Stone upon it, but al&longs;o the addition of, a Flake of Hemp will make it weigh more by tho&longs;e &longs;ix or ten ounces that the Hemp &longs;hall weigh; but if you &longs;hould freely let fall the Stone tied to the Hemp from an high place, do you think that in the Motion the Hemp weigheth down the Stone, &longs;o as to accelerate its Motion; or el&longs;e do you believe that it will retard it, &longs;u&longs;tain­ing it in part? We indeed feel our &longs;houlders laden, &longs;o long as we will oppo&longs;e the Motion that the weight would make which lyeth upon our backs; but if we &longs;hould de&longs;cend with the &longs;ame Velocity wherewith that &longs;ame grave Body would naturally de&longs;cend, in what manner will you that it pre&longs;&longs;e or bear upon us? Do not you &longs;ee that this would be a wounding one with a Lance that runneth before you, with as much or more &longs;peed than you pur&longs;ue him. You may conclude therefore that in the free and natural fall, the le&longs;&longs;er Stone doth not bear upon the greater, and con&longs;equently doth not encrea&longs;e their weight, as it doth in Re&longs;t.

SIMP. But what if the greater was put upon the le&longs;&longs;er?

SALV. It would encrea&longs;e their weight, in ca&longs;e its Motion were more &longs;wift; but it hath been already concluded, that in ca&longs;e the le&longs;&longs;er &longs;hould be more &longs;low it would in part retard the Velocity of the greater, &longs;o that there Compound would move le&longs;&longs;e &longs;wiftly; being greater than the other, which is contrary to your A&longs;&longs;umpti­on: Let us conclude therefore, that great Moveables, and like­wi&longs;e little, being of the &longs;ame Specifical Gravity, move with like Velocity.

SIMP. Your di&longs;cour&longs;e really is full of ingenuity, yet methinks it is hard to conceive that a drop of Bird-&longs;hot, &longs;hould move as &longs;wiftly as a Canon-bullet.

SALV. You may &longs;ay a grain of Sand as fa&longs;t as a Mill-&longs;tone. I would not have you, Simplicius, to do as &longs;ome others are wont to do, and diverting the di&longs;cour&longs;e from the principal de&longs;ign, fa­&longs;ten upon &longs;ome one &longs;aying of mine that may want an hairs-breadth of the truth, and under this hair hide a defect of another man as big as the Cable of a Ship. Aristotle &longs;aith, a Ball of Iron of an hundred pounds weight falling, from an height of an hundred yards, commeth to the ground before that one of one pound is de&longs;cended one &longs;ole yard: I &longs;ay, that they arrive at the earth both in the &longs;ame time: You find, that the bigger anticipates the le&longs;&longs;er two Inches, that is to &longs;ay, that when the great one falls to the ground, the o­ther is di&longs;tant from it two inches: you go about to hide under the&longs;e two inches the ninety nine yards of Ari&longs;totle, and &longs;peaking onely to my &longs;mall errour, pa&longs;&longs;e over in &longs;ilence the other great one. Ari&longs;totlee affirmeth, that Moveables of different Gravities in the &longs;ame Medium move (as far as concerneth Gravity) with Veloci­ties proportionate to their Weights; and exemplifieth it by Moveables, wherein one may di&longs;cover the pure and ab&longs;olute effect of Weight, omitting the other Con&longs;iderations, as well of Figures, as of the minute Motions; which things receive great alteration from the Medium, which altereth the &longs;imple effect of the &longs;ole Gravity; wherefore we &longs;ee Gold, that is heavier than any other matter, being reduced into a very thin Leaf, to go flying to and again through the Air, the like do Stones beaten to very &longs;mall Powder. But if you would maintain the Univer&longs;al Propo&longs;ition, it is requi&longs;ite that you &longs;hew the proportion of the Velocities to be ob&longs;erved in all grave Bodies, and that a Stone of twenty pounds moveth ten times &longs;wifter than one of two: which, I tell you, is fal&longs;e, and that falling from an height of fifty or an hundred yards, they come to the ground in the &longs;ame in&longs;tant.

SIMP. Perhaps in very great heights of Thou&longs;ands of yards that would happen, which is not &longs;een to occur in the&longs;e le&longs;&longs;er heights.

SALV. If this was the Meaning of Ari&longs;totle, you have in­volved him in another Errour, which will be found a Lie; for there being no &longs;uch perpendicular altitudes found on the Earth, its a clear ca&longs;e, that Ari&longs;totle was not able to have made an Experi­ment thereof; and yet would per&longs;wade us that he had, whil&longs;t he &longs;aith, that the &longs;aid effect is &longs;een.

SIMP. Ari&longs;totle indeed makes no u&longs;e of this Principle, but of that other, which I believe is not obnoxious to the&longs;e doubts.

SALV. Why that al&longs;o is no le&longs;&longs;e fal&longs;e than this; and I admire that you do not of your &longs;elf perceive the fallacy, and di&longs;cern, that &longs;hould it be true, that the &longs;ame Moveable in Medium's of dif­ferent Subtilty and Rarity, and, in a word, of different Ce&longs;&longs;ion, &longs;uch, for example, as are Water and Air, move with a greater Velocity in the Air than in the Water, according to the propor­tion of the Airs Rarity to the Rarity of the Water, it would follow that every Moveable that de&longs;cendeth in the Air would de&longs;cend al&longs;o in the Water: Which is &longs;o fal&longs;e, that very many Bodies de&longs;cend in the Air, that in the Water do not onely not de&longs;cend, but al&longs;o ri&longs;e upwards.

SIMP I do not under&longs;tand the nece&longs;&longs;ity of your Con&longs;equence: and I will &longs;ay farther, that Ari&longs;totle &longs;peaketh of tho&longs;e Grave­bodies that de&longs;cend in the one Medium and in the other, and not of tho&longs;e that de&longs;cend in the Air and a&longs;cend in the Water.

SALV. You produce for the Phil&longs;opher &longs;uch Pleas as he, with­out all doubt, would never alledge, for that they aggravate the fir&longs;t mi&longs;take. Therefore tell me, if the Cra&longs;situde of the Water, or whatever it be that retardeth the Motion, hath any proporti­on to the Cra&longs;&longs;itude of the Air that le&longs;&longs;e retards it; and if it have; do you a&longs;&longs;ign it us, at plea&longs;ure.

SIMP. It hath &longs;uch a proportion, and we will &longs;uppo&longs;e it to be decuple; and that therefore the Velocity of a Grave Body, that de&longs;cends in both the Elements, &longs;hall be ten times &longs;lower in the Wa­ter than in the Air.

SALV. I will take one of tho&longs;e Grave-Bodies that de&longs;cend in the Air, but not in the Water; as for in&longs;tance, a Ball of Wood, and de&longs;ire that you will a&longs;&longs;ign it what Velocity you plea&longs;e, whil&longs;t it de&longs;cends through the Air.

SIMP. Suppo&longs;e we, that it move with twenty degrees of Velo­city.

SALV. Very well: And it is manife&longs;t, that that Velocity to &longs;ome other le&longs;&longs;er, may have the &longs;ame proportion, that the Cra&longs;&longs;i­tude of the Water hath to that of the Air; and that this &longs;hall be the Velocity of the two only degrees: &longs;o that exactly to an hair, and in direct conformity to the A&longs;&longs;umption of Ari&longs;totle, it &longs;hould be concluded, That the Ball of Wood, which in the Air, ten times more yielding, moveth de&longs;cending with twenty degrees of Veloci­ty, in the Water &longs;hould de&longs;cend with two, and not return from the bottom to flote a-top, as it doth: unle&longs;s you will &longs;ay, that the a&longs;cending of the Wood to the top is the &longs;ame in the Water, as its &longs;inking to the bottom with two degrees of Velocity; which I do not believe. But &longs;eeing that the Ball of Wood de&longs;cends not to the bottom, I rather think that you will grant me, that &longs;ome other Ball, of other matter different from Wood, might be found that de&longs;cends in the Water with two degrees of Velocity.

SIMP. Que&longs;tionle&longs;&longs;e there might; but it mu&longs;t be of a matter con&longs;iderably more grave than Wood.

SALV. This is that which I de&longs;ired to know. But this &longs;econd Ball, which in the Water de&longs;cendeth with two degrees of Velocity, with what Velocity will it de&longs;cend in the Air? It is requi&longs;ite (if you will maintain Ari&longs;totles Rule) that you an&longs;wer that it will move with twenty degrees: But you your &longs;elf have a&longs;&longs;igned twen­ty degrees of Velocity to the Ball of Wood; Therefore this, and the other that is much more grave, will move thorow the Air with equall Velocity. Now how doth the Philo&longs;opher reconcile this Conclu&longs;ion with that other of his, that the Moveables of different Gravity, move in the &longs;ame Medium with different Velocities, and &longs;o different as are their Gravities? But, without any deep &longs;tudies, how comes it to pa&longs;s that you have not ob&longs;erved very frequent, and very palpable Accidents, and not con&longs;idered two Bodies, that in the Water will move one an hundred times more &longs;wiftly than the other, but that again in the Air that &longs;wifter one will not out-go the other, one &longs;ole Cente&longs;m? As for example, an Egge of Marble will de&longs;cend in the Water an hundred times fa&longs;ter than one of an Hen, when as in the Air, at the height of twenty Yards it will not anti­cipate it four Inches: and, in a word, &longs;uch a certain Grave Body will &longs;ink to the bottom in three hours in ten fathom Water, that in the Air will pa&longs;s the &longs;ame &longs;pace in one or two pul&longs;es, and &longs;uch another (as for in&longs;tance a Ball of Lead) will pa&longs;s that number of fathoms with ea&longs;e in le&longs;s than double the time. And here I &longs;ee plainly, Simplicius, that you find, that herein there is no place left for any di&longs;tinction, or reply. Conclude we therefore, that that &longs;ame Argument concludeth nothing again&longs;t Vacuum; and if it &longs;hould, it would only overthrow Spaces con&longs;iderably great, which neither I, nor, as I take it, tho&longs;e Ancients did &longs;uppo&longs;e to be natu­rally allowed, though, perhaps, with violence they may be effe­cted, as, me thinks, one may collect from &longs;everal Experiments, which it would be two tedious to go about at pre&longs;ent to produce.

SAGR. Seeing that Simplicius is &longs;ilent, I will take leave to &longs;ay &longs;omething. In regard you have with &longs;ufficient plainne&longs;&longs;e demon­&longs;trated, that it is not true, That Moveables unequally grave move in the &longs;ame Medium with Velocities proportionate to their Gravities, but with equal: de&longs;iring to be under&longs;tood to &longs;peak of Bodies of the &longs;ame Matter, or of the &longs;ame Specifick Gravity, but not (as I con­ceive) of Gravities different in Spetie, (for I do not think that you intend to prove unto us, that a Ball of Cork moveth with like Velocity to one of Lead;) and having moreover very manife&longs;tly demon&longs;trated, that it is not true, That the &longs;ame Moveable in Me­diums of different Re&longs;i&longs;tances retain in their Velocities and Tardi­ties the &longs;ame proportion as have their Re&longs;i&longs;tances: to me it would be a very plea&longs;ing thing to hear, what tho&longs;e be which are ob&longs;erved as well in the one ca&longs;e as in the other.

SALV. The Que&longs;tions are ingenuous, and I have many times thought of them: I will relate unto you the Contemplations made upon them, and what at length I did from thence infer. After I had a&longs;&longs;ured my &longs;elf that it was not true, That the &longs;ame Moveable in Medium's of different Re&longs;i&longs;tance ob&longs;erveth in its Velocity the proportion of the Ce&longs;&longs;ion of tho&longs;e Media; nor yet, again, That in the &longs;ame Medium Moveables of different Gravity retain in their Velocities the proportion of tho&longs;e Gravities (&longs;peaking alwaies of Gravitles different in &longs;pecie) I began to put both the&longs;e Accidents together, ob&longs;erving that which befell the Moveables different in Gravity put into Mediums of different Re&longs;i&longs;tance, and I perceived that the inequality of the Velocities were found to be alwaies greater in the more re&longs;i&longs;ting Medium's, than in the more yielding; and that with &longs;uch a diver&longs;ity, that of two Moveables that, de­&longs;cending thorow the Air, differ very little in Velocity of Motion, one will, in the Water, move ten times fa&longs;ter than the other; yea: that &longs;uch, as in the Air do &longs;wiftly de&longs;cend, in the Water not only will not de&longs;cend, but will be wholly deprived of Motion, and, which is yet more, will move upwards: for one &longs;hall &longs;ome­times find &longs;ome kind of Wood, or &longs;ome knot, or root of the &longs;ame, that in the Water will lye &longs;till, when as in the Air it will &longs;wiftly de&longs;cend.

SAGR. I have many times &longs;et my &longs;elf with an extream patience to &longs;ee if I could reduce a Ball of Wax, (which of it &longs;elf doth not go to the bottom) by adding to it grains of &longs;and, to &longs;uch a degree of Gravity like to the Water, as to make it &longs;tand &longs;till in the mid&longs;t of that Element; but I could never, by all the care I u&longs;ed, &longs;ucceed in my attempt; &longs;o that I cannot tell, whether any Solid matter may be found &longs;o naturally alike in Gravity to Wa­ter, as that being put into any place of the &longs;ame, it can re&longs;t or lye &longs;till.

SALV. In this, as well as in a thou&longs;and other actions, many Animals are more ingenuous than we. And, in this ca&longs;e, Fi&longs;hes would have been able to have given you &longs;ome light, being in this affair &longs;o skilful, that at their plea&longs;ure they ^{*} equilibrate them&longs;elves, not only with one kind of Water, but with &longs;uch, as, either of their own nature, or by means of &longs;ome &longs;upervenient muddine&longs;s, or for their &longs;altne&longs;s (which maketh a great alteration) are very diffe­rent; equilibrate them&longs;elves, I &longs;ay, &longs;o exactly, that without &longs;tir­ring in the lea&longs;t they lye &longs;till in every place: and this, in my opi­nion, they do, by making u&longs;e of the In&longs;trument given them by Na­ture to that end, &longs;cilicet, of that Bladder which they have in their Bodies, which by a very narrow neck an&longs;wereth to their mouth; and by that they either, when they would &longs;tand &longs;till, &longs;end forth part of the Air that is contained in the &longs;aid Bladders, or, &longs;wimming to the top they draw in more, making them&longs;elves by that art one while more, another while le&longs;s heavy than the Water, and at their plea&longs;ures equilibrating them&longs;elves to the &longs;ame.

Fi&longs;hes equilibrate them&longs;elves admi­rably in the Water.

* Or poi&longs;e.

SAGR I deceived &longs;ome of my Friends with another device; for I had made my boa&longs;t unto them, that I would reduce that Ball of Wax to an exact equilibrium with the Water, and having put &longs;ome &longs;alt Water in the bottom of the Ve&longs;&longs;el, and a-top of that &longs;ome fre&longs;h, I &longs;hewed them the Ball, which in the mid&longs;t of the Water &longs;tood &longs;till, and being thru&longs;t to the bottom, or to the top, &longs;taid nei­ther in this nor that &longs;cituation, but returned to the mid&longs;t.

SALV. This &longs;ame Experiment is not void of utility; for Phy&longs;i­cians, in particular, treating of &longs;undry qualities of Waters, and among&longs;t other things, principally of the more or le&longs;s Gravity or Levity of this or that: by &longs;uch a Ball, in &longs;uch manner poi&longs;ed and adju&longs;ted that it may re&longs;t ambiguous, if I may &longs;o &longs;ay, between a&longs;cending and de&longs;cending in a Water, upon the lea&longs;t difference of weight between two Waters, if that Ball &longs;hall de&longs;cend in the one; in the other, that is more grave, it &longs;hall a&longs;cend. And the Experiment is &longs;o exact, that the addition of but only two grains of Salt, put into &longs;ix pounds of Water, &longs;hall make that Ball to a&longs;cend from the bottom to the &longs;urface, which was but a little be­fore de&longs;cended thither. And moreover, I will tell you this in con­firmation of the exactne&longs;s of this Experiment, and withall for a clear proof of the Non-re&longs;i&longs;tance of Water to divi&longs;ion, that not only the ingravitating it with the mixture of &longs;ome matter heavier than it, maketh that &longs;o notable difference, but the warming or cooling of it a little produceth the &longs;ame effect, and with &longs;o &longs;ubtil an operation, that the infu&longs;ing four diops of other Water, a lit­tle warmer, or a little colder, than the &longs;ix pounds, &longs;hall cau&longs;e the Ball to ri&longs;e or &longs;ink in the &longs;ame; to &longs;ink in it upon the infu&longs;ion of the warm, and to ri&longs;e at the infu&longs;ion of the cold. Now &longs;ee how much tho&longs;e Philo&longs;ophers are deceived, who would introduce in Water vi&longs;co&longs;ity, or other conjunction of parts which make it to re&longs;i&longs;t Divi&longs;ion or Penetration.

A Ball of Wax prepared to make the Experiment of the different Gra­vities of Waters.

Water bath no Re&longs;i&longs;tance to Di­vi&longs;ion.

SAGR. I have &longs;een many Convincing Di&longs;cour&longs;es touching this Argument in a ^{*} Treati&longs;e of our Accademick; yet never the le&longs;s there is re&longs;ting in me a &longs;trong &longs;cruple, which I know not how to remove: For if nothing of Tenacity, or Coherence re&longs;ides among&longs;t the parts of Water, how can it bear it &longs;elf up in rea&longs;onable big and high Tumours; in particular, upon the leaves of Cole-worts without di&longs;per&longs;ing or levelling?

* The Tract cited in this place is that which we di&longs;po&longs;e fir&longs;t in Order, in the fir&longs;t part of this Tome,

SALV. Although it be true, that he who is Ma&longs;ter of a true Conclu&longs;ion, may re&longs;olve all Objections that can be brought again&longs;t it, yet will not I arrogate to my &longs;elf the power &longs;o to do; nor ought my in&longs;ufficiency becloud the &longs;plendour of Truth. Fir&longs;t, therefore, I confe&longs;s that I know not how it cometh to pa&longs;s, that tho&longs;e Globes of Water &longs;u&longs;tain them&longs;elves at &longs;uch an height and bigne&longs;s, albeit I certainly know that it doth not proceed from any internal Tenacity that is between its parts; &longs;o that it remaineth neœ&longs;&longs;ary, that the Cau&longs;e of that Effect do re&longs;ide without. That it is not Internal, be&longs;ides tho&longs;e Experiments already &longs;hewn you, I can prove by another mo&longs;t convincing one. If the parts of that Wa­ter, which con&longs;erveth it &longs;elf in a Globe or Tumour whil&longs;t it is en­compa&longs;&longs;ed by the Air, had an internal Cau&longs;e for &longs;o doing, they would much better &longs;u&longs;tain them&longs;elves being environed by a Medi­um, in which they had le&longs;s propen&longs;ion to de&longs;cend, than they have in the Ambient Air: But every Fluid Body more grave than the Air would be &longs;uch a Medium; as, for in&longs;tance, Wine: And there­fore, infu&longs;ing Wine about that Globe of Water, it might rai&longs;e it &longs;elf on every &longs;ide, and yet the parts of the Water, conglutinated by the internal Vi&longs;co&longs;ity, never di&longs;&longs;olve: But it doth not happen &longs;o; nay, no &longs;ooner doth the circumfu&longs;ed liquor approach thereto, but, without &longs;taying till it ri&longs;e much about it, the little globes of Water will di&longs;&longs;olve and become flat, re&longs;ting under the Wine, if it was red. The Cau&longs;e therefore of this Effect is External, and per­haps in the Ambient Air: and, indeed, one may ob&longs;erve a great di&longs;&longs;ention between the Air and Water; which I have ob&longs;erved in another Experiment; and this it is: If I fill a ^{*} Ball of Chri&longs;tal, that hath a mouth as narrow as the hollow of a &longs;traw, with water, and when it is thus full, turn it with its mouth downwards, yet will not the Water, although very heavy, and prone to de&longs;cend tho­row the Air, nor the Air, as much di&longs;po&longs;ed on the other hand, as being very light, to a&longs;cend thorow the Waters, yet will they not (I &longs;ay) agree that that &longs;hould de&longs;cend, i&longs;&longs;uing out at the mouth, and this a&longs;cend, entering in at the &longs;ame: but they both continue aver&longs;e and contumacious. Again, on the contrary, if I pre&longs;ent to that mouth a ve&longs;&longs;el of red Wine, which is almo&longs;t in&longs;en&longs;ibly le&longs;s grave than Water, we &longs;hall &longs;ee it in an in&longs;tant gently to a&longs;cend by red &longs;treams thorow the Water, and the Water with like Tardity to de&longs;cend through the Wine, without ever mixing with each other, till that in the end, the Ball will be full of Wine, and the Water Will all &longs;ink unto the bottom of the Ve&longs;&longs;el underneath. Now what are we to &longs;ay, or what are we to infer, but a di&longs;agreement between the Water and Air, occult to me, but perhaps -----

Water formed into great drops upon the Leaves of Col­worts, how they con&longs;i&longs;t.

* Or bottle.

SIMP. I can &longs;carce refrain my laughter to &longs;ee the great Anti­pathy that Salviatus hath to Antipathy, &longs;o that he will not &longs;o much as name it, and yet it is &longs;o accommodate to re&longs;olve the doubt.

SALV. Now let this, for the &longs;ake of Simplicius be the &longs;oluti­on of our &longs;cruple; and leaving the Digre&longs;&longs;ion, let us return to our purpo&longs;e. Seeing that the difference of Velocity in Moveables of divers Gravities is found to be more and more, as the Mediums are more and more Re&longs;i&longs;ting: And withall, that in a Medium of Quick&longs;ilver, Gold doth not only go to the bottom more &longs;wiftly than Lead, but it alone de&longs;cends in it, and all other Metals and Stones move upwards therein, and flote thereon; whereas between Balls of Gold, Lead, Bra&longs;s, Porphiry, or other grave matters, the in­equality of motion in the Air &longs;hall be almo&longs;t wholly in&longs;en&longs;ible, for it is certain, that a Ball of Gold in the end of the de&longs;cent of an hundred yards &longs;hall not out-&longs;trip one of Bra&longs;s four Inches: &longs;eeing this, I &longs;ay, I have thought, that if we wholly took away the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Medium, all Matters would de&longs;cend with equall Velocity.

Re&longs;i&longs;tance of theMedium remo­ved, all Matters, though of different Gravities would move with like Velocity.

SIMP. This is a bold &longs;peech, Salviatus, I &longs;hall never believe that in Vacuity it &longs;elf, if &longs;o be one &longs;hould allow Motion in it, a lock of Wooll would move as &longs;wiftly as a piece of Lead.

SALV. Fair and &longs;oftly, Simplicius, your &longs;cruple is not &longs;o ab­&longs;truce, nor I &longs;o incautelous, that you &longs;hould need to think that I was not advi&longs;ed of it, and that con&longs;equently I have not found a re­ply to it. Therefore, for my explanation, and your information, hearken to what I &longs;hall &longs;ay. We are upon the examination of what would befall Moveables exceeding different in weight in a Medium, in ca&longs;e it &longs;hould have no Re&longs;i&longs;tance, &longs;o that all the diffe­rence of Velocity that is found between the &longs;aid Moveables ought to be referred to the &longs;ole inequality of Weight. And becau&longs;e on­ly a Space altogether void of Air, and of every other, though te­nuous and yielding Body, would be apt &longs;en&longs;ibly to &longs;hew us what we &longs;eek, &longs;ince we want &longs;uch a Space, let us &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively ob&longs;erve that which happeneth in the more &longs;ubtill and le&longs;&longs;e re&longs;i&longs;ting Mediums,in compari&longs;on of that which we &longs;ee to happen in others le&longs;&longs;e &longs;ubtill and more re&longs;i&longs;ting: for if we &longs;hould really find the Moveables different in Gravity to differ le&longs;&longs;e and le&longs;&longs;e in Velocity, according as the Mediums are found more and more yielding; and that, finally, although extreamly unequal in weight, in a Medium more tenuous than any other, though not void, the difference of Velo­city di&longs;covers it &longs;elf to be very &longs;mall, and almo&longs;t unob&longs;ervable, I conceive that we may, and that upon very probable conjecture, believe, that in a Vacuum their Velocities would be exactly equal. Therefore let us con&longs;ider that which hapneth in the Air; wherein to have a Figure of an uniform Superficies, and very light Matter, I will that we take a blown Bladder, in which the included Air will weigh little or nothing in a Medium of the Air it &longs;elf, becau&longs;e it can make but very &longs;mall Compre&longs;&longs;ion therein, &longs;o that the Gravi­ty is only that little of the &longs;aid film, which would not be the thou­&longs;andth part of the weight of a lump of Lead of the bigne&longs;s of the &longs;aid Bladder when blown. The&longs;e, Simplicius, being let fall from the height of four or &longs;ix yards, how great a &longs;pace, do you judge, that the Lead would anticipate the Bladder in its de&longs;cent? A&longs;&longs;ure your &longs;elf that would not move thrice, no nor twice as fa&longs;t, although even now you would have had it to have been a thou­&longs;and times more &longs;wift.

SIMP. It is po&longs;&longs;ible that at the beginning of the Motion, that is, in the fir&longs;t five or &longs;ix yards this might happen that you &longs;ay; but in the progre&longs;&longs;e, and in a long continuation I believe, that the Lead would leave it behind, not only &longs;ix, but al&longs;o eight and ten parts of twelve.

SALV. And I al&longs;o believe the &longs;ame: and make no que&longs;tion, but that in very great di&longs;tances the Lead will have pa&longs;&longs;ed an hun­dred miles of way, ere the Bladder will have pa&longs;&longs;ed &longs;o much as one. But this, Simplicius, which you propound, as an effect contrary to my A&longs;&longs;ertion, is that which mo&longs;t e&longs;pecially confirmeth it. It is (I once more tell you) my intent to declare, That the difference of Gravity is in no wi&longs;e the cau&longs;e of the divers velocities of Movea­bles of different Gravity, but that the &longs;ame dependeth on exteri­our accidents, & in particular, on the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Medium, &longs;o that, this being removed, all Moveables move with the &longs;ame de­grees of Velocity. And this I chiefly deduce from that which but now you your &longs;elf did admit, and which is very true, namely, that of two Moveables, very different in weight, the Velocities more and more differ, according as the ^{*} Spaces are greater and greater that they pa&longs;&longs;e: an Effect which would not follow, if it did depend on the different Gravities: for they being alwaies the &longs;ame, the pro­portion betwixt the Spaces would likewi&longs;e alwaies continue the &longs;ame, which proportion we &longs;ee &longs;till &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively to encrea&longs;e in the continuance of the Motion; for that the heavie&longs;t Moveable in the de&longs;cent of one yard will not anticipate the lighte&longs;t the tenth part of that Space or Way, but in the fall of twelve yards will out-go it a third part, in that of an hundred will out&longs;trip it 90/100.

* Or Waies.

SIMP. Very well: But following you &longs;tep by &longs;tep, if the dif­ference of weight in Moveables of different Gravities cannot cau&longs;e the difference of proportion in their Velocities, for that the Gravities do not alter; neither then can the Medium, which is &longs;uppo&longs;ed alwaies to continue the &longs;ame, cau&longs;e any alteration in the proportion of the Velocities.

SALV. You wittily bring an in&longs;tance again&longs;t my Po&longs;ition, that it is very nece&longs;&longs;ary to remove. I &longs;ay therefore, that a Grave Body hath, by Nature, an intrin&longs;ick Principle of moving towards the Common Center of heavy things, that is to that of our Terre&longs;trial Globe, with a Motion continually accelerated, and accelerated alwaies equally, &longs;cilicet, that in equal times there are made equal ^{*} additions of new Moments, and degrees of Velocities: and this ought to be under&longs;tood to hold true at all times when all acciden­tal and external impediments are removed; among&longs;t which there is one that we cannot obviate, that is the Impediment of the Me­dium, which is Repleat, when as it &longs;hould be opened and latterally moved by the falling Moveable, to which tran&longs;ver&longs;e Motion the Medium, though fluid, yielding and tranquile, oppo&longs;eth it &longs;elf with a Re&longs;i&longs;tance one while le&longs;&longs;er, and another while greater and greater, according as it is more &longs;lowly or ha&longs;tily to open to give pa&longs;&longs;age to the Moveable, which, becau&longs;e, as I have &longs;aid, it goeth of its own nature continually accelerating, it cometh of con&longs;e­quence to encounter continually greater Re&longs;i&longs;tance in the Medi­um, and therefore Retardment, and diminution in the acqui&longs;t of new degrees of Velocity; &longs;o that in the end, the Velocity arriveth to that &longs;wiftne&longs;&longs;e, and the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Medium, to that &longs;trength, that ballancing each other, they take away all further Acceleration, and reduce the Moveable to an Equable and Uni­form Motion, in which it afterwards continually abides. There is therefore in the Medium augmentation of Re&longs;i&longs;tance, not becau&longs;e it changeth its E&longs;&longs;ence, but becau&longs;e the Velocity altereth where­with it ought to open, and laterally move, to give pa&longs;&longs;age to the falling Body, which goeth continually accelerating. Now the ob&longs;erving, that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Air to the &longs;mall Moment or Impetus of the Bladder is very great, and to the great weight of the Lead is very &longs;mall, makes me hold for certain, that if one &longs;hould wholly remove it, by adding to the Bladder great a&longs;&longs;i&longs;tance, and but very little to the Lead, their Velocities would equalize each other. Taking this Principle therefore for granted, That in the Medium wherein, either by rea&longs;on of Vacuity, or otherwi&longs;e, there were no Re&longs;i&longs;tance that might abate the Velocity of the Motion, &longs;o that of all Moveables the Velocities were alike, we might con­gruou&longs;ly enough a&longs;&longs;ign the proportions of the Velocities of like and unlike Moveables, in the &longs;ame and in different, Replear, and therefore Re&longs;i&longs;ting Medium's. And this we might effect by &longs;tudy­ing how much the Gravity of the Medium abateth from the Gra­vity of the Moveable, which Gravity is the In&longs;trument wherewith the Moveable makes its Way, repelling the parts of the Mediumon each Side: an operation that doth not occur in void Mediums; and therefore there is no difference to be expected from the di­ver&longs;e Gravity: and becau&longs;e it is manife&longs;t, that the Medium abateth from the Gravity of the Body by it contained, as much as is the weight of &longs;uch another ma&longs;s of its own Matter, if the Velocities of the Moveables that in a non-re&longs;i&longs;ting Medium would be (as hath been &longs;uppo&longs;ed) equal, &longs;hould dimini&longs;h in that proportion, we &longs;hould have what we de&longs;ired. As for example; &longs;uppo&longs;ing that Lead be ten thou&longs;and times more grave than Air, but Ebony a thou&longs;and times only; of the Velocities of the&longs;e two Matters, which ab&longs;olutely taken, that is, all Re&longs;i&longs;tance being removed, would be equal, the Air &longs;ub&longs;tracts from the ten thou&longs;and degrees of the Lead one, and from the thou&longs;and degrees of the Ebony likewi&longs;e abateth one, or, if you will, of its ten thou&longs;and, ten. If there­fore the Lead and the Ebony &longs;hall de&longs;cend thorow the Air from any height, which, the retardment of the Air removed, they would have pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame time, the Air will abate from the ten thou&longs;and degrees of the Leads Velocity one, but from the ten thou&longs;and degrees of Ebony's Velocity it will abate ten: which is as much as to &longs;ay, that dividing that Altitude, from which tho&longs;e Moveables departed into ten thou&longs;and parts, the Lead will arrive at the Earth, the Ebony being left behind, ten, nay, nine of tho&longs;e &longs;ame ten thou&longs;and parts. And what el&longs;e is this, but that a Ball of Lead, falling from a Tower two hundred yards high, to find how much it will anticipate one of Ebony of le&longs;&longs;e than four Inches? The Ebony weigheth a thou&longs;and times more than the Air, but that Bladder &longs;o blown, weigheth only four times &longs;o much; the Air therefore from the intrin&longs;ick and natural Velocity of the Ebony &longs;ubducteth one degree of a thou&longs;and, but from that, which al&longs;o in the Bladder would ab&longs;olutely have been the &longs;ame, the Air &longs;ub­ducts one part of four: &longs;o that by that time the Ball of Ebony falling from the Tower, &longs;hall come to the ground, the Bladder &longs;hall have pa&longs;&longs;ed but three quarters of that height. Lead is twelve times heavier than Water, but Ivory only twice as heavy; the Water therefore, from their ab&longs;olute Velocities which would be equal, &longs;hall abate in the Lead the twelfth part, but in the Ivory the half: when therefore, in the Water, the Lead &longs;hall have de­&longs;cended eleven fathom, the Ivory &longs;hall have de&longs;cended &longs;ix. And, arguing by this Rule, I believe, that we &longs;hall find the Experiment much more exactly agree with this &longs;ame Computation, than with that of Ari&longs;totle. By the like method we might find the Veloci­ties of the &longs;ame Moveable in different fluid Mediums, not compa­ring the different Re&longs;i&longs;tances of the Mediums, but con&longs;idering the exce&longs;&longs;es of the Gravity of the Moveable over and above the Gra­vities of the Mediums: v. gr. ^{*} Tin is a thou&longs;and times heavier than Air, and ten times heavier than Water; therefore dividing the ab­&longs;olute Velocity of the Tin into a thou&longs;and degrees, it &longs;hall move in the Air, (which deducteth from it the thou&longs;andth part,) with nine hundred ninety nine, but in the Water with nine hundred only; being that the Water abateth the tenth part of its Gravity, and the Air the thou&longs;andth part. Take a Solid &longs;omewhat heavier than Water, as for in&longs;tance, the Wood called Oake, a Ball of which weighing, as we will &longs;uppo&longs;e, a thou&longs;and drams, a like quantity of Water will weigh nine hundred and fifty, but &longs;o much Air will weigh but two drams,: it is manife&longs;t, that &longs;uppo&longs;ing that its ab&longs;o­lute Velocity were of a thou&longs;and degrees, in Air there would re­main nine hundred ninety eight, but in the Water only fifty; be­cau&longs;e that the Water of the thou&longs;and degrees of Gravity taketh away nine hundred and fifty, and leaves fifty only; that Solid there­fore would move well-near twenty times as fa&longs;t in the Air as Wa­ter; like as the exce&longs;&longs;e of its Gravity above that of the Water is the twentieth part of its own. And here I de&longs;ire that we may con­&longs;ider, that no matters, having a power to move downwards in the Water, but &longs;uch as are more grave in Species than it; and con&longs;e­quently many hundreds of times, more grave than the Air, in &longs;eeking what the proportions of their Velocities are in the Air and Water, we may, without any con&longs;iderable errour, make account that the Air doth not deduct any thing of moment from the ab&longs;o­lute Gravity, and con&longs;equently, from the ab&longs;olute Velocity of &longs;uch matters: &longs;o that having ea&longs;ily found the exce&longs;&longs;e of their Gravi­ty above the Gravity of the Water, we may &longs;ay that their Velo­city in the Air, to their Velocity in the Water hath the &longs;ame propor­tion, that their total Gravity hath to the exce&longs;&longs;e of this above the Gravity of the Water. For example, a Ball of Ivory weigh­eth twenty ounces, a like quantity of Water weigheth &longs;eventeen ounces: therefore the Velocity of the Ivory in Air, to its Velocity in Water is very neer as twenty to three.

The Velocity of Grave Bodies de­&longs;cending Natural­ly to the Center do go continually en­crea&longs;ing till that by the encrea&longs;e of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Medium it becometh uniform.

* Or aqui&longs;ts.

To find the Pro­portions of the Ve­locities of different Moveables in the &longs;ame, and in diffe­rent Mediums.

* Or Pewter.

SAGR. I have made a great acqui&longs;t in a bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e of it &longs;elf cu­rious, and in which, but without any benefit, I have many times wearied my-thoughts: nor would there any thing be wanting for the putting the&longs;e Speculations in practice, &longs;ave onely the way how one &longs;hould come to know of what Gravity the Air, is in com­pari&longs;on to the Water, and con&longs;equently to other heavy matters.

SIMP. But in ca&longs;e one &longs;hould finde, that the Air in&longs;tead of Gravity had Levity, what ought one to &longs;ay of the foregoing di&longs;­cour&longs;es, otherwi&longs;e very ingenuous?

SALV. It would be nece&longs;&longs;ary to confe&longs;&longs;e that they were truly Aerial, Light, and Vain. But will you que&longs;tion whether the Air be heavy, having the expre&longs;&longs;e Text of Ari&longs;totle that affirmeth it, &longs;aying, That all the Elements have Gravity, even the Air it &longs;elf; a &longs;igne of which (&longs;ubjoyns he) we have in that a ^{*} Bladder blown, weigheth heavier than un&longs;well'd.

* Or Boracho; a bottle made of a Goat skin, u&longs;ed to hold wine and other Liquids.

SIMP. That a Boracho, or Bladder blown, weigheth more, might proceed, as I could &longs;uppo&longs;e, not from the Gravity that is in the Air, but in the many gro&longs;&longs;e Vapours intermixed with it in the&longs;e our lower Regions; by means whereof I might &longs;ay, that the Gravity of the Bladder, or Boracho encrea&longs;eth.

SALV. I would not have you &longs;ay it, and much le&longs;&longs;e that you &longs;hould make Aristotle &longs;peak it, for he treating of the Elements, and de&longs;iring to per&longs;wade me that the Element of Air is grave, making me to &longs;ee it by an Experement: if in comming to the proof he &longs;hould &longs;ay: Take a Bladder, and fill it with gro&longs;&longs;e Vapours; and ob&longs;erve that its weight will encrea&longs;e; I would tell him that it would weigh yet more if one &longs;hould fill it with bran; but would afterwards adde; that tho&longs;e Experiments prove, that bran, and gro&longs;&longs;e Vapours are grave: but as to the Element of Air, I &longs;hould be left in the &longs;ame doubt as before. The Experiment of Ari&longs;totletherefore is good, and the Propo&longs;ition true. But I will not &longs;ay &longs;o much, for a certain other rea&longs;on taken expre&longs;ly out of a Philo&longs;o­pher who&longs;e name I do not remember, but am &longs;ure that I have read it, who argueth the Air to be more grave than light, becau&longs;e it more ea&longs;ily carrieth grave Bodies downwards, than the light up­wards.

SAGR. Good i-faith. By this rea&longs;on then, the Air &longs;hall be much heavier than the Water, &longs;ince, that all Bodies are carried more ea&longs;ily downwards thorow the Air than thorow the Water, and all light Bodies more ea&longs;ily upwards in this than in that: nay, infinite matters a&longs;cend in the Water, that in the Air de&longs;cend. But be the Gravity of the Bladder, Simplicius, either by rea&longs;on of the gro&longs;&longs;e Vapours, or pure Air, this nothing concerns our pur­po&longs;e, for we &longs;eek that which happeneth to Moveables that move in this our Vaporous Region. Therefore, returning to that which more concerneth me, I would for a full and ab&longs;olute informati­on in the pre&longs;ent bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e, not onely be a&longs;&longs;ured that the Air is grave, as I hold for certain, but I would, if it be po&longs;&longs;ible, know what its Gravity is. Therefore, Salviatus, if you have wherewith to &longs;atisfie me in this al&longs;o, I entreat you to favour me with the &longs;ame.

SALV. That there re&longs;ideth in the Air po&longs;itive Gravity, and not, as &longs;ome have thought, Levity, which haply is in no Mat­ter to be found, the Experiment of the Blown-Bladder, alledged by Ari&longs;totle, affordeth us a &longs;ufficiently-convincing Argument; for if the quality of ab&longs;olute and po&longs;itive Levity were in the Air, then the Air being multiplied and compre&longs;&longs;ed, the Levity would encrea&longs;e, and con&longs;equently the propen&longs;ion of going upwards: but Experience &longs;hews the contrary. As to the other demand, that is, of the Method how to inve&longs;tigate its Gravity, I have tried to do it in this manner: I have taken a pretty bigge Gla&longs;&longs;e ^{*} Bottle, with its neck bended, and a Finger-&longs;tall of Leather fa&longs;t about it, having in the top of the &longs;aid Finger-&longs;tall in&longs;erted and fa­&longs;tened a Valve of Leather, by which with a Siringe I have made pa&longs;&longs;e into the Bottle by force a great quantity of Air, of which, becau&longs;e it admits of great Conden&longs;ation, it may take in two or three other Bottles-ful over and above that which is naturally con­tained therein. Then I have in an exact Ballance very preci&longs;ely weighed that Bottle with the Air compre&longs;&longs;ed within it, adju&longs;ting the weight with &longs;mall Sands. Afterwards, the Valve being opened, and the Air let out, that was violently conteined in the Ve&longs;&longs;el, I have put it again into the Scales, and finding it notably aleviated, I have by degrees taken &longs;o much Sand from the other Scale, keep­ing it by it &longs;elf, that the Ballance hath at la&longs;t &longs;tood in Equilibriowith the remaining counter-poi&longs;e, that is with the Bottle. And here there is no que&longs;tion, but that the weight of the re&longs;erved Sand is that of the Air that was forceably driven into the Bottle, and which is at la&longs;t gone out thence. But this Experiment hitherto a&longs;­&longs;ureth me of no more but this, that the Air violently deteined in the Ve&longs;&longs;el, weigheth as much as the re&longs;erved Sand, but how much the Air re&longs;olutely and determinately weigheth in re&longs;pect of the Water, or other grave matter, I do not as yet know, nor can I tell, unle&longs;&longs;e I mea&longs;ure the quantity of the Air compre&longs;&longs;ed: and for the di&longs;covering of this a Rule is nece&longs;&longs;ary, which I have found may be performed two manner of wayes, one of which is to take &longs;uch another Bottle or Flask as the former, and in like manner bended, with a Finger-&longs;tall of Leather, the end of which may clo&longs;ely imbrace the Volve of the other, and let it be very fa&longs;t tied about it. It's requi&longs;ite, that this &longs;econd Bottle be bored in the bottom, &longs;o that as by that hole we may thru&longs;t in a Wier, wherewith we may, at plea&longs;ure, open the &longs;aid Volve, to let out the &longs;uperfluous Air of the other Ve&longs;&longs;el, after it hath been weighed: but this &longs;econd Bottle ought to be full of Water. All being pre­pared in the manner afore&longs;aid, and with the Wier opening the Volve, the Air i&longs;&longs;uing out with impetuo&longs;ity, and pa&longs;&longs;ing into the Ve&longs;&longs;el of Water, &longs;hall drive it out by the hole at the Bottom: and it is manife&longs;t, that the quantity of Water which &longs;hall be thru&longs;t out, is equal to the Ma&longs;&longs;e and quantity of Air that &longs;hall have i&longs;&longs;ued from th'other Ve&longs;&longs;el: that Water therefore being kept, and returning to weigh the Ve&longs;&longs;el lightned of the Air com­pre&longs;&longs;ed (which I &longs;uppo&longs;e to have been weighed likewi&longs;e fir&longs;t with the &longs;aid forced Air) and the &longs;uperfluous &longs;and being laid by, as I directed before; it is manife&longs;t, that this is the ju&longs;t weight of &longs;o much Air in ma&longs;&longs;e, as is the ma&longs;&longs;e of the expul&longs;ed and re&longs;erved Water; which we are to weigh, and &longs;ee how many times its weight &longs;hall contain the weight of the re&longs;erved &longs;and: and we may without errour affirme, that the Water is &longs;o many times heavier than Air; which &longs;hall not be ten times, as it &longs;eemeth Ari&longs;totleheld, but very neer four hundred, as the &longs;aid Experiment &longs;heweth.

The Air hath Po­&longs;itive Gravity.

How that Gravity may be computed.

* Un Fia&longs;co, tho&longs;e long-neckt gla&longs;&longs;e bottles in which we have our Florence Wine brought to us.

The other way is more expeditious, and it may be done with one Ve&longs;&longs;el onely, that is with the fir&longs;t accomodated after the man­ner before directed, into which I will not that any other Air be put, more than that which naturally is found therein; but I will, that we inject Water without &longs;uffering any Air to come out, which being forced to yield to the &longs;upervenient Water mu&longs;t of nece&longs;&longs;ity be compre&longs;&longs;ed: having gotten in, therefore, as much Water as is po&longs;&longs;ible, (but yet without great violence one cannot get in three quarters of what the Bottle will hold) put it into the Scales, and very carefully weigh it: which done, holding the Ve&longs;&longs;el with the neck upwards, open the Volve, letting out the Air, of which there will preci&longs;ely i&longs;&longs;ue forth &longs;o much as there is Water in the Bottle. The Air being gone out, put the Ve&longs;&longs;el again into the Scales, which by the departure of the Air will be found lightened, and abating from the oppo&longs;ite Scale the &longs;uperfluous weight, it &longs;hall give us the weight of as much Air as there is Water in the Bottle.

SIMP. The Contrivances you found out cannot but be con­fe&longs;&longs;ed to be witty and very ingenuous, but whil&longs;t, me thinks, they fully &longs;atisfie my under&longs;tanding, they another way occa&longs;ion in me much Confu&longs;ion, for it being undoubtedly true that the Ele­ments in their proper Region are neither heavy nor light, I can­not comprehend, how and which way that portion of Air, which &longs;eemeth to have weighed v. gr. four drams of &longs;and, &longs;hould af­terwards have that &longs;ame Gravity in the Air, in which the &longs;and is contained that weigheth again&longs;t it: and therefore me thinks that the Experiment ought not to be practiced in the Element of Air, but in a Medium in which the Air it &longs;elf might exerci&longs;e its quality of Gravitation, if it really be owner thereof.

SALV. Certainly the Objection of Simplicius is very acute, and therefore its nece&longs;&longs;ary, either that it be unan&longs;werable, or that the Solution be no le&longs;&longs;e acute. That that Air, which compre&longs;­&longs;ed, appeared to weigh as much as that &longs;and, left at liberty in its Element is no longer to weigh any thing as the Sand doth, is a thing manife&longs;t: and therefore for making of &longs;uch an Experiment, its requi&longs;ite to choo&longs;e a place and Medium wherein the Air as well as the Sand might weigh: for, as hath &longs;everal times been &longs;aid, the Medium &longs;ub&longs;tracts from the Weight of every Matter that is im­merged therein, &longs;o much, as &longs;uch another quantity of the &longs;aid Medium, as is that of the ma&longs;&longs;e immer&longs;ed, weigheth: &longs;o that the Air depriveth the Air of all its Gravity. The operation, there­fore, to the end it were made exactly, ought to be tried in a Va­cuum, wherein every grave Body would exerci&longs;e its Moment without any diminution. In ca&longs;e therefore, Simplicius, that we &longs;hould weigh a portion of Air in a Vacuum, would you then be convinced and a&longs;&longs;ured of the bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e?

The Air compre&longs;­&longs;ed and violently pent up, weigheth in a Vacuum; and how its weight is to be e&longs;timated.

SIMP. Verily I &longs;hould: but this is to defire, or enjoyn that which is impo&longs;&longs;ible.

SALV. And therefore the obligation mu&longs;t needs be great that you owe to me, when ever I &longs;hall for your &longs;ake effect an impo&longs;&longs;ibi­lity: but I will not &longs;ell you that which I have already given you: for we, in the foregoing Experiment, weigh the Air in a Vacuum,and not in the Air, or in any other Replete Medium. That from the Ma&longs;s, Simplicius, that in the fluid Medium is immerged certain Gravity is &longs;ub&longs;tracted by the &longs;aid Medium, this commeth to pa&longs;s by rea&longs;on that it re&longs;i&longs;teth its being opened, driven back, and in a word commoved; a &longs;ign of which is its pronene&longs;s to return in&longs;tant­ly to fill the Space up again, that the immer&longs;ed ma&longs;s occupied in it, as &longs;oon as ever it departeth thence; for if it &longs;uffered not by that immer&longs;ion, it would not operate again&longs;t the &longs;ame. Now tell me, when you have in the Air the Bottle before filled with the &longs;ame Air naturally contained therein, what divi&longs;ion, repul&longs;e, or, in &longs;hort, what mutation doth the external ambient Air receive from the &longs;e­cond Air that was newly infu&longs;ed with force into the Ve&longs;&longs;el? Doth it enlarge the Bottle, whereupon the Ambient ought the more to retire it &longs;elf to make room for it? Certainly no: And therefore we may &longs;ay, that the &longs;econd Air is not immer&longs;ed in the Ambient, not occupying any Space therein; but is as if it was in a Vacuum,nay more, is really con&longs;tituted in it, and is placed in Vacuities that were not repleted by the former un-conden&longs;ed Air. And, really, I know not how to di&longs;cern any difference between the two Con&longs;ti tutions of Inclo&longs;ed and Ambient, whil&longs;t in this the Ambient doth no-ways pre&longs;s the Inclo&longs;ed, and in that the Inclo&longs;ed doth not re­repul&longs;e the Ambient: and &longs;uch is the placing of any matter in a Vacuum, and the &longs;econd Air compre&longs;sed in the Flask. The weight therefore that is found in that &longs;ame conden&longs;ed Air, is the &longs;ame that it would have, were it freely di&longs;tended in a Vacuum. Tis true in­deed, that the weight of the Sand that weigheth again&longs;t it, as ha­ving been in the open Air, would in a Vacuum have been a little more than ju&longs;t &longs;o heavy; and therefore it is nece&longs;&longs;ary to &longs;ay, that the weighed Air is in reality &longs;omewhat le&longs;&longs;e heavy than the Sand that counterpoi&longs;eth it, that is, &longs;o much, by how much the like quantity of Air would weigh in a Vacuum.

SIMP. I had thought that there was &longs;omething to have been wi&longs;hed for in the Experiments before produced; but now I am thorowly &longs;atisfied.

The difference, though very great, of the Gravity of Moveables hath no part in differer­cing their Veloci­ties.

SALV. The things by me hitherto alledged, and in particular, this, That the difference of Gravity, although exceeding great, hath no part in diver&longs;ifying the Velocities of Moveables, &longs;o that, notwith&longs;tanding any thing depending on that, they would all move with equal Celerity, is &longs;o new, and at the fir&longs;t apprehen&longs;i­on &longs;o remote from probability, that, were there not a way to de­lucidate it, and make it as clear as the Sun, it would be better to pa&longs;&longs;e it over in &longs;ilence, than to divulge it: therefore &longs;eeing that I have let it e&longs;cape from me, its fit that I omit neither Expe­riment nor Rea&longs;on that may corroborate it.

SAGR. Not onely this, but many other al&longs;o of your A&longs;&longs;erti­ons are &longs;o remote from the Opinions and Doctrines commonly received, that &longs;ending them abroad, you would &longs;tir up a great number of Antagoni&longs;ts: in regard, that the innate Di&longs;po&longs;ition of Men doth not &longs;ee with good eyes, when others in their Studies di&longs;cover Truths or Fallacies, that were not di&longs;covered by them­&longs;elves: and with the title of Innovators of Doctrines, little plea­&longs;ing to the ears of many, they &longs;tudy to cut tho&longs;e knots which they cannot untie, and with &longs;ub-terranean Mines to blow up tho&longs;e Structures, which have been with the ordinary Tools by patient Architects erected: but with us here, who are far from any &longs;uch thoughts, your Experiments and Arguments are &longs;ufficient to give full &longs;atisfaction: yet neverthele&longs;&longs;e, if &longs;o be you have other more palpable Experiments, and more convincing Rea&longs;ons we would very gladly hear them.

SALV. The Experiment made with two Moveables, as different in weight as may be, by letting them de&longs;cend from a place on high, thereby to &longs;ee whether their Velocity be equal, meets with &longs;ome difficulty: for if the height &longs;hall be great, the Medium,which is to be opened and laterally repelled by the Impetus of the cadent Body, &longs;hall be of much greater prejudice to the &longs;mall Mo­ment of the light Moveable, than to the violence of the heavy one; whereupon in a long way the light one will be left behind: and in a little altitude it might be doubted whether there were really any difference, or if there were, whether it would be &longs;en&longs;ible. Therefore I have oft been thinking to reiterate the de­&longs;cent &longs;o many times from &longs;mall heights, and to accumulate toge­ther &longs;o many of tho&longs;e minute differences of time, as might inter­cede between the arrival or fall of the heavy Body to the ground, and the arrival of the light one, which &longs;o conjoyned, would make a time not onely ob&longs;ervable, but ob&longs;ervable with much facility Moreover, that I might help my &longs;elf with Motions as &longs;low as po&longs;­&longs;ible may be, in which the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Medium operates le&longs;&longs;e in altering the effect that dependeth on &longs;imple Gravity, I have had thoughts to cau&longs;e the Moveable to de&longs;cend upon a de­clining Plane, not much rai&longs;ed above the Plane of the Horizon; for upon this, no le&longs;&longs;e than in perpendicularity, we may di&longs;cover that which is done by Grave Bodies different in weight: and pro­ceeding farther, I have de&longs;ired to free my &longs;elf from any what&longs;o­ever impediment, that might ari&longs;e from the Contact of the &longs;aid Moveables upon the &longs;aid declining Plane: and la&longs;tly, I have ta­ken two Balls, one of Lead, and one of Cork, that above an hun­dred times more grave than this, and have fa&longs;tened them to two &longs;mall threads, each equally four or five yards long, tyed on high: and having removed a&longs;wel the one as the other Ball from the &longs;tate of Perpendicularity, I have let them both go in the &longs;ame Moment, and they de&longs;cending by the Circumferences of Circles de&longs;cribed by the equal Strings their Semidiameters, and having pa&longs;&longs;ed beyond the Perpendicular, they afterwards by the &longs;ame way returned back, and reiterating the&longs;e Vibrations, and re­turns of them&longs;elves neer an hundred times, they have &longs;hewn ve­ry &longs;en&longs;ibly, that the grave Pendulum moveth &longs;o exactly under the time of the light one, that it doth not in an hundred, no nor in a thou&longs;and Vibrations, anticipate the time of one &longs;mall moment, but that they keep an equal pa&longs;&longs;e in their Recur&longs;ions. They al&longs;o &longs;hew the Operation of the Medium, which conferring &longs;ome im­pediment on the Motion, doth much more dimini&longs;h the Vibrati­ons of the Cork, than that of the Lead: not that it maketh them more or le&longs;&longs;e frequent, nay, when the Arches pa&longs;&longs;ed by the Cork were not of above five or &longs;ix degrees, and tho&longs;e of the Lead fif­ty, they did pa&longs;s them under the &longs;ame times.

SIMP. If this be &longs;o, how is it then that the Velocity of the Lead is not greater than that of the Cork? that pa&longs;&longs;ing a jour­ney of &longs;ixty degrees, in the time that this pa&longs;seth hardly &longs;ix?

SALV. But what would you &longs;ay, Simplicius, in ca&longs;e they &longs;hould both di&longs;patch their Recur&longs;ions in the &longs;ame time, when the Cork being removed thirty degrees from the Perpendicular, &longs;hould pa&longs;s an arch of &longs;ixty, and the Lead removed from the &longs;ame middle point onely two degrees, &longs;hould run an arch of four? would not then the Cork be &longs;o much more &longs;wift than the Lead? and yet Experience &longs;hews that &longs;o it happeneth: therefore ob&longs;erve, The Pendulum of Lead being carried v. gr. fifty degrees from the Perpendicular, and thence let go, &longs;wingeth, and pa&longs;&longs;ing beyond the Perpendicular, neer fifty more degrees, de&longs;cribeth an arch of well neer an hundred degrees; and returning of its &longs;elf back again, it de&longs;cribeth another arch, not much le&longs;&longs;e than the former, and continuing its Vibrations, after a great number of them, it finally returneth to Re&longs;t: Each of tho&longs;e Vibrations are made un­der equal times a&longs;wel tho&longs;e of ninety degrees, as tho&longs;e of fifty, twenty, ten, or four; &longs;o that by con&longs;equence, the Velocity of the Moveable doth &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively langui&longs;h and abate, in regard, that under equal times it doth &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively pa&longs;&longs;e arches continually le&longs;&longs;er and le&longs;&longs;er. The like, yea the &longs;elf &longs;ame effect is performed by the Cork, hanging by a &longs;tring of the like length, &longs;ave that in a le&longs;&longs;e number of Vibracions it returneth to Re&longs;t, as being le&longs;s apt, by means of its Levity, to overcome the ob&longs;tacle of the Air: and yet neverthele&longs;s all the Vibrations, both great and &longs;mall, are made under times equal to one another, and equal al&longs;o to the times of the times of the Vibrations of the Lead. Whereupon it is true, that if whil&longs;t the Lead pa&longs;&longs;eth an arch of fifty degrees, the Cork pa&longs;seth one but of ten, the Cork is then more &longs;low than the Lead: but it will al&longs;o happen on the other &longs;ide, that the Cork pa&longs;seth the arch of fifty degrees, when the Lead pa&longs;seth but that of ten or &longs;ix; and &longs;o in &longs;everal times the Lead &longs;hall be &longs;wifter onewhile, and the Cork another while: but if the &longs;ame Moveables &longs;hall al&longs;o under the &longs;ame equal times, pa&longs;s arches that are equal, one may then very &longs;afely &longs;ay, that their Velocities are equal.

SIMP. This di&longs;cour&longs;e &longs;eems to me concluding, and not con­cluding, and I finde in my thoughts &longs;uch a Confu&longs;ion, ari&longs;ing from the one-while &longs;wift, another-while &longs;low, another-while ex­treme &longs;low motion of both the one and other Moveable; as that it permits me not to di&longs;cern clearly, whether it be true, That their Velocities are alwaies equal.

SAGR. Give me leave, I pray you, Salviatus, to interpo&longs;e two words. And tell me, Simplicius, whether you admit, that it may be &longs;aid with ab&longs;olute verity that the Velocities of the Cork and of the Lead are equal, in ca&longs;e, that both of them departing at the &longs;ame moment from Re&longs;t, and moving by the &longs;ame declivities, they &longs;hould alwaies pa&longs;&longs;e equal Spaces in equal times?

SIMP. This admits of no doubt, nor can it be contradicted.

SAGR. It hapneth now in the Pendulums that each of them pa&longs;&longs;eth now &longs;ixty degrees, now fifty, now thirty, now ten, now eight, four, and two; and when each of them pa&longs;&longs;eth the Arch of &longs;ixty degrees they pa&longs;&longs;e it in the &longs;ame time; in the Arch of fifty the &longs;ame time is &longs;pent by both the one and the other Moveable; &longs;o in the Arch of thirty, of ten, and of the re&longs;t: and therefore it is con­cluded, that the Velocity of the Lead in the Arch of &longs;ixty degrees, is equal to the Velocity of the Cork in the &longs;ame Arch of &longs;ixty de­grees: and that the Velocities in the Arch of fifty, are likewi&longs;e equal to one the other, and &longs;o in the re&longs;t. But it is not &longs;aid, that the Velocity that is exerci&longs;ed in the Arch of &longs;ixty is equal to the Ve­locity that is exerci&longs;ed in the Arch of fifty, nor this to that of the Arch of thirty. But the Velocities are alwaies le&longs;&longs;er, in the le&longs;&longs;er Arches. And this is collected from our &longs;en&longs;ibly &longs;eeing the &longs;ame Moveable con&longs;ume as much time in pa&longs;&longs;ing the great Arch of &longs;ixty degrees, as in pa&longs;&longs;ing the le&longs;&longs;er of fifty, or the lea&longs;t of ten: and, in a word, in their being all pa&longs;&longs;ed alwaies under equal times. It is true therefore, that both the Lead and the Cork &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively retard the Motion, according to the Diminution of the Arches, but yet do not alter their harmony in keeping the equality of Velocity in all the &longs;ame Arches by them pa&longs;&longs;ed. I de&longs;ired to &longs;ay thus much, more to try whether I have rightly apprehended the Conceit of Salvia­tus, than out of any nece&longs;&longs;ity that I thought Simplicius to &longs;tand in of a more plain Explanation than that of Salviatus, which is, as in all other things, extreamly clear, and &longs;uch, that, it being fre­quent with him to re&longs;olve Que&longs;tions, in appearance not only ob­&longs;cure, but repugnant to Nature, and to the Truth, with Rea&longs;ons, or Ob&longs;ervations, or Experiments very trite and familiar to every one, it hath (as I have under&longs;tood from divers) given occa&longs;ion to one of the mo&longs;t e&longs;teemed Profe&longs;&longs;ors of our Age to put the le&longs;&longs;e e&longs;teem upon his Novelties, holding them to have as much of Sor­didne&longs;&longs;e, for that they depend on over low and popular Funda­mentals: as if the mo&longs;t admirable and mo&longs;t-to-be-prized Proper­ty of the Demon&longs;trative Sciences, were not to &longs;pring and ari&longs;e from Principles known, under&longs;tood, and granted by every one. But let us, for all that, continue to banquet our &longs;elves with this diet that is &longs;o light of dige&longs;tion; and &longs;uppo&longs;ing that Simplicius is fully &longs;atisfied in under&longs;tanding and admitting, That the intern Gravity of different Moveables hath no &longs;hare in differencing their Veloci­ties, &longs;o that all of them, for ought that dependeth on that, would move with the &longs;ame Velocities; tell us, Salviatus, in what you place the &longs;en&longs;ible and apparent inequalities of Motion; and an­&longs;wer to that In&longs;tance that Simplicius produceth, and which I like­wi&longs;e confirm, I mean, of &longs;eeing a Cannon Bullet move more &longs;wift­ly than a drop of Bird-&longs;hot, for the difference of Velocity &longs;hall be but &longs;mall, in re&longs;pect of that which I object again&longs;t you of Movea­bles of the &longs;ame matter, of which &longs;ome of the greater will de&longs;cend in a Medium, in le&longs;&longs;e than one beat of the Pul&longs;e, that &longs;pace, that others which are le&longs;&longs;er will not pa&longs;&longs;e in an hour, nor in four, nor in twenty; &longs;uch are pebbles and minute gravel-&longs;tones, e&longs;pecially, that &longs;mall &longs;and which muddieth the Water; in which Mediumthey will not de&longs;cend in many hours &longs;o much as two fathoms, which Stones, and tho&longs;e of no great bigne&longs;&longs;e, do pa&longs;&longs;e in one beat of the Pul&longs;e.

SALV. That which the Medium operates, in retarding Movea­bles, the more according as they are compared to one another, le&longs;s grave in &longs;pecie, hath been already declared, &longs;hewing that it pro­ceeds from the &longs;ub&longs;traction of weight. But how one and the &longs;ame Medium can with &longs;o great difference dimini&longs;h the Velocity in Moveables that differ only in Magnitude, although they are of the &longs;ame Matter, and of the &longs;ame Figure, requireth for its expli­cation a more &longs;ubtil di&longs;cour&longs;e, than that which &longs;ufficeth for under­&longs;tanding how the more dilated Figure of the Moveable, or the Motion of the Medium that is made contrary to the Moveable, re­

tardeth the Velocity of the &longs;aid Moveable. I reduce the cau&longs;e of the &longs;aid Problem to the Scabro&longs;ity, and Poro&longs;ity, that is common­ly, and, for the mo&longs;t part, nece&longs;&longs;arily found in the Superficies of Solid Bodies, the which Scabro&longs;ities, in their Motion, go repul&longs;ing and commoving the Air, or other Ambient Medium: of which we have an evident te&longs;timony, in that we hear the Bodies, though made as round as is po&longs;&longs;ible for them to be, to hum whil&longs;t they pa&longs;&longs;e ve­ry &longs;wiftly thorow the Air; and they are not only heard to hum, but to whir and whi&longs;tle, if there be but in them &longs;ome more than ordi­nary cavity or prominency. We &longs;ee al&longs;o, that in turning round every rotund Solid maketh a little wind: And what need more? Do we not hear a notable whirring, and in a very &longs;harp Accent, made by a Top, while it turneth round on the ground with great Celerity? The &longs;hrilne&longs;s of which whizzing groweth flatter accor­ding as the Velocity of the Vertigo doth by degrees more and more &longs;lacken: a nece&longs;&longs;ary Argument likewi&longs;e of the commotion and percu&longs;&longs;ion of the Air by tho&longs;e (though very &longs;mall) Scabro&longs;i­ties of their Superficies. It is not to be doubted, but that the&longs;e in the de&longs;cent of Moveables, grating upon, and repul&longs;ing the fluid Am­bient, procure retardment in the Velocity, and &longs;o much the greater, by how much the Superficies &longs;hall be greater, as is that of le&longs;&longs;er Solids compared to bigger.

The greater or le&longs;s Scabro&longs;ity and Po­ro&longs;ity of the Super­ficies of Movea­bles, a probable cau&longs;e of their grea­ter or le&longs;&longs;er Retar­dation.

SIMP. Stay, I pray you, for here I begin to be at a lo&longs;&longs;e: for though I under&longs;tand and admit, that the Confrication of the Medi­um with the Superficies of the Moveable retardeth the Motion, and that it more retardeth it where (ceteris paribus) the Superficies is greater, yet do I not comprehend upon what ground you call the Superficies of le&longs;&longs;er Solids greater: & farthermore if, as you affirm, the greater Superficies ought to cau&longs;e greater retardment, the greater Solids ought to be the &longs;lower, which is not &longs;o: but this Objection may ea&longs;ily be removed, by &longs;aying, that although the greater hath a greater Superficies, it hath al&longs;o a greater Gravity, upon which the impediment of the greater Superficies hath not &longs;o much more prevalent influence, than the impediment of the le&longs;&longs;er Superficies hath upon the le&longs;&longs;er Gravity, as that the Velocity of the greater Solid &longs;hould become the le&longs;&longs;er. And therefore I &longs;ee no rea&longs;on why one &longs;hould alter the equality of the Velocities, whil&longs;t, that looking how much the Moving Gravity dimini&longs;heth, the faculty of the Re­tarding Superficies doth dimini&longs;h at the &longs;ame rate.

SALV. I will re&longs;olve all that which you object in one word. Therefore, Simplicius, you will without controver&longs;ie admit, that when, of two equal Moveables of the &longs;ame Matter, and alike in Fi­gure (which undoubtedly would move with equal &longs;wiftne&longs;&longs;e) as well the Gravity, as the Superficies of one of them dimini&longs;heth, (yet &longs;till retaining the &longs;imilitude of Figure) the Velocity like­wi&longs;e, for the &longs;ame rea&longs;on, would not be dimini&longs;hed in that which was le&longs;&longs;ened.

SIMP. Really, I think, that it ought &longs;o to follow as you &longs;ay, granting the pre&longs;ent Doctrine with a &longs;alvo &longs;till to our Doctrine, which teacheth, that the greater or le&longs;&longs;er Gravity hath no operati­on in accelerating or retarding Motion.

SALV. And this I confirm; and grant you likewi&longs;e your Po­&longs;ition, from whence, in my opinion, may be inferred, That in ca&longs;e the Gravity dimini&longs;heth more than the Superficies, there may be introduced in the Moveable, in that manner dimini&longs;hed, &longs;ome re­tardment of Motion, and that greater and greater, by how much in proportion, the diminution of the Weight was greater than the di­minution of the Superficies

SIMP. I make not the lea&longs;t que&longs;tion of it.

Solids cannot be dimini&longs;hed at the &longs;ame rate in Super­ficies as in Weight, retaining the &longs;imi­litude of the Fi­gures.

SALV. Now know, Simplicius, that in Solids one cannot di­mini&longs;h the Superficies &longs;o much as the Weight keeping the &longs;imili­tude of Figure. For it being manife&longs;t, that in dimini&longs;hing of grave Solids, the Weight le&longs;&longs;eneth as much as the Bulk, when ever the Bulk happens to be dimini&longs;hed more than the Superficies, (care being had to retain the &longs;imilitude of Figure) the Gravity likewi&longs;e would come to be more dimini&longs;hed than the Superficies. But Geo­metry teacheth us, that there is much greater proportion between the Bulk and the Bulk in like Solids, than between their Superfi­cies. Which for your better under&longs;tanding, I &longs;hall explain in &longs;ome particular ca&longs;e. Therefore fancy to your &longs;elf, for example, a Dye, one of the Sides of which is v. gr. two Inches long, &longs;o that one of its Surfaces &longs;hall be four Square Inches, and all &longs;ix, that is, all its Superficies twenty four Square Inches. Then &longs;uppo&longs;e the &longs;ame Dye at three &longs;awings cut into eight &longs;mall Dice, the Side of every one of which will be one Inch, and one of its Surfaces an Inch Square, and its whole Superficies &longs;ix Square Inches, of which the whole Dye contained twenty four in its Superficial content. Now, you &longs;ee, that the Superficial content of the little Dye is the fourth part of the Superficial content of the great one, (for &longs;ix is the fourth part of twenty four) but the Solid content of the &longs;aid Dye is only the eighth part: therefore the Bulk, and con&longs;equently the Weight, doth much more dimini&longs;h than the Superficies. And if you &longs;ubdivide the little Dye into eight others, we &longs;hall have for the whole Superficial content of one of the&longs;e, one and an half Square Inches, which is the &longs;ixteenth part of the Superficies of the fir&longs;t Dye; but its Bulk, or Ma&longs;s, is only the &longs;ixty fourth part of that. You &longs;ee therefore, how that in only the&longs;e two divi&longs;ions the Bulks decrea&longs;e four times fa&longs;ter than their Superficies: and if we &longs;hould pro&longs;ecute the Subdivi&longs;ion, untill that we had reduced the fir&longs;t So­lid into a &longs;mall powder, we &longs;hould find the Gravity of the minute Atomes to be le&longs;&longs;ened an hundred and an hundred times more than their Superficies. And this which I have exemplified in Cubes, hapneth in all like Solids, the Bulks of which are in Se&longs;­quialter proportion of their Superficies. You &longs;ee, therefore, in how much greater proportion the Impediment of the Contact of the Superficies of the Moveable with the Medium encrea&longs;eth in &longs;mall Moveables, than in greater: and if we &longs;hould add, that the Sca­bro&longs;ities in the very &longs;mall Superficies of the minute Atomes are not happily le&longs;&longs;er than tho&longs;e of the Superficies of greater Solids, that are diligently poli&longs;hed, ob&longs;erve how fluid, and void of all Re­&longs;i&longs;tance being opened, the Medium is required to be, when it is to give pa&longs;&longs;age to &longs;o feeble a Virtue. And therefore take notice, Sim­plicius, that I did not equivocate, when even now I &longs;aid, That the Superficies of le&longs;&longs;er Solids is greater, in compari&longs;on of that of bigger.

SIMP. I am wholly &longs;atisfied: and I verily believe, that if I were to begin my Studies again, I &longs;hould follow the Coun&longs;el of Plato,and enter my &longs;elf fir&longs;t in the Mathematicks, which I &longs;ee to proceed very &longs;crupulou&longs;ly, and refu&longs;e to admit any thing for certain, &longs;ave that which they nece&longs;&longs;arily demon&longs;trate.

SAGR. I have taken great delight in this Di&longs;cour&longs;e; but, be­fore we pa&longs;&longs;e any further, I would be glad to be &longs;atisfied in one particular, which newly came into my thoughts, when but ju&longs;t now you &longs;aid, that Like-Solids are in Se&longs;quialter proportion to their Superficies for I have &longs;een, and under&longs;tood the Propo&longs;ition

with its Demon&longs;tration, in which it is proved, That the Superficies of Like-Solids are in duplicate proportion of their Sides; and ano­ther that proveth the &longs;ame Solids to be in triple proportion of the &longs;ame Sides; but the proportion of Solids to their Superficies, I do not remember that I ever &longs;o much as heard it mentioned.

Solids are to each other in Se&longs;quial­ter proportion to their Superficies.

SALV. You your &longs;elf have an&longs;wered and declared the doubt. For that which is triple of a thing of which another is double, doth it not come to be Se&longs;quialter of this double? Yes doubtle&longs;&longs;e. Now, if Superficies are in double proportion of the Lines, of which the Solids are in triple proportion, may not we &longs;ay, That the Solids are in Se&longs;quialter proportion of their Superficies?

SAGR. I under&longs;tand you very well. And although other par­ticulars, pertaining to the matter of which we have treated, do re­main for me to ask, yet if we &longs;hould thus run from one Digre&longs;&longs;ion to another, it will be late before we &longs;hould come to the Que&longs;tions principally intended, which concern the diver&longs;ities of the Acci­dents of the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of Solids again&longs;t Fraction; and therefore, if you &longs;o plea&longs;e, we may return to the fir&longs;t Theme, which we pro­po&longs;ed in the beginning.

SALV. You &longs;ay very well; but the &longs;o many, and &longs;o different things that have been examined, have &longs;toln &longs;o much of our time, that there is but little of it left in this day to &longs;pend in our other principal Argument, which is full of Geometrical Demon&longs;trati­ons that are to be con&longs;idered with attention: &longs;o that I &longs;hould think it were better to adjourn our meeting till to morrow, as well for this which I have told you, as al&longs;o becau&longs;e I might bring with me &longs;ome Papers, on which I have, in order, &longs;et down the Theorems and Problems, in which are propo&longs;ed and demon&longs;trated the different Pa&longs;&longs;ions of this Subject, which, it may be, would not otherwi&longs;e with requi&longs;ite Method come into my mind.

SAGR. I very gladly comply with your advice, and &longs;o much the more willingly, in regard that, for a Conclu&longs;ion of this daies Con­ference, I &longs;hall have time to hear you re&longs;olve &longs;ome doubts that I find in my mind concerning the Point la&longs;t handled. Of which one is, Whether we are to hold, that the Impediment of the Mediummay be &longs;ufficient to a&longs;&longs;ign bounds to the Acceleration of Bodies of very grave Matter, that are of great Bulk, and of a Spherical Figure: and I in&longs;tance in the Spherical Figure, that I might take that which is contained under the lea&longs;t Superficies, and therefore le&longs;&longs;e &longs;ubject to Retardment. Another &longs;hall be, touching the Vibrations of Pen­dulums, and this hath many heads: One &longs;hall be, Whether all, both Great, Mean, and Little, are made really and preci&longs;ely under equal Times: And another, What is the proportion of the Times of Moveables, &longs;u&longs;pended at unequal &longs;trings, of the Times of their Vibrations I mean.

SALV. The Que&longs;tions are ingenious, and, like as it is incident to all Truths, I &longs;uppo&longs;e, that, which ever of them we handle, it will draw after it &longs;o many other Truths, and curious Con&longs;equences, that I cannot tell whether the remainder of this day may &longs;uffice for the di&longs;cu&longs;&longs;ing of them all.

SAGR. If they &longs;hall be but as delightful as the precedent, it would be more grateful for me to employ as many daies, not to &longs;ay, hours, as it is unto night, and I believe that Simplicius will not be cloy'd with &longs;uch Argumentations as the&longs;e.

SIMP. No certainly: and e&longs;pecially, when the Que&longs;tions trea­ted of are Phy&longs;ical, touching which we read not the Opinions or Di&longs;cour&longs;es of other Philo&longs;ophers.

Any Body, of any Figure, Greatne&longs;s, and Gravity, is checked by the Re­nitence of the Me­dium, though ne­ver &longs;o tenuous, in &longs;uch &longs;ort, that the Motion continuing, it is reduced to equability.

SALV. I come therefore to the fir&longs;t, affirming without any hæ&longs;itation, that there is not a Sphere &longs;o big, nor of Matter &longs;o grave, but that the Renitence of the Medium, though very tenuous, checks its Acceleration, and in the continuation of the Motion reduceth it to Equability, of which we may draw a very clear Argument from Experience it &longs;elf. For if any falling Moveable were able in its continuation of Motion to attain any degree of Velocity, no Velocity that &longs;hould be conferred upon it, could be &longs;o great but that it would depo&longs;e it, and free it &longs;elf of it by help of the Impe­diment of the Medium. And thus, a Cannon-bullet, that had de &longs;cended through the Air, v. gr. four yards, and had, for example, acquired ten degrees of Velocity, and that with the&longs;e &longs;hould enter into the Water, in ca&longs;e the Impediment of the Water were not able to prohibit &longs;uch a certain Impetus in the Ball, it would en­crea&longs;e it, or at lea&longs;t would continue it unto the bottom; which is not ob&longs;erved to en&longs;ue: nay, the Water, although it were but a few fathoms in depth, would impede and debilitate it in &longs;uch a man­ner, that it will make but a &longs;mall impre&longs;&longs;ion in the bottom of the River or Lake. It is therefore manife&longs;t, that that Velocity, of which the Water had ability to deprive it in a very &longs;hort way, would never be permitted to be acquired by it, though in a depth of a thou&longs;and Fathoms. And why &longs;hould it be permitted to gain it in a thou&longs;and, to be taken from it again in four? What need we more? Do we not &longs;ee the immen&longs;e Impetus of the Ball, &longs;hot from the Cannon it &longs;elf, to be in &longs;uch a manner flatted by the interpo­&longs;ition of a few Fathom of Water, that without any harm to the Ship, it but very hardly reacheth to make a dent in it? The Air al­&longs;o, though very yielding, doth neverthele&longs;&longs;e repre&longs;&longs;e the Velocity of the falling Moveable, although it be very heavy, as we may by &longs;uch like Experiments collect; for if from the top of a very high Tower we &longs;hould di&longs;charge a Mu&longs;quet downwards, this will make a le&longs;&longs;er impre&longs;&longs;ion on the ground, than if we &longs;hould di&longs;charge the Mu&longs;quet at the height of four or &longs;ix yards above the Plane: an evident &longs;ign, that the Impetus, wherewith the Bullet i&longs;&longs;ueth from the Gun, di&longs;charged on the top of the Tower, doth gradually di­mini&longs;h in de&longs;cending thorow the Air: therefore the de&longs;cending from any what&longs;oever great height will not &longs;uffice to make it ac­quire that Impetus, of which the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Air deprived it, when it had in any manner been conferred upon it. The batte­ry likewi&longs;e that the force of a Bullet, &longs;hot from a Culverin, &longs;hall make in a Wall at the di&longs;tance of twenty Paces, would not, I be­lieve, be &longs;o great, if the Bullet was &longs;hot perpendicularly from any immen&longs;e Altitude. I believe, therefore, that there is a Bound or term belonging to the Acceleration of every Natural Moveable that departs from Re&longs;t, and that the Impediment of the Medium in the end reduceth it to ^{*} Equality, in which it afterwards alwaies

continueth.

* Or Equability.

SAGR. The Experiments are really, in my opinion, much to the purpo&longs;e: nor doth any thing remain, unle&longs;&longs;e the Adver&longs;ary &longs;hould fortifie him&longs;elf, by denying, that they will hold true in great and ponderous Ma&longs;&longs;es, and that a Cannon-bullet coming from the Concave of the Moon, or from the upper Region of the Air, would make a greater percu&longs;&longs;ion than coming from the Cannon.

SALV. There is no que&longs;tion, but that many things may be objected, and that they may not be all &longs;alved by Experiments; ne­verthele&longs;&longs;e in this contradiction, me thinks, there is &longs;omething that may fall under con&longs;ideration; &longs;cilicet, that it is very probable, that the Grave Body, falling from an Altitude, acquireth &longs;o much Impetus, at its arrival to the ground, as would &longs;uffice to return it to that height, as is plainly &longs;een in a Pendulum rea&longs;onable weighty, that being removed fifty or &longs;ixty degrees from the Perpendicular, gaineth that Velocity and Virtue which exactly &longs;ufficeth to force it to the like Recur&longs;ion, that little abated, which is taken from it by the Impediment of the Air. To con&longs;titute, therefore, the Cannon­bullet in &longs;uch an Altitude as may &longs;uffice for the acqui&longs;t of an Impe­tus, as great as that which the Fire giveth it in its i&longs;&longs;uing from the Piece, it would &longs;uffice to &longs;hoot it upwards perpendicularly with the &longs;aid Cannon, and then ob&longs;erving, whether in its fall it maketh an impre&longs;&longs;ion equal to that of the percu&longs;&longs;ion made near at hand in its i&longs;&longs;uing forth; but, indeed, I believe, that it would not be any whit near &longs;o forcible. And therefore I hold that the Velocity, which the Bullet hath near to its going out of the Piece, would be one of tho&longs;e that the Impediment of the Air would never &longs;uffer it to acquire, whil&longs;t it &longs;hould with a natural Motion de&longs;cend, leaving the &longs;tate of Re&longs;t, from any great height. I come now to the other Que&longs;tions belonging to Pendulums, matters which to many would &longs;eem very frivolous, and more e&longs;pecially to tho&longs;e Philo&longs;ophers that are continually bu&longs;ied in the more profound Que&longs;tions of Natural Philo&longs;ophy: yet, notwith&longs;tanding, will not I contemn them, being encouraged by the Example of Ari&longs;totle him&longs;elf, in whom I admire this above all things; that he hath not, as one may &longs;ay, omitted any matter that any waies merited con&longs;ideration, which he hath not &longs;poken of: and now upon the Que&longs;tions you propounded, I think I can tell you a certain conceit of mine upon &longs;ome Problems con­cerning Mu&longs;ick, a noble Subject, of which &longs;o many famous men, and Ari&longs;totle him&longs;elf, have written; and touching it, he con&longs;ide­reth many curious Problems: &longs;o that if I likewi&longs;e &longs;hall from &longs;o fa­miliar and &longs;en&longs;ible Experiments, draw Rea&longs;ons of admirable acci­dents on the Argument of Sounds, I may hope that my di&longs;cour&longs;es will be accepted by you.

A Grave Body, falling from an Altitude, acqui­reth &longs;o much Im­petus at its arri­val to the ground, as in all probabili­ty, would &longs;uffice to recarry it to the &longs;ame height from whence it fell.

SAGR Not only accepted, but by me, in particular, mo&longs;t pa&longs;­&longs;ionately de&longs;ired, in regard that I taking a great delight in all Mu­&longs;ical In&longs;truments, and being rea&longs;onably well in&longs;tructed concerning Con&longs;onances, have alwaies been ignorant and perplexed with endeavouring to know, whence it cometh that one &longs;hould more plea&longs;e and delight me than another; and that &longs;ome not only pro­cure me no delight, but highly di&longs;plea&longs;e me: the trite Ptoblem al­&longs;o of the two Chords &longs;et to an Uni&longs;on, one of which moveth and actually &longs;oundeth at the touching of the other, I al&longs;o am unre&longs;ol­ved in: nor am I very clearly informed concerning the Forms of Con&longs;onances, and other particularities.

SALV. We will &longs;ee, if from the&longs;e our Peudulums one may ga­ther any &longs;atisfaction in all the&longs;e Doubts. And as to the fir&longs;t Que­&longs;tion, that is, Whether the &longs;ame Pendulum doth really and punctu­ally perform all its Vibrations, great, le&longs;&longs;er, and lea&longs;t, under Times preci&longs;ely equal; I refer my &longs;elf to that which I have heretofore learnt from our Academian, who plainly demon&longs;trateth, that the Moveable that &longs;hould de&longs;cend along the Chords, that are Subten­&longs;es to any Arch, would nece&longs;&longs;arily pa&longs;&longs;e them all in equal Times, as well the Subten&longs;e under an hundred and eighty degrees, (that is, the whole Diameter) as the Subten&longs;es of an hundred, &longs;ixty, ten, two, or half a degree, or of four minutes: &longs;till &longs;uppo&longs;ing that they all determine in the lowe&longs;t Point touching the Horizontal Plane. Next as to the de&longs;cendents by the Arches of the &longs;ame Chords eli­vated above the Horizon, and that are not greater than a Qua­drant, that is, than ninety degrees, Experience likewi&longs;e &longs;hews, that they pa&longs;&longs;e all in Times equal, but yet &longs;horter than the Times of the pa&longs;&longs;ages by the Chords: an effect which hath &longs;o much of won­der in it, by how much at the fir&longs;t apprehen&longs;ion one would think the contrary ought to follow: For the terms of the beginning, and the end of the Motion being common, and the Right-Line be­ing the &longs;horte&longs;t, that can be comprehended between the &longs;aid Terms, it &longs;eemeth rea&longs;onable, that the Motion made by it &longs;hould be fini&longs;hed in the &longs;horte&longs;t Time, which yet is not &longs;o: but the &longs;hor­te&longs;t Time, and con&longs;equently, the &longs;wifte&longs;t Motion, is that made by the Arch of which the &longs;aid Right-Line is Chord. In the next place, as to the Times of the Vibrations of Moveables, &longs;u&longs;pended by &longs;trings of different lengths, tho&longs;e Times are in Subduple pro­portion to the lengths of the &longs;trings, or, if you will, the lengths are in duplicate proportion to the Times, that is, are as the Squares of the Times: &longs;o that if, for example, the Time of a Vibration of one Pendulum is double to the Time of a Vibration of another, it followeth, that the length of the &longs;tring of that is quadruple to the length of the &longs;tring of this. And in the Time of one Vibration of that, another &longs;hall then make three Vibrations, when the &longs;tring of that &longs;hall be nine times as long as the other. From whence doth follow, that the length of the &longs;trings have to each other the &longs;ame proportion, that the Squares of the Numbers of the Vibrations that are made in the &longs;ame Times have.

Moveables de&longs;cen­ding along the Chords, that are Subten&longs;es to any Arch of a Circle, pa&longs;&longs;e as well the greater as the le&longs;­&longs;er Chords in equal Times.

Moveables andPendula de&longs;cend­ing along the Ar­ches of the &longs;ame Chords, elivated as far as 90 deg. pa&longs;s the &longs;aid Arches in Times equal, but that are &longs;horter than the tran&longs;iti­ons along the Chords.

The Times of the Vibrations of Mo­vables, hanging at alonger or &longs;horter thread, are to one another in propor­tion &longs;ubduple the lengths of the &longs;trings, at which they hang.

SAGR. Then, if I have rightly under&longs;tood you, I may ea&longs;ily know the length of a &longs;tring, hanging at any never-&longs;o-great height, although the &longs;ublime term of the &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;ion were invi&longs;ible to me, and I only &longs;aw the other lower extream. For if I &longs;hall fa&longs;ten a weight of &longs;ufficient Gravity to the &longs;aid &longs;tring here below, and &longs;et it on vibrating to and again, and a friend telling &longs;ome of its Recur­&longs;ions, and I at the &longs;ame time tell the Recur&longs;ions of another Movea­ble, &longs;u&longs;pended at a &longs;tring that is preci&longs;ely a yard long, by the Numbers of the Vibrations of the&longs;e Pendula, made in the &longs;ame Time, I will find the length of the &longs;tring. As for example, &longs;uppo&longs;e that in the time that my friend hath counted twenty Recur&longs;ions of the long &longs;tring, I had told two hundred and forty of my &longs;tring, that is one yard long: &longs;quaring the two numbers twenty and two hundred and forty, which are 400, and 57600, I will &longs;ay, that the long &longs;tring containeth 57600 of tho&longs;e Mea&longs;ures, of which my &longs;tring containeth 400. and becau&longs;e the &longs;tring is one &longs;ole yard, I will divide 57600 by 400, and the quotient will be 144, and I will af­firm that &longs;tring to be 144 yards long.

To find the Length of any Rope, or &longs;tring, at which a Moveable hang­eth, by the frequen­cy of its Vibrations

SALV. Nor will you be mi&longs;taken one Inch; and e&longs;pecially, if you take a great Number of Vibrations.

SAGR. You give me frequent occa&longs;ion to admire the Riches, and withal the extraordinary bounty of Nature, whil'&longs;t by things &longs;o common, and, I might in a certain &longs;ence &longs;ay, vile, you go col­lecting of Notions very curious, new, and oftentimes, remote from all imagination. I have an hundred times con&longs;idered the Vi­brations, in particular, of the Lamps in &longs;ome Churches, hanging by very long ropes, when they have been unawares &longs;tirred by any one: but the mo&longs;t that I inferred from that &longs;ame Ob&longs;ervati­on, was the improbability of the Opinion of tho&longs;e who hold, that &longs;uch-like Motions are maintained and continued by the Medi­um, that is by the Air: for it &longs;hould &longs;eem to me, that the Air had a great judgment, and withal but little bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e to &longs;pend &longs;o ma­ny hours time in vibrating an hanging Weight with &longs;o much Regu­larity: but that I &longs;hould have learnt, that that &longs;ame Moveable, &longs;u&longs;pended at a &longs;tring of an hundred yards long, being removed from Perpendicularity one while ninety degrees, and another while one degree onely, or half a degree, &longs;hould &longs;pend as much time in pa&longs;&longs;ing this little, as in pa&longs;&longs;ing that great Arch, certainly would never have come into my head, for I &longs;till think, that it bordereth upon Impo&longs;sibility. Now I am in expectation to hear that the&longs;e petty Notions will a&longs;sign me &longs;uch Rea&longs;ons of tho&longs;e Mu&longs;ical Pro­blems, as may, in part at lea&longs;t, give me &longs;atisfaction.

Every Pendulum hath the Time of its Vibration &longs;o li­mited; that it is not po&longs;&longs;ible to make it move under any other Period.

SALV. Above all things, you are to know, that every Pendu­lum hath the Time of its Vibrations &longs;o limited, and prefixed, that it is impo&longs;&longs;ible to make it move under any other Period, than that onely one, which is natural unto it. Let any one take the &longs;tring in hand, to which the Weight is fa&longs;tened, and trie all the wayes he can to encrea&longs;e or decrea&longs;e the frequency of its Vibrations, and he &longs;hall finde it labour in vain: but we may, on the contrary, on a Pendulum, though grave and at re&longs;t, by onely blowing up­on it, conferre a Motion, and a Motion con&longs;iderably great, by reiterating the bla&longs;ts, but under the Time that is properly be­longing to its Vibrations: for if at the fir&longs;t bla&longs;t we &longs;hould have re­moved it from Perpendicularity half an Inch, adding a &longs;econd, after that it being returned towards us, is ready to begin the &longs;e­cond Vibration, we &longs;hould conferre new Motion on it, and &longs;o &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively with other bla&longs;ts, but given in Time, and not when the Pendulum is comming towards us (for &longs;o we &longs;hould impede; and not help the Motion) and &longs;o continuing with many Impul­&longs;es, we &longs;hould confer upon it &longs;uch an Impetus, that a greater force by much than that of a bla&longs;t of our breath, will be required to &longs;tay it.

SAGR. I have, from my childhood, ob&longs;erved, that one man a­lone, by means of the&longs;e Impul&longs;es, given in Time, hath been able to towl a very great Bell, and when it was to cea&longs;e, I have &longs;een four or &longs;ix men more lay hold on the Bell-rope, and they have all been rai&longs;ed from the ground: &longs;o many together being unable to arre&longs;t that Impetus, which one alone, with regular Pulls, had con­ferred upon the Bell.

SALV. An example, that declareth my meaning with no le&longs;&longs;e

propriety than this that I have premi&longs;ed, doth &longs;ute to render the rea&longs;on of the admirable Problem of the Chord of the Lute or Viol, which moveth, and maketh not onely that really to &longs;ound, which is tuned to the Uni&longs;on, but that al&longs;o which is &longs;et to an Eighth and a Fifth. The Chord being toucht, its Vibrations begin, and continue all the Time that its Sound is heard to endure: the&longs;e Vibrations make the Air neer adjacent to vibrate and tremble, who&longs;e tremblings and quaverings di&longs;tend them&longs;elves a great way, and &longs;trike upon all the Chords of the In&longs;trument, and al&longs;o of o­thers neer unto it: the Chord that is &longs;et to an Uni&longs;on, with that which is toucht, being di&longs;po&longs;ed to make its Vibrations ^{*} in the &longs;ame Time, beginneth at the fir&longs;t impul&longs;e to move a little, and a &longs;econd, a third, a twentieth, and many more, overtaking it, all in ju&longs;t and Periodick Times, it receiveth at la&longs;t, the &longs;ame Tre­mulation, with that fir&longs;t touched, and one may clearly &longs;ee it go, dilating its Vibrations exactly according to the Pace of its Mo­ver. This Undulation that di&longs;tendeth it &longs;elf thorow the Air, mo­veth, and makes to vibrate, not onely the Chords, but likewi&longs;e any other Body di&longs;po&longs;ed to trembling, and to vibrate in the very Time of the trembling Chord: &longs;o that if we fix in the Sides of the In&longs;trument &longs;everal &longs;mall pieces of Bri&longs;tles, or of other flexible matters, you &longs;hall &longs;ee upon the &longs;ounding of the Viol, now one, now another of tho&longs;e Corpu&longs;cles tremble, according as that Chord is toucht, who&longs;e Vibrations return in the &longs;ame Time: the others will not move at the &longs;triking of this Chord, nor will that Bri&longs;tle tremble at the &longs;triking of another Chord. If with the Bow one &longs;martly &longs;trike the Ba&longs;e-Chord of a Viol, and &longs;et a drinking Gla&longs;&longs;e, thin and &longs;mooth, neer unto it, if the Tone of the Chord be an Uni&longs;on to the Tone of the Gla&longs;&longs;e, the Gla&longs;&longs;e &longs;hall dance, and &longs;en&longs;ibly re-&longs;ound. Again, the ample dilating of the Tremor or Undulation of the Medium about the Body re&longs;ounding, is ap­parently &longs;een in making the Gla&longs;&longs;e to &longs;ound, by putting a little Water in it, and then chafing the brim or edge of it with the tip of the finger: for the included Water is ob&longs;erved to undulate in a mo&longs;t regular order: and the &longs;ame effect will be yet more clearly &longs;een, by &longs;etting the foot of the Gla&longs;&longs;e in the bottom of a rea&longs;o­nable large Ve&longs;&longs;el, in which there is Water as high almo&longs;t as to the brim of the Gla&longs;&longs;e, for making it to &longs;ound, as before, with the Confrication of the finger, we &longs;hall &longs;ee the trembling of the Water to diffu&longs;e it &longs;elf mo&longs;t regularly, and with great Velocity, to a great di&longs;tance round about the Gla&longs;&longs;e; and it hath many times been my fortune, in making a rea&longs;onable big Gla&longs;&longs;e, almo&longs;t full of Water, to &longs;ound as afore&longs;aid, to &longs;ee the Waves in the Water, at fir&longs;t formed with an exact equality; and it hapning &longs;ometimes, that the Tone of the Gla&longs;&longs;e ri&longs;eth an Eighth higher, at the &longs;ame in&longs;tant, I have &longs;een every one of the &longs;aid Waves to divide them&longs;elves in two: an accident that very clearly proveth the forme of the Octave to be the double.

The Chord of a Mu&longs;ical In&longs;tru­ment touched, mo­veth, and maketh the Chords &longs;et to an Uni&longs;on, Fifth and Eighth, with it to &longs;ound; and why.

Sundry Problems touching Mu&longs;ical Proportions, and their Solutions.

* Or under.

SAGR. The &longs;ame hath al&longs;o befaln me more than once, to my delight, and al&longs;o benefit: for I &longs;tood a long time perplexed a­bout the&longs;e Forms of Con&longs;onants, not conceiving, that the Rea­&longs;on, commonly given thereof by the Authours that have hither­to written learnedly of Mu&longs;ick, were &longs;ufficiently convincing, they tell us, that the Diapa&longs;on, that is the Eighth, is contained by the double, the Diapente, which we call the Fifth, by the Se&longs;quialter: for a Chord being di&longs;tended on the ^{*} Monochord, &longs;triking it all; and afterwards &longs;triking but the half of it, by pla­cing a Bridge in the middle, one heareth an Eighth; and if the Bridge be placed at a third of the whole Chord, touching the whole, and then the two thirds, it &longs;oundeth a Fifth; whereupon they infer, that the Eighth is contained between two and one, and the Fifth between three and two. This Rea&longs;on, I &longs;ay, &longs;eemed to me not nece&longs;&longs;arily concluding for the a&longs;&longs;igning ju&longs;tly the double and the Se&longs;quialter, for the natural Forms of the Diapa&longs;on and the Diapente. And that which moved me &longs;o to think, was this. There are three ways, by which we may &longs;harpen the Tone of a Chord: one is, by making it &longs;horter, the other is by di&longs;tending; or making it more ten&longs;e; and the third is by making it thinner. If, retaining the &longs;ame Tention and thickne&longs;&longs;e, we would hear an Eighth, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary to &longs;horten it to one half, which is done by &longs;triking it all, and then half. But if, retaining the &longs;ame length and thickne&longs;&longs;e, we would have it ri&longs;e to an Eighth, by &longs;crewing it higher, it will not &longs;uffice to &longs;tretch it double as much, but we &longs;hall need the quadruple, &longs;o that, if before it was &longs;tretched by a Weight of one pound, it will be needful to fa&longs;ten four pound to it to &longs;harpen it to an Eighth. And la&longs;tly, if, keeping the &longs;ame length and Tention, we would have a Chord, that by being &longs;mal­ler, rendereth an Eighth, it will be nece&longs;&longs;ary, that it retain onely a fourth part of the thickne&longs;&longs;e of the other more Grave. And this which I &longs;peak of the Eighth, that is, that its form taken from the Tention, or from the thickne&longs;&longs;e of the Chord, is in duplicate proportion to that which it receiveth from the length, is to be under&longs;toood of all other Mu&longs;ical Intervals: for that which the length giveth us in a Se&longs;quialter proportion, i. e. by &longs;triking it all, and then the two thirds, if you would have it proceed from the Tention, or from the di&longs;gro&longs;&longs;ing, you mu&longs;t double the Se&longs;qui­alter proportion, taking the double Se&longs;quiquartan: and if the Grave Chord were &longs;tretched by four pound weight, fa&longs;ten to the Acute not &longs;ix, but nine: and, as to the thickne&longs;&longs;e, make the Grave Chord thicker than the Acute, according to the proportion of nine to four, to have the Fifth. The&longs;e being mo&longs;t exact Experi­ments, I thought, that I &longs;aw no rea&longs;on, why the&longs;e Sage Philo&longs;o­phers &longs;hould e&longs;tabli&longs;h the form of the Eighth to be rather the dou­ble, than quadruple; and the Form of the Fifth to be rather the Se&longs;quialter, than the double Se&longs;quiquartan. But becau&longs;e the numbring of the Vibrations of a Chord, which in giving a &longs;ound, are extreme frequent, is altogether impo&longs;&longs;ible, I &longs;hould always have been in doubt, whether or no it were true, that the more Acute Chord of the Eighth, made in the &longs;ame time, double the number of the Vibrations of the more Grave, if the Waves, which may be continued as long as you plea&longs;e, by making the Gla&longs;s to &longs;ound and vibrate, had not &longs;en&longs;ibly &longs;hewn me, that in the &longs;elf &longs;ame moment that (&longs;ometimes) the Sound is heard to ri&longs;e to an Eighth, there are &longs;een to ari&longs;e other Waves more minute, which with infinite &longs;moothne&longs;s cut in the middle each of tho&longs;e fir&longs;t.

* An In&longs;trument of but one &longs;tring; called by Mar­&longs;ennus la Tromper­te Marine.

SALV. An excellent Ob&longs;ervation for di&longs;tingui&longs;hing one by one the Undulations ari&longs;ing from the Tremulation of the re­&longs;ounding Body: which are tho&longs;e that diffu&longs;ing them&longs;elves tho­row the Air, make the titillation upon the Drum of our Ear, that in our Soul becommeth a Sound: But whereas beholding and ob­&longs;erving them in the Water, endure no longer than the confrica­tion of the finger la&longs;teth, and al&longs;o in that time they are not per­manent, but are continually made and di&longs;&longs;olved, would it not be an ingenious undertaking, if one could make, with much exqui&longs;itene&longs;&longs;e, &longs;uch, as would continue a long time; I mean Moneths and Years, &longs;o as to give a man opportunity mea&longs;ure, and with ea&longs;e to number them?

SAGR. I a&longs;&longs;ure you I &longs;hould highly value &longs;uch an Invention.

SALV. The di&longs;covery was accidental, and the Ob&longs;ervation and applicative improvement of it onely were mine, and I hold it to be a Circum&longs;tance of noble Contemplation, althongh a bu&longs;i­ne&longs;&longs;e in its &longs;elf &longs;ufficiently homely. Scraping a Bra&longs;&longs;e Plate with an Iron Chizzel to fetch out &longs;ome Spots, in moving the Chizzel to and again upon it pretty quick, I heard it (once or twice among&longs;t many gratings) to Sibilate and &longs;end forth a whi&longs;tling noi&longs;e, very &longs;hrill and audible: and looking upon the Plate, I &longs;aw a long row of &longs;mall &longs;treaks, parallel to one another, and di&longs;tant from one another by mo&longs;t equal Intervals: returning to my &longs;craping again, I perceived by &longs;everal trials, that in tho&longs;e &longs;crapings, and tho&longs;e onely that whi&longs;tled, the Chizzel left the &longs;treaks upon the Plate: but when the Scraping pa&longs;&longs;ed without any Sibilation, there was not &longs;o much as the lea&longs;t &longs;ign of any &longs;uch &longs;treaks. Re­peating the Experiment &longs;everal times afterwards, &longs;craping now with greater, now with le&longs;&longs;e velocity, the Sibilation hapned to be of a Tone &longs;ometimes acuter, &longs;ometimes graver; and I ob&longs;erved the marks made in the more acute &longs;ounds to be clo&longs;er together, and tho&longs;e of the more grave farther a&longs;under: and &longs;ometimes al&longs;o, according as the &longs;elf &longs;ame &longs;crape was made towards the end, with greater velocity than at the beginning, the &longs;ound was heard to grow &longs;harper, and the &longs;treaks were ob&longs;erved to &longs;tand thicker, but ever with extream neatne&longs;&longs;e, and marked with exact equidi­&longs;tance: and farther-more, in the Sibilating &longs;crapes; I felt the Chizzel to &longs;hake or tremulate in my hand, and a certain chilne&longs;&longs;e to run along my arm; and in &longs;hort, I &longs;aw the &longs;ame effected upon the Toole, which we u&longs;e to ob&longs;erve in whi&longs;pering, and after­wards &longs;peaking aloud, for &longs;ending forth the breath without forming a &longs;ound, we do not perceive any moving in the throat and mouth, in compari&longs;on of that which we di&longs;cern to be in the Wind-pipe and Throat of every one, in &longs;ending forth the voice; and e&longs;pecially in grave and loud Tones. I have likewi&longs;e &longs;ome­times among&longs;t the Chords of the Viols, ob&longs;erved two that were Uni&longs;ons to the Sibilations made by &longs;craping after the manner I told you, and that were mo&longs;t different in Tone, from which two they preci&longs;ely were di&longs;tant a perfect Fifth, and then mea&longs;uring the intervals of the &longs;treaks of both the Scrapes, I &longs;aw the di­&longs;tance that conteined forty five &longs;paces of the one, conteined thirty of the other: which, indeed, is the Form attributed to the Diapente. But here, before I proceed any farther, I will tell you, that of the three manners of rendring a Sound Acute, that which you refer to the &longs;lenderne&longs;&longs;e or finene&longs;&longs;e of the Chord, may with more truth be a&longs;cribed to the Weight. For the alteration ta­ken from the thickne&longs;&longs;e, an&longs;wereth, when the Chords are of the &longs;ame matter; and &longs;o a Gut-&longs;tring to make an Eighth, ought to be four times thicker than the other Gut-&longs;tring; and one of Wier four times thicker than another of Wier. But if I would make an Eighth with one of Wier to one of Gut-&longs;tring, I am not to make it four times thicker, but four times graver, &longs;o that, as to thickne&longs;&longs;e, this of Wier &longs;hall not be four times thicker, but quadruple in Gravity, for &longs;ome times it &longs;hall be more &longs;mall than its re&longs;pon­dent to the Acuter Eighth, that is of Gut-&longs;tring. Hence it com­meth to pa&longs;&longs;e that, &longs;tringing an In&longs;trument with Chords of Gold, and another with Chords of Bra&longs;&longs;e, if they &longs;hall be of the &longs;ame length, thickne&longs;&longs;e, and Tention, Gold being almo&longs;t twice as heavy, the Strings &longs;hall prove about a Fifth more Grave. And here it is to be noted, that the Gravity of the Moveable more re­&longs;i&longs;teth the Velocity, than the thickne&longs;&longs;e doth; contrary to what others at the fir&longs;t would think: for indeed, in appearance, its more rea&longs;onable, that the Velocity &longs;hould be retarded by the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Medium again&longs;t Opening in a Moveable thick and light, than in one grave and &longs;lender: and yet in this ca&longs;e it happeneth quite contrary. But pur&longs;uing our fir&longs;t Intent, I &longs;ay, That the ncere&longs;t and immediate rea&longs;ons of the Forms of Mu&longs;ical Intervals, is neither the length of the Chord, nor the Tention, nor the thickne&longs;&longs;e, but the proportion of the numbers of the Vibrations, and Percu&longs;&longs;ions of the Undulations of the Air that beat upon the Drum of our Ear, which it &longs;elf al&longs;o doth tremulate under the &longs;ame mea&longs;ures of Time. Having e&longs;tabli&longs;hed this Point, we may, perhaps, a&longs;&longs;ign a very apt rea&longs;on, whence it commeth, that of tho&longs;e Sounds that are different in Tone, &longs;ome Couples are re­ceived with great delight by our Sence, others with le&longs;s, and others occa&longs;ion in us a very great di&longs;turbance; which is to &longs;eek a rea&longs;on of the Con&longs;onances more or le&longs;&longs;e perfect, and of Di&longs;lo­nances. The mole&longs;tation and har&longs;hne&longs;&longs;e of the&longs;e proceeds, as I believe, from the di&longs;cordant Pul&longs;ations of two different Tones, which di&longs;proportionally &longs;trike the Drum of our Ear: and the Di&longs;&longs;onances &longs;hall be extreme har&longs;h, in ca&longs;e the Times of the Vi­brations were incommen&longs;urable. For one of which take that, when of two Chords &longs;et to an Uni&longs;on, one is &longs;ounded, and &longs;uch a part of another, as is the Side of the Square of its Diameter; a Di&longs;&longs;onance like to the ^{*} Tritone, or Semi-diapente. Con&longs;onan­ces, and with plea&longs;ure received, &longs;hall tho&longs;e Couples of Sounds be, that &longs;hall &longs;trike in &longs;ome order upon the Drum; which order requireth, fir&longs;t, that the Pul&longs;ations made in the &longs;ame Time be commen&longs;urable in number, to the end, the Cartillage of the Drum, may not &longs;tand in the perpetual Torment of a double inflection of allowing and obeying the ever di&longs;agreeing Percu&longs;&longs;ions. Therefore the fir&longs;t and mo&longs;t grateful Con&longs;onance &longs;hall be the Eighth, being, that for every &longs;troke, that the Grave-&longs;tring or Chord giveth upon the Drum, the Acute giveth, two; &longs;o that both beat together in every &longs;econd Vibration of the Acute Chord; and &longs;o of the whole number of &longs;trokes, the one half accord to &longs;trike together, but the &longs;trokes of the Chords that are Uni&longs;ons, alwayes joyn both together, and therefore they are, as if they were of the &longs;ame Chord, nor make they a Con&longs;onance. The Fifth delighteth likewi&longs;e, in regard, that for every two &longs;troaks of the Grave Chord, the Acute giveth three: from whence it followeth, that numbering the Vibrations of the Acute Chord, the third part of that number will agree to beat together; that is, two Solitary ones interpo&longs;e between every couple of Con&longs;onances; and in the Di­ate&longs;&longs;eron there interpo&longs;e three. In the &longs;econd, that is in the Se&longs;-quioctave Tone for every nine Pul&longs;ations, one onely &longs;trikes in Con­&longs;ort with the other of the Graver Chord; all the re&longs;t are Di&longs;cords, and received upon the Drum with regret, and are judged Di&longs;&longs;o­nances by the Ear.

* Or a fal&longs;e Fifth.

SIMP. I could wi&longs;h this Di&longs;cour&longs;e were a little explained.

SALV. Suppo&longs;e this line A B the Space, and dilating of a Vi­bration of the Grave Chord; and the line C D that of the Acute Chord, which with the other giveth the Eighth: and let A B be divided in the mid&longs;t in E. It is manife&longs;t, that the Chords begin­ing to move at the terms A and C, by that time the Acute Vibra­tion &longs;hall be come to the term D, the other

&longs;hall be di&longs;tended onely to the half E, which not being the bound or term of the Motion, it &longs;trikes not: but yet a &longs;troak is made in D. The Vibrations afterwards returning from D to C, the other pa&longs;&longs;eth from E to B, where­upon the two Percu&longs;&longs;ions of B and C &longs;trike both together upon the Drum: and &longs;o con­tinuing to reiterate the like &longs;ub&longs;equent Vi­brations; one &longs;hall &longs;ee, that the union of the Percu&longs;&longs;ions of the Vibrations C D with tho&longs;e of A B, happen al­ternately every other time: but the Pullations of the terms A B are alwayes accompanied with one of C D, and that alwayes the &longs;ame: which is manife&longs;t, for &longs;uppo&longs;ing that A and C &longs;trike to­gether; in the time that A is pa&longs;&longs;ing to B, C goeth to D, and returneth back to C: &longs;o that the &longs;troaks at B and C are al&longs;o together. But now let the two Vibrations A B and C D be tho&longs;e that produce the Diapente, the times of which are in proportion Se&longs;quialter, and divide A B of the Grave Chord, in three equal parts in E and O; And &longs;uppo&longs;e the Vibrations to begin at the &longs;ame moment from the terms A and C: It is manife&longs;t, that at the &longs;troke that &longs;hall be made in D, the Vibration of A B &longs;hall have got no farther than O, the Drum therefore receiveth the Pul&longs;a­tion D onely: again in the return from D to C, the other Vibra­tion pa&longs;&longs;eth from O to B, and returneth to O, making the Pul­&longs;ation in B, which likewi&longs;e is &longs;olitary, and in Counter-time, (an accident to be con&longs;idered:) for we having &longs;uppo&longs;ed the fir&longs;t Pul&longs;ations to be made at the &longs;ame moment in the terms A and C, the &longs;econd, which was onely by the term D, was made as long after as the time of the tran&longs;ition C D, that is A O, imports; but that which followeth, made in B, is di&longs;tant from the other one­ly &longs;o much as is the time O B, which is the half: afterwards con­tinuing the Recur&longs;ion from O to A, whil&longs;t the other goeth from C to D, the two Pul&longs;ations come to be made both at once in A and D. There afterwards follow other Periods like to the&longs;e, that is, with the interpo&longs;ition of two &longs;ingle and &longs;olitary Pul&longs;ations of the Acute Chord, and one of the Grave Chord, likewi&longs;e &longs;olita­ry, is interpo&longs;ed between the two &longs;olitary &longs;trokes of the Acute. So that if we did but &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time divided into Moments, that is, into &longs;mall equal Particles: &longs;uppo&longs;ing that in the two fir&longs;t moments, I pa&longs;&longs;ed from the Concordant Pul&longs;ations made in A and C to O and D, and that in D, I make a Percu&longs;&longs;ion: and that in the third and fourth moment I return from D to C, &longs;triking in C, and that from O, I pa&longs;t to B, and returned to O, &longs;triking in B; and that la&longs;tly in the fifth and &longs;ixth moment from O and C, I pa&longs;t to A and D &longs;triking in both: we &longs;hall have the Pul&longs;ations di&longs;tributed with &longs;uch order upon the Drum, that &longs;uppo&longs;ing the Pul&longs;ations of the two Chords in the &longs;ame in&longs;tant, it &longs;hall two moments after receive a &longs;olitary Percu&longs;&longs;ion, in the third moment anothor, &longs;oli­tary likewi&longs;e, in the fourth another &longs;ingle one, and two moments after, that is, in the &longs;ixth, two together; and here ends the Period, and, if I may &longs;o &longs;ay, Anomaly; which Period is oft-times afterwards replicated.

SAGR. I can hold no longer, but mu&longs;t needs expre&longs;&longs;e the con­tent I take in hearing rea&longs;ons &longs;o appo&longs;itely a&longs;&longs;igned of effects that have &longs;o long time held me in darkne&longs;&longs;e and blindne&longs;&longs;e. Now I know why the Uni&longs;on differeth not at all from a &longs;ingle Tone: I &longs;ee why the Eighth is the principal Con&longs;onance, but withal &longs;o like to an Uni&longs;on, that, as an Uni&longs;on, it is taken and cojoyned with others: it re&longs;embleth an Uni&longs;on, for that whereas the Pul­&longs;ations of Chords &longs;et to an Uni&longs;on, keep time in &longs;triking, the&longs;e of the Grave Chord in an Eighth alwayes keep time with tho&longs;e of the Acute, and of the&longs;e one interpo&longs;eth alone, and in equal di&longs;tances, and as, one may &longs;ay, without any variety, whereupon that Con&longs;onance is over &longs;weet. But the Fifth, with tho&longs;e its Counter-times, and with the interpo&longs;ures of two &longs;olitary Pul&longs;a­tions of the Acute Chord, and one of the Grave Chord, between the Couples of Di&longs;cordant Pul&longs;ations, and tho&longs;e three &longs;olitary ones, with an interval of time, as great as the half of that which interpo&longs;eth between each Couple, and the &longs;olitary Percu&longs;&longs;ions of the Acute Chord, maketh &longs;uch a Titillation and Tickling upon the Cartillage of the Drum of the Ear, that al­laying the Dulcity with a mixture of Acrimony, it &longs;eemeth at one and the &longs;ame time to ki&longs;&longs;e and bite.

SALV. It is convenient, in regard I &longs;ee, that you take &longs;uch de­light in the&longs;e Novelties, that I &longs;hew you the way whereby the Eye al&longs;o, and not the Ear alone, may recreate it &longs;elf in beholding the &longs;ame &longs;ports that the Ear feeleth. Su&longs;pend Balls of Lead or o­ther heavy matter on three &longs;trings of different lengths, but in &longs;uch proportion, that while the longer maketh two Vibrations, the &longs;horter may make four, and the middle one three; which will happen, when the longe&longs;t containeth &longs;ixteen feet, or other mea&longs;ures, of which the middle one containeth nine, and the &longs;horte&longs;t four: and removing them all together from Perpendi­cularity, and then letting them go, you &longs;hall &longs;ee a plea&longs;ing In­termixtion of the &longs;aid Pendulums with various encounters, but &longs;uch, that, at every fourth Vibration of the longe&longs;t, all the three will concurre in one and the &longs;ame term together, and then again will depart from it, reiterating anew the &longs;ame Period: the which commixture of Vibrations, is the &longs;ame, that being made by the Chords, pre&longs;ents to the Ear an Eighth, with a Fifth in the mid&longs;t. And if you qualifie the length of other &longs;trings in the like di&longs;po­&longs;ure, &longs;o that their Vibrations an&longs;wer to tho&longs;e of other Mu&longs;ical, but Con&longs;onant Intervals, you &longs;hall &longs;ee other and other Inter­weavings, and alwaies &longs;uch, that in determinate times, and after determinate numbers of Vibrations, all the &longs;trings (be they three, or be they four) will agree to joyn in the &longs;ame moment, in the term of their Recur&longs;ions, and from thence to begin &longs;uch another Period: but if the Vibrations of two or more &longs;trings are either Incommen&longs;urable, &longs;o, that they never return harmoniou&longs;ly to ter­minate determinate numbers of Vibrations, or though they be not Incommen&longs;urable, yet if they return not till after a long time, and after a great number of Vibrations, then the &longs;ight is con­founded in the di&longs;orderly order of irregular Intermixtures, and the Ear with wearine&longs;&longs;e and regret receiveth the intemperate Im­pul&longs;es of the Airs Tremulations, that without Order or Rule, &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively beat upon its Drum.

But whither, my Ma&longs;ters, have we been tran&longs;ported for &longs;o many hours by various Problems, and unlook't for Di&longs;cour&longs;es? We have made it Night, and yet we have handled few or none of the points propounded; nay we have &longs;o lo&longs;t our way, that I &longs;car&longs;e remember our fir&longs;t entrance, and that &longs;mall Introduction, which we laid down, as the Hypothe&longs;is and beginning of the fu­ture Demon&longs;trations.

SAGR It will be convenient, therefore, that we break up our Conference for this time, giving our Minds leave to compo&longs;e them&longs;elves in the Nights Repo&longs;e, that we may to Morrow (if you plea&longs;e &longs;o far to favour us) rea&longs;&longs;ume the Di&longs;cour&longs;es de&longs;ired, and chiefly intended.

SALV. I &longs;hall not fail to be here to Morrow at the u&longs;ual hour, to &longs;erve and enjoy you.

The End of the Fir&longs;t Dialogue.

GALILEUS, HIS DIALOGUES OF MOTION.

The Second Dialogue.

INTERLOCUTORS,

SALVIATUS, SAGREDUS, and SIMPLICIUS.

SAGREDUS.

Simplicius, and I, &longs;taid expecting your com­ing, and we have been trying to recall to memory our la&longs;t Con&longs;ideration, which, as the Principle and Suppo&longs;ition, on which you ground the Conclu&longs;ions that you in­tended to Demon&longs;trate to us, was that Re&longs;i&longs;tance, that all Bodies have to Fracti­on, depending on that Cement, that con­nects and glutinates the parts, &longs;o, as that they do not &longs;eparate and divide without a powerful attraction: and our enquiry hath been, what might be the Cau&longs;e of that Coherence, which in &longs;ome Solids is very vigorous; propounding that of Vacuum for the principal, which afterwards occa&longs;ioned &longs;o many Digre&longs;&longs;ions as held us the whole day, and far from the matter at fir&longs;t propo&longs;ed, which was the Contemplation of the Re­&longs;i&longs;tances of Solids to Fraction.

SALV. I remember all that hath been &longs;aid, and returning to our begun di&longs;cour&longs;e; What ever this Re&longs;i&longs;tance of Solids to brea­king by a violent attraction, is &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be, it is &longs;ufficient, that it is to be found in them: which, though it be very great again&longs;t the &longs;trength of one that draweth them &longs;treight out, it is ob&longs;erved to be le&longs;&longs;e in forcing them tran&longs;ver&longs;ely, or &longs;idewaies: and thus we &longs;ee, for example, a rod of Steel, or Gla&longs;&longs;e to &longs;u&longs;tain the length-waies a weight of a thou&longs;and pounds, which, fa&longs;tned at Right-Angles in­to a Wall, will break if you hang upon it but only fifty. And of this &longs;econd Re&longs;i&longs;tance we are to &longs;peak, enquiring, according to what proportions it is found in Pri&longs;mes, and Cylinders of like and unlike figure, length, and thickne&longs;s, and, withal, of the &longs;ame mat­ter. In which Speculation, I take for a known Principle, that which in the Mechanicks is demon&longs;trated among&longs;t the Pa&longs;&longs;ions of the Vectis, which we call the Leaver: namely, That in that u&longs;e of the Leaver, the Force is to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance in Reciprocal proportion, as the Di&longs;tances from the Fulciment to the &longs;aid Force and the Re­&longs;i&longs;tance.

SIMP. This Ari&longs;totle, in his Mechanicks, demon&longs;trated before any other man.

SALV. I am content to grant him the precedency in time, but for the firmne&longs;&longs;e o&longs; Demon&longs;tration, I think, that Archimedesought to be preferred far before him, on one &longs;ole Propo&longs;ition of whom, by him demon&longs;trated in his Book, De Equiponderantium,depend the Rea&longs;ons, not only of the Leaver, but of the greater part of the other Mechanick In&longs;truments.

SAGR. But &longs;ince that this Principle is the foundation of all that which you intend to demon&longs;trate to us, it would be very re­qui&longs;ite, that you produce us the proof of this &longs;ame Suppo&longs;ition, if it be not too long a work, giving us a full and perfect informati­on thereof.

SALV. Though I am to do this, yet it will be better, that I lead you into the field of all our future Speculations, by an enterance &longs;omewhat different from that of Archimedes; and that, &longs;uppo­&longs;ing no more, but only that equal Weights, put into a Ballance of equal Arms, make an Equilibrium, (a Principle likewi&longs;e &longs;uppo&longs;ed by Archimedes him&longs;elf.) I come, in the next place, to demon­&longs;trate to you, that not only it is as true as the other, That unequal Weights make an Equilibrium in a Stiliard of Armes unequal, ac­cording to the proportion of tho&longs;e Weights Reciprocally &longs;u&longs;pen­ded, but that it is one and the &longs;ame thing to place equal Weights at equal di&longs;tances, as to place unequal Weights at di&longs;tances that are in Reciprocal Proportion to the Weights. Now for a plain Demon&longs;tration of what I &longs;ay, de&longs;cribe a Solid Pri&longs;m or Cylinder A B, [as in Figure 1. at the end of this Dialogue,] &longs;u&longs;pended by its ends at the Line H I, and &longs;u&longs;tained by two Cords, H A, and I B. It is manife&longs;t, that if I &longs;u&longs;pend the whole by the Cord C, placed in the middle of the Beam or Ballance H I, the Pri&longs;m A B will be equilibrated, one half of its weight, being on one &longs;ide, and the other half on the other &longs;ide of the Point of Su&longs;pen&longs;ion C by the Princi­ple that we pre&longs;uppo&longs;ed. Now let the Pri&longs;m be divided into un­equal parts by the Line D, and let the part D A be grea­ter, and D B le&longs;&longs;er; and to the end, that &longs;uch divi&longs;ion being made, the Parts of the Pri&longs;m may re&longs;t in the &longs;ame &longs;cituation and con&longs;ti­tution, in re&longs;pect of the Line H I, let us help it with a Cord E D, which, being fa&longs;tened in the Point E, &longs;u&longs;taineth the parts A D, and D B: It is not to be doubted, but that there being no local muta­tion in the Pri&longs;m, in re&longs;pect of the Ballance H I, it &longs;hall remain in the &longs;ame &longs;tate of Equilibration. But it will re&longs;t in the &longs;ame Con­&longs;titution likewi&longs;e, if the Part of the Pri&longs;m, that is now &longs;u&longs;pended at the two extreams, or ends with Cords A H and D E, be hanged at one &longs;ole Cord G L, placed in the mid&longs;t: and likewi&longs;e the other part D B, will not change &longs;tate, if &longs;u&longs;pended by the middle, and &longs;u&longs;tained by the Cord F M. So that the Cords H A, E D, and I B being untied, and only the two Cords G L, and F M being left, the Equilibrium will &longs;till remain, the Su&longs;pen&longs;ion being &longs;till made at the Point C. Now, here let us confider, that we have two Grave Bodies A D, and D B, hanging at the terms G and F of a Beam G F, in which the Equilibrium is made at the Point C: in &longs;uch manner, that the di&longs;tance of the &longs;u&longs;pen&longs;ion of the Weight A D from the Point C, is the Line C G, and the other part C F, is the di&longs;tance at which the other Weight D B hangeth. It remaineth, therefore, only to be demon&longs;trated, that tho&longs;e Di&longs;tances have the &longs;ame proportion to one another, as the Weights them&longs;elves have, but reciprocally taken: that is, that the di&longs;tance G C is to the di­&longs;tance C F, as the Pri&longs;m D B to the Pri&longs;m D A, which we prove thus. The Line G E being the half of E H, and E F the half of E I, all G F &longs;hall be equall to all H I, and therefore equal to C I: and taking away the common part C F, the remainder G C &longs;hall be equal to the remainder F I, that is, to F E: and C E taken in common, the two Lines G E and C F &longs;hall be equal: and, there­fore, as G E, is to E F, &longs;o is F C, to C G: but as G C is to E F, &longs;o is the double to the double; that is H E to E I; that is, the Pri&longs;m A D to the Pri&longs;m D B. Therefore by Equality of proportion, and by Conver&longs;ion, as the di&longs;tance G C is to the di&longs;tance C F, &longs;o is the Weight B D to the Weight D A: which is that that I was to demon&longs;trate. If you under&longs;tand this, I believe that you will not &longs;cruple to admit, that the two Pri&longs;mes A D, and D B make an Equilibrium in th Point C, for the half of the whole Solid A B is on the right hand of the Su&longs;pen&longs;ion C, and the other half on the left; and that in this manner there are repre&longs;ented two equal Weights, di&longs;po&longs;ed and di&longs;tended at two equal di&longs;tances. Again, that the two Pri&longs;mes A D, and D B, being reduced into two Dice, or two Balls, or into any two other Figures, (provided that they keep the &longs;ame Su&longs;pen&longs;ions G and F) do continue to make their Equilibrium in the Point C, I believe none can deny, for that it is mo&longs;t manife&longs;t, that Figures change not weight, where the &longs;ame quantity of matter is retained. From which we may gather the general Conclu&longs;ion, That two Weights, whatever they be, make an Equilibrium at Di&longs;tances reciprocally an&longs;wering to their Gra­vities. This Principle, therefore, being e&longs;tabli&longs;hed, before we pa&longs;s any farther, I am to propo&longs;e to Con&longs;ideration, how the&longs;e Forces, Re&longs;i&longs;tances, Moments, Figures, may be con&longs;idered in Ab&longs;tract, and &longs;eparate from Matter, as al&longs;o in Concrete and conjoyned with Matter; and in this manner tho&longs;e Accidents that agree with Figures, con&longs;idered as Immaterial, &longs;hall receive certain Modifica­tions, when we &longs;hall come to add Matter to them, and con&longs;equent­ly Gravity. As for example, if we take a Leaver, as for in&longs;tance B A [as in Fig. 2.] which, re&longs;ting upon the Fulciment E, we ap­ply to rai&longs;e the heavy Stone D: It is manife&longs;t by the Principle de­mon&longs;trated, that the Force placed at the end B, &longs;hall &longs;uffice to equal the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Weight D, if &longs;o be, that its Moment have the &longs;ame proportion to the Moment of the &longs;aid D, that the Di&longs;tance A C hath to the Di&longs;tance C B: and this is true, if we confider no other Moments than tho&longs;e of the &longs;imple Force in B, and of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance in D, as if the &longs;aid Leaver were immaterial, and void of Gravity. But if we bring to account the Gravity al&longs;o of the In&longs;trument or Leaver it &longs;elf, which hapneth &longs;ometimes to be of Wood, and &longs;ometimes of Iron; it is manife&longs;t, that the weight of the Leaver, being added to the Force in B, it will alter the pro­portion, which it will be requi&longs;ite to deliver in other terms. And therefore before we pa&longs;&longs;e any farther, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary, that we di­&longs;tingui&longs;h between the&longs;e two waies of Con&longs;ideration, calling that a taking it ab&longs;olutely, when we &longs;uppo&longs;e the In&longs;trument to be taken in Ab&longs;tract, that is, disjunct from the Gravity of its own Matter; but conjoyning the Matter, as al&longs;o the Gravity, with &longs;imple and ab&longs;olute Figures, we will phra&longs;e the Figures conjoyn'd with the Matter, Moment, or Force compounded.

SAGR I mu&longs;t of nece&longs;&longs;ity break the Re&longs;olution I had taken, not to give occa&longs;ion of digre&longs;&longs;ing, for I &longs;hould not be able to &longs;et my &longs;elf to hear what remaines with attention, if a certain &longs;cruple were not removed that cometh into my head; and it is this, That I gue&longs;&longs;e you make compari&longs;on between the Force placed in B, and the total Gravity of the Stone D, of which Gravity me thinks, that one, and that, very probably, the greater part, re&longs;teth upon the Plane of the Horizon: &longs;o that----

SALV. I have rightly apprehended you, &longs;o that you need &longs;ay no more, but only take notice, that I named not the total Gravity of the Stone, but &longs;pake of the Moment that it hath, and exerci&longs;eth at the Point A, the extream term of the Leaver B A, which is ever le&longs;s than the entire weight of the Stone; and is variable according to the Figure of the Stone, and according as it hapneth to be more or le&longs;&longs;e elevated.

SAGR. I am &longs;atisfied in that particular, but I have one thing more to de&longs;ire, namely, that for my perfect information, you would demon&longs;trate to me the way, if there be one, how I may find what part of the total weight that is, which cometh to be born by the &longs;ubjacent Plane, and what that which gravitates upon the Leaver at the extream A.

SALV. Becau&longs;e I can give you &longs;atisfaction in few words, I will not fail to &longs;erve you: therefore, de&longs;cribing a &longs;light Figure thereof, be plea&longs;ed to &longs;uppo&longs;e, that the Weight, who&longs;e Center of Gravity is A, [as in Fig. 3.] re&longs;teth upon the Horizon with the term B, and at the other end is born up by the Leaver C G, on the Fulciment N, by a Power placed in G: and that from the Center A, and term C, Perpendiculars be let fall to the Horizon, A O, and C F. I &longs;ay, That the Moment of the whole Weight &longs;hall have to the Moment of the whole Power in G, a proportion compounded of the Di­&longs;tance G N to the Di&longs;tance N C, and of F B to B O. Now, as the Line F B is to B O, &longs;o let N C be to X. And the whole Weight A being born by the two Powers placeed in B and C, the Power B is to C, as the di&longs;tance F O to O B: and by Compo&longs;ition, the two Powers B and C together, that is, the total Moment of the whole Weight A, is to the Power in C, as the Line F B is to the Line B O; that is, as N C to X: But the Moment of the Power in C is to the Moment of the Power in G, as the Di­&longs;tance G N is to N C: Therefore, by Perturbation of proportion, the whole Weight A is to the Moment of the Power in G, as G N to X: But the proportion of G N to X is compounded of the pro­portion G N to N C, and of that of N C to X; that is, of F B to B O: Therefore the Weight A is to the Power that bears it up in G, in a proportion compounded of G N to N C, and of that of F B to B O: which is that that was to be demon&longs;trated. Now re­turning to our fir&longs;t intended Argument, all things hitherto decla­red being under&longs;tood, it will not be hard to know the rea&longs;on, whence it cometh to pa&longs;&longs;e that

PROPOSITION I.

A Solid Pri&longs;m or Cylinder of Gla&longs;&longs;e, Steel, Wood, or other Frangible Matter, that being &longs;u&longs;pended length­waies, will &longs;u&longs;tain a very great Weight hanged Thereat, will, Sidewaies, (as we &longs;aid even now) be broken in pieces by a far le&longs;&longs;er Weight, according as its length &longs;hall exceed its thickne&longs;s.

Wherefore let us de&longs;cribe the Solid Pri&longs;m A B C D, fixed into a Wall by the Part A B, and in the other extream &longs;uppo&longs;e the Force of the Weight E; (alwaies under&longs;tanding the Wall to be erect to the Horizon, and the Pri&longs;m or Cylinder fa&longs;tened in the Wall at Right-An­gles) it is manife&longs;t, that being to break, it will be broken in the place B, where the Mortace in the Wall &longs;erveth for Fulciment, and B C for the part of the Leaver in which lieth the force, and the thick­ne&longs;&longs;e of the Solid B A is the other part of the Leaver, in which lieth the Re&longs;i&longs;tance, which con&longs;i&longs;teth in the unfa&longs;tening, or divi­ding, that is to be made of the part of the Solid B D, that is with­out the Wall from that which is within: and by what hath been declared, the Moment

of the Force placed in C, is to the Moment of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance that lieth in the thickne&longs;&longs;e of the Pri&longs;m, that is, in the Connection of the Ba&longs;e B A, with the parts con­tiguous to it, as the length C B is to the half of B A: And therefore the ab&longs;olute Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction that is in the Pri&longs;m B D, (which ab&longs;olute Re&longs;i­&longs;tance is that which is made by drawing it downwards, for at that time the motion of the Mover is the &longs;ame with that of the Body Moved) again&longs;t the fracture to be made by help of the Leaver B C, is as the Length B C to the half of A B in the Pri&longs;m, which in the Cylinder is the Semidiameter of its Ba&longs;e. And this is our fir&longs;t Propo&longs;ition. And ob&longs;erve, that what I have &longs;aid ought to be un­der&longs;tood, when the Confideration of the proper Weight of the So­lid B D is removed: which Solid I have taken as weighing nothing. But in ca&longs;e we would bring its Gravity to account, conjoyning it with the Weight E, we ought to add to the Weight E the half of the Weight of the Solid B D: &longs;o that the Weight B D being v. gr. two pounds, and the Weight of E ten pounds, we are to take the Weight E, as if it were eleven pounds.

SIMP. And why not as if it were twelve?

SALV. The Weight E, Simplicius, hanging at the term C, gravitates in re&longs;pect of B C, with all its Moment of ten pounds, whereas if only B D were pendent, it would weigh with its whole Moment of two pounds; but, as you &longs;ee, that Solid is di&longs;tributed thorow all the length B C, uniformly, &longs;o that its parts near to the extream B, gravitate le&longs;&longs;e than the more remote: &longs;o that, in a word, compen&longs;ating tho&longs;e with the&longs;e, the weight of the whole Pri&longs;m is brought to operate under the Center of its Gravity, which an&longs;we­reth to the middle of the Leaver B C: But a Weight hanging at the end C, hath a Moment double to that which it would have hanging at the middle: And therefore the half of the Weight of the Pri&longs;m ought to be added to the Weight E, when we would u&longs;e the Moment of both, as placed in the Term C.

SIMP. I apprehend you very well, and, if I deceive not my &longs;elf, me thinks, that the Power of both the Weights B D and E, &longs;o placed, would have the &longs;ame Moment, as if the whole Weight of B D, and the double of E were hanged in the mid&longs;t of the Leaver B C.

SALV. It is exactly &longs;o, and you are to bear it in mind. Here we may immediatly under&longs;tand

PROPOSITION II.

How, and with what proportion, a Ruler, or Pri&longs;m, more broad than thick, re&longs;i&longs;teth Fraction, better if it be forced according to its breadth, than according to its thickne&longs;&longs;e.

For under&longs;tanding of which, let a Pri&longs;m be &longs;uppo&longs;ed A D: [as in Fig. 4.] who&longs;e breadth is A C, and its thickne&longs;s much le&longs;&longs;er C B: It is demanded, why we would attempt to break it edge-waies, as in the fir&longs;t Figure it will re&longs;i&longs;t the great Weight T, but placed flat-waies, as in the &longs;econd Figure, it will not re&longs;i&longs;t X, le&longs;&longs;er than T: Which is manife&longs;ted, &longs;ince we under&longs;tand the Fulciment, one while under the Line B C, and another while under C A, and the Di&longs;tances of the Forces to be alike in both Ca&longs;es, to wit, the length B D. But in the fir&longs;t Ca&longs;e, the Di&longs;tance of the Re­&longs;i&longs;tance from the Fulciment, which is the half of the Line C A, is greater than the Di&longs;tance in the other Ca&longs;e, which is the half of B C: Therefore the Force of the Weight T, mu&longs;t of nece&longs;&longs;ity be grea­ter than X, as much as the half of the breadth C A is greater than half the thichne&longs;&longs;e B C, the fir&longs;t &longs;erving for the Counter-Leaver of C A, and the &longs;econd of C B to overcome the &longs;ame Re&longs;i&longs;tance, that is the quantity of the Fibres, or &longs;trings of the whole Ba&longs;e A B. Conclude we therefore, that the &longs;aid Pri&longs;m or Ruler, which is broader than it is thick, re&longs;i&longs;teth, bresking more the edge-waies than the flat-waies, according to the Proportion of the breadth to the thickne&longs;s.

It is requi&longs;ite that we begin in the next place

PROPOSITION III.

To find according to what proportion the encrea&longs;e of the Moment of the proper Gravity is made in a Pri&longs;m or Cylinder, in relation to the proper Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction, whil&longs;t that being parallel to the Horizon, it is made longer and longer: Which Mo­ment I find to encrea&longs;e &longs;ucce&longs;sively in duplicate Pro­portion to that of the prolongation.

For demon&longs;tration whereof, de&longs;cribe the Pri&longs;m or Cylin­der A D, firmly fa&longs;tned in the Wall at the end A, and let it be equidi&longs;tant from the Horizon, and let the &longs;ame be under&longs;tood to be prolonged as far as E, adding thereto the part B E. It is manife&longs;t, that the prolongation of the Leaver A Bto C encrea&longs;eth, by it &longs;elf alone, that is taken ab&longs;olutely, the Moment of the Force pre&longs;&longs;ing again&longs;t the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Separation and Rupture to be made in A, according to the pro­portion of C A to B A: but, moreover, the Weight of the Solid affixed B E, encrea&longs;eth the Moment of the pre&longs;&longs;ing Gravity of the Weight of the Solid A B, according to the Proportion of the Pri&longs;m A E to the Pri&longs;m A B; which proportion is the &longs;ame as that of the length A C, to the length A B: Therefore it is clear that the two augmentations of the Lengths and of the Gravities being put together, the Moment compounded of both is in double

proportion to ei­ther of them. We conclude there­fore, That the Mo­ments of the For­ces of Pri&longs;mes and Cylinders of equal thickne&longs;&longs;e, but of unequal length, are to one another in duplicate proporti­on to that of their Lengths; that is, are as the Squares of their Lengths.

We will &longs;hew, in the &longs;econd place, according to what proportion the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of Fraction in Pri&longs;mes and Cylinders encrea&longs;eth, when they continue of the &longs;ame length, and encrea&longs;e in thickne&longs;s. And here I &longs;ay, that

PROPOSITION IV.

In Pri&longs;mes and Cylinders of equal length, but unequal thickne&longs;s, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction encrea&longs;eth in a proportion iriple to the Diameters of their Thickne&longs;&longs;es, that is, of their Ba&longs;es.

Let the two Cylinders be the&longs;e A and B, [as in Fig. 5.] who&longs;e equal lengths are D G, and F H, the unequal Ba&longs;es the Circles, who&longs;e Diameters are C D, and E F. I &longs;ay, that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder B is to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder A again&longs;t Fraction, in a proportion triple to that which the Diameter F E hath to the Diameter D C. For if we con&longs;ider the ab&longs;olute and &longs;imple Re&longs;i&longs;tance that re&longs;ides in the Ba&longs;es, that is, in the Circles E F, and D C to breaking, offering them vio­lence by pulling them end-waies, without all doubt, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder B, is &longs;o much greater than that of the Cylinder A, by how much the Circle E F is greater than C D; for the Fibres, Filaments, or tenacious parts, which hold together the Parts of the Solid, are &longs;o many the more. But if we con&longs;ider, that in offering them violence tran&longs;ver&longs;ly we make u&longs;e of two Leavers; of which the Parts or Di&longs;tances, at which the Forces are applied are the Lines D G, and F H, the Fulciments are in the Points D and F; but the other Parts or Di&longs;tances, at which the Re&longs;i&longs;tances are placed, are the Semidiameters of the Circles D C and E F, becau&longs;e the Fila­ments di&longs;per&longs;ed thorow the whole Superficies of the Circles are as if they were all reduced into the Centers: con&longs;idering, I &longs;ay, tho&longs;e Leavers, we would be under&longs;tood to intend, that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance in the Center of the Ba&longs;e E F again&longs;t the Force of H, is &longs;o much grea­ter than the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e C D, again&longs;t the Force placed in G, (and the Forces in G and H are of equal Leavers D G, and F H) as the Semidiameter F E is greater than the Semidiameter D C, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction, therefore, in the Cylinder B, encrea&longs;eth above the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder A, according to both the proportions of the Circles E F and D C, and of their Semidiameters, or, if you will, Diameters: But the proportion of the Circles is double of that of the Diameters; Therefore the pro­portion of the Re&longs;i&longs;tances, which is compounded of them, is in triplicate proportion of the &longs;aid Diameters: Which is that which I was to prove. But becau&longs;e al&longs;o the Cubes are in triplicate pro­portion to their Sides, we may likewi&longs;e conclude, That the Re&longs;i­&longs;tances of Cylinders of equal Length, are to one another as the Cubes of their Diameters.

From that which we have Demon&longs;trated we may likewi&longs;e con­clude, that

COROLARY.

The Re&longs;i&longs;tances of Pri&longs;ms, and Cylinders of equal length are in Se&longs;quialter proportion to that of the &longs;aid Cylinders.

The which is manife&longs;t, becau&longs;e the Pri&longs;ms and Cylinders, equal in height, are to one another, in the &longs;ame proportion as their Ba&longs;es; that is, the double of the Sides or Diameters of the &longs;aid Ba&longs;es: But the Re&longs;i&longs;tances (as hath been demon&longs;trated) are in triplicate proportion to the &longs;aid Sides or Diameters: Therefore the proportion of the Re&longs;i&longs;tances is Se&longs;quialter to the proportion of the &longs;aid Solids, and, con&longs;equently, to the Weights of the &longs;aid Solids.

SIMP. It is convenient, that, before we proceed any farther, I be re&longs;olved of a certain Doubt, and this it is, That I have not hi­therto heard propo&longs;ed to Con&longs;ideration another certain kind of Re&longs;i&longs;tance, that, in my opinion, is &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively dimini&longs;hed in So­lids, according as they are more and more prolonged, and not on­ly in u&longs;ing them &longs;idelongs, but al&longs;o leng thwaies, in the &longs;elf &longs;ame manner ju&longs;t as we &longs;ee a very long Cord to be much le&longs;&longs;e apt to &longs;u&longs;tain a great weight, than if it were &longs;hort: &longs;o that I believe, that a Ruler of Wood or Iron will &longs;u&longs;tain a much greater weight, if it &longs;hall be &longs;hort, than if it &longs;hall be very long; under&longs;tanding it al­waies to be u&longs;ed lengthwaies, and not tran&longs;ver&longs;ly; and al&longs;o its own weight being accounted for, which in the longer is greater.

SALV. I fear, Simplicius, that in this Point you, with many others, are deceived, if &longs;o be, that I have rightly apprehended your meaning, &longs;o that you would &longs;ay, that a Cord v. gr. forty yards long cannot &longs;u&longs;tain &longs;o much, as if u&longs;e were made but of one or two yards of the &longs;ame Rope.

SIMP. That is it, which I would have &longs;aid, and as yet it &longs;eemeth a very probable Propo&longs;ition.

SALV. But I hold it not only improbable, but fal&longs;e: and think that I can very ea&longs;ily reclaim you from your Errour. Therefore let us &longs;uppo&longs;e this Rope A B, [as in Fig. 6.] fa&longs;tned on high by the end A, and by the other end let there hang the Weight C, by the force of which, the &longs;aid Rope is to be broken. Do you a&longs;&longs;ign me the particular place, Simplicius, where the Rupture is to happen.

SIMP. Let it be in the place D.

SALV. I ask what is the cau&longs;e why it &longs;hould break in D.

SIMP. The rea&longs;on thereof is, becau&longs;e the Rope was not &longs;trong enough in that part, to &longs;u&longs;tain v. gr. an hundred pounds of weight, for &longs;o much is the Rope D B with the Stone C.

SALV. Therefore when ever &longs;uch a Rope &longs;hall come to be vio­lently &longs;tretched by tho&longs;e hundred pounds of weight, it &longs;hall break in that place.

SIMP So I think.

SALV. But tell me now; if one did hang the &longs;ame Weight, not at the end of the Rope B, but near to the point D, as for in&longs;tance, in E, or el&longs;e did tye the Rope not at the height A, but very near, and almo&longs;t at the Point D it &longs;elf, as in F, tell me, I &longs;ay, whether the Point D would feel the &longs;ame weight of an hundred pounds.

SIMP. It would &longs;o, &longs;till joyning the piece of Rope E B to the Stone C.

SALV. If then the Rope in the Point D commeth to be drawn by the &longs;aid hundred pounds of weight, it will break by your con­ce&longs;&longs;ion. And yet F E, is a &longs;mall piece of the length A B: why do you &longs;ay then, that the long Rope is weaker than the &longs;hort one? Be content, therefore, to &longs;uffer your &longs;elf to be reclaimed from an Errour, in which you have had many Companions, and tho&longs;e in other things very knowing. And let us go on: and having demon­&longs;trated, that Pri&longs;ms and Cylinders encrea&longs;e their Moments above their Re&longs;i&longs;tances, according to the Squares of their Lengths (alwaies provided, that they retain the &longs;ame thickne&longs;&longs;e) and that likewi&longs;e, the&longs;e that are equally long, but different in thickne&longs;&longs;e, encrea&longs;e their Re&longs;i&longs;tances according to the proportion of the Cubes of the Sides or Diameters of their Ba&longs;es, we may enquire what befal­leth to tho&longs;e Solids, being different in length and thickne&longs;s, in which I ob&longs;erve, that

PROPOSITION V.

Pri&longs;ms and Cylinders, of different length and thickne&longs;s, have their Re&longs;i&longs;tances again&longs;t Fraction, in a propor­tion compounded of the proportion of the Cubes of the Diameters of their Ba&longs;es, and of the proportion of their lengths reciprocally taken.

Let the&longs;e two A B C, and D E F, [as in Fig. 7.] be &longs;uch Cy­linders. I &longs;ay, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder A C &longs;hall be to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder D F, in a proportion com­pounded of the proportion of the Cube of the Diameter A B, to the Gube of the Diameter D E, and of the proportion of the Length E F to the Length B C. Suppo&longs;e E G equal to B C, and to the Lines A B, and D E, let C H be a third proportional, and I, a fourth; and as E F is to B C, &longs;o let I be to S. And becau&longs;e the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder A C is to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylin­der D G, as the Cube A B to the Cube D E; that is, as the Line A B to the Line I: and the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder G D is to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder D F, as the Length F E is to the Length E G; that is, as the Line I is to S: Therefore by Equali­ty of proportion, as the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder A C is to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder D F, &longs;o is the Line A B to S: But the Line A B is to S, in a proportion compounded of A B to I, and of I to S: Therefore the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder A C is to the Re­&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder D F, in a proportion compounded of A B to I, that is, as the Cube of A B to the Cube of D E, and of the proportion of the Line I to S; that is, of the Length E F to the Length B C: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

After the Propo&longs;ition la&longs;t demon&longs;trated, we will con&longs;ider what hapneth between like Cylinders and Pri&longs;ms, of which we will de­mon&longs;trate, how that

PROPOSITION VI.

Of like Cylinders and Pri&longs;ms the Moments compoun­ded, that is to &longs;ay, re&longs;ulting from their Gravities, and from their Lengths, which are, as it were, Lea­vers, have to one another a proportion Se&longs;quialter to that which is between the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of their &longs;ame Ba&longs;es.

For demon&longs;tration of which let us de&longs;cribe the two like Cy­linders A B, and C D, [as in Fig. 8.] I &longs;ay, that the Mo­ment of the Cylinder A B, to overcome the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of its Ba&longs;e B, hath to the Moment of C D, to overcome the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of its Ba&longs;e C, a proportion Se&longs;quialter to that which the &longs;ame Re­&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e B, hath to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e D: And becau&longs;e the Moments of the Solids A B, and C D, to over­come the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of their Ba&longs;es B and D, are compounded of their Gravities, and of the Forces of their Leavers, and the Force of the Leaver A B is equal to the Force of the Leaver C D, and that becau&longs;e the length A B hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Semi­diameter of the Ba&longs;e B, (by the &longs;imilitude of the Cylinders) that the Length C D hath to the Semidiameter of the Ba&longs;e D; it re­maineth, that the total Moment of the Cylinder A B, be to the total Moment of C D, as the &longs;ole Gravity of the Cylinder A B is to the &longs;ole Gravity of the Cylinder C D; that is, as the &longs;aid Cy­linder A B is to the &longs;aid C D: But the&longs;e are in triplicate propor­tion to the Diameters of their Ba&longs;es B and D; and the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of the &longs;ame Ba&longs;es, being to one another as the &longs;aid Ba&longs;es, they are con&longs;equently in duplicate proportion to their &longs;ame Ba&longs;es: There­fore the Moments of Cylinders are in Se&longs;quialter proportion to the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of their Ba&longs;es.

SIMP. This Propo&longs;ition, indeed, is not only new, but unexpe­cted to me, and at fir&longs;t &longs;ight, very remote from the judgment that I &longs;hould have conjecturally pa&longs;t upon it: for in regard, that the&longs;e Figures are in all other re&longs;pects alike, I &longs;hould have thought that their Moments likewi&longs;e &longs;hould have retained the &longs;ame proportion towards their proper Re&longs;i&longs;tances.

SAGR. This is the Demon&longs;tration of that Propo&longs;ition, that in the beginning of our Di&longs;cour&longs;es, I &longs;aid, I thought------I had &longs;ome glimps of.

SALV. That which now befalleth, Simplicius, hapned for &longs;ome time to my &longs;elf, believing, that the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of like Solids were alike, till that a certain, and that no very fixed or accurate Ob&longs;er­vation &longs;eemed to repre&longs;ent unto me, that Solids do not contain an equal tenure in their Toughne&longs;s, but that the bigger are le&longs;&longs;e apt to &longs;uffer violent accidents, as lu&longs;ty men are more damnified by their falls than little children; and, as in the begining we &longs;aid, we &longs;ee a great Beam or Column break to pieces falling from the &longs;ame height, and not a &longs;mall Pri&longs;in or little Cylinder of Marble. This &longs;ame Ob&longs;ervation gave me the hint for finding of that which I am now about to demon&longs;trate; a Quality truly admirable, for that among&longs;t the infinite Solid-like Figures, there are not &longs;o much as two, who&longs;e Moments retain the &longs;ame proportion towards their proper Re&longs;i&longs;tances.

SIMP. Now you put me in mind of &longs;omething in&longs;erted by Ari­&longs;totle among&longs;t his Mechanical Que&longs;tions, where he would give a Rea&longs;on, whence it is, that Beams the longer they are, they are by &longs;o much the more weak, and bend more and more, although the &longs;hort ones be the &longs;lendere&longs;t, and the long ones thicke&longs;t: and, if I well re­member, he reduceth the Rea&longs;on to the &longs;imple Leaver.

SALV. It is very true, and becau&longs;e the Solution &longs;eemeth not wholly to remove the cau&longs;e of doubting Mon&longs;ignore di Guevara,who, the truth is, with his mo&longs;t learned Commentaries hath highly enobled and illu&longs;trated that Work, enlargeth him&longs;elf with other accute Speculations for the obviating all difficulties, yet him&longs;elf al&longs;o remaining perplexed in this point, whether, the lengths and thickne&longs;&longs;es of &longs;uch Solid Figures, encrea&longs;ing with the &longs;elf &longs;ame proportion, they ought to retain the &longs;ame tenure in their Tough­ne&longs;&longs;es and Re&longs;i&longs;tances again&longs;t their breaking, and likewi&longs;e again&longs;t their bending. After I had long con&longs;idered thereon, I have, in this manner found, that which I am about to tell you. And fir&longs;t I will demon&longs;trate that

PROPOSITION VII.

Of like and heavy Pri&longs;ms or Cylinders there is one only, and no more, that is reduced (being charged with its own weight) to the ultimate &longs;tate between breaking and holding it &longs;elf together: &longs;othat every greater, as being unable to re&longs;i&longs;t its own weight, will break, and every le&longs;&longs;er re&longs;i&longs;teth &longs;ome Force that is employed again&longs;t it to break, it.

Let the heavy Pri&longs;m be A B [as in Fig 9.] reduced to the utmo&longs;t length of its Con&longs;i&longs;tance, &longs;o that being lengthned never &longs;o little more it will break: I &longs;ay, that this is the only one among&longs;t all tho&longs;e that are like unto it, (which yet are infinite) that is capable of being reduced to that dubious and tickli&longs;h &longs;tate; &longs;o that every greater being oppre&longs;&longs;ed with its own weight will break, and every le&longs;&longs;er not, nay, will be able to re&longs;i&longs;t &longs;ome additi­on of a new violence, over and above that of its own weight. Fir&longs;t, take the Pri&longs;m C E, like to, and greater than A B. I &longs;ay, that this cannot con&longs;i&longs;t, but will break, being overcome by its own Gravity. Suppo&longs;e the part C D as long as A B. And becau&longs;e the Re&longs;i&longs;tance C D is to that of A B, as the Cube of the thickne&longs;&longs;e of C D to the Cube of the thickne&longs;s of A B; that is, as the Pri&longs;m C E to the Pri&longs;m A B (being alike:) Therefore the Weight of C E is the greate&longs;t that can be &longs;u&longs;tained at the length of the Pri&longs;m C D: But the Length C E is greater: Therefore the Pri&longs;m C E will break. But let F G be le&longs;&longs;et: it &longs;hall be demon&longs;trated like­wi&longs;e (&longs;uppo&longs;ing F H equal to B A) that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of F G is to that of A B, as the Pri&longs;m F G is to the Pri&longs;m A B, in ca&longs;e that the Di&longs;tance A B, that is F H, were equal to F G, but it is greater: Therefore the Moment of the Pri&longs;m F G, placed in G, doth not &longs;uffice to break the Pri&longs;m F G.

SAGR. A mo&longs;t manife&longs;t and brief Demon&longs;tration, inferring the truth and nece&longs;&longs;ity of a Propo&longs;ition that at fir&longs;t &longs;ight &longs;eemeth far from probability. It would be requi&longs;ite, therefore, to alter much the proportion betwixt the Length and Thickne&longs;&longs;e of the greater Pri&longs;m by making it thicker or &longs;horter, to the end it might be re­duced to that nice &longs;tate of indifferency between holding and brea­king; and the Inve&longs;tigation of that &longs;ame State, as I think, would be no le&longs;&longs;e ingenuous.

SALV. Nay, rather more, as it is al&longs;o more laborious: and I am &longs;ure I have &longs;pent no &longs;mall time to find it; and I will now impart it to you: Therefore

PROP. VIII. PROBL. I.

A Cylinder or Pri&longs;m of the utmo&longs;t length not to be bro­ken by its own weight, and al&longs;o a greaver length, be­ing given, to find the thickne&longs;&longs;e of another Cylinder or Pri&longs;m that under-given length is the only one, and bigge&longs;t, that can re&longs;i&longs;t its own weight.

Let the Cylinder B C [as in Fig. 10.] be the bigge&longs;t that can re&longs;i&longs;t its own weight, and let D E be a Length greater than A C; it is required to find the Thickne&longs;&longs;e of the Cylin­der, that under the Length D E is the greate&longs;t re&longs;i&longs;ting its own weight. Let I be a third proportional to the Lengths D E, and A C; and as D E is to I, &longs;o let the Diameter F D be to the Dia­meter B A: and make the Cylinder F E. I &longs;ay, that this is the big­ge&longs;t, and only one among&longs;t all that are like to it that re&longs;i&longs;teth its own weight. To the Lines D C and I let M be a third propor­tional, and O a fourth. And &longs;uppo&longs;e F G equal to A C. And be­cau&longs;e the Diameter F D is to the Diameter A B, as the Line D E to I, and O is a fourth proportional to D E and I, the Cube of F D &longs;hall be to the Cube of B A as D E is to O: But as the Cube of F D is to the Cube of B A, &longs;o is the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder D G to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder B C: Therefore the Re&longs;i­&longs;tance of the Cylinder D G is to that of the Cylinder B C, as the Line D F is to O. And becau&longs;e the Moment of the Cylinder B C is equal to its Re&longs;i&longs;tance, if we &longs;hew that the Moment of the Cylin­der F E is to the Moment of the Cylinder B C, as the Re&longs;i&longs;tance D F to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance B A; that is, as the Cube of F D to the Cube of B A; that is, as the Line D E to O, we &longs;hall have our intent: that is, that the Moment of the Cylinder F E is equal to the Re&longs;i­&longs;tance placed in F D. The Moment of the Cylinder F E is to the Moment of the Cylinder D G, as the Square of D E is to the Square of A C; that is, as the Line D E to I: But the Moment of the Cylinder D G is to the Moment of the Cylinder B C, as the Square D F to the Square B A; that is, as the Square of D E to the Square of I; that is, as the Square of I to the Square of M; that is, as I to O: Therefore, by Equality of proportion, as the Mo­ment of the Cylinder F E is to the Moment of the Cylinder B C, &longs;o is the Line D E to O; that is, the Cube D F to the Cube B A; that is, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e D F to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e B A: Which is that that was &longs;ought.

SAGR This, Salviatus, is a long Demon&longs;tration, and very hard to be born in mind at the fir&longs;t hearing, therefore I could wi&longs;h, that you would plea&longs;e to repeat it.

SALV. I will do what you &longs;hall command; but haply it would be better to produce one more conci&longs;e and &longs;hort: but then it will be requi&longs;ite to de&longs;cribe a Figure &longs;omewhat different.

SAGR. The favour will then be the greater: and be&longs;tow upon me the draught of that already explained, that I may at my lea&longs;ure con&longs;ider it again.

SALV. I will not fail to &longs;erve you. Now, &longs;uppo&longs;e a Cylinder A, [as in Fig. 11.] the Diameter of who&longs;e Ba&longs;e let be the Line D C, and let this A be the greate&longs;t that can &longs;u&longs;tain it &longs;elf and not break, than which we will find a bigger, which likewi&longs;e &longs;hall be the big­ge&longs;t al&longs;o, and the only one that &longs;u&longs;taineth it &longs;elf. Let us de&longs;ire one like to the &longs;aid A, and as long as the a&longs;&longs;igned Line, and let this be v. gr. E, the Diameter of who&longs;e Ba&longs;e let be K L; and to the two Lines D C, and K L let M N be a third proportional; which let be the Diameter of the Ba&longs;e of the Cylinder X, in length equal to E. I &longs;ay, that this X is that which we &longs;eek. And becau&longs;e the Re&longs;i­&longs;tance D C is to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance K L, as the Square D C to the Square K L; that is, as the Square K L to the Square M N; that is, as the Cylinder E to the Cylinder X; that is, as the Moment E to the Moment X: But the Re&longs;i&longs;tance K L is to M N, as the Cube of K L is to the Cube of M N; that is, as the Cube B C to the Cube K L; that is, as the Cylinder A to the Cylinder E; that is, as the Moment A to the Moment E: Therefore, by Perturbation of proportion, as the Re&longs;i&longs;tance D C is to M N, &longs;o is the Moment A to the Moment X: Therefore the Pri&longs;m X, is in the &longs;ame Con&longs;ti­tution of Moment and Re&longs;i&longs;tance as the Pri&longs;m A.

The la&longs;t Problem performed another way.

But let us make the Problem more general, and let the Propo­&longs;ition be this:

The Cylinder A C being given, and its Moment to-wards its Re&longs;i&longs;tance being &longs;uppo&longs;ed at plea&longs;ure, and any Length D E being a&longs;signed, to find the Thick­ne&longs;&longs;e af the Cylinder who&longs;e Length is D E, and who&longs;e Moment towards its Re&longs;i&longs;tance retaineth the &longs;ame proportion, that the Moment of the Cylinder A C doth to its Re&longs;i&longs;tance.

The la&longs;t Propo&longs;i­tion made more ge­neral.

Rea&longs;&longs;uming the above &longs;aid Figure and almo&longs;t the &longs;ame Me­thod, we will &longs;ay: Becau&longs;e the Moment of the Cylinder F E hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Moment of the part D G, that the Square E D hath to the Square F G; that is that the Line D E hath to I: and becau&longs;e the Moment of the Cylinder F G is to the Moment of the Cylinder A C, as the Square F D to the Square A B; that is, as the Square D E to the Square I; that is, as the Square I to the Square M; that is, as the Line I to O: Therefore, ex æquali, the Moment of the Cylinder F E hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Moment of the Cylinder A C, that the Line D E hath to the Line O; that is, that the Cube D E hath to the Cube of I; that is, that the Cube of F D hath to the Cube of A B; that is, that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e F D hath to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Ba&longs;e A B: Which was to be performed.

Now, let it be ob&longs;erved, that from the things hitherto demon&longs;tra­ted, we may plainly gather, how Impo&longs;&longs;ible it is, not only for Art, but for Nature her &longs;elf to encrea&longs;e her Machines to an immen&longs;e Va&longs;t­ne&longs;&longs;e: &longs;o that it would be impo&longs;&longs;ible by Art to build extraordina­ry va&longs;t Ships, Palaces, or Temples, who&longs;e ^{*} Oars, Sail-yards, Beams, Iron Bolts, and, in a word, their other parts &longs;hould con&longs;i&longs;t or hold together: neither again could Nature make Trees of unmea&longs;ura­ble greatne&longs;&longs;e, for that their Arms or Bows being oppre&longs;&longs;ed with their own weight would at la&longs;t break: and likewi&longs;e it would be impo&longs;&longs;ible for her to make &longs;tructures of Bones for men, Hor&longs;es, or other Animals, that might &longs;ub&longs;i&longs;t, and proportionatly perform their Offices, when tho&longs;e Animals &longs;hould be augmented to im­men&longs;e heights, unle&longs;&longs;e &longs;he &longs;hould take Matter much more hard and Refi&longs;ting than that which &longs;he commonly u&longs;eth, or el&longs;e &longs;hould de­form tho&longs;e Bones by augmenting them beyond their due Symetry, and making the Figure or &longs;hape of the Animal to become mon­&longs;trou&longs;ly big: Which haply was hinted by my mo&longs;t Witty Poet, where de&longs;cribing an huge Giant, he &longs;aith,

* Oares are u&longs;ed in the Ships or Gallies of the Mediterrane, up­on which our Author was a Coa&longs;ter.

Bones of Animals magnified beyond their ratural &longs;ize, would not &longs;ub&longs;i&longs;t, if it be required to retain the &longs;ame proportion of thick­ne&longs;s and hardne&longs;s in them that is in tho&longs;e of Natural Animals.

Non &longs;i puo compartir quanto &longs;ia lungo,

Si &longs;mi&longs;uratamente è tutto gro&longs;&longs;o.

Example of the Bone of an Animal enlarged to thrice the Natural pro­portion, how much thicker it ought to be to perform its office.

And for a &longs;hort example of this that I &longs;ay, [as in Fig. 12.] I have heretofore drawn the Figure of a Bone only trebled in Length, and augmented in Thickne&longs;&longs;e in &longs;uch proportion, as that it may in its great Animal perform the office proportionate to that of the le&longs;&longs;er Bone in a &longs;maller Animal, and the Figures are the&longs;e: whereby you &longs;ee what a di&longs;proportionate Figure that of the aug­mented Bone becometh. Whence it is manife&longs;t, that he that would in an huge Giant keep the proportions that the Members have in an ordinary Man, mu&longs;t either find Matter much more hard and re­&longs;i&longs;ting to make Bone of, or el&longs;e mu&longs;t admit that its Strength is in proportion much more weak than in Men of middle Stature: other­wi&longs;e, encrea&longs;ing the Giant to an immea&longs;urable height he would be oppre&longs;&longs;ed, and fall under his own weight. Whereas on the con­trary, in dimini&longs;hing of Bodies we do not &longs;ee the Strength and Forces to dimini&longs;h in the &longs;ame proportion, nay, in the le&longs;&longs;er the Robu&longs;tiou&longs;ne&longs;&longs;e encrea&longs;eth with a great proportion. So that I believe, that a little Dog could carry on his back two or three Dogs equal to him&longs;elf, but I do not think that an Hor&longs;e could carry &longs;o much as one &longs;ingle Hor&longs;e of his own &longs;ize.

SIMP. But if it be &longs;o, I have great rea&longs;on to doubt the Im­men&longs;e bulks that we &longs;ee in Fi&longs;hes, for (if I rightly under&longs;tand you) a Whale &longs;hall be as big as ten Elephants, and yet they &longs;u­&longs;tain them&longs;elves.

SALV. Your doubt, Simplicius, prompts me with another Con­dition which I perceived not before, which is al&longs;o able to make Giants and other very big Animals to con&longs;i&longs;t, and act them&longs;elves no le&longs;&longs;e than &longs;maller, and this will happen when not only Strength is added to the Bones and other Parts, who&longs;e office it is to &longs;u&longs;tain their own and the &longs;upervenient weight; but the &longs;tructure of the Bones being left with the &longs;ame proportions, the &longs;ame Fabricks would ju&longs;t in the &longs;ame manner, yea, with much more ea&longs;e, con­&longs;i&longs;t, when the Gravity of the matter of tho&longs;e Bones, or that of the Fle&longs;h, or whatever el&longs;e is to re&longs;t it &longs;elf upon the Bones is dimini­&longs;hed in that proportion: and of this &longs;econd Artifice, Nature hath made u&longs;e in the framing of Fi&longs;hes, making their Bones, and Pulps, not only very light, but without any Gravity.

SIMP. I &longs;ee very well, Salviatus, whither your Di&longs;cour&longs;e ten­deth: you will &longs;ay, that becau&longs;e the Element of Water is the Ha­bitation of Fi&longs;hes, which by its Corpulence, or, as others will, by its Gravity dimini&longs;heth the weight of Bodies demerged in it, for that rea&longs;on the Matter of Fi&longs;hes, not weighing any thing, may be &longs;u&longs;tained without &longs;urcharging their Bones: but this doth not &longs;uf­fice, for although the re&longs;t of the &longs;ub&longs;tance of the Fi&longs;h weigh not, yet without doubt the matter of their Bones hath its weight: and who will &longs;ay, that the Rib of a Whale that is as big as a Beam doth not weigh very much, and in Water &longs;inketh to the Bot­tom? The&longs;e therefore &longs;hould not be able to &longs;ub&longs;i&longs;t in &longs;o va&longs;t a Bulk.

SALV. You argue very cunningly; and for an an&longs;wer to your Doubt, tell me, whether you have ob&longs;erved Fi&longs;hes to &longs;tand im­moveable under water at their plea&longs;ures, and not to de&longs;cend to­wards the Bottom, or rai&longs;e them&longs;elves towards the top without making &longs;ome motion with their Fins?

SIMP. This is a very manife&longs;t Ob&longs;ervation.

The Cau&longs;e why Fi&longs;hes do equili­brate them&longs;elves in the Water.

SALV. This power therefore that the Fi&longs;hes have to &longs;tay them­&longs;elves, as if they were immoveable in the mid&longs;t of the Water, is a mo&longs;t infallible argument, that the Compofition of their Corporeal Ma&longs;&longs;e equalleth the Specifick Gravity of the Water, &longs;o that if there be found in them &longs;ome parts that are more grave than the Water, it is nece&longs;&longs;arily requi&longs;ite that they have others &longs;o much le&longs;&longs;e grave, &longs;o that the Equilibrium may be ballanced. If therefore the Bones be more grave, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that the Pulps, or other Matters that are in them, be more light; and the&longs;e will with their lightne&longs;&longs;e counterpoi&longs;e and compen&longs;ate the weight of the Bones. So that in Aquatick Animals the quite contrary hapneth to that which befals the Terre&longs;trial, namely, that in the latter it is the of­fice of the Bones to &longs;u&longs;tain their own weight, and the weight of the Fle&longs;h; and in the former, the Fle&longs;h [if one may &longs;o call it]

beareth up its own weight, and that of the Bones. And therefore cea&longs;e to wonder how there may be mo&longs;t va&longs;t Animals in the Wa­ter, but not on the Earth, that is, in the Air.

Aquatick Animals greater than the Terre&longs;trial, and for what Rea&longs;on.

SIMP. I am &longs;atisfied, and moreover ob&longs;erve, that the&longs;e which we call Terre&longs;trial Animals, ought with more rea&longs;on to be called Aerial; becau&longs;e in the Air they really live, and by the Air they are environ'd, and of the Air they breath.

SAGR. The Di&longs;cour&longs;e of Simplicius plea&longs;eth me, as al&longs;o his Doubt and its Solution. And farthermore I comprehend very ea­&longs;ily, that one of the&longs;e huge Fi&longs;hes being haul'd on &longs;hore, could not perchance be able to &longs;u&longs;tain it &longs;elf for any time; but that the Con­nections of the Bones being relaxed, its Ma&longs;&longs;e would be cru&longs;h'd un­der its own weight.

SALV. For the pre&longs;ent, I encline to the &longs;ame Opinion: nor am I far from thinking that the &longs;ame would happen to that huge Ship, which floating in the Sea is not di&longs;&longs;olved by its weight, and the bur­den of its Lading and Artilery, but on dry ground, and environed with Air, it perhaps would fall in pieces. But let us pur&longs;ue our bu­&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e, and demon&longs;trate, that

PROP. IX. PROBL. II.

A Pri&longs;me or Cylinder with its weight, and the great­e&longs;t Weight &longs;u&longs;tained by it being given, to find the greate&longs;t Length, beyond which being prolonged. it would break under its own Weight.

Let there be given the Pri&longs;me A C (as in Fig. 13.) with its weight, and likewi&longs;e let the Weight D be given, the great­e&longs;t that can be &longs;u&longs;tained by the extreme C: it is required to finde the greate&longs;t Length unto which the &longs;aid Pri&longs;me may be pro­longed, without breaking. As the weight of the Pri&longs;me A C is to the Compound of the weights A C, with the double of the Weight D, &longs;o let the length C A be to C A H: between which let A G be a Mean-Proportional. I &longs;ay that A G is the Length &longs;ought. For the depre&longs;&longs;ing Moment of the Weight D in C, is equal to the Moment of the double weight D, if it be placed in the middle of A C, where is al&longs;o the Center of the Moment of the Pri&longs;me A C: The Moment, therefore, of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Pri&longs;me A C, which re&longs;ides in A, is equivalent to the gravi­tation of the double of the Weight D with the weight A C, but hanged in the mid&longs;t of A C. And becau&longs;e it hath been made, that as the Moment of the &longs;aid Weights &longs;o &longs;ituated, that is, of the double of D, with A C, is to the Moment of A C, &longs;o is H A to A C, between which A G is a Mean Proportional: There­fore the Moment of D doubled with the Moment of A C, is to the Moment A C, as the Square G A to the Square A C: But the pre&longs;&longs;ing Moment of the Pri&longs;me G A, is to the Moment of A C, as the Square G A to the Square A C: Therefore the Length A G is the greate&longs;t that was &longs;ought, namely, that unto which the Pri&longs;me A G being prolonged, it would &longs;u&longs;tain it &longs;elf, but beyond it would break.

Hitherto we have con&longs;idered the Moments and Re&longs;i&longs;tances of &longs;olid Pri&longs;mes and Cylinders, one end of which is &longs;uppo&longs;ed im­moveable, and to the other onely the Force of a pre&longs;&longs;ing weight is applyed, con&longs;idering it by it &longs;elf alone, or joyned with the Gravity of the &longs;ame Solid, or el&longs;e the &longs;ole Gravity of the &longs;aid Solid. Now I de&longs;ire that we may &longs;peak &longs;omething of tho&longs;e &longs;ame Pri&longs;mes or Cylinders, in ca&longs;e they were &longs;u&longs;tained at both ends, or did re&longs;t upon one &longs;ole point taken between the ends. And fir&longs;t, I &longs;ay that,

PROPOSITION X.

The Cylinder that being charged with its own Weight &longs;hall be reduced to its greate&longs;t Length, beyond which it would not &longs;u&longs;tain it &longs;elf, whether it be born up in the middle by one &longs;ole Fulciment, or el&longs;e by two at the ends, may be double in length to that which &longs;hould be fa&longs;tned in the Wall, that is &longs;u&longs;tained at but one end.

Which of it &longs;elt is very obvious; for if we &longs;hall &longs;up­po&longs;e of the Cylinder which I de&longs;cribe A B C, its half A B to be the utmo&longs;t Length that is able to be &longs;u&longs;tained, being fa&longs;tened at the end B, it &longs;hall be &longs;u&longs;tained in the &longs;ame manner, if being laid upon the Fulciment G, it &longs;hall be counterpoi&longs;ed by its other half B C. And likewi&longs;e, if of the Cy­linder D E F, the Length &longs;hall be &longs;uch that onely one half of it can be &longs;u&longs;tained, being fa&longs;tened at the end D, and con&longs;equent­ly the other E F, fixed at the end F; it is manife&longs;t, that placing the Fulciments H and I under the ends D and F, every Moment of Force or of Weight that is added in E, will there make the Fracture.

That which requireth a more &longs;ubtil Speculation is, when &longs;ub­&longs;tracting from the proper Gravity of &longs;uch Solids, it were pro­pounded to us

PROP. XI. PROBL. III.

To find whether that Force or weight, that being ap­plied to the middle of a Cylinder &longs;u&longs;tained at the ends, would &longs;uffice to break it, could do the &longs;ame, applied in any other place, neerer to one end than to the other.

As for Example, whether we de&longs;iring to break a Staffe and took it with the ends in our hands, and &longs;etting our knee, to the mid&longs;t of it, the &longs;ame Force that &longs;hould &longs;uf­fice to break it in that manner, would al&longs;o &longs;uffice in ca&longs;e the knee were &longs;et, not in the mid&longs;t, but neerer to one of the ends.

SAGR. I think the Problem is toucht upon by Ari&longs;totle in his Mechanical Que&longs;tions.

SALV. The Que&longs;tion of Aristotle is not preci&longs;ely the &longs;ame, for he &longs;eeks no more, but to render a rea&longs;on why le&longs;&longs;e labour is required to break the Staffe, holding the hands at the ends of it, that is, far di&longs;tant from the Knee, than if we held them neerer: and he giveth a general Rea&longs;on of the &longs;ame, reducing the cau&longs;e of it to the Leavers, which are longer when the Arms are ex­tended, gra&longs;ping the ends. Our Que&longs;tion addeth &longs;omething more, &longs;eeking whether, &longs;etting the Knee in the mid&longs;t, or in ano­ther place, but alwayes keeping the hands at the ends, the &longs;ame Force &longs;erveth in all &longs;ituations.

SAGR. At fir&longs;t apprehen&longs;ion it &longs;hould &longs;eem that it doth, for that the two Leavers retain in a certain fa&longs;hion the &longs;ame Moment, &longs;eeing that as the one is &longs;hortned, the other is lengthened.

SALV. Now you &longs;ee, how ea&longs;ie it is to make Equivocations, and with what caution and circum&longs;pection we are to walk, lea&longs;t we run into them. This that you &longs;ay, and which indeed at the fir&longs;t &longs;ight carrieth with it &longs;o much of probability, is in the &longs;trict­ne&longs;&longs;e of it &longs;o fal&longs;e, that whether the Knee, which is the Fulci­ment of the two Leavers, be placed or not placed in the mid&longs;t, it maketh &longs;uch alteration, that of that Force which would &longs;uffice to make the Fracture in the mid&longs;t, it being to be made in &longs;ome other place, it will not &longs;uffice to apply four times &longs;o much, nor ten, nor an hundred, no nor a thou&longs;and. Upon this we will make &longs;ome general Con&longs;ideration, and then we will come to the Specifick Determination of the Propo&longs;ition, according to which, the Forces for making of Fractures gradually vary more in one point than in another.

Let us fir&longs;t de&longs;igne this Truncheon A B to be broken in the mid&longs;t upon the Fulciment C, and neer unto that let us de&longs;igne it again, but under the Characters D E, to be broken on the Fulciment F, remote from the middle. Fir&longs;t it is manife&longs;t, that the Di&longs;tances A C and C B being equal, the Force &longs;hall be &longs;ha­red equally in the ends B and A. Again, according as the Di­&longs;tance D F groweth le&longs;&longs;e than the Di&longs;tance A C, the Moment of the Force placed in D groweth le&longs;&longs;e than the Moment in A, that is placed at the Di&longs;tance C A, and le&longs;&longs;eneth according to the proportion of the Line D F to A C; and con&longs;equently, it is requi&longs;ite to encrea&longs;e it to equalize or exceed the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of F: But the Di&longs;tance D F may dimini&longs;h in infinitum, in relation to the Di&longs;tance A C: Therefore it is requi&longs;ite, that it be po&longs;&longs;ible for the Force to be applyed in D, to encrea&longs;e in infinitum, that it may countervail the Re&longs;i&longs;tance in F. But, on the contrary, ac­cording as the Di&longs;tance F E encrea&longs;eth above C B, it is requi&longs;ite to dimini&longs;h the Force in E, that it may compen&longs;ate the Re&longs;i­&longs;tance in F: But the Di&longs;tance F E in relation to C B, cannot en­crea&longs;e in infinitum, by drawing the Fulciment F towards the end D, no nor yet to the double: Therefore, the Force in E, that it may compen&longs;ate the Re&longs;i&longs;tance in F, &longs;hall be alwayes more than half of the Force in B. We may comprehend, therefore, the ne­ce&longs;&longs;ity of augmenting the Moments of the Collected Forces in E and D infinitely to equalize or exceed the Re&longs;i&longs;tance placed in F, according as the Fulciment F &longs;hall approach neerer and neerer to the end D.

SAGR. What will Simplicius &longs;ay to this? Mu&longs;t he not con­fe&longs;&longs;e the Virtue of Geometry to be a more powerful in&longs;trument than all others, to &longs;harpen the Wit, and di&longs;po&longs;e it to di&longs;cour&longs;e and &longs;peculate well? and that Plato had great rea&longs;on to de&longs;ire that his Scholars &longs;hould be well grounded in the Mathematicks? I have very well under&longs;tood the nature of the Leaver, and how that its Length encrea&longs;ing or decrea&longs;ing, the Moment of the Force and of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance augmented or dimini&longs;hed, and yet in the determination of the pre&longs;ent Problem I deceived my &longs;elf, and that not a little, but infinitely much.

SIMP. The truth is, I begin to &longs;ee that Logick, although it be a mo&longs;t appo&longs;ite In&longs;trument to regulate our Di&longs;cour&longs;e, doth not attain, as to the prompting of the Mind with Invention, unto the acutene&longs;&longs;e of Geometry.

SAGR. In my conceit, Logick giveth us to under&longs;tand, whe­ther the Di&longs;courfes and Demon&longs;trations already made and found are concluding, but that it teacheth us how to finde concluding Di&longs;cour&longs;es and Demon&longs;trations; the truth is, I do not believe: But it will be better, that Salviatus &longs;hew us according to what pro­portion the Moments of the Forces do go increa&longs;ing, to overcome the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the &longs;ame Piece of Wood, according to the &longs;e­veral places of the Fracture.

SALV. The proportion that you &longs;eek, proceedeth after &longs;uch a manner, that

PROPOSITION XII.

If in the length of a Cylinder we &longs;hall marke two places, upon which we would make the Fracture of the &longs;aid Cylinder, the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of tho&longs;e two places have the &longs;ame proportion to each other, as have the Re­ctangles made by the Di&longs;tances of tho&longs;e places reciprocally taken.

Let the two Forces (as in Fig. 16.) be A and B the lea&longs;t, to break in C, and E and F likewi&longs;e the lea&longs;t, to break in D. I &longs;ay the Forces A and B have the &longs;ame proportion to the Forces E and F, that the Rectangle A D B hath to the Rectan­gle A C B. For the Forces A and B, have to the Forces E and F, a proportion compounded of the Forces A and B, to the Force B, of B to F, and of F to E and E: But as the Forces A and B are to the Force B, &longs;o is the Length B A to A C; and as the Force B is to F, &longs;o is the Line D B to B C; and as the Force F is to F and E, &longs;o is the Line D A to A B: Therefore the Forces A and B have to the Forces E and F a proportion compounded of the&longs;e three, namely, of B A to A C, of D B to B C, and of D A A B. But of the two proportions D A to A B, and A B to A C, is compounded the proportion of D A to A C: Therefore the Forces A and B have to the Forces E and F, the proportion com­pounded of this D A to A C, and of the other D B to D C. But the Rectangle A D B hath to the Rectangle A C B, a pro­portion compounded of the &longs;ame D A to A C, and of D B to B C: Therefore the Forces A and B are to the Forces E and F, as the Rectangle A D B is to the Rectangle A C B; which is as much as to &longs;ay, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction in C, hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction in D, that the Rectangle A D B hath to the Rectangle A C B: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

In con&longs;equence of this Theorem we may re&longs;olve a Problem of great Curio&longs;ity; and it is this:

PROP. XIII. PROBL. IV.

There being given the greate&longs;t Weight that can be &longs;up­ported at the middle of a Cylinder or Pri&longs;me, where the Re&longs;i&longs;tance is leafl; and there being given a Weight greater than that, to find in the &longs;aid Cylin­der, the point at which the given greater Weight may be &longs;upporited as the greate&longs;t Weight.

Let the given weight greater than the greate&longs;t weight that can be &longs;upported at the middle of the Cylinder A B, have unto the &longs;aid greate&longs;t weight, the proportion of the line E to F: it is required to find the point in the Cylinder at which the &longs;aid given weight commeth to be &longs;upported as the bigge&longs;t. Be­tween E and F let G be a Mean-Proportional; and as E is to G, &longs;o let A D be to S, S &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;er than A D. Let A D be the Diameter of the Semicircle A H D: in which &longs;uppo&longs;e A H equal to S; and joyn together H and D, and take D R equal to it. I &longs;ay that R is the point &longs;ought, at which the given weight, greater than the greate&longs;t that can be &longs;upported at the middle of the Cylinder D, would become as the greate&longs;t weight. On the length BA de&longs;cribe the Semicircle A N B, and rai&longs;e the Perpendicular RN, and conjoyn N and D: And becau&longs;e the two

Squares N R and R D are equal to the Square N D; that is, to the Square A D; that is, to the two A H and and H D; and H D is equal to the Square D R: There­fore the Square N R, that is, the Rectangle A R B &longs;hall be equal to the Square A H; that is, to the Square S: But the Square S is to the Square A D, as F to E; that is, as the greate&longs;t &longs;upportable Weight at D to the given greater Weight: Therefore this greater &longs;hall be &longs;upported at R, as the greate&longs;t that can be there &longs;u&longs;tained. Which is that that we &longs;ought.

SAGR. I under&longs;tand you very well, and am con&longs;idering that the Pri&longs;me A B having alwayes more &longs;trength and re&longs;i&longs;tance a­gain&longs;t Pre&longs;&longs;ion in the parts that more and more recede from the middle, whether in very great and heavy Beams one may take away a pretty big part towards the end with a notable alleviation of the weight; which in Beams of great Rooms would be commo­dious, and of no &longs;mall pro&longs;it. And it would be pretty, to find what Figure that Solid ought to have, that it might have equal Re&longs;i­&longs;tance in all its parts; &longs;o as that it were not with more ea&longs;e to be broken by a weight that &longs;hould pre&longs;&longs;e it in the mid&longs;t, than in any other place.

SALV. I was ju&longs;t about to tell you a thing very notable and plea&longs;ant to this purpo&longs;e. I will a&longs;&longs;ume a brief Scheme for the bet­ter explanation of my meaning. This Figure D B is a Pri&longs;m, who&longs;e Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t Fraction in the term A D by a Force pre&longs;&longs;ing at the term B, is le&longs;&longs;e than the Re&longs;i&longs;tance that would be found in the place C I, by how much the length C B is le&longs;&longs;er than B A; as hath already been demon­&longs;trated. Now &longs;uppo&longs;e the

&longs;aid Pri&longs;me to be &longs;awed Diagonally according to the Line FB, &longs;o that the oppo­&longs;ite Surfaces may be two Triangles, one of which to­wards us is F A B. This So­lid obtains a quality contrary to the Pri&longs;me, to wit, that it le&longs;&longs;e re­&longs;i&longs;teth Fraction by the Force placed in B at the term C than at A, by as much the Length C B is le&longs;&longs;e than B A; Which we will ea &longs;ily prove: For imagining the Section C N O parallel to the other A F D, the Line F A &longs;hall be to C N in the Triangle F A B in the &longs;ame proportion, as the Line A B is to B C: and therefore if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Fulciment of the two Leavers to be in the Points A and C, who&longs;e Di&longs;tances are B A, A F, B C, and C N, the&longs;e, I &longs;ay, &longs;hall be like: and therefore that Moment which the Force placed at B hath at the Di&longs;tance B A above the Re&longs;i&longs;tance placed at the Di&longs;tance A F, the &longs;aid Force at B &longs;hall have at the Di&longs;tance BC above the &longs;ame Re&longs;i&longs;tance, were it placed at the Di&longs;tance C N: But the Re&longs;i&longs;tance to be overcome at the Fulciment C, being pla­ced at the Di&longs;tance C N, from the Force in B is le&longs;&longs;er than the Re&longs;i&longs;tance in A &longs;o much as the Rectangle C O is le&longs;&longs;e than the Rectangle A D; that is, &longs;o much as the Line C N is le&longs;s than A F; that is, C B than B A: Therefore the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the part O C B again&longs;t Fraction in C is &longs;o much le&longs;s than the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the whole D A O again&longs;t Fracture in O, as the Length C B is le&longs;s than A B. We have therefore from the Beam or Pri&longs;me D B, taken away a part, that is half, cutting it Diagonally, and left the Wedge or triangular Pri&longs;m F B A; and they are two Solids of contrary Qualities, namely, that more re&longs;i&longs;ts the more it is &longs;hortned, and this in &longs;hortning lo&longs;eth its toughne&longs;s as fa&longs;t. Now this being granted, it &longs;eemeth very rea&longs;onable, nay, nece&longs;&longs;ary, that one may give it a cut, by which taking away that which is &longs;uperfluous, there remai­neth a Solid of &longs;uch a Figure, as in all its parts hath equal Re&longs;i­&longs;tance.

SIMP. It mu&longs;t needs be &longs;o; for where there is a tran&longs;ition from the greater to the le&longs;&longs;er, one meeteth al&longs;o with the equal.

SAGR. But the bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e is to find how we are to guide the Saw for making of this Section.

SIMP. This &longs;eemeth to me as if it were a very ea&longs;ie bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e; for if in &longs;awing the Pri&longs;m diagonally, taking away half of it, the Figure that remains retaineth a contrary quality to that of the whole Pri&longs;m, &longs;o as that in all places wherein this acquireth &longs;trength, that as fa&longs;t lo&longs;eth it, me thinks, that keeping the middle way, that is, taking only the half of that half, which is the fourth part of the whole, the remaining Figure will not gain or lo&longs;e &longs;trength in any of all tho&longs;e places wherein the lo&longs;&longs;e and the gain of the other two Figures were alwaies equal.

SALV. You have not hit the mark, Simplicius; and as I &longs;hall &longs;hew you, it will appear in reality, that that which may be cut off from the Pri&longs;m, and taken away without weakening it is not its fourth part, but the third. Now it remaineth (which is that that was hinted by Sagredus)

PROP. XIV. PROBL. V.

To find according to what Line the Section is to be made; Which I will prove to be a Parabolical Line.

But fir&longs;t it is nece&longs;&longs;ary to demon&longs;trate a certain Lemma, which is this:

LEMMA I.

If there &longs;hall be two Ballances or Leavers divided by their Fulci­ments in &longs;uch &longs;ort that the two Distances where at the Forces are to be placed, have to each other double the proportion of the Di&longs;tances at which the Re&longs;i&longs;tances &longs;ball be, which Re&longs;i­&longs;tances are to each other as their Di&longs;tances, the &longs;u&longs;taining Powers &longs;hall be equal.

Let A B and C D be two Leavers divided upon their Fulciments E and F, in &longs;uch &longs;ort that the Di&longs;tance E B hath to F D a pro­portion double to that which the Di&longs;tance E A hath to F C. I &longs;ay, the Powers that in BD &longs;hall &longs;u&longs;tain the Re&longs;i&longs;tances A and C &longs;hall be equal to each other. Let E G be &longs;uppo&longs;ed a Mean-Proporti­onal between E B and F D; therefore as B E is to E G, &longs;o &longs;hall G E be to F D, and A E to C F; and &longs;o is &longs;uppo&longs;ed the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of A to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of C. And becau&longs;e that as E G is to F D, &longs;o is A E to C F; by Permutation as G E is to E A, &longs;o &longs;hall D Fbe to F C: And therefore (in regard that the two Leavers

D C and G A are divided pro­portionally in the Points F and E) in ca&longs;e the Power that being placed at D compen&longs;ates the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of C were at G, it would countervail the &longs;ame Re&longs;i&longs;tance of C placed in A: But by what hath been granted, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of A hath the &longs;ame propor­tion to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of C, that AE hath to C F; that is, B E hath to E G: Therefore the Power G, or if you will D, placed at B will &longs;u&longs;tain the Re&longs;i&longs;tance placed at A: Which was to be de­mon&longs;trated.

This being under&longs;tood: in the Surface F B of the Pri&longs;me D B, let the Parabolical Line F N B be drawn, who&longs;e Vertex is B, ac­cording to which let the &longs;aid Pri&longs;me be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be &longs;awed, the Solid compri&longs;ed between the Ba&longs;e A D, the Rectangular Plane A G, the Bight Line B G, and the Superficies D G B F being le&longs;t incurvated according to the Curvity of the Parabolical Line F N B. I &longs;ay, that that Solid is through­

out of equal Re&longs;i­&longs;tance. Let it be cut by the Plane C O pa­rallel to A D; and imagine two Leavers divided and &longs;uppor­ted upon the Fulciments A and C; and let the Di&longs;tances of one be B A and A F, and of the other B C, and C N. And becau&longs;e in the Parabola F B A, A B is to B C, as the Square of F A to the Square of C N, it is manife&longs;t, that the Di&longs;tance B A of one Leaver, hath to the Di&longs;tance B C of the other a proportion double to that which the other Di&longs;tance A F hath to the other C N, And be­cau&longs;e the Re&longs;i&longs;tance that is to be equal by help of the Leaver B A hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance that is to be equal by help of the Leaver B C, that the Rectangle D A hath to the Rectangle O C; which is the &longs;ame that the Line A F hath to N C, which are the other two Di&longs;tances of the Leavers; it is ma­nife&longs;t by the fore going Lemma, that the &longs;ame Force that being applyed to the Line B G will equal the Re&longs;i&longs;tance D A, will like­wi&longs;e equal the Re&longs;i&longs;tance C O. And the &longs;ame may be demon&longs;tra­ted, if one cut the Solid in any other place: therefore that Parabo­lical Solid is throughout of equal Re&longs;i&longs;tance. In the next place, that cutting the Pri&longs;me according to the Parabolical Line F N B, the third part of it is taken away, appeareth, For that the Semi­Parabola F N B A and the Rectangle F B are Ba&longs;es of two Solids contained between two parallel Planes, that is, between the Rect­angles F B and D G, whereby they retain the &longs;ame Proportion, as tho&longs;e their Ba&longs;es: But the Rectangle F B is Se&longs;quialter to the Se­miparabola F N B A: Therefore cutting the Pri&longs;ine according to the Parabolick Line, we take away the third part of it. Hence we &longs;ee, that Beams may be made with the diminution of their Weight more than thirty three in the hundred, without dimini&longs;hing their Strength in the lea&longs;t; which in great Ships, in particular, for bea­ring the Decks may be of no &longs;mall benefit; for that in &longs;uch kind of Fabricks Lightne&longs;&longs;e is of infinite importance.

SAGR. The Commodities are &longs;o many, that it would be tedi­ous, if not impo&longs;&longs;ible, to mention them all. But I, laying a&longs;ide the&longs;e, would more gladly under&longs;tand that the alleviation is made according to the a&longs;&longs;igned proportions. That the Section, according to the Diagonal Line, cuts away half of the weight I very well know: but that the other Section according to the Parabolical Line takes away the third part of the Pri&longs;me I can believe upon the word of Salviatus, who evermore &longs;peaks the truth, but in this Ca&longs;e Science would better plea&longs;e me than Faith.

SALV. I &longs;ee then that you would have the Demon&longs;tration, whether or no it be true, that the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Pri&longs;me over and above this, which for this time we will call a Parabolical Solid, is the third part of the whole Pri&longs;me. I am certain that I have for­merly demo&longs;trated it; I will try now whether I can put the Demon&longs;tration together again: to which purpo&longs;e I do remember that I made u&longs;e of a Certain Lemma of Archimedes, in&longs;erted by him in his Book de Spiralibus, and it is this:

LEMMA II.

If any number of Lines at plea&longs;ure &longs;hall exceed one another equal­ly, and the exce&longs;&longs;es be equal to the lea&longs;t of them, and there be as many more, each of them equal to the greate&longs;t; the Squares of all the&longs;e &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;e than the triple of the Squares of tho&longs;e that exceed one another: but they &longs;hall be more than triple to tho&longs;e others that remain, the Square of the greate&longs;t being &longs;ub­&longs;tracted.

This being granted: Let the Parabolick Line A B be in&longs;cribed in this Rectangle A C B P: we are to prove the Mixt Triangle B A P, who&longs;e &longs;ides are B P and P A, and Ba&longs;e the Parabolical Line B A, to be the third part of the whole Rectangle C P. For if it be not &longs;o, it will be either more than the third part, or le&longs;&longs;e. Let it be &longs;uppo&longs;ed that it may be le&longs;&longs;e, and to that which is

wanting &longs;uppo&longs;e the Space X to be equal. Then di­viding the Rectangle con­tinually into equal parts with Lines parallel to the Sides B P and C A, we &longs;hall in the end arrive at &longs;uch parts, as that one of them &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;e than the Space X. Now let one of them be the Rectangle O B, and by the Points where the other Parallels inter&longs;ect the Parabolick Line, let the Pa­rallels to A P pa&longs;&longs;e: and here I will &longs;uppo&longs;e a Figure to be cir­cum&longs;cribed about our Mixt-Triangle, compo&longs;ed of Rectangles, which are B O, I N, H M, F L, E K, G A; which Figure &longs;hall al&longs;o yet be le&longs;s than the third part of the Rectangle C P, in regard that the exce&longs;&longs;e of that Figure over and above the Mixed Triangle is much le&longs;&longs;e than the Rectangle B O, which yet again is le&longs;&longs;e than the Space X.

SAGR. Softly, I pray you, for I do not &longs;ee how the exce&longs;&longs;e of this circum&longs;cribed Figure above the Mixt Triangle is con&longs;iderably le&longs;&longs;er than the Rectangle B O.

SALV. Is not the Rectangle B O equal to all the&longs;e &longs;mall Rect­angles by which our Parabolical Line pa&longs;&longs;eth; I mean the&longs;e, B I, I H, H F, F E, E G, and G A, of which one part only lyeth with­out the Mixt Triangle? And the Rectangle B O, is it not al&longs;o &longs;up­po&longs;ed to be le&longs;&longs;e than the Space X? Therefore if the Triangle to­gether with X did, as the Adver&longs;ary &longs;uppo&longs;eth, equalize the third part of the Rectangle C P the circum&longs;cribed Figure that adjoyns to the Triangle &longs;o much le&longs;&longs;e than the Space X, will remain even yet le&longs;&longs;e than the third part of the &longs;aid Rectangle C P. But this cannot be, for it is more than a third part, therefore it is not true that our Mixt Triangle is le&longs;&longs;e than one third of the Rectangle.

SAGR. I under&longs;tand the Solution of my Doubt. But it is requi&longs;ite now to prove unto us, that the Circum&longs;cribed Figure is more than a third part of the Rectangle C P; which, I believe, will be harder to do.

SALV. Not at all. For in the Parabola the Square of the Line D E hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Square of Z G, that the Line D A hath to A Z; which is the &longs;ame that the Rectangle K E hath to the Rectangle A G, their heights A K and K L being equal. There­fore the proportion that the Square E D hath to the Square Z G; that is, the Square L A hath to the Square A K, the Rectangle K E hath likewi&longs;e to the Rectangle K Z. And in the &longs;elf-&longs;ame manner we might prove that the other Rectangles L F, M H, N I, O B are to one another as the Squares of the Lines M A, N A, O A, P A. Con&longs;ider we in the next place, how the Circum&longs;cribed Figure is compounded of certain Spaces that are to one another as the Squares of the Lines that exceed with Exce&longs;&longs;es equal to the lea&longs;t, and how the Rectangle C P is compounded of &longs;o many other Spa­ces each of them equal to the Greate&longs;t, which are all the Rectan­gles equal to O B. Therefore, by the Lemma of Archimedes, the Circum&longs;cribed Figure is more than the third part of the Rectangle C P: But it was al&longs;o le&longs;&longs;e, which is impo&longs;&longs;ible: Therefore the Mixt-Triangle is not le&longs;&longs;e than one third of the Rectangle C P. I &longs;ay likewi&longs;e, that it is not more: For if it be more than one third of the Rectangle C P, &longs;uppo&longs;e the Space X equal to the ex­ce&longs;&longs;e of the Triangle above the third part of the &longs;aid Rectangle C P, and the divi&longs;ion and &longs;ubdivi&longs;ion of the Rectangle into Rect­angolets, but alwaies equal, being made, we &longs;hall meet with &longs;uch as that one of them is le&longs;&longs;er than the Space X; which let be done: and let the Rectangle B O be le&longs;&longs;er than X; and, having de&longs;cribed the Figure as before, we &longs;hall have in&longs;cribed in the Mixt-Triangle a Figure compounded of the Rectangles V O, T N, S M, N L, Q K, which yet &longs;hall not be le&longs;s

than the third part of the great Rectangle C P, for the Mixt Triangle doth much le&longs;&longs;e exceed the In­&longs;cribed Figure than it doth exceed the third part of the Rectangle C P; Be­cau&longs;e the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Triangle above the third part of the Rectangle C P is equal to the Space X which is greater than the Rectangle B O, and this al­&longs;o is con&longs;iderably greater than the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Triangle above the In&longs;cribed Figure: For to the Rectangle B O, all the Rectan­golets A G, G E, E F, F H, H I, I B are equal, of which the Ex­ce&longs;&longs;es of the Triangle above the In&longs;cribed Figure are le&longs;&longs;e than half: And therefore the Triangle exceeding the third part of the Rectangle C P, by much more (exceeding it by the Space X) than it exceedeth its in&longs;cribed Figure, that &longs;ame Figure &longs;hall al&longs;o be greater than the third part of the Rectangle C P: But it is le&longs;&longs;er, by the Lemma pre&longs;uppo&longs;ed: For that the Rectangle C P, as being the Aggregate of all the bigge&longs;t Rectangles, hath the &longs;ame pro­portion to the Rectangles compounding the In&longs;cribed Figure, that the Aggregate of of all the Squares of the Lines equal to the big­ge&longs;t, hath to the Squares of the Lines that exceed equally, &longs;ub&longs;tra­cting the Square of the bigge&longs;t: And therefore (as it hapneth in Squares) the whole Aggregate of the bigge&longs;t (that is the Rectan­gle C P) is more than triple the Aggregate of the exceeding ones, the bigge&longs;t deducted, that compound the In&longs;cribed Fgure. Therefore the Mixt-Triangle is neither greater nor le&longs;&longs;er than the third part of the Rectangle C P: It is therefore equal.

The Quadrature of the Parabola &longs;hewn by one &longs;ingle De­mon&longs;tration.

SAGR. A pretty and ingenuous Demon&longs;tration: and &longs;o much the more, in that it giveth us the Quadrature of the Parabola, &longs;hew­ing it to be Se&longs;quitertial of the Triangle in&longs;cribed in the &longs;ame; proving that which Archimedes demon&longs;trateth by two very diffe­rent, but both very admirable, methods of a great number of Pro­po&longs;itions. As hath likewi&longs;e been demon&longs;trated lately by Lucas Valerius, another &longs;econd Archimedes of our Age, which Demon­&longs;tration is &longs;et down in the Book that he writ of the Center of the Gravity of Solids.

SALV. A Treati&longs;e which verily is not to come behind any one that hath been written by the mo&longs;t Famous Geometricians of the pre&longs;ent and all pa&longs;t Ages: which when it was read by our Acade­mick, it made him de&longs;i&longs;t from pro&longs;ecuting his Di&longs;coveries that he was then proceeding to write on the &longs;ame Subject: in regard he &longs;aw the whole bu&longs;ine&longs;s &longs;o happily found and demon&longs;trated by the &longs;aid Valerius.

SAGR. I was informed of all the&longs;e things by our Academick; and have be&longs;ought him withall that he would one day let me &longs;ee his Demon&longs;trations that he had &longs;ound at the time when he met with the Book of Valerius: but I never was &longs;o happy as to &longs;ee them.

SALV. I have a Copy of them, and will impart them to you, for you will be much plea&longs;ed to &longs;ee the variety of Methods, which the&longs;e two Authors take to inve&longs;tigate the &longs;ame Conclu&longs;ions, and their Demon&longs;trations: wherein al&longs;o &longs;ome of the Conclu&longs;ions have different Explanations, howbeit in effect equally true.

SAGR. I &longs;hall be very glad to &longs;ee them, therefore when you re­turn to our wonted Conferences you may do me the favour to bring them with you. But in the mean time, this &longs;ame of the Re­fi&longs;tance of the Solid taken from the Pri&longs;me by a Parabolick Secti­on, being an Operation no le&longs;&longs;e ingenuous than beneficial in many Mechanical Works, it would be good that Artificers had &longs;ome ea­&longs;ie and expedite Rule how they may draw the &longs;aid Parabolick Line upon the Plane of the Pri&longs;me.

SALV. There are &longs;everal waies to draw tho&longs;e Lines, but two that are more expedite than all the re&longs;t, I will de&longs;cribe unto you. One of which is truly admirable, &longs;ince that thereby, in le&longs;&longs;e time than another can with Compa&longs;&longs;es &longs;lightly draw upon a paper four or &longs;ix Circles of different &longs;izes, I can de&longs;ign thirty or forty Parabolick Lines no le&longs;&longs;e exact, &longs;mall, and &longs;mooth than the Cir­cumferences of tho&longs;e Circles. I have a Ball of Bra&longs;&longs;e exqui&longs;itely round, no bigger than a Nut, this thrown upon a Steel Mirrour held, not erect to the Horizon, but &longs;omewhat inclined, &longs;o that the Ball in its motion may run along pre&longs;&longs;ing lightly upon it, leaveth a Parabolical Line finely and &longs;moothly de&longs;cribed, and wider or narrower according as the Projection &longs;hall be more or le&longs;s elevated. Whereby al&longs;o we have a clear and &longs;en&longs;ible Experiment that the Motion of Projects is made by Parabolick Lines: an Effect ob&longs;er­ved by none before our Academick, who al&longs;o layeth down the Demon&longs;tration of it in his Book of Motion, which we will joynt­ly peru&longs;e at our next meeting. Now the Ball, that it may de&longs;cribe by its motion tho&longs;e Parabola's, mu&longs;t be rouled a little in the hands that it may be warmed, and &longs;omewhat moy&longs;tned, for by this means it will leave its track more apparent upon the Mirrour. The other way to draw the Line that we de&longs;ire upon the Pri&longs;me is after this manner. Let two Nailes be fa&longs;tned on high in a Wall, at an equal di&longs;tance from the Horizon, and remote from one another twice the breadth of the Rectangle upon which we would trace the Semiparabola, and to the&longs;e two Nails tye a &longs;mall thread of &longs;uch a length that its doubling may reach as far as the length of the Pri&longs;me; this &longs;tring will hang in a Parabolick Figure: &longs;o that tra­cing out upon the Wall the way that the &longs;aid String maketh on it, we &longs;hall have a whole Parabola de&longs;cribed: which a Perpendicular that hangeth in the mid&longs;t between the&longs;e two Nailes will divide into two equal parts. And for the transferring or &longs;etting off of that Line afterwards upon the oppo&longs;ite Surfaces of the Pri&longs;me it is not difficult at all, &longs;o that every indifferent Arti&longs;t will know how to do it. The &longs;ame Line might be drawn upon the &longs;aid Sur­face of the Pri&longs;me by help of the Geometrical Lines delineated up­on the Compa&longs;&longs;e of our Friend, without any more ado.

Several waies to de&longs;cribe a Para­bola.

We have hitherto demon&longs;trated &longs;o many Conclu&longs;ions touching the Contemplation of the&longs;e Re&longs;i&longs;tances of Solids again&longs;t Fraction by having fir&longs;t opened the way unto the Science with &longs;uppo&longs;ing the direct Re&longs;i&longs;tance for known, that we may in pur&longs;uance of them proceed forwards to the finding of other, and other Conclu&longs;ions, with their Demon&longs;trations of tho&longs;e which in Nature are infinite. Only at pre&longs;ent, for a final conclu&longs;ion of this daies Conferences, I will add the Speculation of the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of the Hollow Solids which Art, and chiefly Nature, u&longs;eth in an hundred Operations, when without encrea&longs;ing the weight &longs;he greatly augmenteth the &longs;trength: as is &longs;een in the Bones of Birds, and in many Canes that are light and of great Re&longs;i&longs;tance again&longs;t bending and breaking. For if a Wheat Straw that &longs;upports an Ear that is heavier than the whole Stalk, were made of the &longs;ame quantity of matter but were ma&longs;&longs;ie or &longs;olid, it would be much le&longs;&longs;e repugnant to Fraction or Flection. And with the &longs;ame Rea&longs;on Art hath ob&longs;erved, and Ex­perience confirmed, that an hollow Cane, or a Trunk of Wood or Metal, is much more firm and tough than if being of the &longs;ame weight and length it were &longs;olid, which con&longs;equently would be more flender, and therefore Art hath contrived to make Lances hol­low within when they are de&longs;ired to be &longs;trong and light. We will &longs;hew therefore, that

PROPOSITION XV.

The Re&longs;i&longs;tances of two Cylinders, equall, and equally long, one of which is Hollow, and the other Ma&longs;sie, have to each other the &longs;ame proportion, as their Dia­meters.

Let the Cane or Hollow Cylinder be A E, [as in Fig. 17.] and the Cylinder I N Ma&longs;&longs;ie, and equall in weight and length. I &longs;ay, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cane A E hath the &longs;ame propor­tion to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the &longs;olid Cylinder, as the Diameter A B hath to the Diameter I L. Which is very manife&longs;t; For the Cane and the Cylinder I N being equal, and of equal lengths, the Circle I L that is Ba&longs;e of the Cylinder &longs;hall be equal to the Ring A B that is Ba&longs;e of the Cane A E, (I call the Superficies that re­maineth when a le&longs;&longs;er Circle is taken out of a greater that is Con­centrick with it a Ring:) and therefore their Ab&longs;olute Re&longs;i&longs;tan­ces &longs;hall be equal: but becau&longs;e in breaking cro&longs;&longs;e-waies we make u&longs;e in the Cylinder I N of the length L N for a Leaver, and of the point L for a Fulciment, and of the Semidiameter or Diameter L I for a Counter-Leaver; and in the Cane the part of the Leaver, that is the Line B E is equal to L N; but the Counter-Leaver at the Fulciment B is the Diameter or Semidiameter A B: It is mani­fe&longs;t therefore that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cane exceedeth that of the Solid Cylinder as much as the Diameter A B exceeds the Dia­meter I L; Which is that that we &longs;ought. Toughne&longs;s therefore is ac­quired in the hollow Cane above the Toughne&longs;s of the &longs;olid Cylin­der according to the proportion of the Diameters: provided al­waies that they be both of the &longs;ame matter, weight, and length.

It would be well, that in con&longs;equence of this we try to inve&longs;tigate that which hapneth in other Ca&longs;es indifferently between all Canes and &longs;olid Cylinders of equal length, although unequal in quantity of weight, and more or le&longs;s evacuated. And fir&longs;t we will demon­&longs;trate, that

Place this at the end of the &longs;econd Dialogue pag: 124,

PROP. XVI. PROBL. VI.

A Trunk or Hollow Cane being given, a Solid Cylinder may be found equal to it.

This Operation is very ea&longs;ie. For let the Line A B, be the Dia­meter of the Cane, and C D the Diameter of the Hollow or Cavity. Let the Line A E be &longs;et off upon the greater Circle equal to the Diameter C D, and conjoyn E B. And becau&longs;e in

the Semicircle A E B the Angle E is Right­Angle, the Circle who&longs;e Diameter is A B &longs;hall be equall to the two Circles of the Di­ameters A E and E B: But A E is the Dia­meter of the Hollow of the Cane: Therefore the Circle who&longs;e Diameter is E B, &longs;hall be equal to the Ring A C B D: And therefore the &longs;olid Cylinder, the Circle of who&longs;e Ba&longs;e hath the Diameter E B &longs;hall be equal to the Cane, they being of the &longs;ame length. This demon&longs;trated, we may pre&longs;ently be able

PROP. XVII. PROBL. VII.

To find what proportion is betwixt the Re&longs;i&longs;tances of any what&longs;oever Cane and Cylinder, their lengths be­ing equal.

LET the Cane A B E, and the Cylinder R S M, be of equal length: it is required to find what proportion the Re&longs;i&longs;tances have to each other. By the precedent let the Cylinder I L N be found equal to the Cane, and of the &longs;ame length; and to the Lines I L and R S (Diameters of the Ba&longs;es of the Cylinders I N and

R M) let the Line V be a fourth Proportional. I &longs;ay, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cane A E is to the Re&longs;i­&longs;tance of the Cylinder R M, as the Line A B is to V. For the Cane A E being equal to, and of the &longs;ame length with the Cylinder I N, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cane &longs;hall be to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder, as the Line A B is to I L: But the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder I N is to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder R M, as the Cube I L is to the Cube R S; that is, as the Line I L to V: Therefore, ex æquali, the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cane A E hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Cylinder R M, that the Line A B hath to V: Which is that that was &longs;ought.

The End of the Second Dialogue.

GALILEUS, HIS DIALOGUES OF MOTION.

The Third Dialogue.

INTERLOCUTORS,

SALVIATUS, SAGREDUS, and SIMPLICIUS.

OF LOCAL MOTION.

We promote a very new Science, but of a very old Subject. There is nothing in Nature more antient than MOTION, of which many and great Volumns have been written by Philo&longs;ophers: But yet there are &longs;undry Symptomes and Properties in it worthy of our Notice, which I find not to have been hi­therto ob&longs;erved, much le&longs;&longs;e demon&longs;trated by any. Some &longs;light particulars have been no­ted: as that the Natural Motion of Grave Bodies continually accelle-rateth, as they de&longs;cend towards their Center: but it hath not been as yet declared in what proportion that Acceleration is made. For no man, that I know, hath ever demon&longs;trated, That there is the &longs;ame proportion between the Spaces, thorow which a thing moveth in equal Times, as there is between the Odde Numbers which follow in order after a Vnite. It hath been ob&longs;erved that Projects [or things thrown or darted with vi­olence] make a Line that is &longs;omewhat curved; but that this line is a Pa­rabola, none have hinted: Yet the&longs;e, and &longs;undry other things, no le&longs;&longs;e worthy of our knowledg, will I here demon&longs;trate: And which is more, I will open a way to a mo&longs;t ample and excellent Science, of which the&longs;e our Labours &longs;hall be the Elements: into which more &longs;ubtil and piercing Wits than mine will be better able to dive.

We divide this Treati&longs;e into three parts. In the fir&longs;t part we con&longs;ider &longs;uch things as re&longs;pect Equable or Vniforme Motion. In the &longs;econd we write of Motion naturally accelerate. In the third we treat of Violent Motion, or De Projectis.

OF EQVABLE MOTION.

Concerning Equable or Vniform Motion we have need of onely one Definition, which I thus deliver.

DEFINITION.

By an Equable or Uniform Motion, I under&longs;tand that by which a Moveable in all equal Times pa&longs;&longs;eth thorow equal Spaces.

ADVERTISEMENT.

I thought good to add to the old Definition (which &longs;imply termeth that an Equable Motion, whereby equal Spaces are pa&longs;t in equal Times) this Particle All, that is, any what&longs;oever Times that are equal: for it may happen, that a Moveable may pa&longs;&longs;e thorow equal Spaces in cer­tain equal Times, though the Spaces be not equal which it hath gone in le&longs;&longs;er, though equal parts of the &longs;ame Time. From this our Definition follow the&longs;e four Axiomes: &longs;cilicet,

AXIOMEL

In the &longs;ame Equable Motion that Space is greater which is pa&longs;&longs;ed in a longer Time, and that le&longs;&longs;er which is pa&longs;t in a &longs;horter.

AXIOME II.

In the &longs;ame Equable Motion, the greater the Space is that hath been gone thorow, the longer was the Time in which the Move­able was going it.

AXIOME III.

The Space which a greater Velocity pa&longs;&longs;eth in any Time, is great­er than the Space which a le&longs;&longs;er Velocity pa&longs;&longs;eth in the &longs;ame Time.

AXIOME IV.

The Velocity which pa&longs;&longs;eth a greater Space, is greater than the Velocity which pa&longs;&longs;eth a le&longs;&longs;er Space in the &longs;ame Time.

THEOR. I. PROP. I.

If a Moveable moving with an Equable Motion, and with the &longs;ame Velocity pa&longs;&longs;e two &longs;everal Spaces, the Times of the Motion &longs;hall be to one another as the &longs;aid Spaces.

Let the Moveable by an Equable Motion with the &longs;ame Velocity paß the two Spaces A B and B C: and let D E be the Time of the Moti­on thorow A B; and let the Time of the Motion thorow B C be E F I &longs;ay that the Time D E to the Time E F, is as the Space A B to the Space B C. Protract the Spaces and Times on both &longs;ides, towards G H and I K, and in A G take any number of Spaces equal to A B,

and in D I the like number of Times equal to D E. Again, in C H take any number of Spaces equal to B C, and in F K take the &longs;ame number of Times equal to the Time E F. This done, the Space B G will con­tain ju&longs;t as many Spaces equal to B A, as the Time E I containeth Times equal to E D, equimultiplied according to what ever Rate; And likewi&longs;e the Space B H will contain as many Spaces equal to B C, asthe Time K E containeth Times equal to F E, at what ever rate equi­multiplied. And fora&longs;much as D E is the Time of the Motion thorow A B, the whole Time E I, &longs;hall be the Time of the whole Space of the Motion thorow B G, by rea&longs;on that the Motion is Equable, and that the number of the Times in E I equal to D E, is the &longs;ame with the number of Spaces in B G, equal to B A: For the &longs;ame rea&longs;on E K is the Time of the Motion thorow H B. Now in regard the Motion is Equable, if the Space G B were equal to H B, the Time I E would be equal to E K: and if G B be greater than B H, I E &longs;hall likewi&longs;e be greater than E K: and if le&longs;&longs;er, le&longs;&longs;er. They are therefore four Magnitudes; A B the fir&longs;t, B C the &longs;econd, D E the third, and E F the Fourth; and the fir&longs;t and third, to wit, the Space A B, and Time D E, there were taken the Time I E, and the Space G B equimultiple, according to any multi­plication; and it hath been demon&longs;trated that the&longs;e do at once either equal, or fall &longs;hort of, or el&longs;e exceed the Time E K, and Space B H, which are equimultiple of the &longs;econd and fourth: Therefore the fir&longs;t bath to the &longs;econd, to wit the Space A B to the Space B C, the &longs;ame proportion that the third hath to the fourth, to wit, the Time D E to the Time E F. Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

THEOR. II. PROP. II.

If a Moveable in equal Times pa&longs;&longs;e thorow two Spaces, the &longs;aid Spaces will be to each other, as the Velocities. And if the Spaces are to each other as the Velocities, the Times will be equal.

Let us &longs;uppo&longs;e A B and B C in the former Figure, to be two Spaces pa&longs;t, by the Moveable in equal times; the Space A B with the Velocity D E, and the Space B C with the Velocity E F. I &longs;ay, that the Space A B is to the Space B C, as the Velocity D E is to the Velocity E F: and thus I prove it. Take as before, of the Spaces and Velocities equi-multiples, accordieg to any what ever Rate, &longs;ci­licet G B and I E, of A B and D E, and likewi&longs;e H B and K E, of B C and E F: It may be concluded as above, that G B and I E are both at once either equal to, or fall &longs;hort of, or el&longs;e exceed the equi-mul­tiples of D H and E K. Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is proved.

THEOR. III. PROP. III.

The Times in which the &longs;ame Space is pa&longs;t tho­row by unequal Velocities, have the &longs;ame pro­portion to each other as their Velocities contra­rily taken.

Let the two unequal Velocities be A the greater, and B the le&longs;&longs;e: and according to both the&longs;e let a Motion be made thorow the &longs;ame Space C D. I &longs;ay the Time in which the Velocity A pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space C D, &longs;hall be to the Time in which the Velocity B pa&longs;&longs;eth the &longs;aid Space, as the Velocity B to the Velocity A. As A is to B, &longs;o let C D be to C E: Then, by the former Propo&longs;ition, the Time in

which the Velocity A pa&longs;&longs;eth C D, &longs;hall be the &longs;ame with the Time in which B pa&longs;&longs;eth C E. But the Time in which the Velocity B pa&longs;&longs;eth C E, is to the Time in which it pa&longs;&longs;eth C D, as C E is to C D: Therefore the Time in which the Velocity A pa&longs;&longs;eth C D, is to the Time in which the Velocity B pa&longs;&longs;eth the &longs;ame C D, as C E is to C D; that is, the Ve­locity B is to the Velocity A: Which was to be proved.

THEOR. IV. PROP. IV.

If two Moveables move with an Equable Mo­tion, but with unequal Velocities, the Spaces which they pa&longs;&longs;e in unequal Times, are to each other in a proportion compounded of the pro­portion of the Velocities, and of the propor­tion of the Times.

Let the two Moveables moving with an Equable Motion, be E and F: And let the proportion of the Velocity of the Moveable E be to the Velocity of the Moveable F, as A is to B: And let the Time in which E is moved, be unto the Time in which F is moved, as C is to D. I &longs;ay the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by E, with the Velocity A in the Time C, is to the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by F, with the Velocity B in the Time D, in a proportion compounded of the proportion of the Velocity A to the Velocity B, and ofthe proportion of the Time C to the Time D. Let the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by the Moveable E, with the Velocity A in the Time C, be G: And as the Velocity A is to the Velocity B,

&longs;o let G be to I: And as the Time C is to the Time D, &longs;o let I be to L: It is manife&longs;t, that I is the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by F in the &longs;ame Time in which E pa&longs;&longs;eth thorow G; &longs;eeing that the Spaces G and I are as the Velocities A and B; and &longs;eeing that as the Time C is to the Time D, &longs;o is I unto L; and &longs;ince that I is the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by the Moveable F in the Time C: Therefore L &longs;hall be the Space that F pa&longs;&longs;eth in the Time D, with the Velocity B: But the proportion of G to L, is compounded of the proportions of G to I, and of I to L; that is, of the proportions of the Velocity A to the Velocity B, and of the Time C to the Time D: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is demon&longs;trated.

THEOR. V. PROP. V.

If two Moveables move with an Equable Motion, but with unequal Velocities, and if the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed be al&longs;o unequal, the Times &longs;hall be to each other in a proportion compounded of the proportion of the Spaces, and of the proporti­on of the Velocities contrarily taken.

Let A and B be the two Moveables, and let the Velocity of A be to the Velocity of B, as V to T, and let the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed, be as S to R. I &longs;ay the proportion of the Time in which A is moved to the Time in which B is moved, &longs;hall be compounded of the proportions of the Velocity T to the Velocity V, and of the Space S to the Space R. Let C be the Time of the Motion A;

and as the Velocity T is to the Velocity V, &longs;o let the Time C be to the Time E: And for a&longs;much as C is the Time in which A with the Velocity V pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space S; and that the Time C is to the Time E, as the Velocity T of the Moveable B is to the Velocity V, E &longs;hall be the Time in which the Moveable B would pa&longs;&longs;ethe &longs;ame Space S. Again as the Space S is to the Space R, &longs;o let the Time E be to the Time G: Therefore G is the Time in which B would pa&longs;&longs;e the Space R. And becau&longs;e the proportion of C to G is compounded of the proportions of C to E, and of E to G; And &longs;ince the proportion of C to E is the &longs;ame with that of the Velocities of the Moveables A and B contrarily taken; that is, with that of T and V; And the proportion of E to G is the &longs;ame with the proportion of the Spaces S and R: There­fore the Propo&longs;ition is demon&longs;trated.

THEOR. VI. PROP. VI.

If two Moveables move with an Equable Motion, the proportion of their Velocities &longs;hall be com­pounded of the proportion of the Spaces pa&longs;­&longs;ed, and of the proportion of the Times con­trarily taken.

Let A and B be the two Moveables moving with an Equable Motion; and let the Spaces by them pa&longs;&longs;ed, be as V to T; and let the Times be as S to R. I &longs;ay that the proportion of the Ve­locity of the Moveable A, to that of the Velocity of B, &longs;hall be compounded of the proportions of the Space V to the Space T, and of the Time R to the Time S. Let C be the Velocity with which the Moveable A pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space V in the Time S: And let the Velocity C be to the Velo-

city E, as the Space V is to the Space T; And E &longs;hall be the Veloci­ty with which the Moveable B pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space T in the Time S: Again, let the Velocity E be to the other Velocity G, as the Time R is to the Time S; And G &longs;hall be the Velocity with which the Moveable B pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space T in the Time R. We have therefore the Velocity C, wherewith the Moveable A pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space V in the Time S; and the Velocity G, wherewith the Move­able B pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space T in the Time R: And the proportion of C to G is compounded of the proportions of C to E and of E to G: But the proportion of C to E, is &longs;uppo&longs;ed the &longs;ame with that of the Space V to the Space T; and the proportion of E to G, is the &longs;ame with that of R to S: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is manifest.

* That is the A­cademick, i. e. Galileus.

SALV. This that we have read, is what our ^{*} Author hath written of the Equable Motion. We will pa&longs;s therefore to a more &longs;ubtil and new Contemplation touching the Motion Naturally Accelerate: and behold here the Title and Introduction.

OF MOTION NATVRALLY ACCELERATE.

In the former Book we have con&longs;idered the Accidents which ac­company Equable Motion; we are now to treat of another kind of Motion which we call Accelerate. And fir&longs;t it will be expedient to find out and explain a Definition be&longs;t agreeing to that which Nature makes u&longs;e of. For though it be not nconvenient to feign a Motion at plea­&longs;ure, and then to con&longs;ider the Accidents that attend it (as tho&longs;e have done, who having framed in their imagination Helixes and Conchoi­des, which are Lines ari&longs;ing from certain Motions, although not u&longs;ed by Nature, and upon that Suppo&longs;ition have laudably demon&longs;trated the Symptomes thereof) yet in regard that Nature maketh u&longs;e of a certain kind of Acceleration in the de&longs;cent of Grave Bodies, we are re&longs;olved to &longs;earch out and contemplate the pa&longs;&longs;ions thereof, and &longs;ee whether the Definition that we are about to produce of this our Accelerate Motion, doth aptly and congruou&longs;ly &longs;ute with the E&longs;&longs;ence of Motion Naturally Accelerate. After many long and laborious Studies we have found out a Definition which &longs;eemeth to expre&longs;&longs;e the true nature of this Accelerate Motion, in regard that all the Natural Experiments that fall under the Ob&longs;ervation of our Sen&longs;es, do agree with tho&longs;e its properties that we intend anon to demon&longs;trate. In this Di&longs;qui&longs;ition we have been a&longs;&longs;i­&longs;ted, and as it were led by the hand by that ob&longs;ervation of the u&longs;ual Method and common procedure of Nature her &longs;elf in her other Operati­ons, wherein &longs;he con&longs;tantly makes u&longs;e of the Fir&longs;t, Simple&longs;t, and Ea­&longs;ie&longs;t Means that are: for I believe that no man can think that Swim­ming or flying can be performed in a more &longs;imple or ea&longs;ie way, than that which Fi&longs;hes and Birds do u&longs;e out of a Natural In&longs;tinct. Why there­fore &longs;hall not I be per&longs;waded, that, when I &longs;ee a Stone to acquire conti­nually new additions of Velocity in its de&longs;cending from its Re&longs;t out of &longs;ome high place, this encrea&longs;e made in the &longs;imple&longs;t ea&longs;ie&longs;t and mo&longs;t obvious manner that we can imagine? Now if we &longs;eriou&longs;ly examine all the ways that can be devi&longs;ed, we &longs;hall find no encrea&longs;es, no acqui&longs;itions le&longs;&longs;e intricate or more intelligible than that which ever encrea&longs;eth or makes its additions after the &longs;ame manner. This appeareth by the greatAffinity that is between Time and Motion. For as the Equability or Vniformity of Motion is defined and expre&longs;&longs;ed by the Equability of theTimes and Spaces, (for we call that Motion or Lation Equable, by which equal Spaces are pa&longs;t in equal Times) &longs;o by the &longs;ame Equability of the parts of Time, we may perceive, that the encrea&longs;e of Celerity in the Natu­ral Motion of Grave Bodies, is made after a Simple and plain manner; conceiving in our Mind that their Motion is continually accelerated uni­formly and at the &longs;ame Rate, whil&longs;t equal additions of Celerity are conferred upon them in all equal Times. So that taking any equal par­ticles of Time beginning from the fir&longs;t In&longs;tant in which the Moveable departeth from Re&longs;t, and entereth upon its De&longs;cent, the Degree of Velocity acquired in the fir&longs;t and &longs;econd Particles of Time, is double the degree of Velocity that the Moveable acquired in the fir&longs;t Particle: and the degree of Velocity that it acquireth in three Particles, is triple, and that in four quadruple to the &longs;ame Degree of the fir&longs;t Time: As, for our better under&longs;tanding, if a Moveable &longs;hould continue its Motion according to the degree or moment of Velocity acquired in the fir&longs;t Parti­cle of Time, and &longs;hould extend its cour&longs;e equably with that &longs;ame De­gree; this Motion would be twice as &longs;low as that which it would obtain according to the degree of Velocity acquired in two Particles of Time: So that it will not be improper if we under&longs;tand the Intention of the Ve­locity, to proceed according to the Exten&longs;ion of the Time. From whence we may frame this Definition of the Motion of which we are about to treat.

DEFINITION.

Motion Accelerate in an Equable or Vniform Proportion, I call that which departing from Re&longs;t, &longs;uperaddeth equal moments of Velocity in equal Times.

SAGR. Though it were Irrational for me to oppo&longs;e this or any other Definition a&longs;&longs;igned by any what&longs;oever Author, they being all Arbitrary, yet I may very well, without any offence, que&longs;tion whe­ther this Definition, which is under&longs;tood and admitted in Ab&longs;tract, doth &longs;ute, agree, and hold true in that &longs;ort of Accelerate Motion, which Grave Bodies de&longs;cending naturally do exerci&longs;e. And becau&longs;e the Authour &longs;eemeth to promi&longs;e us, that the Natural Motion of Grave Bodies is &longs;uch as he hath defined it, I could wi&longs;h that &longs;ome Scruples were removed that trouble my mind; that &longs;o I might apply my &longs;elf afterwards with greater attention to the Proportions and Demon&longs;trations which are expected.

SALV. I like well, that you and Simplicius do propound Doubts as they come in the way: which I do imagine will be the &longs;ame that I my &longs;elf did meet with when I fir&longs;t read this Treati&longs;e, and that, either were re&longs;olved by conferring with the Author, or removed by my own con&longs;idering of them.

SAGR. Whil&longs;t I am fancying to my &longs;elf a Grave De&longs;cending Moveable to depart from Re&longs;t, that is from the privation of all Velocity, and to enter into Motion, and in that to go encrea­&longs;ing, according to the proportion after which the Time encrea&longs;eth from the fir&longs;t in&longs;tant of the Motion; and to have v. gr. in eight Pul&longs;ations, acquired eight degrees of Velocity, of which in the fourth Pul&longs;ation it had gained four, in the &longs;econd two, in the fir&longs;t one, Time being &longs;ubdivi&longs;ible in infinitum, it followeth, that the Antecedent Velocity alwayes dimini&longs;hing at that Rate, there will bt no degree of Velocity &longs;o &longs;mall, or, if you will, of Tardity &longs;o great, in which the &longs;aid Moveable is not found to be con&longs;ti­tuted, after its departure from infinite Tardity, that is, from Re&longs;t. So that if that degree of Velocity which it had at four Pul­&longs;ations of Time, was &longs;uch, that maintaining it Equable, it would have run two Miles in an hour, and with the degree of Velocity that it had in the &longs;econd Pul&longs;ation, it would have gone one mile an hour, it mu&longs;t be granted, that in the In&longs;tants of Time neeter and neerer to its fir&longs;t In&longs;tant of moving from Re&longs;t, it is &longs;o &longs;low, as that (continuing to move with that Tardity) it would not have pa&longs;&longs;ed a Mile in an hour, nor in a day, nor in a year, nor in a thou&longs;and; nay, nor have gone one &longs;ole foot in a greater time: An accident to which me thinks the Imagination but very unea­&longs;ily accords, &longs;eeing that Sen&longs;e &longs;heweth us, that a Grave Falling Body commeth down &longs;uddenly, and with great Velocity.

SALV. This is one of tho&longs;e Doubts that al&longs;o fell in my way upon my fir&longs;t thinking on this affair, but not long after I remo­ved it: and that removal was the effect of the &longs;elf &longs;ame Expe­riment which at pre&longs;ent &longs;tarts it to you. You &longs;ay, that in your opinion, Experience &longs;heweth that the Moveable hath no &longs;ooner departed from Re&longs;t, but it entereth into a very notable Velocity: and I &longs;ay, that this very Experiment proves it to us, that the fir&longs;t Impetus's of the Cadent Body, although it be very heavy, are mo&longs;t &longs;lack and &longs;low. Lay a Grave Body upon &longs;ome yielding mat­ter, and let it continue upon it till it hath pre&longs;&longs;ed into it as far as it can with its &longs;imple Gravity; it is manife&longs;t, that rai&longs;ing it a yard or two, and then letting it fall upon the &longs;ame matter, it &longs;hall with its percu&longs;&longs;ion make a new pre&longs;&longs;ure, and greater than that made at fir&longs;t by its meer weight: and the effect &longs;hall be cau&longs;ed by the falling Moveable conjoyned with the Velocity acquired in the Fall: which impre&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall be greater and greater, accord­ing as the Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall come from a greater height; that is, according as the Velocity of the Percutient &longs;hall be greater. We may therefore without mi&longs;take conjecture the quantity of the Ve­locity of a falling heavy Body; by the quality and quantity of the Percu&longs;&longs;ion. But tell me Sirs, that Beetle which being let fall upon a Stake from an height of four yards, driveth it into the ground, v. gr. four inches, comming from an height of two yards, &longs;hall drive it much le&longs;&longs;e, and le&longs;&longs;e from an height of one, and le&longs;&longs;e from a foot; and la&longs;tly lifting it up an inch, what will it do more than if without any blow it were laid upon it? Certainly but very little, and the operation would be wholly impercep­tible, if it were rai&longs;ed the thickne&longs;&longs;e of a leaf. And becau&longs;e the effect of the Percu&longs;&longs;ion is regulated by the Velocity of the Percu­tient, who will que&longs;tion but that the Motion is very &longs;low, and the Velocity extreme &longs;mall, where its operation is impercep­tible? See now of what power Truth is, &longs;ince the &longs;ame Experi­ment that &longs;eemed at the fir&longs;t blu&longs;h to hold forth one thing, be­ing better con&longs;idered, a&longs;certains us of the contrary. But without having recour&longs;e to that Experiment (which without doubt is mo&longs;t per&longs;wa&longs;ive) me-thinks that it is not hard to penetrate &longs;uch a Truth as this by meer Di&longs;cour&longs;e. We have an heavy &longs;tone &longs;u­&longs;tained in the Air at Re&longs;t: let it be di&longs;engaged from its uphol­der, and &longs;et at liberty; and, as being more grave than the Air, it goeth de&longs;cending downwards, and that not with a Motion Equa­ble, but &longs;low in the beginning, and continually afterwards ac­celerate: and &longs;eeing that the Velocity is Augmentable and Di­mini&longs;hable in infinitum, what Rea&longs;on &longs;hall per&longs;wade me, that that Moveable departing from an infinite Tardity (for &longs;uch is Re&longs;t) entereth immediately into ten degrees of Velocity, rather than in one of four, or in this more than in one of two, of one, of half one, or of the hundredth part of one; and to be &longs;hort, in all the infinite le&longs;&longs;er? Pray you hear me. I do not think that you would &longs;cruple to grant me, that the acqui&longs;t of the Degrees of Ve­locity of the falling Stone may be made with the &longs;ame Order as is the Diminution and lo&longs;&longs;e of the &longs;ame degrees, when with an impellent Virtue it is driven upwards to the &longs;ame height: But if that be &longs;o, I do not &longs;ee how it can be &longs;uppo&longs;ed that in the diminu­tion of the Velocity of the a&longs;cendent Stone, &longs;pending it all, it can come to the &longs;tate of Re&longs;t before it hath pa&longs;&longs;ed thorow all the degrees of Tardity.

SIMP. But if the greater and greater degrees of Tardity are infinite, it &longs;hall never &longs;pend them all; &longs;o that the a&longs;cendent Grave will never attain to Re&longs;t, but will move ad infinitum, &longs;till retarding: a thing which we &longs;ee not to happen.

SALV. This would happen, Simplicius, in ca&longs;e the Moveable &longs;hould &longs;tay for &longs;ome time in each degree: but it pa&longs;&longs;eth thorow them, without &longs;taying longer than an in&longs;tant in any of them. And becau&longs;e in every quantitative Time, though never &longs;o &longs;mall, there are infinite In&longs;tants, therefore they are &longs;ufficient to an&longs;wer to the infinite degrees of Velocity dimini&longs;hed. And that the a&longs;cendent Grave Body per&longs;i&longs;ts not for any quantitative Time in one and the &longs;ame degree of Velocity, may thus be made out: Becau&longs;e, a certain quantitative Time being a&longs;&longs;igned it in the fir&longs;t in&longs;tant of that Time, and likewi&longs;e in the la&longs;t, the Moveable &longs;hould be found to have one and the &longs;ame degree of Velocity, it might by this &longs;econd degree be likewi&longs;e driven upwards &longs;uch an­other Space, like as from the fir&longs;t it was tran&longs;ported to the &longs;e­cond; and by the &longs;ame rea&longs;on it would pa&longs;&longs;e from the &longs;econd to the third, and, in &longs;hort, would continue its Motion Uniform ad infinitum.

SAGR. From this Di&longs;cour&longs;e, as I conceive, one might derive a very appo&longs;ite Rea&longs;on of the Que&longs;tion controverted among&longs;t Philo. &longs;ophers, Touching what &longs;hould be the Cau&longs;e of the acceleration of the Natural Motion of Grave Moveables. For when I confider in the Grave Body driven upwards, its continual Diminution of that Virtue impre&longs;&longs;ed upon it by the Projicient, which &longs;o long as it was &longs;uperiour to that other contrary one of Gravity, forced it upwards, this and that being come to an Equilibrium, the Move­able cea&longs;eth to ri&longs;e any higher, and pa&longs;&longs;eth thorow the &longs;tate of Re&longs;t, in which the Impetus impre&longs;&longs;ed is not annihilated, but one­ly that exce&longs;&longs;e is &longs;pent, which it before had above the Gravity of the Moveable, whereby prevailing over the &longs;ame, it did drive it upwards. And the Diminution of this forrein Impetus continu­ing, and con&longs;equently the advantage beginning to be on the part of the Gravity, the De&longs;cent al&longs;o beginneth but &longs;low, in regard of the oppo&longs;ition of the Virtue impre&longs;&longs;ed, a con&longs;iderable part of which &longs;till remaineth in the Moveable: but becau&longs;e it doth go continually dimini&longs;hing, and is &longs;till with a greater and greater proportion overcome by the Gravity, hence ari&longs;eth the continual Acceleration of the Motion.

SIMP. The conceit is witty, but more &longs;ubtil than &longs;olid: for in ca&longs;e it were concludent, it &longs;alveth onely tho&longs;e Natural Motions to which a Violent Motion preceded, in which part of the extern Virtue &longs;till remains in force: but where there is no &longs;uch remaining impul&longs;e, as where the Moveable departeth from a long Quie&longs;­cence, the &longs;trength of your whole Di&longs;cour&longs;e vani&longs;heth.

SAGR. I believe that you are in an Errour, and that this Di­&longs;tinction of Ca&longs;es which you make, is needle&longs;&longs;e, or, to &longs;ay bet­ter, Null. Therefore tell me, whether may there be impre&longs;&longs;ed on the Project by the Projicient &longs;ometimes much, and &longs;ometimes little Vertue; &longs;o as that it may be &longs;tricken upwards an hundred yards, and al&longs;o twenty, or four, or one?

SIMP. No doubt but there may.

SAGR. And no le&longs;&longs;e po&longs;&longs;ible is it, that the &longs;aid Virtue impre&longs;&longs;ed &longs;hall &longs;o little &longs;eperate the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Gravity, as not to rai&longs;e the Project above an inch: and finally the Virtue of the Projicient may be onely &longs;o much, as ju&longs;t to equalize and com­pen&longs;ate the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Gravity, &longs;o as that the Moveable is not driven upwards, but onely &longs;u&longs;tained. So that when you hold a Stone in your hand, what el&longs;e do you, but impre&longs;&longs;e on it &longs;o much Virtue impelling upwards, as is the faculty of its Gra­vity drawing downwards? And this your Virtue, do you not continue to keep it impre&longs;&longs;ed on the Stone all the time that you hold it in your hand? What &longs;ay you, is it dimini&longs;hed by your long holding it? And this &longs;u&longs;tention which impedeth the Stones de&longs;cent, what doth it import, whether it be made by your hand, or by a Table, or by a Rope, that &longs;u&longs;pends it? Doubtle&longs;&longs;e no thing at all. Conclude with your &longs;elf therefore, Simplicius, that the precedence of a long, a &longs;hort, or a Momentary Re&longs;t to the Fall of the Stone, makes no alteration at all, &longs;o that the Stone &longs;hould not alwaies depart affected with &longs;o much Virtue contrary to Gravity, as did exactly &longs;uffice to have kept it in Re&longs;t.

SALV. I do not think it a &longs;ea&longs;onable time at pre&longs;ent to enter upon the Di&longs;qui&longs;ition of the Cau&longs;e of the Acceleration of Natu­ral Motion: touching which &longs;undry Philo&longs;ophers have produced &longs;undry opinions: &longs;ome reducing it to the approximation unto the Center others to the le&longs;&longs;e parts of the Medium &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively re­maining to be perforated; others to a certain Extru&longs;ion of the Ambient Medium, which in reuniting upon the back of the Moveable, goeth driving and continually thru&longs;ting it; which Fancies, and others of the like nature, it would be nece&longs;&longs;ary to examine, and with &longs;mall benefit to an&longs;wer. It &longs;erveth our Au­thours turn at the pre&longs;ent, that we under&longs;tand that he will de­clare and demon&longs;trate to us &longs;ome Pa&longs;&longs;ions of an Accelerate Mo­tion (be the Cau&longs;e of its Acceleration what it will) &longs;o as that the Moments of its Velocity do go encrea&longs;ing, after its departure from Re&longs;t with that mo&longs;t &longs;imple proportion wherewith the Continua­tion of the Time doth encrea&longs;e: which is as much as to &longs;ay, that in equal Times there are made equal additaments of Velocity. And if it &longs;hall be found, that the Accidents that &longs;hall hereafter be demon&longs;trated, do hold true in the Motion of Naturally De­&longs;cendent and Accelerate Grave Moveables, we may account, that the a&longs;&longs;umed Definition taketh in that Motion of Grave Bo­dies, and that it is true, that their Acceleration doth encrea&longs;e ac­cording as the Time and Duration of the Motion encrea&longs;eth.

SAGR. By what as yet is &longs;et before my Intellectuals, it appears to me that one might with (haply) more plainne&longs;&longs;e define, and yet never alter the Conceit; &longs;aying that, A Motion uniformly accele­rate is that in which the Velocity goeth encrea&longs;ing according as the Space encrea&longs;eth that is pa&longs;&longs;ed thorow: So that, for example, the degree of Velocity acquired by the Moveable in a de&longs;cent of four yards &longs;hould be double to that that it would have after it had de&longs;cended a Space of two, and this double to that acquired in the Space of the fir&longs;t Yard. For I do not think that it can be doubted, but that that Grave Moveable which falleth from an height of &longs;ix yards hath, and percu&longs;&longs;eth with an Impetus double to that which it had when it had de&longs;cended three yards, and triple to that which it had at two, and &longs;extuple to that had in the Space of one.

SALV. I comfort my &longs;elf in that I have had &longs;uch a Companion in my Errour: and I will tell you farther, that your Di&longs;cour&longs;e hath &longs;o much of likelihood and probability in it, that our Author him&longs;elf did not deny unto me, when I propo&longs;ed it to him, that he likewi&longs;e had been for &longs;ome time in the &longs;ame mi&longs;take. But that which I af­terwards extreamly wondred at, was to &longs;ee in four plain words, di&longs;covered, not only the falfity, but impo&longs;&longs;ibility of two Propo&longs;i­tions that carry with them &longs;o much of &longs;eeming truth, that having propounded them to many, I never met with any one but did freely admit them to be &longs;o.

SIMP. Certainly I &longs;hould be of the number, and that the De­&longs;cendent Grave Moveable vires acquir at eundo, encrea&longs;ing its Ve­locity at the rate of the Space, and that the Moment of the &longs;ame Percutient is double, coming from a double height, &longs;eem to me Pro­po&longs;itions to be granted without any hæ&longs;itation or controver&longs;ie.

SALV. And yet they are as fal&longs;e and impo&longs;&longs;ible, as that Moti­on is made in an in&longs;tant. And hear a clear proof of the &longs;ame. In ca&longs;e the Velocities have the &longs;ame proportion as the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed, or to be pa&longs;&longs;ed, tho&longs;e Spaces &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed in equal Times: if therefore the Velocities with which the falling Moveable pa&longs;&longs;eth the Space of four yards, were double to the Velocities with which it pa&longs;&longs;eth the two fir&longs;t yards (like as the Space is double to the Space) then the Times of tho&longs;e Tran&longs;itions are equal: but the &longs;ame Move­able's pa&longs;&longs;ing the four yards, and the two in one and the &longs;ame Time, hath place only in In&longs;tantaneous Motion. But we &longs;ee, that the falling grave Body maketh its Motion in Time, and pa&longs;&longs;eth the two yards in a le&longs;&longs;er than it doth the four. Therefore it is fal&longs;e that its Velocity encrea&longs;eth as its Space. The other Propo&longs;ition is demon­&longs;trated to be fal&longs;e with the &longs;ame per&longs;picuity. For that which per­cu&longs;&longs;eth being the &longs;ame, the difference and Moment of the Percu&longs;&longs;ton cannot be determined but by the difference of Velocity; If there­fore the percutient, coming from a double height, make a Percu&longs;&longs;i­on with a double Moment, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that it &longs;trike with a dou­ble Velocity: But the double Velocity pa&longs;&longs;eth the double Space in the &longs;ame Time; and we &longs;ee the Time of the De&longs;cent from the grea­ter altitude to be longer.

SAGR. This is too great an Evidence, too great a Facility wherewith you manife&longs;t ab&longs;truce Conclu&longs;ions: this extream ea&longs;i­ne&longs;s rendreth them of le&longs;&longs;e value than they were whil&longs;t they lay hid under contrary appearances. I believe that the Generality of men little pre&longs;&longs;e tho&longs;e Notions which are ea&longs;ily obtained, in compari­&longs;on of tho&longs;e about which men make &longs;o long and inexplicable alter­cations.

SALV. To tho&longs;e which with great brevity and clarity &longs;hew the fallacies of Propo&longs;itions that have been commonly received for true by the generality of people, it would be a very tolerable in­jury to return them only &longs;lighting in&longs;tead of thanks: but there is much di&longs;plea&longs;ure and mole&longs;tation in another certain affection &longs;ometimes found in &longs;ome men, that pretending in the &longs;ame Studies at lea&longs;t Parity with any whom&longs;oever, do &longs;ee that they have let pa&longs;s &longs;uch and &longs;uch for true Conclu&longs;ions, which afterwards by another, with a &longs;hort and ea&longs;ie di&longs;qui&longs;ition, have been detected and convicted for fal&longs;e. I will not call that affection Envy, that is ac­cu&longs;tomed to convert in time to hatred and de&longs;pite again&longs;t the di&longs;­coverers of &longs;uch Fallacies, but I will call it an itch, and a de&longs;ire to be able rather to maintain their inveterate Errours, than to per­mit the reception of new-di&longs;covered Truths. Which humour &longs;ome­times induceth them to write in contradiction of tho&longs;e truths which are but too perfectly known unto them&longs;elves only to keep the Reputation of others low in the opinion of the numerous and ill-informed Vulgar. Of &longs;uch fal&longs;e Conclu&longs;ions received for true, and very ea&longs;ie to be confuted, I have heard no &longs;mall number from our Academick, of &longs;ome of which I have kept account.

SAGR. And you mu&longs;t not deprive us of them; but in due time impart them to us, when a particular Meeting &longs;hall be appointed for them. For the pre&longs;ent, continuing the di&longs;cour&longs;e we are about, I think that by this time we have e&longs;tabli&longs;hed the Definition of Mo­tion uniformly Accelerate, treated of in the en&longs;uing di&longs;cour&longs;es, and it is this;

A Motion Equable, or Vniformly Accelerate, we call that which departing from Re&longs;t &longs;uperadds equal Moments of Velocity in equal Times.

SALV. That Definition being confirmed, the Author asketh and &longs;uppo&longs;eth but one only Principle to be true, namely:

SVPPOSITION.

I &longs;uppo&longs;e that the degrees of Velocity acquired by the &longs;ame Moveable upon Planes of different inclinations are equal then, when the Elevations of the &longs;aid Planes are equal.

By the Elevation of an inclined Plane he meaneth the Per­pendicular, which from the higher term of the &longs;aid Plane falleth upon the Horizontal Line produced along by the lower term of the &longs;aid Plane inclined: as for better under&longs;tanding; the Line A B being parallel to the Horizon, upon which let the two

Planes C A, and C D be inclined: the Perpendicular C B falling up­on the Horizontal Line B A the Author calleth the Elevation of the Planes C A and C D; and &longs;uppo&longs;eth that the degrees of Velocity of the &longs;ame Moveable de&longs;cending along the inclined Planes C A and C D, acqui­red in the Terms A and D are equal, for that their Elevation is the &longs;ame C B. And &longs;o great al&longs;o ought the degree of Velocity be under&longs;tood to be which the &longs;ame Moveable falling from the Point C would acquire in the term B.

SAGR. The truth is, this Suppo&longs;ition hath in it &longs;o much of pro­bability, that it de&longs;erveth to be granted without di&longs;pute, alwaies pre&longs;uppo&longs;ing that all accidental and extern Impediments are re­moved, and that the Planes be very Solid and Ter&longs;e, and the Move­able in Figure mo&longs;t perfectly Rotund, &longs;o that neither the Plane, nor the Moveable have any unevenne&longs;s. All Contra&longs;ts and Im­pediments, I &longs;ay, being removed, the light of Nature dictates to me without any difficulty, that a Ball heavy and perfectly round de&longs;cending by the Lines C A, C D, and C B would come to the terms A D, and B with equal Impetus's.

SALV. You argue very probably; but over and above the pro­bability, I will by an Experiment &longs;o increa&longs;e the likelihood, as that it wants but little of being equal to a very nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;trati­on. Imagine this leafe of Paper to be a Wall erect at Right-angles to the Horizon, and at a Nail, fa&longs;tned in the &longs;ame, hang a Ball or Plummet of Lead, weighing an ounce or two, &longs;u&longs;pended by the &longs;mall thread A B, two or three yards long, perpendicular to the Horizon: and on the Wall draw an Horizontal Line D C, cutting the Perpendicular A B at Right angles, which A B mu&longs;t hang two Inches, or thereabouts, from the Wall: Then transferring the &longs;tring A B with the Ball into C, let go the &longs;aid Ball; which you will

&longs;ee fir&longs;t to de&longs;cend de&longs;cribing C B D, and to pa&longs;s &longs;o far beyond the Term B, that run­ning along the Arch B D it will ri&longs;e almo&longs;t as high as the de&longs;igned Parallel C D, wanting but a very &longs;mall mat­ter of reaching to it, the preci&longs;e arrival thi­ther being denied it by the Impediment of the Air, and of the Thread. From which we may truly conclude, that the Impetus acquired in the point B by the Ball in its de&longs;cent along the Arch C B, was &longs;o much as &longs;ufficed to carry it upwards along &longs;uch another Arch B D unto the &longs;ame height: having made, and often reiterated this Experiment, let us drive into the Wall, along which the Perpendicular A B pa&longs;&longs;eth, another Nail, as in E or in F, which is to &longs;tand out five or &longs;ix In­ches; and this to the end that the thread A B, returning as before to carry back the Ball C along the Arch C B, when it is come to B, the Thread &longs;topping at the Nail E may be con&longs;trained to move along the Circumference B G, de&longs;cribed about the Center E: by which we &longs;hall &longs;ee what that &longs;ame Impetus is able to do, which be­fore, being conceived in the &longs;ame term B, carried the &longs;ame Move­able along the Arch B D unto the height of the Horizontal Line C D. Now, Sirs, you &longs;hall with delight &longs;ee the Ball carried unto the Horizontal Line in the Point G; and the &longs;ame will happen if the &longs;top be placed lower, as in F, where the Ball would de&longs;cribe the Arch B I, evermore terminating its a&longs;cent exactly in the Line C D: and in ca&longs;e the Check were &longs;o low that the overplus of the thread beneath it cannot reach to the height of C D, (which would happen if it were nearer to the point B than to the inter&longs;ection of A B with the Horizontal Line C D) then the thread would whirle and twine about the Nail. This experiment leaveth no place for our doubting of the truth of the Suppo&longs;ition: for the two Arches C B and D B being equall, and &longs;cituate alike, the acqui&longs;t of Moment made along the De&longs;cent in the Arch C B, is the &longs;ame with that made along the De&longs;cent in the Arch D B. But the Moment acquired in B, along the Arch C B, is able to carry the &longs;ame Moveable upwards along the Arch B D: Therefore the Mo­ment acquired in the De&longs;cent D B is equall to that which driveth the &longs;ame Moveable along the &longs;ame Arch from B to D: So that ge­nerally every Moment acquired along the De&longs;cent of an Arch is equall to that which hath power to make the &longs;ame Moveable re­a&longs;cend along the &longs;ame Arch: But all the Moments that make the Moveable a&longs;cend along all the Arches B D, B G, B I are equal, &longs;ince they are made by one and the &longs;ame Moment acquired along the De&longs;cent C B, as Experience &longs;hews: Therefore all the Moments that are acquired by the De&longs;cents along the Arches D B, G B, and I B are equal.

SAGR. Your Di&longs;cour&longs;e is in my Judgment very Rational, and the Experiment &longs;o appo&longs;ite and pertinent to verifie the Po&longs;tulatum,that it very well de&longs;erveth to be admitted as if it were Demon­&longs;trated.

SALV. I will not con&longs;ent, Sagredus, that we take more to our &longs;elves than we ought; and the rather for that we are chiefly to make u&longs;e of this A&longs;&longs;umption in Motions made upon &longs;treight and not curved Superficies; in which the Acceleration proceedeth with degrees very different from tho&longs;e wherewith we &longs;uppo&longs;e it to pro­ceed in &longs;treight Planes. In&longs;omuch, that although the Experiment alledged &longs;hews us, that the de&longs;cent along the Arch C B conferreth on the Moveable &longs;uch a Moment, as that it is able to re-carry it to the &longs;ame height along any other Arch B C, B G, and B I, yet we cannot with the like evidence &longs;hew, that the &longs;ame would hap­pen in ca&longs;e a mo&longs;t exact Ball were to de&longs;cend by &longs;treight Planes in­clined according to the inclinations of the Chords of the&longs;e &longs;ame Arches: yea, it is credible, that Angles being formed by the &longs;aid Right Planes in the term B, the Ball de&longs;cended along the Declivi­ty according to the Chord C B, finding a &longs;top in the Planes a&longs;cend­ing according to the Chords B D, B G, and B I, in ju&longs;tling again&longs;t them, would lo&longs;e of its Impetus, and could not be able in ri&longs;ing to attain the height of the Line C D. But the Ob&longs;tacle being remo­ved, which prejudiceth the Experiment, I do believe, that the un­der&longs;tanding may conceive, that the Impetus (which in effect de­riveth vigour from the quantity of the De&longs;cent) would be able to remount the Moveable to the &longs;ame height. Let us therefore take this at pre&longs;ent for a Po&longs;tulatum or Petition, the ab&longs;olute truth of which will come to be e&longs;tabli&longs;hed hereafter by &longs;eeing other Con­clu&longs;ions rai&longs;ed upon this Hypothe&longs;is to an&longs;wer, and exactly jump with the Experiment. The Author having &longs;uppo&longs;ed this only Prin­ciple, he pa&longs;&longs;eth to the Propo&longs;itions, demon&longs;tratively proving them; of which the fir&longs;t is this;

THEOR. I. PROP. I.

The time in which a Space is pa&longs;&longs;ed by a Movea­ble with a Motion Vniformly Accelerate, out of Re&longs;t, is equal to the Time in which the &longs;ame Space would be pa&longs;t by the &longs;ame Moveable with an Equable Motion, the degree of who&longs;e Velocity is &longs;ubduple to the greate&longs;t and ulti mate degree of the Velocity of the former Vni­formly Accelerate Motion.

Let us by the exten&longs;ion A B repre&longs;ent the Time, in which the Space C D is pa&longs;&longs;ed by a Moveable with a Motion Vniformly Accelerate, out of Re&longs;t in C: and let the greate&longs;t and la&longs;t de-

gree of Velocity acquired in the In&longs;tants of the TimeA B be repre&longs;ented by E B; and con&longs;titute at plea­&longs;ure upon A B any number of parts, and thorow the points of divi&longs;ion draw as many Lines, continued out unto the Line A E, and equidi&longs;tant to B E, which will repre&longs;ent the encrea&longs;e of the degrees of Velocity after the fir&longs;t In&longs;tant A. Then divide B E into two equall parts in F, and draw F G and A G parallel to B A and B F: The Parallelogram A G F B &longs;hall be equall to the Triangle A E B, its SideG F dividing A E into two equall parts in I: For if the Parallels of the Triangle A E B be continued out unto I G F, we &longs;hall have the Aggregate of all the Parallels contained in the Quadrilatural Figure equal to the Aggregate of all the Parallels compre­hended in the Triangle A E B; For tho&longs;e in the Triangle I E F are equal to tho&longs;e contained in the Triangle G I A, and tho&longs;e that are in the Tra­pezium are in common. Now &longs;ince all and &longs;ingular the In&longs;tants of Time do an&longs;wer to all and &longs;ingular the Points of the Line A B; and &longs;ince the Parallels contained in the Triangle A E B do repre&longs;ent the degrees of Ac­celeration or encrea&longs;ing Velocity, and the Parallels contained in the Pa­rallelogram do likewi&longs;e repre&longs;ent as many degrees of Equable Motion or unencrea&longs;ing Velocity: It appeareth, that as many Moments of Velocity pa&longs;&longs;ed in the Accelerate Motion according to the encrea&longs;ing Parallels of the Triangle A E B, as in the Equable Motion according to the Parallels of the Parallelogram G B: Becau&longs;e what is wanting in the fir&longs;t half of theAccelerate Motion of the Velocity of the Equable Motion (which defi­cient Moments are repre&longs;ented by the Parallels of the Triangle A G I) is made up by the moments repre&longs;ented by the Parallels of the TriangleI E F. It is manife&longs;t, therefore, that tho&longs;e Spaces are equal which are in the &longs;ame Time by two Moveables, one whereof is moved with a Mo­tion uniformly Accelerated from Re&longs;t, the other with a Motion Equable according to the Moment &longs;ubduple of that of the greate&longs;t Velocity of the Accelerated Motion: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

THEOR. II. PROP. II.

If a Moveable de&longs;cend out of Re&longs;t with a Moti­on uniformly Accelerate, the Spaces which it pa&longs;&longs;eth in any what&longs;oever Times are to each other in a proportion Duplicate of the &longs;ame Times; that is, they are as the Squares of them.

Let A B repre&longs;ent a length of Time beginning at the fir&longs;t In&longs;tant A; and let A D and A E repre&longs;ent any two parts of the &longs;aid Time; and let H I be a Line in which the Moveable out of H, (as the fir&longs;t beginning of the Motion) de&longs;cendeth uniformly accelerating; and let the

Space H L be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the fir&longs;t Time A D; and let H M be the Space that it &longs;hall de&longs;cend in the Time A E. I &longs;ay, the Space M H is to the Space H L in duplicate propor­tion of that which the Time E A hath to the Time A D: Or, if you will, that the Spaces M H and H L are to one another in the &longs;ame proportion as the Squares E A andA D. Draw the Line A C at any Angle with A B, and from the points D and E draw the Parallels D O andP E: of which D O will repre&longs;ent the greate&longs;t degree of Velocity acquired in the In&longs;tant D of the Time A D; and P the greate&longs;t degree of Velocity acquired in the In­&longs;tant E of the Time A E. And becau&longs;e we have de­mon&longs;trated in the la&longs;t Propo&longs;ition concerning Spaces, that tho&longs;e are equal to one another, of which two Moveables have pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time, the one by a Moveable out of Re&longs;t with a Motion uniformly Accelerate, and the other by the &longs;ame Moveable with an Equable Motion, who&longs;e Velocity is &longs;ubduple to the greate&longs;t acquired by the Accelerate Motion: Therefore M H and H L are the Spaces that two Lquable Motions, who&longs;e Velocities &longs;hould be as the half of P E, andhalf of O D, would pa&longs;&longs;e in the Times E A and D A. If it be proved therefore that the&longs;e Spaces M H and L H are in duplicate proportion to the Times E A and D A; We &longs;hall have done that which was intended. But in the fourth Propo&longs;ition of the Fir&longs;t Book we have demon&longs;trated: That the Spaces pa&longs;t by two Moveables with an Equable Motion are to each other in a proportion compounded of the proportion of the Velo­cities and of the proportion of the Times: But in this ca&longs;e the propor­tion of the Velocities and the proportion of the Times is the &longs;ame (for as the half of P E is to the half of O D, or the whole P E to the wholeO D, &longs;o is A E to A D: Therefore the proportion of the Spaces pa&longs;­&longs;ed is double to the proportion of the Times. Which was to be demon­&longs;trated.

Hence likewi&longs;e it is manife&longs;t, that the proportion of the &longs;ame Spaces is double to the proportions of the greate&longs;t degrees of Velocity: that is, of the Lines P E and O D: becau&longs;e P E is to O D, as E A to D A.

COROLARY I.

Hence it is manife&longs;t, that if there were many equal Times taken in or­der from the fir&longs;t In&longs;tant or beginniug of the Motion, as &longs;uppo&longs;eA D, D E, E F, F G, in which the Spaces H L, L M, M N, N I are pa&longs;&longs;ed, tho&longs;e Spaces &longs;hall be to one another as the odd numbers from an Vnite: &longs;cilicet, as 1, 3, 5, 7. For this is the Rate or pro­portion of the exce&longs;&longs;es of the Squares of Lines that equally exceed one another, and the exce&longs;&longs;e of which is equal to the least of them, or, if you will, of Squares that follow one another, beginning ab Unitate. Whil&longs;t therefore the degree of Velocity is encrea&longs;ed ac­cording to the &longs;imple Series of Numbers in equal Times, the Spaces pa&longs;t in tho&longs;e Times make their encrea&longs;e according to the Series of odd Numbers from an Vnite.

SAGR. Be plea&longs;ed to &longs;tay your Reading, whil&longs;t I do paraphra&longs;e touching a certain Conjecture that came into my mind but even now; for the explanation of which, unto your under­&longs;tanding and my own, I will de&longs;cribe a &longs;hort Scheme: in which I fan&longs;ie by the Line A I the continuation of the Time after the fir&longs;t In&longs;tant, applying the Right Line A F unto A according to any Angle: and joyning together the Terms I F, I divide the Time A I in half at C, and then draw C B parallel to I F. And then con&longs;ide­ring B C, as the greate&longs;t degree of Velocity which beginning from Re&longs;t in the fir&longs;t In&longs;tant of the Time A goeth augmenting accord­ing to the encrea&longs;e of the Parallels to B C, drawn in the Triangle A B C, (which is all one as to encrea&longs;e according to the encrea&longs;e of the Time) I admit without di&longs;pute, upon what hath been &longs;aid already, That the Space pa&longs;t by the falling Moveable with the Velocity encrea&longs;ed in the manner afore&longs;aid would be equal to the Space that the &longs;aid Moveable would pa&longs;&longs;e, in ca&longs;e it were in the &longs;ame Time A C, moved with an Uniform Motion, who&longs;e degree of Velocity &longs;hould be equal to E C, the half of B C. I now proceed farther, and imagine the Moveable; having de&longs;cended with an Accelerate Motion, to have in the In&longs;tant C the degree of Velocity B C: It is ma­

nife&longs;t, that if it did continue to move with the &longs;ame degree of Velocity B C, without farther Acceleration, it would pa&longs;&longs;e in the following Time C I, a Space double to that which it pa&longs;&longs;ed in the equal Time A C, with the degree of Uniform Velocity E C, the half of the Degree B C. But becau&longs;e the Moveable de&longs;cendeth with a Velocity encrea&longs;ed alwaies Uni­formly in all equal Times; it will add to the degree C B in the following Time C I, tho&longs;e Tame Moments of Velocity that encrea&longs;e according to the Parallels of the Triangle B F G, equal to the Triangle A B C. So that adding to the degree of Velocity G I, the half of the degree F G, the greate&longs;t of tho&longs;e ac­quired in the Accelerate Motion, and regulated by the Parallels of the Triangle B F G, we &longs;hall have the degree of Velocity I N, with which, with an Uniform Motion, it would have moved in the Time C I: Which degree I N, being triple the degree E C, pro­veth that the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;econd Time C I ought to be tri­ple to that of the fir&longs;t Time C A. And if we &longs;hould &longs;uppo&longs;e to be added to A I another equal part of Time I O, and the Triangle to be enlarged unto A P O; it is manife&longs;t, that if the Motion &longs;hould continue for all the Time I O with the degree of Velocity I F, acquired in the Accelerate Motion in the Time A I, that degree I F being Quadruple to E C, the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed would be Quadruple to that pa&longs;&longs;ed in the equal fir&longs;t Time A C: But continuing the encrea&longs;e of the Uniform Acceleration in the Triangle F P Q like to that of the Triangle A B C, which being reduced to equable Motion addeth the degree equal to E C, Q R being added, equal to E C, we &longs;hall have the whole Equable Velocity exerci&longs;ed in the Time I O, quintuple to the Equable Velocity of the fir&longs;t Time A C, and therefore the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed quintuple to that pa&longs;t in the fir&longs;t Time A C. We &longs;ee therefore, even by this familiar computation, That the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed in equal Times by a Moveable which departing from Re&longs;t goeth acquiring Velocity, according to the encrea&longs;e of the Time, are to one another as the odd Numbers abunitate 1, 3, 5: And that the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed being conjunctly taken, that pa&longs;&longs;ed in the double Time is quadruple to that pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ubduple, that pa&longs;&longs;ed in the triple Time is nonuple; and, in a word, that the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed are in duplicate proportion to their Times; that is, as the Squares of the &longs;aid Times.

SIMP. I mu&longs;t confe&longs;&longs;e that I have taken more plea&longs;ure in this plain and clear di&longs;cour&longs;e of Sagredus, than in the to-me-more ob&longs;cure Demon&longs;tration of the Author: &longs;o that I am very well &longs;atisfied, that the bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e is to &longs;ucceed as hath been &longs;aid, the Definition of Uniformly Accelerate Motion being &longs;uppo&longs;ed, and granted. But whether this be the Acceleration of which Nature maketh u&longs;e in the Motion of its de&longs;cending Grave Bodies, I yet make a que&longs;tion: and therefore for information of me, and of others like unto me, me thinks it would be &longs;ea&longs;onable in this place to produce &longs;ome Experiment among&longs;t tho&longs;e which were &longs;aid to be many, which in &longs;undry Ca&longs;es agree with the Conclu&longs;ions demon­&longs;trated.

SALV. You, like a true Arti&longs;t, make a very rea&longs;onable demand, and &longs;o it is u&longs;ual and convenient to do in Sciences that apply Mathematical Demon&longs;trations to Phy&longs;ical Conclu&longs;ions, as we &longs;ee in the Profe&longs;&longs;ors of Per&longs;pection, A&longs;tronomy, Mechanicks, Mu&longs;ick, and others, who with Sen&longs;ible Experiments confirm tho&longs;e their Principles that are as the foundations of all the following Structure: and therefore I de&longs;ire that it may not be thought &longs;uperfluous, that we di&longs;cour&longs;e with &longs;ome prolixity upon this fir&longs;t and grand funda­mental on which we lay the weight of the Immen&longs;e Machine of infinite Conclu&longs;ions, of which we have but a very &longs;mall part &longs;et down in this Book by our Author, who hath done enough to open the way and door that hath been hitherto &longs;hut unto all Specula­tive Wits. Touching Experiments, therefore, the Author hath not omitted to make &longs;everal; and to a&longs;&longs;ure us, that the Accelerati­on of natural-de&longs;cending Graves hapneth in the afore&longs;aid propor­tion, I have many times in his company &longs;et my &longs;elf to make a triall thereof in the following Method.

In a pri&longs;me or Piece of Wood, about twelve yards long, and half a yard broad one way, and three Inches the other, we made, upon the narrow Side or edge a Groove of little more than an Inch wide; we &longs;hot it with the Grooving Plane very &longs;traight, and to make it very &longs;mooth and &longs;leek, we glued upon it a piece of Vellum, poli&longs;hed and &longs;moothed as exactly as can be po&longs;&longs;ible: and in it we have let a brazen Ball, very hard, round, and &longs;mooth, de&longs;cend. Having placed the &longs;aid Pri&longs;me Pendent, rai&longs;ing one of its ends above the Horizontal Plane a yard or two at plea&longs;ure, we have let the Ball (as I &longs;aid) de&longs;cend along the Grove, ob&longs;erving, in the manner that I &longs;hall tell you pre&longs;ently, the Time which it &longs;pent in runing it all; repeating the &longs;ame ob&longs;ervation again and again to a&longs;&longs;ure our &longs;elves of the Time, in which we never found any diffe­rence, no not &longs;o much as the tenth part of one beat of the Pul&longs;e. Having done, and preci&longs;ely ordered this bu&longs;ine&longs;&longs;e, we made the &longs;ame Ball to de&longs;cend only the fourth part of the length of that Grove: and having mea&longs;ured the time of its de&longs;cent, we alwaies found it to be punctually half the other. And then making trial of other parts, examining one while the Time of the whole Length with the Time of half the Length, or with that of 2/3, or of 3/4, or, in brief, with any whatever other Divi&longs;ion, by Experiments repeated near an hundred Times, we alwaies found the Spaces to be to one another as the Squares of the Times. And this in all Inclinations of the Plane, that is, of the Grove in which the Ball was made to de&longs;cend. In which we ob&longs;erved moreover, that the Times of the De&longs;cents along &longs;undry Inclinations did retain the &longs;ame proportion to one another, exactly, which anon you will &longs;ee a&longs;&longs;igned to them, and demon&longs;trated by the Author. And as to the mea&longs;uring of the Time; we had a good big Bucket full of Water hanged on high, which by a very &longs;mall hole, pierced in the bottom, &longs;pirted, or, as we &longs;ay, &longs;pin'd forth a &longs;mall thread of Water, which we received with a &longs;mall cup all the while that the Ball was de&longs;cending in the Grove, and in its parts; and then weighing from time to time the &longs;mall parcels of Water, in that manner gathered, in an exact pair of &longs;cales, the differences and proportions of their Weights gave ju&longs;tly the differences and proportions of the Times; and this with &longs;uch exactne&longs;&longs;e, that, as I &longs;aid before, the trials being many and many times repeated, they never differed any con&longs;iderable matter.

SIMP. I &longs;hould have received great &longs;atisfaction by being pre&longs;ent at tho&longs;e Experiments: but being confident of your diligence in making them, and veracity in relating them, I content my &longs;elf, and admit them for true and certain.

SALV. We may, then, rea&longs;&longs;ume our Reading, and go on.

COROLLARY II.

It is collected in the &longs;econd place, that if any two Spaces are ta­ken from the beginning of the Motion, pa&longs;&longs;ed in any Times, tho&longs;e Times &longs;hall be unto each other as one of them is to a Space that is the Mean proportional between them.

For taking two Spaces S T, and S V from the beginning of the Mo­tion S, to which S X is a Mean-proportional, the Time of the de&longs;cent along S T, &longs;hall be to the Time of the de&longs;cent along S V, as S T to S X; or, if you will, the Time along S V &longs;hall be to the Time along S T,

as VS is to SX. For it is demon&longs;trated, that Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed are in duplicate proportion to the Times, or, (which is the &longs;ame) are as the Squares of the Times: But the pro­portion of the Space VS to the Space ST is double to the proportion of V S to SX, or is the &longs;ame that V S, and S X &longs;quared have to one another: Therefore, the proportion of the Times of the Motion by V S, and ST, is as the Spaces or Lines V S to S X.

SCHOLIUM.

That which is demon&longs;trated in Motions that are made Perpendicu­larly, may be under&longs;tood al&longs;o to hold true in the Motions made along Planes of any whatever Inclination; for it is &longs;uppo&longs;ed, that in them the degree of Acceleration encrea&longs;eth in the &longs;ame proportion; that is, according to the encrea&longs;e of the Time; or, if you will, according to the &longs;imple and primary Series of Numbers.

SALV. Here I de&longs;ire Sagredus, that I al&longs;o may be allowed, al­beit perhaps with too much tediou&longs;ne&longs;&longs;e in the opinion of Simplici­us, to defer for a little time the pre&longs;ent Reading, untill I may have explained what from that which hath been already &longs;aid and de­mon&longs;trated, and al&longs;o from the knowledge of certain Mechanical Conclu&longs;ions heretofore learnt of our Academick, I now remember to adjoyn for the greater confirmation of the truth of the Princi­ple, which hath been examined by us even now with probable Rea&longs;ons and Experiments: and, which is of more importance, for the Geometrical proof of it, let me fir&longs;t demon&longs;trate one &longs;ole Ele­mental Lemma in the Contemplation of Impetus's.

SAGR. If our advantage &longs;hall be &longs;uch as you promi&longs;eus, there is no time that I would not mo&longs;t willingly &longs;pend in di&longs;cour&longs;ing about the confirmation and thorow e&longs;tabli&longs;hing the&longs;e Sciences of Motion: and as to my own particular, I not only grant you liber­ty to &longs;atisfie your &longs;elf in this particular, but moreover entreat you to gratifie, as &longs;oon as you can, the Curio&longs;ity which you have begot in me touching the &longs;ame: and I believe that Simplicius al&longs;o is of the &longs;ame mind.

SIMP. I cannot deny what you &longs;ay.

SALV. Seeing then that I have your permi&longs;&longs;ion, I will in the fir&longs;t place con&longs;ider, as an Effect well known, That

LEMMA.

That the Moments or Velocities of the &longs;ame Moveable are different upon different Inclinations of Planes, and the greate&longs;t is by the Line elevated perpendicularly above the Horizon, and by the others inclined, the &longs;aid Velocity dimini&longs;heth according as they more and more depart from Perpendicularity, that is, as they in­cline more obliquely: &longs;o that the Impetus, Talent, Energy, or, we may &longs;ay, Moment of de&longs;cending is dimini&longs;hed in the Moveable by the &longs;ubjected Plane, upon which the &longs;aid Moveable lyeth and de&longs;cendeth.

And the better to expre&longs;s my &longs;elf, let the Line A B be perpen­dicularly erected upon the Horizon A C: then &longs;uppo&longs;e the &longs;ame to be declined in &longs;undry Inclinations towards the Horizon, as in A D, A E, A F, &c. I &longs;ay, that the greate&longs;t and total Impetusof the Grave Body in de&longs;cending is along the Perpendicular B A, and le&longs;s than that along D A,

and yet le&longs;s along E A; and &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively dimini&longs;hing along the more inclined F A, and fi­nally is wholly extinct in the Horizontal C A, where the Moveable is indifferent either to Motion or Re&longs;t, and hath not of it &longs;elf any Inclination to move one way or other, nor yet any Re&longs;i&longs;tance to its being mo­ved: for as it is impo&longs;&longs;i­ble that a Grave Body, or a Compound thereof &longs;hould move naturally upwards, receding from the Common Center, towards which all Grave Matters con&longs;pire to go, &longs;o it is impo&longs;&longs;ible that it do &longs;pontaneou&longs;ly move, unle&longs;s with that Motion its particular Center of Gravity do acquire Proxi­mity to the &longs;aid Common Center: &longs;o that upon the Horizontal which here is under&longs;tood to be a Superficies equidi&longs;tant from the &longs;aid Center, and therefore altogether void of Inclination, the Im­petus or Moment of that &longs;ame Moveable &longs;hall be nothing at all. Having under&longs;tood this mutation of Impetus, I am to explain that which, in an old Treati&longs;e of the Mechanicks, written heretofore in Padona by our Academick, only for the u&longs;e of his Scholars, was diffu&longs;ely and demon&longs;tratively proved, upon the occa&longs;ion of con­&longs;idering the Original and Nature of the admirable In&longs;trument cal­led the Screw, and it is, With what proportion that mutation of Impetus is made along &longs;everal Inclinations or Declivities of Planes.

As, for example, in the inclined Plane A F, drawing its Eleva­tion above the Horizontal, that is, the Line F C, along the which the Impetus of a Grave Body, and the Moment of De&longs;cent is the greate&longs;t; it is &longs;ought what proportion this Moment hath to the Moment of the &longs;ame Moveable along the Declivity F A: Which Proportion, I &longs;ay, is Reciprocal to the &longs;aid Lengths. And this is the Lemma that was to go before the Theorem, which I hope to be able anon to Demon&longs;trate. Hence it is manife&longs;t, That the Impetusof De&longs;cent of a Grave Body is as much as the Re&longs;i&longs;tance or lea&longs;t force that &longs;ufficeth to arre&longs;t and &longs;tay it. For this Force or Re&longs;i­&longs;tance, and its mea&longs;ure, I will make u&longs;e of the Gravity of another Moveable. Let us now upon the Plane F A put the Moveable G tyed to a thread which &longs;liding over F hath fa&longs;tned at its other end the Weight H: and let us con&longs;ider that the Space of the De&longs;cent or A&longs;cent of the Weight H along the Perpendicular, is alwaies equal to the whole A&longs;cent or De&longs;cent of the other Moveable G along the ^{*} Declivity A F, but yet not to the A&longs;cent or De&longs;cent

along the Perpendicular, in which only the &longs;aid Moveable G (like as every other Moveable) exerci&longs;eth its Re&longs;i&longs;tance. Which is manife&longs;t: for con&longs;idering in the Triangle AFC the Motion of the Moveable G, as for example, upwards from A to F, to be com­po&longs;ed of the tran&longs;ver&longs;e Horizontal Line A C, and of the Perpendi­cular C F: And in regard, that as to the Horizontal Plane along which the Moveable, as hath been &longs;aid, hath no Re&longs;i&longs;tance to mo­ving (it not making by that Motion any lo&longs;s, nor yet acqui&longs;t in regard of its particular di&longs;tance from the Common Center of Grave Matters, which in the Horizon continueth &longs;till the &longs;ame) it remai­neth that the Re&longs;i&longs;tance be only in re&longs;pect of the A&longs;cent that it is to make along the Perpendicular C F. Whil&longs;t therefore the Grave Moveable G, moving from A to F, hath only the Perpendicular Space C F to re&longs;i&longs;t in its A&longs;cent, and whil&longs;t the other Grave Move­able H de&longs;cendeth along the Perpendicular of nece&longs;&longs;ity as far as the whole Space F A, and that the &longs;aid proportion of A&longs;cent and De&longs;cent maintains it &longs;elf alwaies the &longs;ame, be the Motion of the &longs;aid Moveables little or much (by rea&longs;on they are tyed toge­ther) we may confidently affirm, that in ca&longs;e there were an Equi­librium, that is Re&longs;t, to en&longs;ue betwixt the &longs;aid Moveables, the Mo­ments, the Velocities, or their Propen&longs;ions to Motion, that is the Spaces which they would pa&longs;s in the &longs;ame Time &longs;hould an&longs;wer re­ciprocally to their Gravities, according to that which is demon&longs;tra­ted in all ca&longs;es of Mechanick Motions: &longs;o that it &longs;hall &longs;uffice to impede the de&longs;cent of G, if H be but &longs;o much le&longs;s grave than it, as in proportion the Space C F is le&longs;&longs;er than the Space F A. Therefore &longs;uppo&longs;e that the Moveable G is to the Moveable H, as F A is to F C; and then the Equilibrium &longs;hall follow, that is, the Moveables H and G &longs;hall have equal Moments, and the Motion of the &longs;aid Moveables &longs;hall cea&longs;e. And becau&longs;e we &longs;ee that the Impetus,Energy, Moment, or Propen&longs;ion of a Moveable to Motion is the &longs;ame as is the Force or &longs;malle&longs;t Re&longs;i&longs;tance that &longs;ufficeth to &longs;top it; and becau&longs;e it hath been concluded, that the Grave Body H is &longs;uf. ficient to arre&longs;t the Motion of

the Grave Body G: Therefore the le&longs;&longs;er Weight H, which in the Perpendicular F C imploy­eth its total Moment, &longs;hall be the preci&longs;e mea&longs;ure of the par­tial Moment that the greater Weight G exerci&longs;eth along the inclined Plane F A: But the mea&longs;ure of the total Moment of the &longs;aid Grave Body G, is the &longs;elf &longs;ame, (&longs;ince that to impede the Perpendicular De&longs;cent of a Grave Body there is required the oppo&longs;ition of &longs;uch another Grave Body, which likewi&longs;e is at liberty to move Perpendicularly:) Therefore the partial Impetus or Moment of G along the inclined Plane F A &longs;hall be to the grand and total Impetus of the &longs;ame G along the Perpendicular F C, as the Weight H to the Weight G: that is, by Con&longs;truction, as the &longs;aid Perpendicular F C, the Eleva­tion of the inclined Plane, is to the &longs;ame inclined Plane F A: Which is that that by the Lemma was propo&longs;ed to be demon­&longs;trated, and which by our Author, as we &longs;hall &longs;ee, is &longs;uppo&longs;ed as known in the &longs;econd part of the Sixth Propo&longs;ition of the pre&longs;ent Treati&longs;e.

* Or inclined Plane.

SAGR. From this that you have already concluded I conceive one may ea&longs;ily deduce, arguing ex æquali by perturbed Proportion, that the Moments of the &longs;ame Moveable, along Planes variou&longs;ly inclined (as F A and F I) that have the &longs;ame Elevation, are to each other in Reciprocal proportion to the &longs;ame Planes.

SALV. A mo&longs;t certain Conclu&longs;ion. This being agreed on, we will pa&longs;s in the next place to demon&longs;trate the Theoreme, namely, that

THEOREM.

The degrees of Velocity of a Moveable de&longs;cending with a Natural Motion from the &longs;ame height along Planes in any manner inclined at the arrival to the Horizon are alwaies equal, Impediments be­ing removed.

Here we are in the fir&longs;t place to adverti&longs;e you, that it having been proved, that in any Inclination of the Plane the Move­able from its rece&longs;&longs;ion from Quie&longs;&longs;ence goeth encrea&longs;ing its Ve­locity, or quantity of its Impetus, with the proportion of the Time (according to the Definition which the Author giveth of Motion naturally Accelerate) whereupon, as he hath by the pre­cedent Propo&longs;ition demon&longs;trated, the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed are in dupli­cate proportion to the Times, and, con&longs;equently, to the degrees of Velocity: look what the Impetus's were in that which was fir&longs;t moved, &longs;uch proportionally &longs;hall be the degrees of Velocity gai­ned in the &longs;ame Time; &longs;eeing that both the&longs;e and tho&longs;e encrea&longs;e with the &longs;ame proportion in the &longs;ame Time.

Now let the inclined Plane be A B, its elevation above the Ho rizon the Perpendicular A C, and the Horizontal Plane C B: and becau&longs;e, as was even now concluded, the Impetus of a Moveable along the Perpendicular A C is to the Impetus of the &longs;ame along the inclined Plane A B, as A B is to A C, let there be taken in the inclined Plane A B, A D a third proportional to A B and A C: The Impetus, therefore, along A C is to the Impetus along A B, that is along A D, as A C is to

A D: And therefore the Move­able in the &longs;ame Time that it would pa&longs;s the Perpendicular Space AC, &longs;hall likewi&longs;e pa&longs;s the Space A D, in the inclined Plane A B, (the Moments being as the Spaces:) And the degree of Velocity in C &longs;hall have the &longs;ame proportion to the degree of Velocity in D, as A C hath to A D: But the degree of Velocity in B is to the &longs;ame degree in D, as the Time along A B is to the Time along AD, by the definition of Accelerate Motion; And the Time along AB is to the Time along A D, as the &longs;ame A C, the Mean Proportional between B A and A D, is to A D, by the la&longs;t Corollary of the &longs;econd Propo&longs;ition: Therefore the degrees of Velocity in B and in C have to the de­gree in D, the &longs;ame Proportion as A C hath to A D; and therefore are equal: Which is the Theorem intended to be demon&longs;trated.

By this we may more concludingly prove the en&longs;uing third Propo&longs;ition of the Author, in which he makes u&longs;e of this Princi­ple; and it is, That the Time along the inclined Plane, hath to the Time along the Perpendicular, the &longs;ame proportion as the &longs;aid In­clined Plane and Perpendicular. For if we put the ca&longs;e that BA be the Time along A B, the Time along A D &longs;hall be the Mean between them, that is A C, by the &longs;econd Corollary of the &longs;econd Propo&longs;ition: But if C A be the Time along A D, it &longs;hall likewi&longs;e be the Time along A C, by rea&longs;on that A D and A C are pa&longs;t in equal Times: And therefore in ca&longs;e B A be the Time along A B, A C &longs;hall be the Time along A C: Therefore, as A B is to A C, &longs;o is the Time along A B to the Time along A C.

By the &longs;ame di&longs;cour&longs;e one &longs;hall prove, that the Time along A C is to the Time along the inclined Plane A E, as A C is to A E: Therefore, ex æquali, the Time along the inclined Plane A B is, Directly, to the Time along the inclined Plane A E as A B to A E, &c.

One might al&longs;o by the &longs;ame application of the Theorem, as Sa­gredus &longs;hall very evidently &longs;ee anon, immediately demon&longs;trate the &longs;ixth Propo&longs;ition of the Author: But let this Digre&longs;&longs;ion &longs;uffice for the pre&longs;ent, which he perhaps thinketh too tedious, though in­deed it is of &longs;ome importance in the&longs;e matters of Motion.

SAGR. You may &longs;ay extreamly delightful, and mo&longs;t nece&longs;&longs;ary to the perfect under&longs;tanding of that Principle.

SALV. I will go on, then, in my Reading of the Text.

THEOR. III. PROP. III.

If a Moveable departing from Re&longs;t do move along an Inclined Plane, and al&longs;o along the Perpendi­cular who&longs;e heights are the &longs;ame, the Times of their Motions &longs;hall be to one another as the Lengths of the &longs;aid Plane and Perpendicular.

Let the inclined Plane be A C, and the Perpendicular A B, who&longs;e heights are the &longs;ame above the Horizon C B, to wit, the &longs;elf &longs;ame Line B A. I &longs;ay, that the Time of the De&longs;cent of the &longs;ame Moveable upon the Plane A C, hath the &longs;ame Proporti­on to the Time of the De&longs;cent along the Perpendicular A B, as the Length of the Plane A C hath to the Length of the &longs;aid Perpendi­cular. For let any number of Lines D G, E I, F L, be drawn, Paral­lel to the Horizon C B: It is manife&longs;t from the A&longs;&longs;umption fore­going, that the degrees of Velocity of the Moveable, departing from A the beginning of Motion, acquired in the Points G and D areequal, their exce&longs;&longs;e or elevation above the Horizon being equal; and &longs;o the degrees in the Points I and E; as al&longs;o the degrees in L and F. And if not only the&longs;e Parallels, but many more were &longs;up­po&longs;ed to be drawn from all the points imagined to be in the Line A B, untill they meet the Line A C, the Mo-

ments, or degrees of the Velocities along the extreams [or ends] of every one of tho&longs;e Parallels, &longs;hall be alwaies equal to one ano­ther: Therefore the two Spaces A C and A B are pa&longs;t with the &longs;ame degree of Velocity: But it hath been demon&longs;trated, that if two Spaces be pa&longs;&longs;ed by a Moveable with one and the &longs;ame degree of Velocity, the Times of the Motions have the &longs;ame proportion as tho&longs;e Spaces: Therefore the Time of the Motion along A C is to the Time along A B, as the Length of the Plane A C to the length of the Perdendicular A B. Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

SAGR. It &longs;eemeth to me, that the &longs;ame might very clearly and conci&longs;ely be concluded, it having fir&longs;t been proved that the &longs;um of the Accelerate Motion of the Tran&longs;itions along A C and A B, is as much as the Equable Motion, who&longs;e degree of Velocity is &longs;ub­duple to the greate&longs;t degree C B: Therefore the two Spaces AC and A B being pa&longs;&longs;ed with the &longs;ame Equable Motion, it hath been &longs;hewn, by the Fir&longs;t Propo&longs;ition of the fir&longs;t, that the Times of the Tran&longs;itions &longs;hall be as the &longs;aid Spaces.

COROLLARY.

Hence is collected, that the Times of the De&longs;cents along Planes of different Inclination, but of the &longs;ame Elevation, are to one another according to their Lengths.

For if we &longs;uppo&longs;e another Plane A M, coming from A, and ter­minated by the &longs;ame Horizontal C B; it &longs;hall in like manner be demon&longs;trated, that the Time of the De&longs;cent along A M, is to the Time along A B, as the Line A M to A B: But as the Time A B is to the Time along A C, &longs;o is the Line A B to A C: Therefore, ex æquali, as A M is to A C, &longs;o is the Time along A M to the Time along A C.

THEOR. IV. PROP. IV.

The Times of the Motions along equal Planes, but unequally inclined, are to each other in &longs;ubduple proportion of the Elevations of tho&longs;e Planes Reciprocally taken.

Let there proceed from the term B two equal Planes, but une­qually inclined, B A and B C, and let A E and C D be Hori­zontal Lines, drawn as far as the Perpendicular B D: Let the Elevation of the Plane B A be B E; and let the Elevation of the Plane B C be B D: And let B I be a Mean Proportional between the Elevations D B and B E: It is manife&longs;t

that the proportion of D B to B I, is &longs;ub­duple the proportion of D B to B E. Now I &longs;ay, that the proportion of the Times of the De&longs;cents or Motions along the Planes B A and B C, are the &longs;ame with the proportion of D B to B I Reciprocal­ly taken: So that to the Time B A the Elevation of the other Plane B C, that is B D be Homologal; and to the Time along B C, B I be Homologal: Therefore it is to be demon&longs;trated, That the Time along B A is to the Time along B C, as D B is to B I. Let I S be drawn equidi&longs;tant from D C. And becau&longs;e it hath been demon&longs;trated that the Time of the De&longs;cent along B A, is to the Time of the De&longs;cent along the Perpendicular B E, as the &longs;aid B A is to B E; and the Time along B E is to the Time along B D, as B E is to B I; and the Time along B D is to the Time along B C, as B D to B C, or as B I to B S: Therefore, ex æqua­li, the Time along B A &longs;hall be to the Time along B C as B A to B S, or as C B to BS: But C B is to B S, as D B to B I: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t:

THEOR. V. PROP. V.

The proportion of the Times of the De&longs;cents along Planes that have different Inclinations and Lengths, and the Elivations unequal, is compounded of the proportion of the Lengths of tho&longs;e Planes, and of the &longs;ubduple proporti­on of their Elevations Reciprocally taken.

Let A B and A C be Planes inclined after different manners, who&longs;e Lengths are unequal, as al&longs;o their Elevations. I &longs;ay, the proportion of the Time of the De&longs;cent along A C to the Time along A B, is compounded of the proportion of the &longs;aid A C to A B, and of the &longs;ubduple proportion of their Elevation Recipro­cally taken. For let the Perpendicular A D be drawn, with which let the Horizontal Lines B G and C D inter&longs;ect, and let A L be a Mean-proportional between C A and A E; and from the point L let a Parallel be drawn to the Horizon inter&longs;ecting

the Plane A C in F; and A F &longs;hall be a Mean proportional between C A and A E. And becau&longs;e the Time along A C is to the Time along A E, as the Line F A to A E; and the Time along A E is to the Time along A B, as the &longs;aid A E to the &longs;aid A B: It is manife&longs;t that the Time along A C is to the Time along A B, as A F to A B. It remaineth, therefore, to be demon&longs;trated, that the proportion of A F to A B is compounded of the proportion of C A to A B, and of the proportion of G A to A L; which is the &longs;ubduple proportion of the Elevati­ons D A and A G Reciprocally taken. But that is manife&longs;t, C A being put between F A and A B: For the proportion of F A to A C is the &longs;ame as that of L A to A D, or of G A to A L; which is &longs;ub­duple of the proportion of the Elevations G A and A D; and the proportion of C A to A B is the proportion of the Lengths: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.

THEOR. VI. PROP. VI.

If from the highe&longs;t or lowe&longs;t part of a Circle, erect upon the Horizon, certain Planes be drawn inclined towards the Circumference, the Times of the De&longs;cents along the &longs;ame &longs;hall be equal.

Let the Circle be erect upon the Horizon G H, who&longs;e Diameter recited upon the lowe&longs;t point, that is upon the contact with the Horizon, let be F A, and from the highe&longs;t point A let certain Planes A B and A C incline towards the Circumference: I &longs;ay that the Times of the De&longs;cents along the &longs;ame are equal. Let B D and C E be two Perpendiculars let fall unto the Diameter; and let A I be a Mean­Proportional between the Altitudes

of the Planes E A and A D. And becau&longs;e the Rectangles F A E and F A D are equal to the Squares of A C and A B; And al&longs;o becau&longs;e that as the Rectangle F A E, is to the Rectangle F A D, &longs;o is E A to A D. Therefore as the Square of C A is to the Square of B A, &longs;o is the Line E A to the Line A D. But as the Line E A is to D A, &longs;o is the Square of I A to the Square of A D: Therefore the Squares of the Lines C A and A B are to each other as the Squares of the Lines I A and A D: And therefore as the Line C A is to A B, &longs;o is I A to A D: But in the precedent Propo&longs;ition it hath been demon­&longs;trated that the proportion of the Time of the De&longs;cent along A C to the Time of the De&longs;cent by A B, is compounded of the proportions of C A to A B, and of D A to A I, which is the &longs;ame with the proportion of B A to A C: Therefore the proportion of the Time of the De&longs;cent along A C, to the Time of the De&longs;cent along A B, is compounded of the pro­portions of C A to A B, and of B A to A C: Therefore the proporti­on of tho&longs;e Times is a proportion of equality: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is evident.

The &longs;ame is another way demon&longs;trated from the Mechanicks: Name­ly that in the en&longs;uing Figure the Moveable pa&longs;&longs;eth in equal Times along C A and D A. For let B A be equal to the &longs;aid D A, ond let fall the Perpendiculars B E and D F: It is manife&longs;t by the Elements of theMechanicks: That the Moment of the Weight elevated upon the Plane according to the Line A B C, is to its total Moment, as B E to B A;

And that the Moment of the &longs;ame Weight upon the Elevation A D, is to its total Moment, as D F to D A or B A: Therefore the Mo­ment of the &longs;aid Weight upon the Plane inclined according to D A, is to the Moment upon the Plane inclined according to A B C, as the Line D F to the Line B E: Therefore the Spaces which the &longs;aid Weight &longs;hall pa&longs;&longs;e in equal Times along the Inclined Planes C A and D A, &longs;hall be to each other as the Line B E to D F; by the &longs;econd Propo&longs;ition of the Fir&longs;t Book: But as B E is to D F, &longs;o A C is demon&longs;trated to be to D A: Therefore the &longs;ame Moveable will in equal Times pa&longs;&longs;e the Lines C A and D A.

And that C A is to D A as B E is to D F, is thus demon&longs;trated.

Draw a Line from C to D; and by D and B draw the Lines D G L, (cutting C A in the point I) and B H, Parallels to A F: And the Angle A D I &longs;hall be equal to the Angle D C A, for that the parts L A and A D of the Circumference &longs;ubtending them, are equal, and the Angle D A C common to them both: Therefore of the equiangled Triangles C A D and D A I, the &longs;ides about the equal Angles &longs;hall be proportional: And as C A is to A D, &longs;o is D A to A I, that is B A to A I, or H A to A G; that is, B E to D F: Which was to be proved.

Or el&longs;e the &longs;ame &longs;hall be demon&longs;trated more &longs;peedily thus.

Vnto the Horizon A B, let a Circle be erect, who&longs;e Diameter is perpendicular to the Horizon: and from the highe&longs;t Term D let a Plane

at plea&longs;ure D F, be inclined to the Circumference. I &longs;ay that the De­&longs;cent along the Plane D F, and the Fall along the Diameter B C, will be pa&longs;&longs;ed by the &longs;ame Moveable in equal Times. For let F G be drawn parallel to the Horizon A B, which &longs;hall be perpendicular to the Diameter D C, and let a Line conjoyn F and C: and becau&longs;e the Time of the Fall along D C, is to the Time of the Fall along D G, as the Mean Proportional between C D and D G, is to the &longs;aid D G; and theMean between C D and D G being D F, (for that the Angle D F C in the Semicircle, is a Right Angle, and F G perpendicular to D C:) Therefore the Time of the Fall along D C is to the Time of the Fall along D G, as the Line F D to D G: But it hath been demon&longs;trated that the Time of the De&longs;cent along D F, is to the Time of the Fall along D G, as the &longs;ame Line D F is to D G: The Times, therefore, of the De&longs;cent along D F and Fall along D C, are to the Time of the Fall along the &longs;aid D G in the &longs;ame proportion: Therefore they are equal. It will likewi&longs;e be demon&longs;trated, if from the lowe&longs;t Term C, one &longs;hould rai&longs;e the Chord C E, and draw E H parallel to the Hori­zon, and conjoyn E and D, that the Time of the De&longs;cent along E C equals the Time of the Fall along the Diameter D C.

COROLLARY I.

Hence is collected that the Times of the De&longs;cents along all the Chords drawn from the Terms C or D are equal to one another.

COROLLARY II.

It is al&longs;o collected that if the Perpendicular and inclined Plane de&longs;cend from the &longs;ame point along which the De&longs;cents are made in equal Times, they are in a Semicircle who&longs;e Dia­meter is the &longs;aid Perpendicular.

COROLLARY III.

Hence it is collected that the Times of the Motions along inclined Planes, are then equal, where the Elevations of equal parts of tho&longs;e Planes &longs;hall be to one another as their Longitudes.

For it hath been &longs;hewn that the Times C A and D A in the la&longs;t Fi­gure &longs;ave one are equal, the Elevation of the part A B being equal to A D, that is, that B E &longs;hall be to the Elevation D F, as C A to D A.

SAGR. Pray you Sir be plea&longs;ed to &longs;tay your Reading of what followeth until that I have &longs;atisfied my &longs;elf in a Contemplation that ju&longs;t now cometh into my mind, which if it be not a delu&longs;i­on, is not far from being a plea&longs;ing diverti&longs;ement: as are all &longs;uch that proceed from Nature or nece&longs;&longs;ity.

It is manife&longs;t, that if from a point a&longs;&longs;igned in an Horizontal Plane, one &longs;hall produce along the &longs;ame Plane infinite right Lines every way, upon each of which a point is under&longs;tood to move with an Equable Motion, all beginning to move in the &longs;ame in&longs;tant of Time from the a&longs;&longs;igned point, and the Velocities of them all being equal, there &longs;hall con&longs;equently be de&longs;cribed by tho&longs;e move­able points Circumferences of Circles alwayes bigger and bigger, all concentrick about the fir&longs;t point a&longs;&longs;igned: ju&longs;t in the &longs;ame manner as we &longs;ee it done in the Undulations of &longs;tanding Water, when a &longs;tone is dropt into it; the percu&longs;&longs;ion of which &longs;erveth to give the beginning to the Motion on every &longs;ide, and remaineth as the Center of all the Circles that happen to be de&longs;igned &longs;ucce&longs;­&longs;ively bigger and bigger by the &longs;aid Undulations. But if we ima­gine a Plane erect unto the Horizon, and a point be noted in the &longs;ame on high, from which infinite Lines are drawn inclined, ac­cording to all inclinations, along which we fancy grave Movea­bles to de&longs;cend, each with a Motion naturally Accelerate with tho&longs;e Velocities that agree with the &longs;everal Inclinations; &longs;uppo&longs;ing that tho&longs;e de&longs;cending Moveables were continually vi&longs;i­ble, in what kind of Lines &longs;hould we &longs;ee them continually di&longs;po&longs;ed? Hence my wonder ari&longs;eth, &longs;ince that the precedent Demon&longs;trati­ons a&longs;&longs;ure me, that they &longs;hall all be alwayes &longs;een in one and the &longs;ame Circumference of Circles &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively encrea&longs;ing, according as the Moveables in de&longs;cending go more and more &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively re­ceding from the highe&longs;t point in which their Fall began: And the better to declare my &longs;elf, let the chiefe&longs;t point A be marked, from which Lines de&longs;cend according to any Inclinations A F, A H, and the Perpendicular A B, in which taking the points C and D, de­&longs;cribe Circles about them that pa&longs;s by

the point A, inter&longs;ecting the inclined Lines in the points F, H, B, and E, G, I. It is manife&longs;t, by the fore-going Demon&longs;trations, that Moveables de­&longs;cendent along tho&longs;e Lines departing at the &longs;ame Time from the term A, one &longs;hall be in E, the other &longs;hall be in G, and the other in I; and &longs;o con­tinuing to de&longs;cend they &longs;hall arrive in the &longs;ame moment of Time at F, H, and B: and the&longs;e and infinite others continuing to move along the infinite differing Inclinations, they &longs;hall alwayes &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively arrive at the &longs;elf-&longs;ame Circumferences made bigger & bigger in infinitum.From the two Species, therefore, of Motion of which Nature makes u&longs;e, ari&longs;eth, with admirable harmonious variety, the generation of in­&longs;inite Circles. She placeth the one as in her Seat, and original be­ginning, in the Center of infinite concentrick Circles; the other is con&longs;tituted in the &longs;ublime or highe&longs;t Contact of infinite Circum­ferences of Circles, all excentrick to one another: Tho&longs;e proceed from Motions all equal and Equable; The&longs;e from Motions all al­wayes Inequable to them&longs;elves, and all unequal to one another, that de&longs;cend along the infinite different Inclinations. But we fur­ther adde, that if from the two points a&longs;&longs;igned for the Emanations, we &longs;hall &longs;uppo&longs;e Lines to proceed, not onely along two Superfi­cies Horizontal and Upright [or erect] but along all every ways like as from tho&longs;e, beginning at one &longs;ole point, we pa&longs;&longs;ed to the production of Circles from the lea&longs;t to the greate&longs;t, &longs;o beginning from one &longs;ole point we &longs;hall &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively produce in&longs;inite Spheres, or we may &longs;ay one Sphere, that &longs;hall gradatim increa&longs;e to infinite bigne&longs;&longs;es: And this in two fa&longs;hions; that is, either with placing the original in the Center, or el&longs;e in the Circumference of tho&longs;e Spheres.

SALV. The Contemplation is really ingenuous, and adequate to the Wit of Sagredus.

SIMP. Though I am at lea&longs;t capable of the Speculation, ac­cording to the two manners of the production of Circles and Spheres, with the two different Natural Motions, howbeit I do not perfectly under&longs;tand the production depending on the Acce­lerate Motion and its Demon&longs;tration, yet notwith&longs;tanding that licence of a&longs;&longs;igning for the place of that Emanation as well the lowe&longs;t Center, as the highe&longs;t Spherical Superficies, maketh me to think that its po&longs;&longs;ible that &longs;ome great Mi&longs;tery may be contained in the&longs;e true and admirable Conclu&longs;ions: &longs;ome Mi&longs;tery I &longs;ay touching the Creation of the Univer&longs;e, which is held to be of Spherical form, and concerning the Re&longs;idence of the Fir&longs;t Cau&longs;e.

SALV. I am not unwilling to think the &longs;ame: but &longs;uch pro­found Speculations are to be expected from Sharper Wits than ours. And it &longs;hould &longs;uffice us, that if we be but tho&longs;e le&longs;&longs;e noble Workmen that di&longs;cover and draw forth of the Quarry the Marbles, in which the Indu&longs;trious Statuaries afterwards make wonderful Images appear, that lay hid under rude and mi&longs;haped Cru&longs;ts. Now, if you plea&longs;e, we will go on.

THEOR. VII. PROP. VII.

If the Elevations of two Planes &longs;hall have a pro­portion double to that of their Lengths, the Motions in them from Re&longs;t &longs;hall be fini&longs;hed in equal Times.

Let A E and A B be two unequal Planes, and unequally inclined, and let their Elevations be F A and D A, and let F A have the &longs;ame proportion to D A, as A E hath to A B. I &longs;ay that the Times of the Motions along the Planes A E and A B, out of Re&longs;t in A areequal. Draw Horizontal Parallels to the Line of Elevation E F and B D, which cutteth A E in G. And be-

cau&longs;e the proportion of F A to A D, is double the proportion of E A to A B; and as F A to A D, &longs;o is E A to A G: There­fore the proportion of E A to A G, is dou­ble the proportion of E A to A B: There­fore A B is a Mean-Proportional between E A and A G: And becau&longs;e the Time of the De&longs;cent along A B, is to the Time of the De­&longs;cent along A G, as A B to A G; and the Time of the De&longs;cent along AG, is to the Time of the De&longs;cent along A E, as A G is to the Mean-proportional between A G and A E, which is A B: Therefore ex equali, the Time along A B is to the Time along A E, as A B unto it &longs;elf: Therefore the Times are equal: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

THEOR. VIII. PROP. VIII.

In Planes cut by the &longs;ame Circle, erect to the Horizon, in tho&longs;e which meet with the end of the erect Diameter, whether upper or lower, the Times of the Motions are equal to the Time of the Fall along the Diameter: and in tho&longs;e which fall &longs;hort of the Diameter, the Times are &longs;horter; and in tho&longs;e which inter­&longs;ect the Diameter, they are longer.

Let A B be the Perpendicular Diameter of the Circle erect to the Horizon. That the Times of the Motions along the Planes pro­duced out of the Terms A and B unto the Circumference are equal, hath already been demon&longs;trated: That the Time of the De&longs;cent along the Plane D F, not reaching to the

Diameter is &longs;borter, is demon&longs;trated by drawing the Plane D B, which &longs;hall be both longer and le&longs;&longs;e decli­ning than D F. Therefore the Time along D F is &longs;horter than the Time along D B, that is, along A B. And that the Time of the De&longs;cent along the Plane that inter&longs;ecteth the Dia­meter, as C O is longer, doth in the &longs;ame manner appear, for that it is longer and le&longs;&longs;e declining than C B: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is de­mon&longs;trated.

THEOR. IX. PROP. IX.

If two Planes be inclined at plea&longs;ure from a point in a Line parallel to the Horizon, and be inter­&longs;ected by a Line which may make Angles Al­ternately equal to the Angles contained be­tween the &longs;aid Planes and Horizontal Parallel, the Motion along the parts cut off by the &longs;aid Line, &longs;hall be performed in equal Times.

From off the point C of the Horizontal Line X, let any two Planes be inclined at plea&longs;ure C D and C E, and in any point of the Line C D make the Angle C D F equal to the Angle X C E: and let the Line D F cut the Plane C E in F, in &longs;uch a manner that the Angles C D F and C F D may be equal to the Angles X C E, L C D Alternately taken. I &longs;ay, that

the Times of the De&longs;cents along C D and C F are equal. And that (the Angle C D F being &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the Angle X C E) the Angle C F D is equal to the Angle D C L, is manife&longs;t. For the Common An­gle D C F being taken from the three Angles of the Triangle C D F equal to two Right An­gles, to which are equal all the Angles made with to the Line L X at the point C, there remains in the Triangle two Angles C D F and C F D, equal to the two Angles X C E and L C D: But it was &longs;up­po&longs;ed that C D F is equal to the Angle X C E: Therefore the remaining Angle C F D is equal to the remaining angle D C L. Let the Plane C E be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the Plane C D, and from the points D and E rai&longs;e the Perpendiculars D A and E B, unto the Horizontal Paral­lel X L; and from C unto D F let fall the Perpendicular C G. And becau&longs;e the Angle C D G is equal to the Angle E C B; and becau&longs;e D G C and C B E are Right Angles; The Triangles C D G and C B E &longs;hall be equiangled: And as D C is to C G, &longs;o let C E be to E B: But D C is equal to C E: Therefore C G &longs;hall be equal to E B. And inregard that of the Triangles D A C and C G F, the An­gles C and A are equal to the Angles F and G: Therefore as C D is to D A, &longs;o &longs;hall F C be to C G; and Alternately, as D C is to C F, &longs;ois D A to C G, or B E. The proportion therefore of the Elevations of the Planes equal to C D and C E, is the &longs;ame with the proportion of the Longitudes D C and C E: Therefore, by the fir&longs;t Corollary of the precedent Sixth Propo&longs;ition, the Times of the Dc&longs;cent along the &longs;ame &longs;hall be equal: Which mas to be proved.

Take the &longs;ame another way: Draw F S perpendicular to the Horizontal Parallel A S. Becau&longs;e the Triangle C S F is like to the Triangle D G C, it &longs;hall be, that as S F is to F C, &longs;o is G C to C D. And becau&longs;e the Triangle C F G is like to the Triangle D C A, it &longs;hall be, that as F C is to C G, &longs;o is C D to D A: Therefore, ex æquali, as S F is to C G, &longs;o is C G to D A: Thorefore C G is a

Mean-proportional between S F and D A: And as DA is to S F, &longs;o is the Square D A unto the Square C G Again, the Triangle A C D being like to the Triangle C G F, it &longs;hall be, that as D A is to D C, &longs;o is G C to C F: and, Alternately, as D A is to G C, &longs;o is D C to C F; and as the Square of D A is to the Square of C G, &longs;o is the Square of D C to the Square of C F. But it hath been proved that the Square D A is to the Square C G as the Line D A is to the Line F S: Therefore, as the Square D C is to the Square C F, &longs;o is the Line D E to F S: There­fore, by the &longs;eventh fore-going, in regard that the Elevations D A and F S, of the Planes C D, and C F are in double proportion to their Planes; the Times of the Motions along the &longs;ame &longs;hall be equal.

THEOR. X. PROP. X.

The Times of the Motions along &longs;everal Inclina­tions of Planes who&longs;e Elevations are equal, are unto one another as the Lengths of tho&longs;e Planes, whether the Motions be made from Re&longs;t, or there hath proceeded a Motion from the &longs;ame height.

Let the Motions be made along A B C, and along A B D, until they come to the Horizon D C, in &longs;uch &longs;ort as that the Motion along A B precedeth the Motions along B D and B C. I &longs;ay, that the Time of the Motion along B D, is to the Time along B C, asthe Length B D is to B C. Let A F be drawn parallel to the Ho­rizon, to which continue out D B, meeting it in F; and let F E be a Mean-proportional between D F and F B; and draw E O parallel to D C, and A O &longs;hall be a Mean-proportional between C A and A B: But if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time along A B, to be as A B, the Time a-

long F B &longs;hall be as F B. And the Time along all A C, &longs;hall be as the Mean-proportional A O; and along all F D &longs;hall be F E: Wherefore the Time along the remainder B C &longs;hall be B O; and along the remainder B D &longs;hall be B E. But as B E is to B O, &longs;o is B D to B C: Therefore the Times along B D and B C, after the De&longs;cent along A B and F B, or which is the &longs;ame, along the Common part A B, &longs;hall be to one another as the Lengths B D and B C: But that the Time along B D, is to the Time along B C, out of Re&longs;t in B, as the Length B D to B C, hath already been demon&longs;trated. Therefore the Times of the Motions along different Planes who&longs;e Elevations are equal, are to one another as the Lengths of the &longs;aid Planes, whether the Motion be made along the &longs;ame out of Re&longs;t, or whether another Motion of the &longs;ame Altitude do precede tho&longs;e Motions: Which was to be de­mon&longs;trated.

THEOR. XI. PROP. XI.

If a Plane, along which a Motion is made out of Re&longs;t, be divided at plea&longs;ure, the Time of the Motion along the fir&longs;t part, is to the Time of the Motion along the &longs;econd, as the &longs;aid fir&longs;t part is to the exce&longs;&longs;e whereby the &longs;ame part &longs;hall be exceeded by the Mean-Propor­tional between the whole Plane and the &longs;ame fir&longs;t part.

Let the Motion be along the whole Plane A B, ex quiete in A, which let be divided at plea&longs;ure in C; and let A F be a Mean proportional between the whole B A and the fir&longs;t part A C; C F &longs;hall be the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Mean proportional F A above the part A C. I &longs;ay the Time of the Motion along A C is to the Time of the following Motion along C B, as A C to C F. Which is manife&longs;t;For the Time along A C is to the Time along all A B, as A C to the Mean-proportional A F: There-

fore, by Divi&longs;ion, the Time along A C, &longs;hall be to the Time along the remainder C B as A C to C F: If therefore the Time along A C be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be the &longs;aid A C, the Time along C B &longs;hall be C F: Which was the Propo&longs;ition.

But if the Motion be not made along the continu­ate Plane A C B, but by the inflected Plane A C D until it come to the Horizon B D, to which from F a Parallel is drawn F E. It &longs;hall in like manner be

demon&longs;trated, that the Time along A C is to the Time along the reflected Plane C D, as A C is to C E. For the Time along A C is to the Time a­long C B, as A C is to C F: But the Time along C B, after A C hath been demon&longs;trated to be to the Time along C D, after the &longs;aid De&longs;oent along A C, as C B is to C D; that is, as C F to C E: Therefore, ex æquali, the Time along A C &longs;hall be to the Time along C D, as the Line A C to C E.

THEOR. XII. PROP. XII.

If the Perpendicular and Plane Inclined at plea­&longs;ure, be cut between the &longs;ame Horizontal Lines, and Mean-Proportionals between them and the parts of them contained betwixt the common Section and upper Horizontal Line be given; the Time of the Motion a­long the Perpendicular &longs;hall have the &longs;ame proportion to the Time of the Motion along the upper part of the Perpendicular, and af­terwards along the lower part of the inter&longs;e­cted Plane, as the Length of the whole Per­pendicular hath to the Line compounded of the Mean-Proportional given upon the Per­pendicular, and of the exce&longs;&longs;e by which the whole Plane exceeds its Mean-Proporttonal.

Let the Horizontal Lines be A F the upper, and C D the low­er; between which let the Perpendicular A C, and inclined Plane D F, be cut in B; and let A R be a Mean-Proportional between the whole Perpendicular C A, and the upper part A B; and let F S be a Mean-proportional between the whole Inclined Plane D F, and the upper part B F. I &longs;ay, that the Time of the Fall along the whole Perpendicular A C hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Time along its upper part A B, with the lower of the Plane, that is, with B D, as A C hath to the Mean-proporti­onal of the Perpendicular, that is

A R, with S D, which is the ex­ce&longs;&longs;e of the whole Plane D F above its Mean-proportional F S. Let a Line be drawn from R to S, which &longs;hall be parallel to the two Horizon­tal Lines. And becau&longs;e the Time of the Fall along all A C, is to the Time along the part A B, as C A is to the Mean proportional A R, if we &longs;uppo&longs;e A C to be the Time of the Fall along A C, A R &longs;hall be the Time of the Fall along A B, and R C that along the remainder B C. For if the Time along A C be &longs;uppo&longs;ed, as was done, to be A C it &longs;elf the Time along F D &longs;hall be F D; and in like manner D S may be concluded to be the Time a­long B D, after F B, or after A B. The Time therefore along the whole A C, is A R, with R C; And the Time along the inflected Plane A B D, &longs;hall be A R, with S D: Which was to be proved.

The &longs;ame happeneth, if in&longs;tead of the Perpendicular, another Plane were taken, as &longs;uppo&longs;e N O; and the Demonstration is the &longs;ame.

PROBL I. PROP. XIII.

A Perpendicular being given, to Inflect a Plane unto it, along which, when it hath the &longs;ame Elevation with the &longs;aid Perpendicular, it may make a Motion after its Fall along the Per­pendicular in the &longs;ame Time, as along the &longs;ame Perpendicular ex quiete.

Let the Perpendicular given be A B, to which extended to C, let the part B C be equal; and draw the Horizontal Lines C E and A G. It is required from B to inflect a Plane reach­ing to the Horizon C E, along which a Motion, after the Fall outof A, &longs;hall be made in the &longs;ame Time, as along A B from Re&longs;t in A. Let C D be equal to C B, and drawing B D, let B E be applied equal to both B D and D C. I &longs;ay B E is the Plane required. Continue out E B to meet the Horizontal Line A G in G;

and let G F be a Mean-Proportional be­tween the &longs;aid E G and G B. E F &longs;hall be to F B, as E G is to G F; and the Square E F &longs;hall be to the Square F B, as the Square E G is to the Square G F; that is as the Line E G to G B: But E G is double to G B: Therefore the Square of E F is double to the Square of F B: But al&longs;o the Square of D B is double to the Square of B C: Therefore, as the Line E F is to F B, &longs;o is D B to B C: And by Compo&longs;ition and Permutation, as E B is to the two D B and B C, &longs;o is B F to B C: But B E is equal to the two D B and B C: Therefore B F is equal to the &longs;aid B C, or B A. If there­fore A B be under&longs;tood to be the Time of the Fall along A B, G B &longs;hall be the Time along G B, and G F the Time along the whole G E: There­fore B F &longs;hall be the Time along the remainder B E, after the Fall from G, or from A, which was the Propo&longs;ition.

PROBL. II. PROP. XIV.

A Perpendicular and a Plane inclined to it being given, to find a part in the upper Perpendicu­lar which &longs;hall be pa&longs;t ex quiete in a Time equal to that in which the inclined Plane is pa&longs;t after the Fall along the part found in the Perpendicular.

Let the Perpendicular be D B, and the Plane inclined to it A C. It is required in the Perpendicular A D to find a part which &longs;hall be pa&longs;t ex quiete in a Time equal to that in which the Plane A C is pa&longs;t after the Fall along the &longs;aid part. Draw the Horizontal Line C B; and as B A more twice A C is to A C, &longs;o let E A be to A R; And from R let fall the Perpendicular R X unto D B. I &longs;ay X is the point requi­red. And becau&longs;e as B A more twice A C is to A C, &longs;o is C A to A E, by Divi&longs;ion it &longs;hall be that as B A more A C is to A C, &longs;o is C E to E A: And becau&longs;e as B A is to A C, &longs;o is E A to A R, by Compo&longs;ition it &longs;hall be that as B A more A C is to A C, &longs;o is E R to R A: But as B A more A C is to A C, &longs;o is C E to E A: Therefore, as C E is to E A, &longs;o is E R, to R A, and both the Antecedents to both the Con&longs;equents, that is, C Rto R E: Therefore C R, R E, and R A are Proportionals. Farther­more, becau&longs;e as B A is to A C, &longs;o E A is &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be to A R, and,

in regard of the likene&longs;&longs;e of the Triangles, as B A is to A C, &longs;o is X A to A R: There­fore, as E A is to A R, &longs;o is X A to A R: Therefore E A and X A are equal. Now if we under&longs;tand the Time along R A to be as R A, the Time along R C &longs;hall be R E, the Mean-Proportional between C R and R A: And A E &longs;hall be the Time along A C after R A or after X A: But the Time along X A is X A, &longs;o long as R A is the Time along R A: But it hath been proved that X A and A E are equal: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is proved.

PROBL. III. PROP. XV.

A Perpendicular and a Plane inflected to it being given, to find a part in the Perpendicular ex­tended downwards which &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame. Time as the inflected Plane after the Fall along the given Perpendicular.

Let the Perpendicular be A B, and the Plane In&longs;lected to it B C. It is required in the Perpendicular extended downwards to find a part which from the Fall out of A &longs;hall be pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time as B C is pa&longs;&longs;ed from the &longs;ame Fall out of A. Draw the Horizontal Line A D, with which let C B meet extended to D; and let D E be a Mean­proportional between C D and D B;

and let B F be equal to B E; and let A G be a third Proportional to B A and A F. I &longs;ay, B G is the Space that after the Fall A B &longs;hall be pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time, as the Plane B C &longs;hall be pa&longs;t af­ter the &longs;ame Fall. For if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time along A B to be as A B, the Time along D B &longs;hall be as D B: And becau&longs;e D E is the Mean-proportional between B D and D C, the &longs;ame D E &longs;hall be the Time along the whole D C, and B E the Time along the Part or Remainder B C ex quiete, in D, or ^{*} ex ca&longs;u A B: And it may inlike manner be proved, that B F is the Time along B G, after the &longs;ame Fall: But B F is equal to B E: Which was the Propo&longs;ition to be proved.

* From or after the Fall A B.

THEOR. XIII. PROP. XVI.

If the parts of an inclined Plane and Perpendicu­lar, the Times of who&longs;e Motions ex quiete are equal, be joyned together at the &longs;ame point, a Moveable coming out of any &longs;ublimer Height &longs;hall &longs;ooner pa&longs;&longs;e the &longs;aid part of the inclined Plane, than that part of the Perpendicular.

Let the Perpendicular be E B, and the Inclined Plane C E, joyned at the &longs;ame Point E, the Times of who&longs;e Motions from off Re&longs;t in E are equal, and in the Perpendicular continued out, let a &longs;ublime point A be taken at plea&longs;ure, out of which the Moveables may be let fall. I &longs;ay, that the Inclined Plane E C &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed in a le&longs;&longs;e Time than the Perpendicular E B, after the Fall A E. Draw a Line from C to B, and having drawn the Horizontal Line A D continue out C E till it meet the &longs;ame in D; and let D F be a Mean-Proportional between C D and D E; and let A G be a

Mean-Proportional between B A and A E; and draw F G and D G. And becau&longs;e the Time of the Motion along E C and E B out of Re&longs;t in E are equal, the Angle C &longs;hall be a Right Angle, by the &longs;econd Corollary of the Sixth Propo&longs;ition; and A is a Right Angle, and the Vertical Angles at E are equal: Therefore the Tri­angles A E D and C E B are equian­gled, and the Sides about equal An­gles are Proportionals: Therefore as B E is to E C, &longs;o is D E to E A. Therefore the Rectangle B E A is equal to the Rectangle C E D: And becau&longs;e the Rectangle C D E ex­ceedeth the Rectangle C E D, by the Square E D, and the Rectangle B A E doth exceed the Rectangle B E A, by the Square E A: The exce&longs;&longs;e of the Rectangle C D E above the Rectangle B A E, that is of the Square F D above the Square A G &longs;hall be the &longs;ame as the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Square D E above the Square A E; which exce&longs;s is the Square D A: Therefore the Square F D is equal to the two Squares G A and A D, to which the Square G D is al&longs;o equal: Therefore theLine D F is equal to D G, and the Angle D G F is equal to the An­gle D F G, and the Angle E G F is le&longs;&longs;c than the Angle E F G, and the oppo&longs;ite Side E F le&longs;&longs;e than the Side E G. Now if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time of the Fall along A E to be as A E, the Time by D E &longs;hall be as D E; and A G being a Mean-Proportional between B A and A E, A G &longs;hall be the Time along the whole A B, and the part E G &longs;hall be the Time along the Part E B ex quiete in A. And it may in like man­ner be proved that E F is the Time along E C after the De&longs;cent D E, or after the Fall A E: But E F is proved to be le&longs;&longs;er than E G: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is proved.

COROLLARY.

By this and the precedent it appears, that the Space that is pa&longs;­&longs;ed along the Perpendicular after the Fall from above in the &longs;ame Time in which the Inclined Plane is pa&longs;t, is le&longs;&longs;e than that which is pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time as in the Inclined, no fall from above preceding, yet greater than the &longs;aid Inclined Plane.

For it having been proved, but now, that of the Moveables coming from the &longs;ublime Term A the Time of the Conver&longs;ion along E C is &longs;horter than the Time of the Progre&longs;&longs;ion along E B; It is manife&longs;t that the Space that is pa&longs;t along E B in a Time equal to the Time along E C is le&longs;s than the whole Space E B. And that the &longs;ame Space along the Perpendicular is greater than E C is mani­fe&longs;ted by rea&longs;&longs;uming the Figure of the pre-

cedent Propo&longs;ition, in which the part of the Perpendicular B G hath been demon&longs;trated to be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame Time as B C after the Fall A B: But that B G is greater than B C is thus collected. Becau&longs;e B E and F B are equal, and B A le&longs;&longs;er than B D, F B, hath greater proportion to B A, than E B hath to B D: And, by Compo&longs;ition, F A hath greater proportion to A B, than E D to D B: But as F A is to A B, &longs;o is G F to F B, (for A F is the Mean-Proportional between B A and A G:) And in like man­ner, as E D is to B D, &longs;o is C E to E B: Therefore G B hath greater proportion to B F, than C B hath to B E: Therefore G B is greater than B C.

PROBL. IV. PROP. XVII.

A Perpendicular and Plane Inflected to it being given, to a&longs;&longs;ign a part in the given Plane, in which after the Fall along the Perpendicular the Motion may be made in a Time equal to that in which the Moveable ex quiete pa&longs;&longs;eth the Perpendicular given.

Let the Perpendicular be A B, and a Plane Inflected to it B E: It is required in B E to a&longs;&longs;ign a Space along which the Moveable af­ter the Fall along A B may move in a Time equal to that in which the &longs;aid Perpendicular A B is pa&longs;&longs;ed ex quiete. Let the Line A D be parallel to the Horizon, with which let the Plane prolonged meet in D; and &longs;uppo&longs;e F B equal to B A; and as B D is to D F, &longs;o let F D be to D E. I &longs;ay, that

the Time along B E after the Fall along A B equalleth the Time along A B, out of Re&longs;t in A. For if we &longs;uppo&longs;e A B to be the Time along A B, D B &longs;hall be the Time along D B. And becau&longs;e, as B D is to D F, &longs;o is F D to D E, D F &longs;hall be the Time along the whole Plane D E, and B F along the part B E out of D: But the Time along B E after D B, is the &longs;ame as after A B: Therefore the Time along B E after A B &longs;hall be B F, that is, equal to the Time ex quiete in A: Which was the Propo&longs;ition.

PROBL. V. PROP. XVIII.

Any Space in the Perpendicular being given from the a&longs;&longs;igned beginning of Motion that is pa&longs;&longs;ed in a Time given, and any other le&longs;&longs;er Time being al&longs;o given, to find another Space in the &longs;aid Perpendicular that may be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the given le&longs;&longs;er Time.

Let the Perpendicular be A D, in which let the Space a&longs;&longs;igned be A B, who&longs;e Time from the beginning A let be A B: and let the Horizon be C B E, and let a Time be given le&longs;s than A B, to which let B C be noted equal in the Horizon: It is required in the &longs;aid Perpendicular to find a Space equal to the &longs;ame A B that &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the Time B C. Draw a Line from A to

C. And becau&longs;e B C is le&longs;&longs;e than B A, the Angle B A C &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;e than the Angle B C A. Let C A E be made equal to it, and the Line A E meet with the Horizon in the Point E, to which &longs;up­po&longs;e E D a Perpendicular, cutting the Perpendi­cular in D, and let D F be cut equal to B A. I &longs;ay, that the &longs;aid F D is a part of the Perpendi­cular along which the Lation from the beginning of Motion in A, the Time B C given will be &longs;pent. For if in the Right-angled Triangle A E D, a Perpendicular to the oppo&longs;ite Side A D, be drawn E B, A E &longs;hall be a Mean-Proportional betwixt D A and A B, and B E a Mean-Proportional betwixt D B and B A, or betwixt F A and A B (for F A is equal to D B.) And in regard A B hath been &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be the Time along A B, A E, or E C &longs;hall be the Time along the whole A D, and E B the Time along A F: There­fore the part B C &longs;hall be the Time along the part F D: Which was intended.

PROBL. VI. PROP. XIX.

Any Space in the Perpendicular pa&longs;&longs;ed from the beginning of the Motion being given, and the Time of the Fall being a&longs;&longs;igned, to find the Time in which another Space. equal to the gi­ven one, and taken in any part of the &longs;aid Per­pendicular, &longs;hall be afterwards pa&longs;t by the &longs;ame Moveable.

In the Perpendicular A B let A C be any Space taken from the be­ginning of the Motion in A, to which let D B be another equal Space taken any where at plea&longs;ure, and let the Time of the Motion along A C be given, and let it be A C. It is required to &longs;ind the Time of theMotion along D B after the Fall from A. About the whole A B de­&longs;cribe a Semicircle A E B, and from

C let fall C E, a Perpendicular to A B, and draw a Line from A to E; which &longs;hall be greater than E C. Let E F be out equall to E C: I &longs;ay, that the remainder F A is the Time of the Motion along D B. For be­cau&longs;e A E is a Mean-proportional be­twixt B A and and A C, and A C is the Time of the Fall along A C; A E &longs;hall be the Time along the Whole A B. And becau&longs;e C E is a Mean-proportional betwixt D A and A C, (for D A is equal to B C) C E, that is E F &longs;hall be the Time along A D: Therefore the Remainder A F &longs;hall be the Time along the Remainder B B: Which is the Propo&longs;ition.

COROLLARY.

Hence is gathered, that if the Time of any Space ex quiete be as the &longs;aid Spaec, the Time thereof after another Space is ad­ded &longs;hall be the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Mean-proportional betwixt the Addition and Space taken together, and the &longs;aid Space above the Mean-proportional betwixt the fir&longs;t Space and the Addition.

As for example, it being &longs;uppo&longs;ed that the Time along

A B, out of Re&longs;t in A, be A B; A S being another Space added, The Time along A B after S A &longs;hall be the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Mean-proportional betwixt S B and B A above the Mean-proportional betwixt B A and A S.

PROBL VII. PROP. XX.

Any Space and a part therein after the begining of the Motion being given, to find another part towards the end that &longs;hall be pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time as the fir&longs;t part given.

Let the Space be C B, and let the part in it given after the begin­ing of the Motion in C be C D. It is required to find another part towards the end B, which &longs;hall be pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time asthe given part C D. Take a Mean-proportional betwixt B C and C D, to which &longs;uppo&longs;e B A equal; and let C E be a third proportional be-

tween B C and C A. I &longs;ay, that E B is the Space that after the Fall out of C &longs;hall be past in the &longs;ame Time as the &longs;aid C D is pa&longs;&longs;ed. For if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time along C B to be as C B; B A (that is the Mean-proportional betwixt B C and C D) &longs;hall be the Time along C D. And becau&longs;e C A is the Mean proportional betwixt B C and C E, C A &longs;hall be the Time along C E: But the whole B C is the Time along the Whole C B: Therefore the part B A &longs;hall be the Time along the part E B, after the Fall out of C: But the &longs;aid B A was the Time along C D: Therefore C D and E B &longs;hall be pa&longs;t in equal Times out of Re&longs;t in C: Which was to be done.

THEOR. XIV. PROP. XXI.

If along the Perpendicular a Fall be made ex quie­te, in which from the begining of the Motion a part is taken at plea&longs;ure, pa&longs;&longs;ed in any Time, after which an Inflex Motion followeth along any Plane however Inclined, the Space which along that Plane is pa&longs;&longs;ed in a Time equal to the Time of the Fall already made along the Perpendicular &longs;hall be to the Space then pa&longs;­&longs;ed along the Perpendicular more than double, and le&longs;&longs;e than triple.

From the Horizon A E let fall a Perpendicular A B, along which from the begining A let a Fall be made, of which let a part A C be taken at plea&longs;ure; then out of C let any Plane G be inclined at plea&longs;ure: along which after the Fall along A C let the Motion be con­tinued. I &longs;ay, the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by that Motion along C G in a Time equall to the Time of the Fall along A C, is more than double, and le&longs;s than triple that &longs;ame Space A C. For &longs;uppo&longs;e C F equal to A C, and extending out the Plane G C as far as the Horizon in E, and as C E is to E F, &longs;o let F E be to E G. If therefore we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time ofthe Fall along A C to be as the Line A C; C E &longs;hall be the Time along E C, and C F or C A the Time of the Motion along C G. Therefore it is to be proved that the

Space C G is more than double, and le&longs;&longs;e than triple the &longs;aid C A. For in regard that as C E is to E F, &longs;o is F E to E G; therefore al&longs;o &longs;o is C F to F G. But E C is le&longs;&longs;e than E F: Therefore C F &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;e than F G, and G C more than double to F C or A C. And moreover, in regard that F E is le&longs;&longs;e than double to E C, (for E C is greater than C A or C F) G F &longs;hall al&longs;o be le&longs;&longs;e than double to F C, and G C le&longs;&longs;e than triple to C F or C A: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

And the &longs;ame may be more generally propounded: for that which hapneth in the Perpendicular and Inclined Plane, holdeth true al&longs;o if after the Motion a Plane &longs;omewhat inclined it be inflected along a more inclining Plane, as is &longs;een in the other Figure: And the Demon&longs;tration is the &longs;ame.

PROBL. VIII. PROP. XXII.

Two unequall Times being given, and a Space that is pa&longs;t ex quiete along the Perpendicular in the &longs;horte&longs;t of tho&longs;e given Times, to inflect a Plane from the highe&longs;t point of the Perpen­dicular unto the Horizon, along which the Moveable may de&longs;cend in a Time equal to the longe&longs;t of tho&longs;e Times given.

Let the unsqual Times be A the greater, and B the le&longs;&longs;er; and let the Space that is pa&longs;t ex quiete along the Perpendicular in the Time B, be C D. It is required from the Term C to inflect [or

bend] a Plane untill it reach the Horizon that may be pa&longs;&longs;ed in theTime A. As B is to A, &longs;o let C D be to another Line, to which let C X be equal that de&longs;cendeth from C unto the Horizon: It is manife&longs;t that the Plane C X is that along which the Moveable de&longs;cendeth in the Gi­ven Time A. For it hath been demon&longs;trated, that the Time along the inclined Plane hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Time along its ^{*} Eleva-tion, as the Length of the Plane hath to the Length of its Elevation,. The Time, therefore, along C X is to the Time along C D, as C X is to C D, that is, as the Time A is to the Time B: But the Time B is that in which the Perpendicular is pa&longs;t ex quiete: Therefore the Time A is that in which the Plane C X is pa&longs;&longs;ed.

* Or Perpendi­cular.

PROBL. IX. PROP. XXIII.

A Space pa&longs;t ex quiete along the Perpendicular in any Time being given, to inflect a Plane from the lowe&longs;t term of that Space, along which, after the Fall along the Perpendicular, a Space equal to any Space given may be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame Time: which neverthele&longs;&longs;e is more than double, and le&longs;&longs;e than triple the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed along the Perpendicular.

Along the Perpendicular A S, in the Time A C, let the Space A C be pa&longs;t ex quiete in A; to which let I R be more than double, and le&longs;&longs;e than triple. It is required from the Terme C to inflect a Plane, along which a Moveable after the Fall along A C may in the &longs;ame Time A C pa&longs;&longs;e a Space equal to the &longs;aid I R. Let R N, and N M be equal to A C: And look what proportion the part I M hath to M N, the &longs;ame &longs;hall the Line A C have to another, equal to which draw C E from C to

the Horizon A E, which con­tinue out towards O, and take C F, F G, and G O, equal to the &longs;aid R N, N M, and M I. I &longs;ay, that the Time along the inflected Plane C O, after the Fall A G, is equal to the Time A C out of Re&longs;t in A. For in regard that as O G is to G F, &longs;o is F C to C E by Compo&longs;ition it &longs;hall be that as O F is to F G or F C, &longs;o is F E to E C; and as one of the Antecedents is to one of the Con­&longs;equents, &longs;o are all to all; that is, the whole O E is to E F as F E to E C: Therefore O E, E F, and E C are Continual Proportionals:And &longs;ince it was &longs;uppo&longs;ed that the Time along A C is as A C, C E &longs;hall be the Time along E C; and E F the Time along the whole E O; and the part C F that along the part C O: But C F is equal to the &longs;aid C A: Therefore that is done which was required: For the Time C A is the Time of the Fall along A C ex quiete in A; and C F (which is equal to C A) is the Time along C O, after the De&longs;cent along E C, or after the Fall along A C: Which was the Propo&longs;ition.

And here it is to be noted, that the &longs;ame may happen if the preceding Motion be not made along the Perpendicular, but along an Inclined Plane: As in the following Figure, in which let the preceding Lation be made along the inclined Plane A S beneath the Horizon A E: And the Demon­&longs;tration is the very &longs;ame.

SCHOLIUM.

If one ob&longs;erve well, it &longs;hall be manife&longs;t, that the le&longs;&longs;e the given Line I R wanteth of being triple to the &longs;aid A C, the nearer &longs;hall the Inflected Plane, along which the &longs;econd Motion is to be made, which &longs;uppo&longs;e to be C O, come to the Perpen­dicular, along which in a Time equal to A C a Space &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed triple to A C.

For in ca&longs;e I R were very near the triple of A C, I M &longs;hould be well­near equal to M N: And if, as I M is to M N by Con&longs;truction, &longs;o A C is to C E, then it is evident that the &longs;aid C E will be found but little bigger than C A, and, which followeth of con&longs;equence, the point E &longs;hall be found very near the point A, and C O to containe a very acute

Angle with C S, and almo&longs;t to concur both in one Line. And on the contrary, if the &longs;aid I R were but a very little more than double the &longs;aid A C, I M &longs;hould be a very &longs;hort Line. Hence it may happen al&longs;o that A C may come to be very &longs;hort in re&longs;pect of C E which &longs;hall be very long, and &longs;hall ap­proach very near the Horizontal Parallel drawn from C. And from hence we may collect, that if in the pre&longs;ent Figure after the De&longs;cent along the inclined Plane A C, a Reflexion be made along the Horizontal Line, as v. gr. C T, the Space along which the Moveable afterwards moved in a Time equal to the Time of the De&longs;cent along A C would be exactly double to the Space A C. And it appears that the like Di&longs;cour&longs;e may be here applied: For it is apparent by what hath been &longs;aid, that &longs;ince O Eis to E F, as F E is to E C, that F C determineth the Time along C O: And if a part of the Horizontal Line T C double to C A be divided in two equal parts in V, the exten&longs;ion towards X &longs;hall be prolonged in in­finitum, whil&longs;t it &longs;eeks to meet with the prolonged Line A E: And the proportion of the Infinite Line T X to the Infinite Line V X, &longs;hall be no other than the proportion of the Infinite Line V X to the Infinite Line X C.

We may conclude the &longs;elf-&longs;ame thing another way by rea&longs;&longs;uming the &longs;ame Rea&longs;oning that we u&longs;ed in the Demon&longs;tration of the fir&longs;t Propo&longs;i­tion. For re&longs;uming the Triangle A B C, repre&longs;enting to us by its Pa­rallels to the Ba&longs;e B C the Degrees of Velocity continually encrea&longs;ed ac­cording to the encrea&longs;es of the Time; from which, &longs;ince they are infi­nite, like as the Points are infinite in the Line A C, and the In&longs;tants in any Time, &longs;hall re&longs;ult the Superficies of that &longs;ame Triangle, if we under&longs;tand the Motion to continue for &longs;uch another Time, but no far­ther with an Accelerate, but with an Equable Motion, according to the greate&longs;t degree of Velocity acquired, which degree is repre&longs;ented by the Line B C. Of &longs;uch degrees &longs;hall be made up an Aggregate like to a Parallelogram A D B C, which is the double of

the Triangle A B C. Wherefore the Space which with degrees like to tho&longs;e &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame Time, &longs;hall be double to the Space pa&longs;t with the de­grees of Velocity repre&longs;ented by the Triangle A B C: But along the Horizontal Plane the Motion is Equa­ble, for that there is no cau&longs;e of Acceleration, or Re­tardation: Therefore it may be concluded that the Space C D, pa&longs;&longs;ed in a Time equall to the Time A C is double to the Space A C: For this Motion is made ex quiete Accelerate according to the Parallels of the Triangle; and that according to the Parallels of the Parallelogram, which, becau&longs;e they are infinite, are donble to the infinite Parallels of the Triangle.

Moreover it may farther be ob&longs;erved, that what ever degree of &longs;wiftne&longs;s is to be found in the Moveable, is indelibly impre&longs;&longs;ed upon it of its own nature, all external cau&longs;es of Acceleration or Retardation being removed; which hapneth only in Horizontal Planes: for in de­clining Planes there is cau&longs;e of greater Acceleration, and in the ri&longs;ing Planes of greater Retardation. From whence in like manner it fol­loweth that the Motion along the Horizontal Plane is al&longs;o Perpetual: for if it be Equable, it can neither be weakned nor retarded, nor much le&longs;&longs;e de&longs;troyed. Farthermore, the degree of Celerity acquired by the Moveable in a Natural De&longs;cent, being of its own Nature Indelible and Penpetual, it is worthy con&longs;ideration, that if after the De&longs;cent along a declining Plane a Reflexion be made along another Plane that is ri&longs;ing, in this latter there is cau&longs;e of Retardation, for in the&longs;e kind of Planesthe &longs;aid Moveable doth naturally de&longs;cend; whereupon there re&longs;ults a mixture of certain contrary Affections, to wit, that degree of Celerity acquired in the precedent De&longs;cent, which would of it &longs;elf carry the Move­able uniformly in infinitum, and of Natural Propen&longs;ion to the Motion of De&longs;cent according to that &longs;ame proportion of Acceleration wherewith it alwaies moveth. So that it will be but rea&longs;onable, if, enquiring what accidents happen when the Moveable after the De&longs;cent along any incli­ned Plane is Reflected along &longs;ome ri&longs;ing Plane, we take that greate&longs;t de­gree acquired in the De&longs;cent to keep it &longs;elf perpetually the &longs;ame in the A&longs;cending Plane; But that there is &longs;uperadded to it in the A&longs;cent the Natural Inclination downwards, that is the Motion from Re&longs;t Accelerate according to the received proportion: And le&longs;t this &longs;hould, perchance, be &longs;omewhat intricate to be under&longs;tood, it &longs;hall be more clearly explained by a Scheme.

Let the De&longs;cent therefore be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be made along the Declining Plane A B, from which let the Reflex Motion be continued along another Ri&longs;ing Plane B C: And in the fir&longs;t place let the Planes be equal, and elevated at equal Angles to the Horizon G H. Now it is manife&longs;t, that the Moveable ex quiete in A de&longs;cending along A B acquireth degrees of Velocity according to the increa&longs;e of its Time, and that the degree in B is the greate&longs;t of tho&longs;e acquired and by Nature immutably impre&longs;&longs;ed, I mean the Cau&longs;es of new Acceleration or Retardation being removed: of Acceleration, I &longs;ay, if it &longs;hould pa&longs;&longs;e any farther along the extended Plane; and of Retardation, whil&longs;t the Reflection is making along the Acclivity B C: But along the Horizontal Plane G H the Equable Mo­tion according to the de-

gree of Velocity acquired from A unto B would ex­tend in infinitum. And &longs;uch a Velocity would that be which in a Time equal to the Time of the De&longs;cent along A B would pa&longs;&longs;e a Space in double the Horizon to the &longs;aid A B. Now let us &longs;uppo&longs;e the &longs;ame Moveable to be Equably moved with the &longs;ame degree of Swiftne&longs;&longs;e along the Plane B C, in &longs;uch &longs;ort that al&longs;o in this Time equal to the Time of the De&longs;cent along A B a Space may be pa&longs;&longs;ed a long B C extended double to the &longs;aid A B. And let us under­&longs;tand that as &longs;oon as it beginneth to a&longs;cend there naturally befalleth the &longs;ame that hapneth to it from A along the Plane A B, to wit, a certain De&longs;cent ex quiete according to tho&longs;e degrees of Acceleration, by vertue of which, as it befalleth in A B, it may de&longs;cend as much in the &longs;ame Time along the Reflected Plane as it doth along A B: It is manife&longs;t, that by this &longs;ame Mixture of the Equable Motion of A&longs;cent, and the Acce­lerate of De&longs;cent the Moveable may be carried up to the Term C along the Plane B C according to tho&longs;e degrees of Velocity, which &longs;hall beequal. And that two points at plea&longs;ure D and E being taken, equally remote from the Angle B, the Tran&longs;ition along D B is made in a Time equal to the Time of the Reflection along B E, we may collect from hence: Draw D F, which &longs;hall be Parallel to B C; for it is manife&longs;t that the De&longs;cent along A D is reflected along D F: And if after D the Move­able pa&longs;&longs;e along the Horizontal Plane D E, the Impetus in E &longs;hall be the &longs;ame as the Impetus in D: Therefore it will a&longs;cend from E to C: And therefore the degree of Velocity in D is equal to the degree in E. From the&longs;e things, therefore, we may rationally affirm, that, if a de­&longs;cent be made along any inclined Plane, after which a Reflection may follow along an elevated Plane, the Moveable may by the conceivedImpetus a&longs;cend untill it attain the &longs;ame beight, or Elevation from the Horizon. As if a De&longs;cent be made along A B, the Moveable would pa&longs;&longs;e along the Reflected Plane B C, untill it arrive at the Horizon A C D; and that not only when the Inclinations of the Planes are equal, but al&longs;o when they are unequal, as is the Plane B D: For it was first &longs;uppo&longs;ed, that the degrees of Velocity are equal, which are acqui­red upon Planes unequally inclined, &longs;o long as the Elevation of tho&longs;e Planes above the Horizon was the &longs;ame: But, if there being the &longs;ame Inclination of the Planes E B and B D, the De&longs;cent along E B &longs;ufficeth to drive the Moveable along the Plane BD as far as D, &longs;eeing this Impul&longs;e
is made by the Impe­tus of Velocity in the point B; and if theImpetus be the &longs;ame in B, whether the Moveable de&longs;cend a­long A B, or along E B: It is manife&longs;t, that the Moveable &longs;hall be in the &longs;ame manner driven along B D, after the De&longs;cent along A B, and after that along E B: But it will happen that the Time of the A&longs;cent along B D &longs;hall be longer than along B C, like as the De&longs;cent along E B is made in a longer time than along A B: But the Proportion of tho&longs;e Times was before demon&longs;trated to be the &longs;ame as the Lengths of tho&longs;e Planes.
Now it follows, that we &longs;eek the proportion of the Spaces pa&longs;t in equal Times along Planes, who&longs;e Inclinations are different, but their Elevations the &longs;ame; that is, which are comprehended between the &longs;ame Horizontal Parallels. And this hapneth according to the fol­lowing Propo&longs;ition.

THEOR. XV. PROP. XXIV.

There being given between the &longs;ame Horizontal Parallels a Perpendicular and a Plane eleva­ted from its lowe&longs;t term, the Space that a Moveable after the Fall along the Perpendi­cular pa&longs;&longs;eth along the Elevated Plane in a Time equal to the Time of the Fall, is greater than that Perpendicular, but le&longs;&longs;e than double the &longs;ame.

Between the &longs;ame Horizontal Parallels B C and H G let there be the Perpendicular A E; and let the Elevated Plane be E B, along which after the Fall along the Perpendicular A E out of the Term E let a Reflexion be made towards B. I &longs;ay, that the Space, along which the Moveable a&longs;cendeth in a Time equal to the Time of the De&longs;cent A E, is greater than A E, but le&longs;&longs;e than double the &longs;ame A E. Let E D be equal to A E, and as E B is to B D, &longs;o let D B be to B F. It &longs;hall be proved, fir&longs;t that the point F is the Term at which the Moveable with a Reflex Motion along E B arriveth in a Time equal to the Time A E: And then, that E F is greater than E A, but le&longs;&longs;e than double the &longs;ame. If we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time of the De&longs;cent along A E to be as A E, the Time of the De&longs;cent along B E, or A&longs;cent along E B &longs;hall be as the &longs;ame Line B E: And D B being a Mean-Proportional betwixt E B and B F, and B E being the Time of De&longs;cent along the whole B E, B D &longs;hall be the Time of the De&longs;cent along B F, and the Remaining part D E the Time of the

De&longs;cent along the Re­maining part F E: But the Time along F E ex quiete in B, and the Time of the A&longs;cent a­long E F is the &longs;ame, &longs;ince that the Degree of Velocity in E was acqui­red along the De&longs;cent B E, or A E: Therefore the &longs;ame Time D E &longs;hall be that in which the Moveable after the Fall out of A along A E, with a Reflex Motion along E B &longs;hall reach to the Mark F: But it hath been &longs;uppo&longs;ed that E D is equal to the &longs;aid A E: Which was fir&longs;t to be proved. And becau&longs;e that as the whole E B is to the whole B D, &longs;o is the part taken away D B to the part taken away B F, therefore, as the whole E B is to the whole B D, &longs;o &longs;hall the Remainder E D be to D F: But E B is greater than B D: Therefore E D is greater than D F, and E F le&longs;&longs;e than double to D E or A E: Which was to be proved.

And the &longs;ame al&longs;o hapneth if the precedent Motion be not made along the Perpendicular, but along an Inclined Plane; and the Demon­&longs;tration is the &longs;ame, provided that the Reflex Plane be le&longs;&longs;e ri&longs;ing, that is, longer than the declining Plane.

THEOR. XVI. PROP. XXV.

If after the De&longs;cent along any Inclined Plane a Motion follow along the Plane of the Hori­zon, the Time of the De&longs;cent along the Incli­ned Plane &longs;hall be to the Time of the Motion along any Horizontal Line; as the double Length of the Inclined Plane is to the Line ta­ken in the Horizon.

Let the Horizontal Line be C B, the inclined Plane A B, and after the De&longs;cent along A B let a Motion follow along the Horizon, in which take any Space B D. I &longs;ay, that the Time of the De&longs;cent along A B to the Time of the Motion along B D is as the double of A B to B D. For B C being &longs;uppo&longs;ed the double of A B, it is manife&longs;t by

what hath already been demon&longs;tra­ted that the Time of the De&longs;cent along A B is equal to the Time of the Motion along B C: But the Time of the Motion along B C is to the Time of the Motion along B D, as the Line C B is to the Line B D: Therefore the Time of the Motion along A B is the Time along B D, as the Double of A B is to B D: Which was to be proved.

PROBL X. PROP. XXVI.

A Perpendicular between two Horizontal Paral­lel Lines, as al&longs;o a Space greater than the &longs;aid Perpendicular, but le&longs;&longs;e than double the &longs;ame, being given, to rai&longs;e a Plane between the &longs;aid Parallels from the lowe&longs;t Term of the Per­pendicular, along which the Moveable may with a Reflex Motion after the Fall along the Perpendicular pa&longs;&longs;e a Space equal to the Space given, and in a Time equal to the Time of the Fall along the Perpendicular.

Let A B be a Perpendicular between the Horizontal Parallels A O and B C; and let F E be greater than B A, but le&longs;&longs;e than double the &longs;ame. It is required between the &longs;aid Parallels from the point B to rai&longs;e a Plane, along which the Moveable after the Fall from A to B may with a Reflex Motion in a Time equal to the Time of the Fall along A B pa&longs;&longs;e a Space a&longs;cending equal to the &longs;aid E F. Suppo&longs;e E D equall to A B, the Remaining Part D F &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;e, for that the whole E F is le&longs;&longs;e than double to A B: Let D I be equal to D F, and as E I is to I D, &longs;o let D F be to another Space F X, and out of B let the Right-

Line B O be reflected, equal to E X. I &longs;ay, that the Plane along B O is that along which after the Fall A B a Moveable in a Time equal to the Time of the Fall along A B pa&longs;&longs;eth a&longs;cending a Space equal to the given Space E F. Suppo&longs;e B R and R S equal to the &longs;aid E D and D F. And becau&longs;e that as E I is to I D, &longs;o is D F to F X; therefore, by Compo&longs;ition, as E D is to D I, &longs;o &longs;hall D X be to X F; that is, as E D is to D F, &longs;o &longs;hall D X be to X F, and E X to X D; that is, as B O is to O R, &longs;o &longs;hall R O be to O S: And if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time along A B to be A B, the Time along O B &longs;hall be the &longs;ame O B, and R O the Time along O S, and the Remaining Part B R the Time along the Remaining Part S B, de&longs;cending from O to B: But the Time of the De&longs;cent along S B from Rest in O, is equal to the Time of the A&longs;cent from B to S after the Fall A B: Therefore B O is the Plane ele­vated from B, along which after the Fall along A B the Space B S equal to the given Space E F is pa&longs;&longs;ed in the Time B R or B A: Which was required to be done.

THEOR. XVII. PROP. XXVII.

If a Moveable de&longs;cend along unequal Planes, who&longs;e Elevation is the &longs;ame, the Space that &longs;hall be pa&longs;t along the lower part of the longe&longs;t in a Time equal to that in which the whole &longs;horter Plane is pa&longs;&longs;ed, is equal to the Space that is compounded of the &longs;aid &longs;horter Plane and of the part to which that &longs;horter Plane hath the &longs;ame Proportion that the longer Plane hath to the Exce&longs;&longs;e by which the longe&longs;t exceedeth the &longs;horte&longs;t.

Let A C be the longer Plane, and A B the &longs;horter, who&longs;e Elevation A D is the &longs;ame; and in the lower part of A C take the Space C E, equal to the &longs;aid A B; and as C A is to A E, (that is to the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Plane C A above A B) &longs;o let C E be to E F. I &longs;ay, that the Space F C is that which is pa&longs;t after the De&longs;cent out of A in a Time equal to the Time of

the De&longs;cent along A B. For the whole C A, being to the whole A E, as the part taken away C E is to the part taken away E F, therefore the re­maining part E A &longs;hall be to the remaining part A F, as the whole C A is to the whole A E: Therefore the three Spaces C A, A E, and A F are three Continual proportionals. And if the Time along A B be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be as A B, the Time along A C &longs;hall be as A C, and the Time along A F &longs;hall be as A E, and along the remain­ing part F C &longs;hall be as E C: But E C is equal to the &longs;aid A B: There­fore the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.

THEOR. XVIII. PROP. XXVIII.

Let the Horizontal Line A G be Tangent to a Circle, and from the point of Contact let A B be the Diameter, and A E B two Chords at plea&longs;ure: We are to a&longs;&longs;ign the proportion of the Time of the Fall along A B to the Time of the De&longs;cent along both the Chords A E B. Let B E be continued out till it meet the Tangent in G, andlet the Angle B A E be cut in two equal parts, and draw A F. I &longs;ay, that the Time along A B is to the Time along A E B, as A E is to A E F. For in regard the Angle F A B is equal to the Angle F A E, and the An­gle E A G to the Angle A B F, the whole Angle G A F &longs;hall be equal to the two Angles F A B, and A B F; to which al&longs;o the Angle G F A

is equal: Therefore the Line G F is equal to G A. And becau&longs;e the Rectangle B G E is equal to the Square of G A, it &longs;hall likewi&longs;e be equal to the Square of G F, and the three Lines B G, G F, and G E &longs;hall be proportionals. And if we &longs;uppo&longs;e A E to be the Time along A E, G E &longs;hall be the Time along G E, and G F the Time along the whole G B, and E F the Time along E B, after the De&longs;cent out of G, or out of A, along A E: The Time, therefore, along A E, or along A B &longs;hall be to the Time along A E B, as A E is to A E F: Which was to be determined.

More briefly thus. Let G F be cut equal to G A: It is manife&longs;t that G F is the Mean-proportional between B G, and G E. The re&longs;t as before.

PROBL. XI. PROP. XXIX.

Any Horizontal Space being given upon the end of which a Perpendicular is erected, in which a part is taken equal to half of the Space given in the Horizontal a Moveable fal­ling from that height, and turned along the Horizon, &longs;hall pa&longs;&longs;e the Horizontal Space to­gether with the Perpendicular in a &longs;horter Time than any other Space of the Perpendi­cular with the &longs;ame Horizontal Space.

Let there be an Horizontal Space in which let any Space be given B C, and on B let there be a Perpendicular erected, in which let B A be the half of the fore&longs;aid B C. I &longs;ay, that the Time in which a Moveable let fall out of A pa&longs;&longs;eth both the Spaces A B and B C is the &longs;horte&longs;t of all Times in which the &longs;aid Space B C with a part of the Perpendicular, whether greater or le&longs;&longs;er than the part A B, &longs;hall be pa&longs;­&longs;ed. Let a greater be taken, as in the &longs;ir&longs;t Figure, or le&longs;&longs;er, as in the&longs;econd, which let be E B. It is to be proved that the Time in which the Spaces E B and B C are pa&longs;&longs;ed is longer than the Time in which A B and B C are pa&longs;&longs;ed. Let the Time along A B be as A B; the &longs;ame &longs;hall be the Time of the Motion along the Horizontal Space B G; becau&longs;e B C is double to A B, and the Time along both the Spaces A B C &longs;hall be double of O B A. Let B O

be a Mean-proportional between E B and B A. B O &longs;hall be the Time of the Fall along E B. Again, let the Horizontal Space B D be double to the &longs;aid B E: It is manife&longs;t that the Time of it after the Fall E B is the &longs;ame B O. As D B is to B C, or as E B is to B A, &longs;o let O B be to B N: and in regard the Motion along the Horizontal Plane is Equable, and O B being the Time along B D after the Fall out of E, therefore N B &longs;hall be the Time along B C after the Fall from the &longs;ame Altitude E. Hence it is manife&longs;t, that O B, together with B N is the Time along E B C; and becau&longs;e the double of B A is the Time along A B C; it remains to be proved, that O B, to­gether with B N is more than double B A. Now becau&longs;e O B is a Mean between E B and B A, the proportion of E B to B A is double the pro­portion of O B to B A: and, in regard that E B is to B A, as O B is to B N, the proportion of O B to B N &longs;hall al&longs;o be double the proportion of O B to B A: But that proportion of O B to B N is compounded of the proportions of O B to B A, and of A B to B N: therefore the proportion of A B to B N is the &longs;ame with that of O B to B A. Therefore B O, B A, and B N are three continual Proportionals, and O B, together with B N, are greater than double B A: Whereupon the Propo&longs;ition is ma­nife&longs;t.

THEOR. XIX. PROP. XXX.

If a Perpendicular be let fall from any point of the Horizontal Line, and out of another point in the &longs;ame Horizontal Line a Plane be drawn forth untill it meet the Perpendicular, along which a Moveable de&longs;cendeth in the &longs;horte&longs;t time unto the &longs;aid Perpendicular, this Plane &longs;hall be that which cutteth off a part equall to the di&longs;tance of the a&longs;&longs;igned point from the end of the Perpendicular.

Let the Perpendicular B D be let fall from the point B of the Ho­rizontal Line A C, in which let there be any point C, and in the Perpendicular let the Di&longs;tance B E be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the Di­&longs;tance B C, and draw C E. I &longs;ay, that of all Planes inclined out of the point C till they meet the Perpendicular C E is that, along which in the &longs;horte&longs;t of all Times the De&longs;cent

is made unto the Perpendicular. For let the Planes C F and C G be inclined above and below, and draw I K a Tan­gent unto the Semidiameter B C of the de&longs;cribed Circle in C, which &longs;hall be equidi&longs;tant from the Perpendicular; and unto the &longs;aid C F let E K be Paral­lel cutting the Circumference of the Cir­cle in L: It is manife&longs;t that the Time of the De&longs;cent along L E is equal to the Time of the De&longs;cent along C E: But the Time along K E is longer than along L E: Therefore the Time along K E is longer than that along C E: But the Time along K E is equal to the Time a­long C F, they being equal, and drawn according to the &longs;ame Inclination: Likewi&longs;e &longs;ince C G, and I E are equal, and inclined according to the &longs;ame Inclination, the Times of the Motions along them &longs;hall be equal: But H E being &longs;horter than I E, the Time along it is al&longs;o &longs;horter than I E: Therefore the Time al&longs;o along C E, (which is equal to the Time along H E) &longs;hall be &longs;horter than the Time along I E: The Propo&longs;ition, therefore, is manife&longs;t.

THEOR. XX. PROP. XXXI.

If a Right-Line &longs;hall be in any manner inclined upon the Horizontal Line, the Plane produced from a given point in the Horizon untill it meet with the Inclined Plane, along which the De&longs;cent is made in the &longs;horte&longs;t of all Times, is that which &longs;hall divide the Angle contained between the two Perpendiculars drawn from the given Point, the one unto the Horizontal Line, the other to the Inclined Line, into two equal parts.

Let C D be a Line inclined in any manner upon the Hori­zontal Line A B, and let any point A be given in the Hori­zon, and from it let A C be drawn Perpendicular to A B, and A E Perpendicular to C D, and let the Line F A divide the Angle C A E into two equal parts. I &longs;ay, that of all Planes incli­ned out of any point of the Line C D to the point A that &longs;ame pro­duced along F A is it along

which the De&longs;cent is made in the &longs;horte&longs;t of all Times. Let F G be drawn Parallel to AE; the alternate Angles G F A and F A E &longs;hall be equal: But E A F is equal to that other F A G: Therefore of the Tri­angle the Sides F G and G A &longs;hall be equal. If therefore about the Center G, at the di­&longs;tance G A, a Circle be de&longs;cri­bed it &longs;hall pa&longs;&longs;e by F, and &longs;hall touch the Horizontal, and the Inclined Lines in the points A and F: For the Angle G F C is a Right Angle, and likewi&longs;e G F is equidi&longs;tant to A E: Whence it is manife&longs;t that all Lines produced from the point A unto the inclined Plane do extend beyond the Circumference, and, which followeth of con&longs;equence, that the Motions along the &longs;ame do take up more Time than along F A. Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

LEMMA.

If two Circles touch one another within, the innermo&longs;t of which toucheth &longs;ome Right Line, and the exteriour one cutteth it, three Lines produced from the Contact of the Circles unto three points of the Tangent Right-Line, that is, to the Con­tact of the interiour Circle, and to the Sections of the exte­riour &longs;hall contain equall Angles in the Contact of the Circles.

Let two Circles touch one another in the point A, of which let the Centers be B, that of the le&longs;&longs;er, and C that of the greater; and let the interiour Circle touch any Line F G in the point H, and let the grea­ter cut it in the points F and G, and connect the three Lines A F, A H, and A G. I &longs;ay, that the Angles by

them contained F A H and G A H are equal. Produce A H untill it meeteth the Circumference in I, and from the Centers draw B H and C I, and thorow the &longs;aid Centers let B C be drawn, which continued forth &longs;hall meet with the Contact A, and with the Circum­ferences of the Circles in O and N. And becau&longs;e the Angles I C N and H O B are equal, for as much as either of them is double to the Angle I A N, the Lines B H and C I &longs;hall be Parallels: And becau&longs;e B H drawn from the Center to the Contact is Perpendicular to F G; C I &longs;hall al&longs;o be Perpendicular to the &longs;ame, and the Arch F I equal to the Arch I G, and, which followeth of con&longs;equence, the Angle F A I to the Angle I A G: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

THEOR. XXI. PROP. XXXII.

If two points be taken in the Horizon, and any Line &longs;hould be inclined from one of them to­wards the other, out of which a Right-Line is drawn unto the Inclined Line, cutting off a part thereof equal to that which is included between the points of the Horizon, the De­&longs;cent along this la&longs;t drawn &longs;hall be &longs;ooner per­formed, than along any other Right Lines pro­duced from the &longs;ame point unto the &longs;aid Incli­ned Line. And along other Lines which are on each hand of this by equal Angles a De­&longs;cent &longs;hall be made in equal Times.

In the Horizon let there be two points A and B, and from B incline the Right Line B C, in which from the Term B take B D equal to the &longs;aid B A, and draw a Line from A to D. I &longs;ay, that the De­&longs;cent along A D is more &longs;wiftly made, than along any other what&longs;oever drawn from the point A unto the inclined Line B C. For out of the points A and D unto B A and

B D draw the Perpendiculars A E and D E, inter&longs;ecting one another in E: and fora&longs;much as in the equicrural Triangle A B D the Angles B A D and B D A are equal, the remainders to the Right-Angles D A E and E D A &longs;hall be equal. Therefore a Circle de&longs;cribed about the Center E at the di&longs;tance A E &longs;hall al&longs;o pa&longs;&longs;e by D; and the Lines B A and B D will touch it in the points A and D. And &longs;ince A is the end of the Perpendicular A E, the De&longs;cent along A D &longs;hall be &longs;ooner performed, than along any other produced from the &longs;ame Term A unto the Line B C beyond the Circumference of the Circle: Which was fir&longs;t to be proved.

But if in the Perpendicular A E being prolonged any Center be taken as F, and at the di&longs;tance F A the Circle A G C be de&longs;cribed cutting the Tangent Line in the points G and C; drawing A G and A C they &longs;hall make equal Angles with the middle Line A D by what hath been aforedemon&longs;trated, and the Motions thorow them &longs;hall be performed in equal Times &longs;eeing that they terminate in A unto the Circumference of the Circle A G O from the highe&longs;t point of it A.

PROBL. XII. PROP. XXXIII.

A Perpendicular and Plane inclined to it being given, who&longs;e height is one and the &longs;ame, as al­&longs;o the highe&longs;t term, to find a point in the Per­pendicular above the common term, out of which if a Moveable be demitted that &longs;hall afterwards turn along the inclined Plane, the &longs;aid Plane may be pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time in which the Perpendicular ex quiete would be pa&longs;&longs;ed.

Let the Perpendicular and inclined Plane, who&longs;e Altitude is the &longs;ame, be A B and A C. It is required in the Perpendicular B A, continued out from the point A to find a Point out of which a Moveable de&longs;cending may pa&longs;&longs;e the Space A C in the &longs;ame Time in which it will pa&longs;&longs;e the &longs;aid Perpendicular A B out of Re&longs;t in A. Draw D C E at Right-Angles to A C, and let C D be cut equal to A B, and draw a Line from A to D: The Angle A D C &longs;hall be greater than the Angles C A D: (for C A is greater than A B or C D:) Let the Angle D A E be equal to the Angle A D E; and to A E let E F an in­clined Plane be Perpen-

dicular, and let both be­ing prolonged meet in F, and unto both A I and A G &longs;uppo&longs;e C F to be equal, and by G draw G H equidi&longs;tant to the Horizon. I &longs;ay, that H is the point which is &longs;ought. For &longs;uppo&longs;ing the Time of the Fall along the Perpendicular A B to be A B, the Time along A C ex quiete in A &longs;hall be the &longs;ame A C. And becau&longs;e in the Right­angled Triangle A E F, from the Right Angle E unto the Ba&longs;e A F, E C is a Perpendicular, A E &longs;hall be a Mean-Proportional betwixt F A and A C, and C E a Mean betwixt A C and C F, that is, betwixt C A and A I: and fora&longs;much as the Time of A C out of A is A C, A E&longs;hall be the Time of the whole A F, and E C the Time of A I: And be­cau&longs;e in the Equicrural Triangle A E D the Side A E is equal to the Side E D, E D &longs;hall be the Time along A F, and E C is the Time along A I: Therefore C D, that is A B &longs;hall be the Time along A F ex qui­ete in A; which is the &longs;ame as if we &longs;aid, that A B is the Time along A G out of G, or out of H: Which was to be done.

PROBL. XIII. PROP. XXXIV.

An inclined Plane and Perpendicular who&longs;e &longs;ub­lime term is the &longs;ame being given, to find a more &longs;ublime point in the Perpendicular pro­longed out of which a Moveable falling, and being turned along the inclined Plane, may pa&longs;&longs;e them both in the &longs;ame Time, as it doth the &longs;ole inclined Plane ex quiete in its &longs;uperi­our Term.

Let the inclined Plane and Perpendicular be A B and A C, who&longs;e Term A is the &longs;ame. It is required in the Perpendicular prolonged from A to find a &longs;ublime point, out of which the Moveable de&longs;cen­ding, and being turned along the Plane A B, may pa&longs;&longs;e the a&longs;&longs;igned part of the Perpendicular and the Plane A B in the &longs;ame Time, as it would the &longs;ole Plane A B out of Re&longs;t in A.

Let the Ho­rizontal Line be B C, and let A N be cut equal to A C; and as A B is to B N, &longs;o let A L be to L C: and unto A L let A I be equal, and unto A C and B I let C E be a third proportional, marked in the Perpendicular A C produced. I &longs;ay, that C E is the Space acquired; &longs;o that the Perpendicular being extended above A, and the part A X equal to C E being taken, a Moveable out of X will pa&longs;&longs;e both theSpaces X A B in the &longs;ame Time as it would the &longs;ole Space A B out of A. Draw the Horizontal Line X R Parallel to B C, with which let B A being prolonged meet in R, and then A B being continued out unto D draw E D Parallel to C B, and upon A D de&longs;cribe a Semicircle, and from B, and Perpendicular to D A, erect B F till it meet with the Cir­cumference. It is manife&longs;t that F B is a Mean-proportional betwixt A B and B D, and that the Line drawn from F to A is a Mean-propor­tional betwixt D A and A B. Suppo&longs;e B S equal to B I, and F H equal to F B: And becau&longs;e, as A B is to B D, &longs;o is A C to C E, and becau&longs;e B F is a Mean-proportional betwixt A B and B D, and becau&longs;e B I is a Mean-proportional betwixt A C and C E; therefore as B A is to A C, &longs;o is F B to B S. And becau&longs;e as B A is to A C, or A N, &longs;o is F B to B S, therefore, by Conver&longs;ion of the proportion, B F is to F S, as A B is to B N, that is, A L to L C; therefore the Rectangle under F B and C L, is equal to the Rectangle under A L, and S F: But this Rectangle A L, and S F, is the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Rectangle under A L and F B, or A I and B F, over and above the Triangle A I and B S, or A I B; and the Rectangle F B and L C is the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Rectangle A C and B F over and above the Rectangle A L and B F: But the Rectangle A C and B F is equal to the Rectangle A B I; (for as B A is to A C, &longs;o is F B to B I:) The exce&longs;&longs;e, therefore, of the Rectangle A B I above the Rectan­gle A I and B F, or A I and F H, is equal to the exce&longs;&longs;e of the Rectangle A I and F H above the Rectangle A I B: Therefore twice the Rectan­gle A I and F H is equal to the two Rectangles A B I and A I B; that is twice A I B with the Square of B I. Let the Square A I be common to both, and twice the Rectangle A I B with the two Squares A I, and I B, (that is, the Square A B) &longs;hall be equal to twice the Rectangle A I and F H, with the Square A I: Again, taking in commonly the Square B F; the two Squares A B and B F, that is the &longs;ole Square A F &longs;hall be equal to twice the Rectangle A I and F H, with the two Squares A I and F B, that is A I and F H: But the &longs;ame Square A F is equal to twice the Rectangle A H F, with the two Squares A H and H F: Therefore twice the Rectangle A I and F H, with the Squares A I and F H, are equal to twice the Rectangle A H F, with the Squares A H and H F: And, the Common Square H F being taken away, twice the Rectangle A I and F H, with the Square A I, &longs;hall be equal to twice the Rectangle A H F, with the Square A H. And becau&longs;e that in all the Rectangles F H is the Common Side, the Line A H &longs;hall be equal to A I: For if it &longs;hould be greater or le&longs;&longs;er, then the Rectangles F H A and the Square H A would al&longs;o be greater or le&longs;&longs;er than the Rectangles F H and I A, and the Square I A: Contrary to what hath been demon&longs;trated.

Now if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time of the De&longs;cent along A B to be as A B, the Time along A C &longs;hall be as A C, and I B the Mean-proportional be­twixt A C and C E &longs;hall be the Time along C E, or along X A from Re&longs;t in X: And becau&longs;e betwixt D A and A B, or R B and B A theMean-proportional is A F, and between A B and B D, that is, R A and A B the Mean is B F, to which F H is equal; Therefore, exprædemon­&longs;tratis, the exce&longs;&longs;e A H &longs;hall be the Time along A B ex quiete in R, or after the Fall out of X; &longs;ince the Time along the &longs;aid A B ex quiete in A, &longs;hall be A B. Therefore the Time along X A is I B; and along A B after R A, or after X A, is A I: Therefore the Time along X A B &longs;hall be as A B, namely the &longs;elf-&longs;ame with the Time along the &longs;ole A B ex qui­ete in A. Which was the Propo&longs;ition.

PROBL. XIV. PROP. XXXV.

An Inflected Line unto a given Perpendicular be­ing a&longs;&longs;igned, to take part in the Inflected Line, along which alone ex quiete a Motion may be made in the &longs;ame Time, as it would be along the &longs;ame together with the Perpendicular.

Let the Perpendicular be A B, and a Line inflected to it B C. It is required in B C to take a part, along which alone out of Re&longs;t a Motion may be made in the &longs;ame Time as it would along the &longs;ame together with the Perpendicular A B. Draw the Horizon A D, with which let the Inclined Line C B prolonged meet in E; and &longs;uppo&longs;e B F equal to B A, and on the Center E at the di&longs;tance E F de&longs;cribe the Circle F I G; and continue out F E unto the Circumference in G; and as G B is to B F, &longs;o let B H be to H F; and let H I touch the Circle in I. Then out of B erect B K

Perpendicular to F C, with which let the Line E I L meet in L; and la&longs;t of all let fall L M Perpendicular to E L, meeting B C in M. I &longs;ay, that along the Line B M from Rest in B a Motion may be made in the &longs;ame Time, as it would be ex quiete in A along both A B and B M. Let E N be made equal to E L. And becau&longs;e as G B is to B F, &longs;o is B H to H F; there­fore, by Permutation as G B is to B H, &longs;o will B F be to F H; and, by Divi&longs;ion, G H &longs;hall be to H B, as B H is to H F: Wherefore the Rect­angle G H F &longs;hall be equal to the Square H B: But the &longs;aid Rectangle is al&longs;o equal to the Square H I: Therefore B H is equal to the &longs;ame H I.And becau&longs;e in the Quadrilateral Figure I L B H the Sides H B and H I are equal, and the Angles B and I Right Angles, the Side B L &longs;hall likewi&longs;e be equal to the Side L I: But E I is equal to E F: Therefore the whole Line L E, or N E is equal to the two Lines L B and E F: Let the Common Line E F be taken away, and the remainder F N &longs;hall be equal to L B: And F B was &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to B A: Therefore L B &longs;hall be equal to the two Lines A B and B N. Again, if we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time along A B to be the &longs;aid A B, the Time along E B &longs;hall be equal to E B; and the Time along the whole E M &longs;hall be E N, namely, the Mean-proportional betwixt M E and E B: I berefore the Time of the De&longs;cent of the remaining part B M after E B, or after A B, &longs;hall be the &longs;aid B N: But it hath been &longs;uppo&longs;ed, that the Time along A B is A B: Therefore the Time of the Fall along both A B and B M is A B N: And becau&longs;e the Time along E B ex quiete in E is E B, the Time along B M ex quiete in B &longs;hall be the Mean-proportional between B E and B M; and this is B L: The Time, therefore, along both A B M ex quiete in A is A B N: And the Time along B M only ex quiete in B is B L: But it was proved that B L is equal to the two A B and B N: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.

Otherwi&longs;e with more expedition.

Let B C be the Inclined Plane, and B A the Perpendicular. Continue out C B to E, and unto E C erect a Perpendicular at B, which being prolonged &longs;uppo&longs;e B H equal to the exce&longs;&longs;e of B E above B A; and to the Angle B H E let the Angle H E L be equal; and let E L continued out meet with B K in L; and from L erect the Perpendicular L M unto E L meeting B C in M. I &longs;ay, that

B M is the Space acquired in the Plane B C. For becau&longs;e the Angle M L E is a Right­Angle, therefore B L &longs;hall be a Mean-proportional betwixt M B and B E; and L E a Mean proportional betwixt M E and E B; to which E L let E N be cut equal: And the three Lines N E, E L, and L H &longs;hall be equal; and H B &longs;hall be the exce&longs;&longs;e of N E above B L: But the &longs;aid H B is al&longs;o the exce&longs;&longs;e of N E above N B and B A: Therefore the two Lines N B and B A are equal to B L. And if we &longs;uppo&longs;e E B to be the Time along E B, B L &longs;hall be the Time along B M ex quiete in B; and B N &longs;hall be the Time of the &longs;ame B M after E B or after A B; and A B &longs;hall be the Time along A B: Therefore the Times along A B M, namely, A B N, are equal to the Times along the &longs;ole Line B M ex quiete in B: Which was intended.

LEMMAI.

Let D C be Perpendicular to the Diameter B A; and from the Term B continue forth B E D at plea&longs;ure, and draw a Line from F to B. I &longs;ay, that F B is a Mean-proportional be-

twixt D B and B E. Draw a Line from E to F, and by B draw the Tangent B G; which &longs;hall be Parallel to the former C D: Wherefore the Angle D B G &longs;hall be equal to the Angle F D B, like as the &longs;ame G B D is equal al&longs;o to the Angle E F B in the al­tern Portion or Segment: Therefore the Triangles F B D and F E B are alike: And, as B D is to B F, &longs;o is F B to B E.

LEMMA II.

Let the Line A C be greater than D F; and let A B have greater proportion to B C, than D E hath to E F. I &longs;ay, that A B is greater than D E. For becau&longs;e A B hath to B C

greater proportion than D E hath to D F, therefore look what proportion A B hath to B C, the &longs;ame &longs;hall D E have to a Line le&longs;­&longs;er than E F; let it have it to E G: And becau&longs;e A B to B C, is as D E, to E G, there­fore, by Compo&longs;ition, and by converting the Proportion, as C A is to A B, &longs;o is G D to D E: But C A is greater than G D: Therefore B A &longs;hall be greater than D E.

LEMMA III.

Let A C I B be the Quadrant of a Circle: and to A C let B E be drawn from B Pa­rallel: And out of any Center taken in the &longs;ame de&longs;cribe the Circle B O E S, touching A B in B, and cutting the Circumference of the Quadrant in I; and draw a Line from C to B, and another from C to I continued out to S. I &longs;ay, that the Line C I is alwaies le&longs;&longs;e than C O. Draw a Line from A to I; which toucheth the Circle B O E. And if D I be drawn it &longs;hall be equal to D B: And becau&longs;é D B toucheth the Quadrant, the &longs;aid D I &longs;hall likewi&longs;e touch it; and &longs;hall be Per-pendicular to the Diameter A I: Wherefore al&longs;o A I toucheth the Cir­cle B O E in I. And, becau&longs;e the Angle A I C is greater than the An­gle A B C, as in&longs;i&longs;ting on a larger Periphery: Therefore the Angle S I N &longs;hall be al&longs;o greater than the &longs;ame A B C: Therefore the Portion I E S is greater than the Portion B O; and the Line C S, nearer to the Center, greater than C B: Therefore al&longs;o C O is greater than C I; for that S C is to C B, as O C is to C I.

And the &longs;ame al&longs;o would happen to be greater, if (as in the other Figure) the Quadrant B I C were

le&longs;&longs;er: For the Perpendicular D B will cut the Circle C I B: Wherefore D I al&longs;o is equal to the &longs;aid D B; and the Angle D I A &longs;hall be Obtu&longs;e, and therefore A I N will al&longs;o cut B I N: And becau&longs;e the Angle A B C is le&longs;&longs;e than the Angle A I C, which is equal to S I N; and this now is le&longs;&longs;e than that which would be made at the Contact in I by the Line S I: Therefore the Porti­on S E I is much greater than the Por­tion B O: Wherefore, &c. Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

THEOR. XXII. PROP. XXXVI.

If from the lowe&longs;t point of a Circle erect unto the Horizon a Plane &longs;hould be elevated &longs;ub­tending a Circumference not greater than a Quadrant, from who&longs;e Terms two other Planes are Inflected to any point of the Cir­cumference, the De&longs;cent along both the Infle­cted Planes would be performed in a &longs;horter Time than along the former elevated Plane alone, or than along but one of the other two, namely, along the lower.

Let C B D be the Circumference not greater than a Quadrant of a Circle erect unto the Horizon on the lower point C, in which let C D be an elevated Plane; and let two Planes be inflected from the Terms D and C to any point in the Circumference taken at plea&longs;ure, as B. I &longs;ay, that the Time of the De&longs;cent along both tho&longs;e Planes D B C is &longs;horter than the Time of the De&longs;cent along the &longs;ole Plane D C, or along the other only B C ex quiete in B. Let the Horizontal Line M D Abe drawn by D, with which let C B prolonged meet in A; and let fall the Perpendiculars D N and M C to M D, and B N to B D; and about the Right-angled Triangle D B N de&longs;cribe the Semicircle D F B N, cutting D C in F; and let D O be a Mean-proportional betwixt C D and D F; and A V a Mean-proportional betwixt C A and A B: And let P S be the time in which the whole D C, or B C, &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed; (for it is manife&longs;t that they &longs;hall be both pa&longs;t in the &longs;ame Time;) And look what proportion C D hath to D O, the &longs;ame &longs;hall the Time S P have to the Time P R: the Time P R &longs;hall be that in which a Movea­ble out of D will pa&longs;&longs;e D F; and R S that in which it &longs;hall pa&longs;&longs;e the re­mainder F C. And becau&longs;e P S is al&longs;o the Time in which the Movea­ble out of B &longs;hall pa&longs;&longs;e B C; if it be &longs;uppo&longs;ed that as B C is to C D, &longs;o is S P to P T, P T &longs;hall be the Time of the De&longs;cent out of A to C: by rea&longs;on D C is a Mean-proportional betwixt A C and C B, by what was before demon&longs;trated: La&longs;t of all, as C A is to A V, &longs;o let T P be to

P G: P G &longs;hall be the Time, in which thé Moveable out of A de&longs;cendeth to B. And becau&longs;e of the Circle D F N the Diameter erect to the Horizon is D N, the Lines D F and D B &longs;hall be pa&longs;­&longs;ed in equal Times. So that if it &longs;hould be demon&longs;tra­ted that the Moveable would &longs;ooner pa&longs;&longs;e B C after the De&longs;cent D B, than F C after the Lation D F; we &longs;hould have our in­tent. But the Moveable will with the &longs;ame Celerity of Time pa&longs;&longs;e B C coming out of D along D B, as if it came out of A along A B: for that in both the De&longs;cents D B and A B it acquireth equal Moments of Velo­city: Therefore it &longs;hall re&longs;t to be demon&longs;trated that the Time is &longs;horter in which B C is pa&longs;&longs;ed after A B, than that in which F C is pa&longs;t after D F. But it hath been demon&longs;trated, that the Time in which B C is pa&longs;&longs;ed after A B is G T; and the Time of F C after D F is R S. It is to be proved therefore, that R S is greater than G T: Which is thus done. Becau&longs;e as S P is to P R, &longs;o is C D to D O, therefore, by Conver­&longs;ion of proportion, and by Inver&longs;ion, as R S is to S P, &longs;o is O C to C D: and as S P is to P T, &longs;o is D C to C A: And, becau&longs;e as T P is to PG, &longs;o is C A to A V: Therefore al&longs;o, by Conver&longs;ion of the proportion, as P T is to T G, &longs;o is A C to C V: therefore, ex equali, as R S is to G T, &longs;o is O C to C V. But O C is greater than C V, as &longs;hall anon be de­mon&longs;trated: Therefore the Time R S is greater than the Time G T: Which it was required to demon&longs;trate. And becau&longs;e C F is greater than C B, and F D le&longs;&longs;e than B A, therefore C D &longs;hall have greater propor­tion to D F than C A to A B: And as C D is to D F, &longs;o is the SquareC O to the Square O F; fora&longs;much as C D, D O, and O F are Propor­tionals: And as C A is to A B, &longs;o is the Square C V to the Square V B: Therefore C O hath greater proportion to O F, than C V to V B: Therefore, by the foregoing Lemma, C O is greater than C V. It is manife&longs;t moreover, that the Time along D C is to the Time along D B C, as D O C is to D O together with C V.

SCHOLIUM.

From the&longs;e things that have been demon&longs;trated may evidently be gathered, that the &longs;wifte&longs;t of all Motions betwixt Term and Term is not made along the &longs;horte&longs;t Line, that is by the Right, but along a portion of a Circle.

For in the Quadrat B A E C, who&longs;e Side B C is erect to the Hori­zon, let the Arch A C be divided into any number of equal parts, A D, D E, E F, F G, G C; and let Right-lines be drawn from C to the Points A, D, E, F, G, H; and al&longs;o by Lines joyn A D, D E, E F, F G. and G C. It is manifest, that the Motion along the two Lines A D C is &longs;ooner performed than along the

&longs;ole Line A C, or D C out of Re&longs;t in D: But out of Re&longs;t in A, D C is &longs;ooner pa&longs;t than the two A D C: But along the two D E C out of Re&longs;t in A the De&longs;cent is likewi&longs;e &longs;ooner made than along the &longs;ole C D: Therefore the De&longs;cent along the three Lines A D E C &longs;hall be performed &longs;ooner than along the two A D C. And in like manner the De&longs;cent along A D E preceding, the Motion is more &longs;peedily con­&longs;ummated along the two EFC than along the &longs;ole FC: Therfore along the four A D E F C the Motion is quicklier accompli&longs;hed than along the three A D E C: And &longs;o, in the la&longs;t place, along the two F G C after the precedent De&longs;cent along A D E F the Motion will be &longs;ooner con&longs;umma­ted than along the &longs;ole F C: Therefore along the five A D E F G C the De&longs;cent &longs;hall be effected in a yet &longs;horter Time than along the four A D E F C: Whereupon the nearer by in&longs;cribed Poligons we approach the Circumference, the &longs;ooner will the Motion be performed between the two a&longs;&longs;igned points A C.

And that which is explained in a Quadrant, holdeth true likewi&longs;e in a Circumference le&longs;&longs;e than the Quadrant: and the Ratiocination is the &longs;ame.

PROBL.XV. PROP. XXXVII.

A Perpendicular and Inclined Plane of the &longs;ame Elevation being given, to find a part in the In­clined Plane that is equal to the Perpendicu­lar, and pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame Time as the &longs;aid Perpendicular.

LET A B be the Perpendicular, and A C the Inclined Plane. It is required in the Inclined to find a part equal to the Perpendicular A B, that after Re&longs;t in A may be pa&longs;&longs;ed in a Time equal to the Time in which the Perpendicular is pa&longs;&longs;ed. Let A D be equal to A B, and cut the Remainder B C in two equal parts in I; and as A C is to

C I, &longs;o let C I be to another Line A E; to which let D G be equal: It is manife&longs;t that E G is equal to A D and to A B. I &longs;ay moreover, that this &longs;ame E G is the &longs;ame that is pa&longs;&longs;ed by the Moveable coming out of Re&longs;t in A in a Time equal to the Time in which the Moveable fall eth along A B. For becau&longs;e that as A C is to C I, &longs;o is C I to A E, or I D to D G; Therefore by Conver&longs;ion of the proportion, as C A is to A I, &longs;o is D I to I G. And becau&longs;e as the whole C A is to the whole A I, &longs;o is the part taken away C I to the part I G; therefore the Remaining part I A &longs;hall be to the Remainder A G, as the whole C A is to the whole A I: Therefore A I is a Mean-propor­tional betwixt C A and A G; and C I a Mean-proportional betwixt C A and A E: If therefore we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Time along A B to be as A B; A C &longs;hall be the Time along A C, and C I or I D the Time along A E: And becau&longs;e A I is a Mean-proportional betwixt C A and A G; and C A is the Time along the whole A C: Therefore A I &longs;hall be the Time along. A G; and the Remainder I C that along the Remainder G C: But D I was the Time along A E: Therefore D I and I C are the Times along both the Spaces A E and C G: Therefore the Remainder D A &longs;hall be the Time along E G, to wit, equal to the Time along A B. Which was to be done.

COROLLARIE.

Hence it is manife&longs;t, that the Space required is an intermedial be­tween the upper and lower parts that are pa&longs;t in equal Times.

PROBL. XVI. PROP. XXXVIII.

Two Horizontal Planes cut by the Perpendicular being given, to find a &longs;ublime point in the Per­pendicular, out of which Moveables falling and being reflected along the Horizontal Planes may in Times equal to the Times of the De&longs;cents along the &longs;aid Horizontal Planes, namely, along the upper and along the lower, pa&longs;&longs;e Spaces that have to each other any given proportion of the le&longs;&longs;er to the greater.

LET the Planes C D and B E be inter&longs;ected by the Perpendicular A C B, and let the given proportion of the le&longs;&longs;e to the greater be N to F G. It is required in the Perpendicular A B to find a point on high, out of which a Moveable falling, and reflected along C D may in a Time equal to the Time of its Fall, pa&longs;&longs;e a Space, that &longs;hall have unto the Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by the other Moveable coming out of the &longs;ame &longs;ub­lime point in a Time equal to the Time of its Fall with a Reflex Motion along the Plane B E the &longs;ame proportion as the given Line N batb to

F G. Let G H be made equal to the &longs;aid N; and as F H is to H G, &longs;o let B C be to C L. I &longs;ay, L is the &longs;ublime point required. For taking C M double to C L, draw L M meeting the Plane B E in O; B O &longs;hall be double to B L: And becau&longs;e, as F H is to H G, &longs;o is B C to C L; therefore, by Compo&longs;ition and In­ver&longs;ion, as H G, that is, N is to G F, &longs;o is C L to L B, that is, C M to B O: But becau&longs;e C M is double to L C; let the Space C M be that which by the Moveable coming from L after the Fall L C is pa&longs;&longs;ed along the Plane C D; and by the &longs;ame rea&longs;on B O is that which is pa&longs;&longs;ed after the Fall L B in a Time equal to the Time of the Fall along L B; fora&longs;­much as B O is double to B L: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.

SAGR. Really me thinks that we may ju&longs;tly grant our Acade­mian what he without arrogance a&longs;&longs;umed to him&longs;elf in the begining of this his Treati&longs;e of &longs;hewing us a New Science about a very old Subject. And to &longs;ee with what Facility and Per&longs;picuity he deduceth from one &longs;ole Principle the Demon&longs;trations of &longs;o many Propo&longs;iti­ons, maketh me not a little to wonder how this bu&longs;ine&longs;s e&longs;caped unhandled by Archimedes, Apollonius, Euclid, and &longs;o many other Illu&longs;trious Mathematicians and Phylo&longs;ophers: e&longs;pecially &longs;ince there are found many great Volumns of Motion.

SALV. There is extant a &longs;mall Fragment of Euclid touching Motion, but there are no marks to be &longs;een therein of any &longs;teps that he took towards the di&longs;covery of the Proportion of Acceleration, and of its Varieties along different Inclinations. So that indeed one may &longs;ay, that never till now was the door opened to a new Con­templation fraught with infinite and admirable Conclu&longs;ions, which in times to come may bu&longs;ie other Wits.

SAGR. I verily believe, that as tho&longs;e few Pa&longs;&longs;ions (I will &longs;ay for example) of the Circle demon&longs;trated by Euclid in the third of his Elements are an introduction to innumerable others more ab­&longs;truce, &longs;o tho&longs;e produced and demon&longs;trated in this &longs;hort Tractate, when they &longs;hall come to the hands of other Speculative Wits, &longs;hall be a manuduction unto infinite others mote admirable: and it is to be believed that thus it will happen by rea&longs;on of the Nobility of the Argument above all others Phy&longs;ical.

This daies Conference hath been very long and laborious; in which I have ta&longs;ted more of the &longs;imple Propo&longs;itions than of their Demon&longs;trations; many of which, I believe, will co&longs;t me more than an hour a piece well to comprehend them: a task that I re&longs;erve to my &longs;elf to perform at lea&longs;ure, you leaving the Book in my hands &longs;o &longs;oon as we &longs;hall have heard this part that remains about the Moti­on of Projects: which &longs;hall, if you &longs;o plea&longs;e, be to morrow.

SALV. I &longs;hall not fail to be with you.

The End of the Third Dialogue.

GALILEUS, HIS DIALOGUES OF MOTION.

The Fourth Dialogue.

INTERLOCUTORS,

SALVIATUS, SAGREDUS, and SIMPLICIUS.

SALVIATUS.

Simplicius likewi&longs;e cometh in the nick of time, therefore without interpo&longs;ing any Re&longs;t let us proceed to Motion; and &longs;ee here the Text of our Author.

OF THE MOTION OF PROJECTS.

What accidents belong to Equable Motion, as al&longs;o to the Na­turally Accelerate along all whatever Inclinations of Planes, we have con&longs;idered above. In this Contemplation which we are now entering upon, I will attempt to declare, and with &longs;olid Demon&longs;trationsto e&longs;tabli&longs;h &longs;ome of the principal Symptomes, and tho&longs;e worthy of know­ledge, which befall a Moveable whil&longs;t it is moved with a Motion com­pounded of a twofold Lation, to wit, of the Equable and Naturally­Accelerate: and this is that Motion, which we call the Motion of Pro­jects: who&longs;e Generation I constitute to be in this manner.

I fancy in my mind a certain Moveable projected or thrown along an Horizontal Plane, all impediment &longs;ecluded: Now it is manife&longs;t by what we have el&longs;ewhere &longs;poken at large, that that Motion will be Equa­ble and Perpetual along the &longs;aid Plane, if the Plane be extended in in­finitum: but if we &longs;uppo&longs;e it terminate, and placed on high, the Move­able, which I conceive to be endued with Gravity, being come to the end of the Plane, proceeding forward, it addeth to the Equable and Indeli­ble fir&longs;t Lation that propen&longs;ion downwards which it receiveth from its Gravity, and from thence a certain Motion doth re&longs;ult compounded of the Equable Horizontal, and of the De&longs;cending naturally. Accellerate Lations: which I call Projection. Some of who&longs;e Accidents we will de­mon&longs;trate; the fir&longs;t of which &longs;hall be this.

THEOR.I. PROP.I.

A Project, when it is moved with a Motion compounded of the Horizontal Equable, and of the Naturally­Accelerate downwards, &longs;hall de&longs;cribe a Semipara­bolical Line in its Lation.

SAGR. It is requi&longs;ite, Salviatus, in favour of my &longs;elf, and, as I believe, al&longs;o of Simplicius, here to make a pau&longs;e; for I am not &longs;o far gone in Geometry as to have &longs;tudied Apol­lonius, &longs;ave only &longs;o far as to know that he treateth of the&longs;e Para­bola's, and of the other Conick Sections, without the knowledge of which, and of their Pa&longs;&longs;ions, I do not think that one can under­&longs;tand the Demon&longs;trations of other Propo&longs;itions depending on them. And becau&longs;e already in the very fir&longs;t Propo&longs;ition it is pro­po&longs;ed by the Author to prove the Line de&longs;cribed by the Project to be Parabolical, I imagine to my &longs;elf, that being to treat of none but &longs;uch Lines, it is ab&longs;olutely nece&longs;&longs;ary to have a perfect know­ledge, if not of all the Pa&longs;&longs;ions of tho&longs;e Figures that are demon­&longs;trated by Apollonius, at lea&longs;t of tho&longs;e that are nece&longs;&longs;ary for the Sci­ence in hand.

SALV. You undervalue your &longs;elf very much, to make &longs;trange of tho&longs;e Notions, which but even now you admitted as very well under&longs;tood: I told you heretofore, that in the Treati&longs;e of Re&longs;i­&longs;tances we had need of the knowledge of certain Propo&longs;itions of Apollonius, at which you made no &longs;eruple.

SAGR. It may be either that I knew them by chance, or that I might for once gue&longs;&longs;e at, and take for granted &longs;o much as &longs;erved my turn in that Tractate: but here where I imagine that we are to hear all the Demon&longs;trations that concern tho&longs;e Lines, it is not con­venient, as we &longs;ay, to &longs;wallow things whole, lo&longs;ing our time and pains.

SIMP. But as to what concerns me, although Sagredus were, as I believe he is, well provided for his occa&longs;ions, the very fir&longs;t Terms already are new to me: for though our Philo&longs;ophers have handled this Argument of the Motion of Projects, I do not remem­ber that they have confined them&longs;elves to de&longs;ine what the Lines are which they de&longs;cribe, &longs;ave only in general that they are alwaies Curved Lines, except it be in Projections Perpendicularly upwards. Therefore in ca&longs;e that little Geometry that I have learnt from Eu­clid &longs;ince the Time that we have had other Conferences, be not &longs;uf­ficient to render me capable of the Notions requi&longs;ite for the under­&longs;tanding of the following Demon&longs;trations, I mu&longs;t content my &longs;elf with bare Propo&longs;itions believed, but not under&longs;tood.

SALV. But I will have you to know them by help of the Au­thor of this Book him&longs;elf, who when he heretofore granted me a &longs;ight of this his Work, becau&longs;e I al&longs;o at that time was not perfect in the Books of Apollonius, took the pains to demon&longs;trate to me two mo&longs;t principal Pa&longs;&longs;ions of the Parabola without any other Pre­cognition, of which two, and no more, we &longs;hall &longs;tand in need in the pre&longs;ent Treati&longs;e; which are both likewi&longs;e proved by Apollonius,but after many others, which it would take up a long time to look over, and I am de&longs;irous that we may much &longs;horten the Journey, ta­king the fir&longs;t immediately from the pure and &longs;imple generation of the &longs;aid Parabola, and from this al&longs;o immediately &longs;hall be deduced the Demon&longs;tration of the &longs;econd. Coming therefore to the fir&longs;t;

De&longs;cribe the Right Cone, who&longs;e Ba&longs;e let be the Circle I B K C, and Vertex the point L, in which, cut by a Plane parallel to the

Side L K, ari&longs;eth the Section B A C called a Parabola; and let its Ba&longs;e B C cut the Diameter I K of the Circle I B K C at Right-Angles; and let the Axis of the Parabola A D be Parallel to the &longs;ide L K; and taking any point F in the Line B F A, draw the Right-Line F E parallel to B D. I &longs;ay, that the Square of B D hath to the Square of F E the &longs;ame proportion that the Axis D A hath to the part A E. Let a Plane parallel to the Circle I B K C be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to pa&longs;&longs;e by the Point E, which &longs;hall make in the Cone a Circular Section, who&longs;e Diameter is G E H. And becau&longs;e upon the Diameter I K of the Circle I B K, B D is a Perpendicular, the Square of B D &longs;hall be equal to the Rectangle made by the parts I D and D K: And likewi&longs;e in the upper Circle which is under&longs;tood to pa&longs;&longs;e by the points G F H, the Square of the Line F E is equal to the Rectangle of the parts G E H: Therefore the Square of B D hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Square of F E, that the Rectangle I D K hath to the Rectangle G E H. And becau&longs;e the Line E D is Parallel to H K, E H &longs;hall be equal to D K, which al&longs;o are Parallels: And therefore the Rectangle I D K &longs;hall have the &longs;ame proportion to the Rectangle G E H, as I D hath to G E; that is, that D A hath to A E: Therefore the Rectangle I D K to the Rectangle G E H, that is, the Square B D to the Square F E, hath the &longs;ame proportion that the Axis D A hath to the part A E: Which was to be de­mon&longs;trated.

The other Propo&longs;ition, likewi&longs;e nece&longs;&longs;ary to the pre&longs;ent Tract, we will thus make out. Let us de&longs;cribe the Parabola, of which let the Axis C A be prolonged out unto D; and taking any point B, let the Line B C be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be continued out by the &longs;ame Parallel un­

to the Ba&longs;e of the &longs;aid Parabola; and let D A be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the part of the Axis C A. I &longs;ay, that the Right-Line drawn by the points D and B, falleth not within the Parabola, but without, &longs;o as that it only toucheth the &longs;ame in the &longs;aid point B: For, if it be po&longs;&longs;ible for it to fall within, it cutteth it above, or being pro­longed, it cutteth it below. And in that Line let any point G be taken, by which pa&longs;&longs;eth the Right Line F G E. And becau&longs;e the Square F E is greater than the Square G E, the &longs;aid Square F E &longs;hall have greater proportion to the Square B C, than the &longs;aid Square G E hath to the &longs;aid B C. And becau&longs;e, by the precedent, the Square F E is to the Square B C as E A is to A C; therefore E A hath greater proportion to A C, than the Square G E hath to the Square B C; that is, than the Square E D hath to the Square D C: (becau&longs;e in the Triangle D G E as G E is to the Parallel B C, &longs;o is E D to D C:) But the Line E A to A C, that is, to A D hath the &longs;ame proportion that four Rectangles E A D hath to four Squares of A D, that is, to the Square C D,(which is equal to four Squares of A D:) Therefore four Rectan­gles E A D &longs;hall have greater proportion to the Square C D, than the Square E D hath to the Square D C: Therefore four Rectan­gles E A D &longs;hall be greater than the Square E D: which is fal&longs;e, for they are le&longs;&longs;e; becau&longs;e the parts E A and A D of the Line E D are not equal: Therefore the Line D B toucheth the Parabola in B, and doth not cut it: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

SIMP. You proceed in your Demon&longs;trations too &longs;ublimely, and &longs;till, as far as I can perceive, &longs;uppo&longs;e that the Propo&longs;itions of Euclid are as familiar and ready with me, as the fir&longs;t Axioms them­&longs;elves, which is not &longs;o. And the impo&longs;ing upon me, ju&longs;t now, that four Rectangles E A D are le&longs;s than the Square D E becau&longs;e the parts E A and A D of the Line E D are not equal, doth not &longs;atis&longs;ie me, but leaveth me in doubt.

SALV. The truth is, all the Mathematicians that are not vulgar &longs;uppo&longs;e that the Reader hath ready by heart the Elements of Euclid: And here to &longs;upply your want, it &longs;hall &longs;u&longs;fice to remember you of a Propo&longs;ition in the &longs;econd Book, in which it is demon&longs;trated that when a Line is cut into equal parts, and into unequal, the Rectangle of the unequal parts is le&longs;s than the Rectangle of the equal, (that is, than the Square of the half) by &longs;o much as is the Square of the Line comprized between the Sections. Whence it is manife&longs;t, that the Square of the whole, which continueth four Squares of the Half, is greater than four Rectangles of the unequal parts. Now it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that we bear in mind the&longs;e two Propo&longs;i­tions which have been demon&longs;trated, taken from the Conick Ele­ments, for the better under&longs;tanding the things that follow in the pre&longs;ent Treati&longs;e: for of the&longs;e two, and no more, the Author makes u&longs;e. Now we may rea&longs;&longs;ume the Text to &longs;ee in what manner he doth demon&longs;trate his fir&longs;t Propo&longs;ition, in which he intendeth to prove unto us, That the Line de&longs;cribed by the Grave Moveable, when it de&longs;cends with a Motion compounded of the Equable Horizontal, and of the Natural De&longs;cending is a Semiparabola.

Suppo&longs;e the Horizontal Line or Plane A B placed on high; upon[or along] which let the Moveable pa&longs;&longs;e with an Equable Motion out of A unto B: and the &longs;upport of the Plane failing in B let there be derived upon the Moveable from its own Gravity a Motion naturally downwards according to the Perpendicular B N. Let the Line B E be &longs;uppo&longs;ed applyed unto the Plane A B right out, as if it were the Efflux or mea&longs;ure of the Time, on which at plea&longs;ure note any equal parts of Time, B C, C D, D E: And out of the points B C D E &longs;uppo&longs;e Per­pendicular Lines to be let fall equidi&longs;tant or parallel to B N: In the fir&longs;t of which take any part C I, who&longs;e quadruple take in the following one D F, nonuple E H, and &longs;o in the re&longs;t that follow according to the propor-tion of the Squares of C B, D B, E B, or, if you will, in the doubled proportion of the Lines. And if unto the Moveable moved beyond B towards C with the Equable Lation we &longs;uppo&longs;e the Perpendicular De&longs;cent to be &longs;uperadded according to the quantity C I, in the Time B C it &longs;hall be found con&longs;tituted in the Term I. And proceeding farther,

in the Time D B, namely, in the double of B C, the Space of the De&longs;cent down­wards &longs;hall be quadruple to the fir&longs;t Space C I: For it hath beendemon&longs;trated in the fir&longs;t Trastate, that the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed by GraveBo­dies with a Motion Natu­rally Accelerate are in du­plicate proportion of their Times. And it likewi&longs;e followeth, that the Space E H pa&longs;&longs;ed in the Time B E, &longs;hall be as G. So that it is manife&longs;tly proved, that the Spaces E H, D F, C I, are to one another as the Squares of the Lines E B, D B, C B. Now from the points I, F, and H draw the Right Lines I O, F G, H L, Parallel to the &longs;aid E B; and each of the Lines H L, F G, and I O &longs;hall be equal to each of the other Lines E B, D B, and C B; as al&longs;o each of tho&longs;e B O, B G, and B L, &longs;hall be equal to each of tho&longs;e C I, D F, and E H: And the Square H L &longs;hall be to the Square F G, as the Line L B to B G: And the Square F G &longs;hall be to the Square I O, as G B to B O: Therefore the Points I, F, and H are in one and the &longs;ame Parabolical Line. And in like manner it &longs;hall be demon&longs;trated, any equalparticles of Time of what&longs;oever Mag­nitude being taken, that the place of the Moveable who&longs;e Motion is compounded of the like Lations, is in the &longs;ame Times to be found in the &longs;ame Parabolick Line: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.

SALV. This Conclu&longs;ion is gathered from the Conver&longs;ion of the fir&longs;t of tho&longs;e two Propo&longs;itions that went before, for the Parabola being, for example, de&longs;cribed by the points B H, if either of the two F or I were not in the de&longs;cribed Parabolick Line, it would be within, or without; and by con&longs;equence the Line F G would be either greater or le&longs;&longs;er than that which &longs;hould determine in the Pa­rabolick Line; Wherefore the Square of HL would have, not to the Square of F G, but to another greater or le&longs;&longs;er, the &longs;ame pro­portion that the Line L B hath to BG, but it hath the &longs;ame propor­tion to the Square of F G: Therefore the point F is in the Parabo­lick Line: And &longs;o all the re&longs;t, &c.

SAGR. It cannot be denied but that the Di&longs;cour&longs;e is new, in­genious and concludent, arguing ex &longs;uppo&longs;itione, that is, &longs;uppo&longs;ing that the Tran&longs;ver&longs;e Motion doth continue alwaies Equable, and that the Natural Dcor&longs;um do likewi&longs;e keep its tenour of continu­ally Accelerating according to a proportion double to the Times; and that tho&longs;e Motions and their Velocities in mingling be not al­tered, di&longs;turbed, and impeded, &longs;o that finally the Line of the Pro­ject do not in the continuation of the Motion degenerate into an­other kind; a thing which &longs;eemeth to me to be impo&longs;&longs;ible. For, in regard that the Axis of our Parabola, according to which we &longs;up­po&longs;e the Natural Motion of Graves to be made, being Perpendicu­lar to the Horizon, doth terminate in the Center of the Earth; and in regard that the Parabolical Line doth &longs;ucce&longs;&longs;ively enlarge from its Axis, no Project would ever come to terminate in the Center, or if it &longs;hould come thitherwards, as it &longs;eemeth nece&longs;&longs;ary that it mu&longs;t, the Line of the Project &longs;hould de&longs;cribe another mo&longs;t different from that of the Parabola.

SIMP. I add to the&longs;e difficulties &longs;everal others; one of which is that we &longs;uppo&longs;e, that the Horizontal Plane which hath neither accli­vity or declivity is a Right Line; as if that &longs;uch a Line were in all its parts equidi&longs;tant from the Center, which is not true: for depart­ing from its middle it goeth towards the extreams, alwaies more and more receding from the Center, and therefore alwaies a&longs;cending: which of con&longs;equence rendereth it Impo&longs;&longs;ible that its Motion &longs;hould be perpetual, or that it &longs;hould for any time continue Equa­ble, and nece&longs;&longs;itates it to grow continually more and more weak. Moreover, it is, in my Opinion, impo&longs;&longs;ible to avoid the Impedi­ment of the Medium, but that it will take away the Equability of the Tran&longs;ver&longs;e Motion, and the Rule of the Acceleration in falling Grave Bodies. By all which difficulties it is rendred very improba­ble that the things demon&longs;trated with &longs;uch incon&longs;tant Suppo&longs;i­tions &longs;hould afterwards hold true in the practical Experiments.

SALV. All the Objections and Difficulties alledged are &longs;o well grounded, that I e&longs;teem it impo&longs;&longs;ible to remove them; and for my own part I admit them all, as al&longs;o I believe the Author him&longs;elf would do. And I grant that the Conclu&longs;ions thus demon­&longs;trated in Ab&longs;tract, do alter and prove fal&longs;e, and that &longs;o egregiou&longs;­ly, in Concrete, that neither is the Tran&longs;ver&longs;e Motion Equable, nor is the Acceleration of the Natural in the proportion &longs;uppo&longs;e, nor is the Line of the Project Parabolical, &c. But yet on the contrary, I de&longs;ire that you would not &longs;cruple to grant to this our Author that which other famous Men have &longs;uppo&longs;ed, although fal&longs;e. And the &longs;ingle Authority of Archimedes may &longs;atisfie every one: who in his Mechanicks, and in the fir&longs;t Quadrature of the Parabola, taketh it as a true Principle, that the Beam of the Ballance or Stilliard is a Right Line in all its points equidi&longs;tant from the Common Center of Grave Bodies, and that the Scale-ropes, to which the Weights are hanged, are parallel to one another. Which Liberty of his hath been excu&longs;ed by &longs;ome, for that in our practices the In&longs;truments we u&longs;e, and the Di&longs;tances which we take are &longs;o &longs;mall in compari&longs;on of our great remotene&longs;s from the Center of the Terre&longs;trial Globe, that we may very well take a Minute of a degree of the great Circle as if it were a Right Line, and two Per­pendiculars that &longs;hould hang at its extreams as if they were Paral­lels. For if we were in practical Operations to keep account of &longs;uch like Minutes, we &longs;hould begin to reprove the Architects, who with the Plumb Line &longs;uppo&longs;e that they rai&longs;e very high Towers between Lines equidi&longs;tant. And I here add, that we may &longs;ay that Archimedes, and others &longs;uppo&longs;e in their Contemplations that they were con&longs;tituted remote at an infinite di&longs;tance from the Center; in which ca&longs;e their A&longs;&longs;umptions were not fal&longs;e: And that therefore they did conclude by Ab&longs;olute Demon&longs;tration. Again, if we will practice the demon&longs;trated Conclu&longs;ions in terminate Di&longs;tances, by &longs;uppo&longs;ing an immen&longs;e Di&longs;tance, we ought to defalk from the truth demon&longs;trated that which our Di&longs;tance from the Center doth import, not being really infinite, but yet &longs;uch as that it may be termed Immen&longs;e in compari&longs;on of the Artifices that we make u&longs;e of, the greate&longs;t of which will be the Ranges of Projects, and among&longs;t the&longs;e that only of Canon &longs;hot; which though it be great, yet &longs;hall it not exceed four of tho&longs;e Miles of which we are remote from the Center well-nigh &longs;o many thou&longs;ands: and the&longs;e coming to deter­mine in the Surface of the Terre&longs;trial Globe may very well only in­&longs;en&longs;ibly alter that Parabolick Figure, which we grant would be extreamly transformed in going to determine in the Center. In the next place as to the perturbation proceeding from the Impedi­ment of the Medium, this is more con&longs;iderable, and, by rea&longs;on of its &longs;o great multiplicity of Varieties, incapable of being brought under any certain Rules, and reduced to a Science: for if we &longs;hould propo&longs;e to con&longs;ideration no more but the Impediment which the Air procureth to the Motions con&longs;idered by us, this alone &longs;hall be found to di&longs;turb all, and that infinite waies, according as we infinite waies vary the Figures, Gravities, and Velocities of the Moveables. For as to the Velocity, according as this &longs;hall be grea­ter, the greater &longs;hall the oppo&longs;ition be that the Air makes again&longs;t them, which &longs;hall yet more impede the &longs;aid Moveable according as they are le&longs;s Grave: &longs;o that although the de&longs;cending Grave Body ought to go Accelerating in a duplicate proportion to the Duration of its Motion, yet neverthele&longs;s, albeit the Moveable were very Grave, in coming from very great heights, the Impediment of the Air &longs;hall be &longs;o great, as that it will take from it all power of far­ther encrea&longs;ing its Velocity, and will reduce it to an Uniform and Equable Motion: And this Adequation &longs;hall be &longs;o much the &longs;ooner obtained, and in &longs;o much le&longs;&longs;er heights, by how much the Moveable &longs;hall be le&longs;s Grave. That Motion al&longs;o which along the Horizontal Plane, all other Ob&longs;tacles being removed, ought to be Equable and perpetual, &longs;hall come to be altered, and in the end arre&longs;ted by the Impediment of the Air: and here likewi&longs;e &longs;o much the &longs;ooner, by how much the Moveable &longs;hall be Lighter. Of which Accidents of Gravity, of Velocity, and al&longs;o of Figure, as being varied &longs;eve­ral waies, there can no fixed Science be given. And therefore that we may be able Scientifically to treat of this Matter it is requi&longs;ite that we ab&longs;tract from them; and, having found and demon&longs;trated the Conclu&longs;ions ab&longs;tracted from the Impediments, that we make u&longs;e of them in practice with tho&longs;e Limitations that Experience &longs;hall from time to time &longs;hew us. And yet neverthele&longs;s the benefit &longs;hall not be &longs;mall, becau&longs;e &longs;uch Matters, and their Figures &longs;hall be made choice of as are le&longs;s &longs;ubject to the Impediments of the Medium; &longs;uch are the very Grave, the Rotund: and the Spaces, and the Velocities for the mo&longs;t part will not be &longs;o great, but that their ex­orbitances may with ea&longs;ie ^{*} Allowance be reduced to a certainty. Yea more, in Projects practicable by us, that are of Grave Matters, and of Round Figure, and al&longs;o that are of Matters le&longs;&longs;e Grave, and of Cylindrical Figure, as Arrows, &longs;hot from Slings or Bows, the variation of their Motion from the exact Parabolical Figure &longs;hall be altogether in&longs;en&longs;ible. Nay, (and I will a&longs;&longs;ume to my &longs;elf a little more freedom) that in ^{*} In&longs;truments that are practicable by us, their &longs;malne&longs;s rendreth the extern and accidental Impediments, of which that of the Medium is mo&longs;t con&longs;iderable, to be but of very &longs;mall note, I am able by two experiments to make manife&longs;t. I will con&longs;ider the Motions made thorow the Air, for &longs;uch are tho&longs;e chiefly of which we &longs;peak: again&longs;t which the &longs;aid Air in two man­ners exerci&longs;eth its power. The one is by more impeding the Movea­bles le&longs;s Grave, than tho&longs;e very Grave. The other is in more oppo­&longs;ing the greater than the le&longs;s Velocity of the &longs;ame Moveable. As to the fir&longs;t; Experience &longs;hewing us that two Balls of equal bigne&longs;s, but in weight one ten or twelve times more Grave than the other, as, for example, one of Lead and another of Oak would be, de&longs;cending from an height of 150, or 200 Yards, arrive to the Earth with Velocity very little different, it a&longs;&longs;ureth us that the Im­pediment or Retardment of the Air in both is very &longs;mall: for if the Ball of Lead departing from on high in the &longs;ame Moment with that of Wood, were but little retarded, and this much, the Lead at its coming to the ground &longs;hould leave the Wood a very con&longs;idera­ble Space behind, &longs;ince it is ten times more Grave; which never­thele&longs;s doth not happen: nay, its Anticipation &longs;hall not be &longs;o much as the hundredth part of the whole height. And between a Ball of Lead, and another of Stone which weighs a third part, or half &longs;o much as it, the difference of the Times of their coming to the ground would be hardly ob&longs;ervable. Now becau&longs;e the Impe­tus that a Ball of Lead acquireth in falling from an height of 200 Yards (which is &longs;o much that continuing it in an Equable Moti­on it would in a like Time run 400 Yards) is very con&longs;iderable in compari&longs;on of the Velocity that we confer with Bows or other Ma­chines, upon our Projects (excepting the Impetus's that depend on the Fire) we may without any notable Errour conclude and account the Propo&longs;itions to be ab&longs;olutely true that are demon&longs;tra­ted without any regard had to the alteration of the Medium. In the next place as touching the other part, that is to &longs;hew, that the Impediment that the &longs;aid Moveable receiveth from the Air whil&longs;t it moveth with great Velocity is not much greater than that which oppo&longs;eth it in moving &longs;lowly, the en&longs;uing Experiment giveth us full a&longs;&longs;urance of it. Su&longs;pend by two threads both of the &longs;ame length, v. gr. four or five Yards, two equal Balls of Lead: and having fa&longs;tned the &longs;aid threads on high, let both the Balls be re­moved from the &longs;tate of Perpendicularity; but let the one be re­moved 80. or more degrees, and the other not above 4 or 5: &longs;o that one of them being left at liberty de&longs;cendeth, and pa&longs;&longs;ing be­yond the Perpendicular, de&longs;cribeth very great Arches of 160, 150, 140, &c. degrees, dimini&longs;hing them by little and little: but the other &longs;winging freely pa&longs;&longs;eth little Arches of 10, 8, 6, &c. this al&longs;o dimini&longs;hing them in like manner by little and little. Here I &longs;ay, in the fir&longs;t place, that the fir&longs;t Ball &longs;hall pa&longs;s its 180, 160, &c.degrees in as much Time as the other doth its 10, 8, &c. From whence it is manife&longs;t, that the Velocity of the fir&longs;t Ball &longs;hall be 16 and 18 times greater than the Velocity of the &longs;econd: &longs;o that in ca&longs;e the greater Velocity were to be more impeded by the Air than the le&longs;&longs;er, the Vibrations &longs;hould be more ^{*} rare in the greate&longs;t Arches of 180, or 160 degrees, &c. than in the lea&longs;t of 10, 8, 4, and al&longs;o of 2, and of 1; but this is contradicted by Experience: for if two A&longs;&longs;i&longs;tants &longs;hall &longs;et them&longs;elves to count the Vibrations, one the greate&longs;t, the other the lea&longs;t, they will find that they &longs;hall number not only tens, but hundreds al&longs;o, without di&longs;agreeing one &longs;ingle Vibration, yea, or one &longs;ole point. And this ob&longs;ervati­on joyntly a&longs;&longs;ureth us of the two Propo&longs;itions, namely, that the greate&longs;t and lea&longs;t Vibrations are all made one after another under equal Times, and that the Impediment and Retardment of the Air operates no more in the &longs;wifte&longs;t Motion, than in the &longs;lowe&longs;t: contrary to that which before it &longs;eemed that we our &longs;elves al&longs;o would have judged for company.

* Tarra.

* Artifizii.

Or &longs;ewer.

SAGR. Rather, becau&longs;e it cannot be denied but that the Air impedeth both tho&longs;e and the&longs;e, &longs;ince they both continually grow more languid, and at la&longs;t cea&longs;e, it is requi&longs;ite to &longs;ay that tho&longs;e Re­tardations are made with the &longs;ame proportion in the one and in the other Operation. And then, the being to make greater Re&longs;i&longs;tance at one time than at another, from what other doth it proceed, but only from its being a&longs;&longs;ailed at one time with a greater Impetus and Velocity, and at another time with le&longs;&longs;er? And if this be &longs;o then the &longs;ame quantity of the Velocity of the Moveable is at once the Cau&longs;e and the Mealure of the quantity of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance. Therefore all Motions, whether they be &longs;low or &longs;wift, are retarded and impe­ded in the &longs;ame proportion: a Notion in my judgment not con­temptible.

SALV. We may al&longs;o in this &longs;econd ca&longs;e conclude, That the Fallacies in the Conclu&longs;ions, which are demon&longs;trated, ab&longs;tracting from the extern Accidents, are in our In&longs;truments of very &longs;mall con&longs;ideration, in re&longs;pect of the Motions of great Velocities of which for the mo&longs;t part we &longs;peak, and of the Di&longs;tances which are but very &longs;mall in relation to the Semidiameter and great Circles of the Terre&longs;trial Globe.

SIMP. I would gladly hear the rea&longs;on why you &longs;eque&longs;trate the Projects from the Impetus of the Fire, that is, as I conceive from the force of the Powder, from the other Projects made by Slings, Bows, or Cro&longs;s-bows, touching their not being in the &longs;ame manner &longs;ubject to the Acceleration and Impediment of the Air.

SALV. I am induced thereto by the exce&longs;&longs;ive, and, as I may &longs;ay, Supernatural Fury or Impetuou&longs;ne&longs;s with which tho&longs;e Projects are driven out: For indeed I think that the Velocity with which a Bul­let is &longs;hot out of a Musket or Piece of Ordinance may without any Hyperbole be called Supernatural. For one of tho&longs;e Bullets de­&longs;cending naturally thorow the Air from &longs;ome immen&longs;e height, its Velocity, by rea&longs;on of the Re&longs;i&longs;tance of the Air will not go in­crea&longs;ing perpetually: but that which in Cadent Bodies of &longs;mall Gravity is &longs;een to happen in no very great ^{*} Space, I mean their being reduced in the end to an Equable Motion, &longs;hall al&longs;o happen after a De&longs;cent of thou&longs;ands of yards, in a Ball of Iron or Lead: and this determinate and ultimate Velocity may be &longs;aid to be the greate&longs;t that &longs;uch a Body can obtain or acquire thorow the Air: which Velocity I account to be much le&longs;&longs;er than that which cometh to be impre&longs;&longs;ed on the &longs;ame Ball by the fired Powder. And of this a very appo&longs;ite Experiment may adverti&longs;e us. At an height of an hundred or more yards let off a Musket charged with a Leaden Bullet perpendicularly downwards upon a Pavement of Stone; and with the &longs;ame Musket &longs;hoot again&longs;t &longs;uch another Stone at the Di­&longs;tance of a yard or two, and then &longs;ee which of the two Bullets is more flatted: for if that coming from on high be le&longs;s ^{*} dented than the other, it &longs;hall be a &longs;ign that the Air hath impeded it, and dimi­ni&longs;hed the Velocity conferred upon it by the Fire in the beginning of the Motion: and that, con&longs;equently, &longs;o great a Velocity the Air would not &longs;uffer it to gain coming from never &longs;o great an height: for in ca&longs;e the Velocity impre&longs;&longs;ed upon it by the Fire &longs;hould not exceed that which it might acquire of its &longs;elf de&longs;cending naturally, the battery downwards ought rather to be more valid than le&longs;s. I have not made &longs;uch an Experiment, but incline to think that a Musket or Cannon Bullet falling from never &longs;o great an height, will not make that percu&longs;&longs;ion which it maketh in a Wall at a Di­&longs;tance of a few yards, that is of &longs;o few that the &longs;hort perforation, or, if you will, Sci&longs;&longs;ure to be made in the Air &longs;ufficeth not to ob­viate the exce&longs;s of the &longs;upernatural impetuo&longs;ity impre&longs;&longs;ed on it by the Fire. This exce&longs;&longs;ive Impetus of &longs;uch like forced &longs;hots may cau&longs;e &longs;ome deformity in the Line of the Projection; making the beginning of the Parabola le&longs;s inclined or curved than the end. But this can be but of little or no prejudice to our Author in practical Operations: among&longs;t the which the principal is the com­po&longs;ition of a Table for the Ranges, or Flights, which containeth the di&longs;tances of the Falls of Balls &longs;hot according to all Elevations. And becau&longs;e the&longs;e kinds of Projections are made with Mortar­Pieces, and with no great charge; in the&longs;e the Impetus not being &longs;upernatural, the Ranges de&longs;cribe their Lines very exactly.

* Or Way.

* Or battered.

But for the pre&longs;ent let us proceed forwards in the Treati&longs;e, where the Author de&longs;ireth to lead us to the Contemplation and Inve&longs;tigation of the Impetus of the Moveable whil&longs;t it moveth with a Motion compounded of two. And fir&longs;t of that compoun­ded of two Equable Motions; the one Horizontal, and the other Perpendicular.

THEOR. II. PROP. II.

If any Moveable be moved with a twofold Equa­ble Motion, that is, Horizontal and Perpen­dicular, the Impetus or Moment of the Lation compounded of both the Motions &longs;hall be po­tentia equal to both the Moments of the fir&longs;t Motions.

For let any Moveable be moved Equably with a double Lation, and let the Mutations of the Perpendicular an&longs;wer to the Space A B, and let B C an&longs;wer to the Horizontal Lation pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame Time. Fora&longs;much therefore as the Spa-

ces A B, and B C are pa&longs;&longs;ed by the Equable Mo­tion in the &longs;ame Time, their Moments &longs;hall be to cach other as the &longs;aid A B and B C. But the Moveable which is moved according to the&longs;e two Mutations &longs;hall de-&longs;cribe the Diagonal A C, and its Moment &longs;hall be as A C. But A C ispotentia equal to the &longs;aid A B and B C: therefore the Moment com­pounded of both the Moments A B and B C, is potentia equal to them both taken together: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

SIMP. It is nece&longs;&longs;ary that you ea&longs;e me of one Scruple that cometh into my mind, it &longs;eemeth to me that this which is now con­cluded oppugneth another Propo&longs;ition of the former Tractate: in which it is affirmed, That the Impetus of the Moveable coming from A into B is equal to that coming from A into C; and now it is concluded, that the Impetus in C is greater than that in B.

SALV. The Propo&longs;itions, Simplicius, are both true, but very different from one another. Here the Author &longs;peaks of one &longs;ole Moveable moved with one &longs;ole Motion, but compounded of two, both Equable; and there he &longs;peaks of two Moveables moved with Motions Naturally Accelerated, one along the Perpendicular A B, and the other along the Inclined Plane A C: and moreover, the Times there are not &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal, but the Time along the Inclined Plane A C is greater than the Time along the Perpen­dicular A B: but in the Motion &longs;poken of at pre&longs;ent, the Motions along A B, B C and A C are under&longs;tood to be Equable, and made in the &longs;ame Time.

SIMP. Excu&longs;e me, and go on, for I am &longs;atisfied.

SALV. The Author proceeds to &longs;hew us that which hapneth concerning the Impetus of a Moveable moved in like manner with one Motion compounded of two, that is to &longs;ay, the one Horizon­tal and Equable, and the other Perpendicular but Naturally-Acce­lerate, of which in fine the Motion of the Project is compounded, and by which the Parabolick Line is de&longs;cribed; in each point of which the Author endeavours to determine what the Impetus of the Project is; for under&longs;tanding of which he &longs;heweth us the manner, or, if you will, Method of regulating and mea&longs;uring that &longs;ame Im­petus upon the &longs;aid Line, along which the Motion of the Grave Moveable de&longs;cending with a Natural-Accelerate Motion departing from Re&longs;t is made, &longs;aying:

THEOR. III. PROP. III.

Let a Motion be made along the Line A B out of Re&longs;t in A, and take in &longs;ome point C; and &longs;uppo&longs;e the &longs;aid A C to be the Time or Mea&longs;ure of the Time of the &longs;aid Fall along the Space A C, as al&longs;o the Mea&longs;ure of the Impetus or Moment in the Point C acquired by the De&longs;cent along A C. Now let there be taken in the &longs;aid Line A B any other Point, as &longs;uppo&longs;e B, in which we are to determine of theImpetus acquired by the Moveable along the Fall A B, in proportion tothe Impetus, which it obtaineth in C, who&longs;e Mea&longs;ure is &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be A C, Let A S be a Mean-proportional betwixt B A and A C. We will demon&longs;trate that the Impetus in B is to the Impetus in C, as S A is to A C. Let the Horizontal Line C D be double to the &longs;aid A C; and B E double to B A. It appeareth by what hath been demon&longs;trated, That the Cadent along A C being turned along the Horizon C D, and according to the Impetus acquired in C, with an Equable Motion, &longs;hall pa&longs;s the Space C D in a Time equal to that in which the &longs;aid A C is pa&longs;&longs;ed

with an Accelerate Motion; and likewi&longs;e that B E is pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame time as A B: But the Time of the De&longs;cent along A B is A S: There­fore the Horizontal Line B E is pa&longs;&longs;ed in A S. As the Time S A is to the Time A C, &longs;o let E B be to B L. And becau&longs;e the Motion by B E is Equable, the Space B L &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed in the Time A C ac­cording to the Moment of Celerity in B: But in the &longs;ame Time A C the Space C D is pa&longs;&longs;ed, according to the Moment of Velocity in C: the Moments of Velocity therefore are to one another as the Spaces which according to the &longs;ame Moments are pa&longs;&longs;ed in the &longs;ame Time: Therefore the Moment of Velocity in C is to the Moment of Celerity in B, as D C is to B L. And becau&longs;e as D C is to B E, &longs;o are their halfs, to wit, C A to A B: but as E B is to B L, &longs;o is B A to A S: Therefore,exæquali, as D C is to B L, &longs;o is C A to A S: that is, as the Moment of Velocity in C is to the Moment of Velocity in B, &longs;o is C A to A S; that is, the Time along C A to the Time along A B. I he manner of Mea&longs;u­ring the Impetus, or the Moment of Velocity upon a Line along which it makes a Motion of De&longs;cent is therefore manife&longs;t; which Impetus is indeed &longs;uppo&longs;ed to encrea&longs;e according to the Proportion of the Time.

But this, before we proceed any farther, is to be premoni&longs;hed, that in regard we are to &longs;peak for the future of the Motion compounded of the Equable Horizontal, and of the Naturally Accelerate downwards, (for from this Mixtion re&longs;ults, and by it is de&longs;igned the Line of the Project, that is a Parabola;) it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that we define &longs;ome common mea&longs;ure according to which we may mea&longs;ure the Velocity, Impetus, or Moment of both the Motions. And &longs;eeing that of the Equable Motion the de­grees of Velocity are innumerable, of which you may not take any promi&longs;cuou&longs;ly, but one certain one which may be be compared and con­joyned with the Degree of Velocity naturally Accelerate. I can think of no more ea&longs;ie way for the electing and determining of that, than by a&longs;­&longs;uming another of the &longs;ame kind. And that I may the better expre&longs;s my meaning; Let A C be Perpendicular to the Horizon C B; and A Cto be the Altitude, and C B the Amplitude of the Semiparabola A B; which is de&longs;cribed by the Compo&longs;ition of two Lations; of which one is that of the Moveable de&longs;cending along A C with a Motion Naturally Acceler ate ex quiete in A; the other is the Equable Tran&longs;ver&longs;al Moti­on according to the Horizontal Line A D. The Impetus acquired in C along the De&longs;cent A C is determined by the quantity of the &longs;aid height A C; for the Impetus of a Moveable

falling from the &longs;ame height is alwaies one and the &longs;ame: but in the Horizontal Line one may a&longs;&longs;ign not one, but innume­rable Degrees of Velocities of Equable Motions: out of which multitude that I may &longs;ingle out, and as it were point with the finger to that which I make choice of, I extend or prolong the Altitude C A in &longs;ublimi, in which, as was done before, I will pitch upon A E; from which if I conceive in my mind a Moveable to fallex quiete in E, it appeareth that its Im­petus acquired in the Time A, is one with which I conceive the &longs;ame Moveable being turned along A D to be moved; and its degree of Vclocity to be that, which in the Time of the De&longs;cent along E A pa&longs;&longs;eth a Space in the Horizon double to the &longs;aid E A. This Præmonition I judged nece&longs;&longs;ary.

It is moreover to be advertized that the Amplitude of the Semi­parabola A B &longs;hall be called by me the Horizontal Line [or Plane] C B.

The Altitude, to with A C, the Axis of the &longs;aid Parabola.

And the Line E A, by who&longs;e De&longs;cent the Horizontal Impetus is de­termined, I call the Sublimity, or height.

The&longs;e things being declared and defined, I proceed to Demon&longs;tra­tion.

SAGR. Stay, I pray you, for here me thinks it is convenient to adorn this Opinion of our Author with the conformity of it to the Conceit of Plato about the determining the different Veloci­ties of the Equable Motions of the Revolutions of the Cœle&longs;tial Bodies; who, having perhaps had a conjecture that no Moveable could pa&longs;&longs;e from Re&longs;t into any determinate degree of Velocity in which it ought afterwards to be perpetuated, unle&longs;s by pa&longs;&longs;ing thorow all the other le&longs;&longs;er degrees of Velocity, or, if you will, greater degrees of Tardity, which interpo&longs;e between the a&longs;&longs;igned degree, and the highe&longs;t degree of Tardity, that is of Re&longs;t, &longs;aid that God after he had created the Moveable Cœle&longs;tial Bodies that he might a&longs;&longs;ign them tho&longs;e Velocities wherewith they were afterwards to be perpetually moved with an Equable Circular Motion, made them, they departing from Re&longs;t, to move along determinate Spaces with that Natural Motion in a Right Line, according to which we &longs;en&longs;ibly &longs;ee our Moveables to move from the &longs;tate of Re&longs;t &longs;ucce&longs;­&longs;ively Accelerating. And he addeth, that having made them to acquire that degree in which it plea&longs;ed him that they &longs;hould after­wards be perpetually con&longs;erved, he converted their Right or direct Motion into Circular; which only is apt to con&longs;erve it &longs;elf Equa­ble, alwaies revolving without receding from, or approaching to any prefixed term by them de&longs;ired. The Conceit is truly worthy of Plato; and is the more to be e&longs;teemed in that the grounds there­of pa&longs;&longs;ed over in &longs;ilence by him, and di&longs;covered by our Author by taking off the Mask or Poetick Repre&longs;entation, do &longs;hew it to be in its native a&longs;pect a true Hi&longs;tory. And I think it very credible that we having by the Doctrine of A&longs;tronomy &longs;ufficiently competent Knowledge of the Magnitudes of the Orbes of the Planets, and of their Di&longs;tances from the Center about which they move, as al&longs;o of their Velocities, our Author (to whom Plato's Conjecture was not unknown) may &longs;ometime for his curio&longs;ity have had &longs;ome thought of attempting to inve&longs;tigate whether one might a&longs;&longs;ign a determinate Sublimity from which the Bodies of the Planets depar­ting, as from a &longs;tate of Re&longs;t, and moved for certain Spaces with a Right and Naturally Accelerate Motion, afterwards converting the Acquired Velocity into Equable Motions, they might be found to corre&longs;pond with the greatne&longs;s of their Orbes, and with the Times of their Revolutions.

SALV. I think I do remember that he hath heretofore told me, that he had once made the Computation, and al&longs;o that he found it exactly to an&longs;wer the Ob&longs;ervations; but that he had no mind to &longs;peak of them, doubting le&longs;t the two many Novelties by him di&longs;­covered, which had provoked the di&longs;plea&longs;ure of many again&longs;t him, might blow up new &longs;parks. But if any one &longs;hall have the like de­&longs;ire he may of him&longs;elf by the Doctrine of the pre&longs;ent Tract give him&longs;elf content. But let us pur&longs;ue our bu&longs;ine&longs;s, which is to &longs;hew;

PROBL. I. PROP. IV.

How in a Parabola given, de&longs;cribed by the Pro­ject, the Impetus of each &longs;everal point may be determined.

Let the Semiparabola be B E C, who&longs;e Amplitude is C D and Al­titude D B, with which continued out on high the Tangent of the Parabola C A meeteth in A; and along the Vertex B let B I bean Horizontal Line, and parallel to C D. And if the Amplitude C D be equal to the whole Altitude D A, B I &longs;hall be equal to B A and B D. And if the Time of the Fall along A B, and the Moment of Velocity acquired in B along the De&longs;cent A B ex quiete in A be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be mea&longs;ured by the &longs;aid A B, then D C (that is twice B I) &longs;hall be the Space which &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed by the Impetus A B turned along the Hori­zontal Line in the &longs;ame Time: But in the &longs;ame Time falling along B D out of Re&longs;t in B, it &longs;hall pa&longs;s the Altitude B D: Therefore the Movea­ble falling out of Re&longs;t in A along A B, being converted with the Impetus A B

along the Horizontal Parallel &longs;hall pa&longs;s a Space equal to D C. And the Fall along B D &longs;upervening, it pa&longs;&longs;eth the Altitude B D, and de&longs;cribes the Parabola B C; who&longs;e Impetus in the Term C is compounded of the Equable Tran&longs;ver&longs;al who&longs;e Moment is as A B, and of another Moment acquired in the Fall B D in the Term D or C; which Moments are Equal. If therefore we &longs;uppo&longs;e A B to be the Mea&longs;ure of one of them, as &longs;uppo&longs;e of the Equa­ble Tran&longs;ver&longs;al; and B I, which is equal to B D, to be the Mea&longs;ure of the Impetus acquired in D or C; then the Subten&longs;e I A &longs;hall be the quantity of the Moment compound of them both: Therefore it &longs;hall be the quantity or Mea&longs;ure of the whole Moment which the Project de&longs;cend­ing along the Parabola B C &longs;hall acquire of Impetus in C. This pre­mi&longs;ed, take in the Parabola any point E, in which we are to determine of the Impetus of the Project. Draw the Horizontal Parallel E F, and let B G be a Mean-proportional between B D and B F. And fora&longs;­much as A B or B D is &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be the Mea&longs;ure of the Time, and of the Moment of the Velocity in the Fall B D ex quiete in B: B G &longs;hall be the Time, or the Mea&longs;ure of the Time, and of the Impetus in F, coming out of B. If therefore B O be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to B G, the Diagonal drawn from A to O &longs;hall be the quantity of the Impetus in E; for A B hath been &longs;uppo&longs;ed the determinator of the Time, and of the Impe­tus in B, which turned along the Horizontal Parallel doth alwaies continue the &longs;ame: And B O determineth the Impetus in F or in E along the De&longs;cent ex quiete in B in the Altitude B F: But the&longs;e two A B and B O are potentia equal to the Power A O. Therefore that is manife&longs;t which was &longs;ought.

SAGR. The Contemplation of the Compo&longs;ition of the&longs;e diffe­rent Impetus's, and of the quantity of that Impetus which re&longs;ults from this mixture, is &longs;o new to me, that it leaveth my mind in no &longs;mall confu&longs;ion. I do not &longs;peak of the mixtion of two Motions Equable, though unequal to one another, made the one along the Horizontal Line, and the other along the Perpendicular, for I very well comprehend that there is made a Motion of the&longs;e two poten­tia equal to both the Compounding Motions, but my confu&longs;ion ari&longs;eth upon the mixing of the Equable-Horizontal and Perpendi­cular-Naturally-Accelerate Motion. Therefore I could wi&longs;h we might toge ther a little better con&longs;ider this bu&longs;ine&longs;s.

SIMP. And I &longs;tand the more in need thereof in that I am not yet &longs;o well &longs;atisfied in Mind as I &longs;hould be, in the Propo&longs;itions that are the fir&longs;t foundations of the others that follow upon them. I will add, that al&longs;o in the Mixtion of the two Motions Equable Horizontal, and Perpendicular, I would better under&longs;tand that Potentia of their Compound. Now, Salviatus, you &longs;ee what we want and de&longs;ire.

SALV. Your de&longs;ire is very rea&longs;onable: and I will e&longs;&longs;ay whe­ther my having had a longer time to think thereon may facilitate your &longs;atisfaction. But you mu&longs;t bear with and excu&longs;e me if in di&longs;­cour&longs;ing I &longs;hall repeat a great part of the things hitherto delivered by our Author.

It is not po&longs;&longs;ible for us to &longs;peak po&longs;itively touching Motions and their Velocities or Impetus's, be they Equable, or be they Naturally Accelerate, unle&longs;s we fir&longs;t agree upon the Mea&longs;ure that we are to u&longs;e in the commen&longs;uration of tho&longs;e Velocities, as al&longs;o of the Time. As to the Mea&longs;ure of the Time, we have already that which is commonly received by all of Hours, Prime-Minutes, and Se­conds, &c. and as for the mea&longs;uring of Time we have that com­mon Mea&longs;ure received by all, &longs;o it is requi&longs;ite to a&longs;&longs;ign another Mea&longs;ure for the Velocities that is commonly under&longs;tood and re­ceived by every one; that is, which every where is the &longs;ame. The Author, as hath been declared, adjudged the Velocity of Naturally de&longs;cending Grave-Bodies to be fit for this purpo&longs;e; the encrea&longs;ing Velocities of which are the &longs;ame in all parts of the World. So that that &longs;ame degree of Velocity which (for example) a Ball of Lead of a pound acquireth in having, departing from Re&longs;t, de&longs;cended Per­pendicularly as much as the height of a Pike, is alwaies, and in all places the &longs;ame, and therefore mo&longs;t commodious for explicating the quantity of the Impetus that is derived from the Natural De­&longs;cent. Now it remains to find a way to determine likewi&longs;e the Quantity of the Impetus in an Equable Motion in &longs;uch a manner, that all tho&longs;e which di&longs;cour&longs;e about it may form the &longs;ame conceit of its greatne&longs;s and Velocity; &longs;o that one may not imagine it more &longs;wift, and another le&longs;s; whereupon afterwards in conjoyning and mingling this Equable Motion imagined by them with the e&longs;tabli­&longs;hed Accelerate Motion &longs;everal men may form &longs;everal Conceits of &longs;everal greatne&longs;&longs;es of Impetus's. To determine and repre&longs;ent this Impetus, and particular Velocity our Author hath not found any way more commodious, than the making u&longs;e of the Impetus which the Moveable from time to time acquires in the Naturally-Accele­rate Motion, any acquired Moment of which being reduced into an Equable Motion retaineth its Velocity preci&longs;ely limited, and &longs;uch, that in &longs;uch another Time as that wherein it did De&longs;cend, it pa&longs;&longs;eth double the Space of the Height from whence it fell. But becau&longs;e this is the principal point in the bu&longs;ine&longs;s that we are upon, it is good to make it to be perfectly under&longs;tood by &longs;ome particular Example. Rea&longs;&longs;uming therefore the Velocity and Impetus acqui­red by the Cadent Moveable, as we &longs;aid before, from the height of a Pike, of which Velocity we will make u&longs;e for a Mea&longs;ure of other Velocities and Impetu&longs;&longs;es upon other occa&longs;ions, and &longs;uppo­&longs;ing, for example, that the Time of that Fall be four &longs;econd Mi­nutes of an hour, to find by this &longs;ame Mea&longs;ure how great the Im­petus of the Moveable would be falling from any other height greater, or le&longs;&longs;er, we ought not from the proportion that this other height hath to the height of a Pike to argue and conclude the quan­tity of the Impetus acquired in this &longs;econd height, thinking, for example, that the Moveable falling from quadruple the height hath acquired quadruple Velocity, for that it is fal&longs;e: for that the Velocity of the Naturally-Accelerate Motion doth not increa&longs;e or decrea&longs;e according to the proportion of the Spaces, but according to that of the Times, than which that of the Spaces is greater in a duplicate proportion, as was heretofore demon&longs;trated. Therefore when in a Right Line we have a&longs;&longs;igned a part for the Mea&longs;ure of the Velocity, and al&longs;o of the Time, and of the Space in that Time pa&longs;&longs;ed (for that for brevity &longs;ake all the&longs;e three Magnitudes are often repre&longs;ented by one &longs;ole Line,) to find the quantity of the Time, and the degree of Velocity that the &longs;ame Moveable would have acquired in another Di&longs;tance we &longs;hall obtain the &longs;ame, not immediataly by this &longs;econd Di&longs;tance, but by the Line which &longs;hall be a Mean-proportional betwixt the two Di&longs;tances. But I will better declare my &longs;elf by an Example. In the Line A C Perpendi­cular to the Horizon let the part A B be under&longs;tood to be a Space pa&longs;&longs;ed by a Moveable naturally de&longs;cending

with an Accelerate Motion: the Time of which pa&longs;­&longs;age, in regard I may repre&longs;ent it by any Line, I will, for brevity, imagine it to be as much as the &longs;ame Line A B and likewi&longs;e for a Mea&longs;ure of the Impetus and Velocity acquired by that Motion, I again take the &longs;ame Line A B; &longs;o that of all the Spaces that are in the progre&longs;s of the Di&longs;cour&longs;e to be con&longs;idered the part A B may be the Mea&longs;ure. Having all our plea&longs;ure e&longs;tabli&longs;hed under one &longs;ole Magnitude A B the&longs;e three Mea&longs;ures of different kinds of Quantities, that is to &longs;ay, of Spaces, of Times, and of Impetus's, let it be required to determine in the a&longs;&longs;igned Space, and at the height A C, how much the Time of the Fall of the Moveable from A to C is to be, and what the Impetus is that &longs;hall be found to have been acquired in the &longs;aid Term C, in relation to the Time and to the Impetus mea&longs;ured by A B. Both the&longs;e que&longs;tions &longs;hall be re&longs;olved taking A D the Mean-proportional betwixt the two Lines A C and A B; affirming the Time of the Fall along the whole Space A C to be as the Time A D is in relation to A B, a&longs;&longs;igned in the beginning for the Quantity of the Time in the Fall A B. And like­wi&longs;e we will &longs;ay that the Impetus, or degree of Velocity that the Cadent Moveable &longs;hall obtain in the Term C, in relation to the Impetus that it had in B, is as the &longs;ame Line A D is in relation to A B, being that the Velocity encrea&longs;eth with the &longs;ame proportion as the Time doth: Which Conclu&longs;ion although it was a&longs;&longs;umed as a Po&longs;tulatum, yet the Author was plea&longs;ed to explain the Applicati­on thereof above in the third Propo&longs;ition.

This point being well under&longs;tood and proved, we come to the Con&longs;ideration of the Impetus derived from two compound Moti­ons: whereof let one be compounded of the Horizontal and alwaies Equable, and of the Perpendicular unto the Horizon, and it al&longs;o Equable: but let the other be compounded of the Horizontal like­wi&longs;e alwaies Equable, and of the Perpendicular Naturally-Accele­rate. If both &longs;hall be Equable, it hath been &longs;een already that the Impetus emerging from the compo&longs;ition of both is potentia equal to both, as for more plainne&longs;s we will thus Exemplifie. Let the Move­able de&longs;cending along the Perpendicular A B be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to have, for example, three degrees of Equable Impetus, but being tran&longs;­ported along A B towards C, let the &longs;aid Velocity and Impetus be &longs;uppo&longs;ed four degrees, &longs;o that in the &longs;ame Time that falling it would pa&longs;s along the Perpendicular, v. gr. three yards,

it would in the Horizontal pa&longs;s four, but in that compounded of both the Velocities it cometh in the &longs;ame Timefrom the point A un­to the Term C, de&longs;cending all the way along the Diagonal Line A C, which is not &longs;even yards long, as that &longs;hould be which is com­pounded of the two Lines A B, 3, and B C, 4, but is 5; which 5 is potentia equal to the two others, 3 and 4: For having found the Squares of 3 and 4, which are 9 and 16, and joyning the&longs;e together, they make 25 for the Square of A C, which is equal to the two Squares of A B and B C: whereupon A C &longs;hall be as much as is the Side, or, if you will, Root of the Square 25, which is 5. For a con&longs;tant and certain Rule therefore, when it is required to a&longs;&longs;ign the Quantity of the Impetus re&longs;ulting from two Impetus's given, the one Horizontal, and the other Perpendicular, and both Equable, they are each of them to be &longs;quared, and their Squares being put together the Root of the Aggregate is to be extracted, which &longs;hall give us the quantity of the Impetus compounded of them both. And thus in the foregoing example, that Moveable that by vertue of the Perpendicular Motion would have percu&longs;&longs;ed upon the Hori­zon with three degrees of Force, and with only the Horizontal Mo­tion would have percu&longs;&longs;ed in C with four degrees, percu&longs;&longs;ing with both the Impetus's conjoyned, the blow &longs;hall be like to that of the Percutient moved with five degrees of Velocity and Force. And this &longs;ame Percu&longs;&longs;ion would be of the &longs;ame Impetuo&longs;ity in all the points of the Diagonal A C, for that the compounded Impetus'sare alwaies the &longs;ame, never encrea&longs;ing or dimini&longs;hing.

Let us now &longs;ee what befalls in compounding the Equable Hori­zontal Motion with another Perpendicular to the Horizon which beginning from Re&longs;t goeth Naturally Accelerating. It is already manife&longs;t, that the Diagonal, which is the Line of the Motion com­pounded of the&longs;e two, is not a Right Line, but Semiparabolical, as hath been demon&longs;trated; ^{*} in which the Impetus doth go con­tinually encrea&longs;ing by means of the continual encrea&longs;e of the Ve­locity of the Perpendicular Motion: Wherefore, to determine what the Impetus is in an a&longs;&longs;igned point of that Parabolical Diagonal, it is requi&longs;ite fir&longs;t to a&longs;&longs;ign the Quantity of the Uniform Horizontal Impetus, and then to find what is the Impetus of the falling Movea­ble in the point a&longs;&longs;igned: the which cannot be determined without the con&longs;ideration of the Time &longs;pent from the beginning of the Compo&longs;ition of the two Motions: which Con&longs;ideration of the Time is not required in the Compo&longs;ition of Equable Motions, the Velocities and Impetus's of which are alwaies the &longs;ame: but here where there is in&longs;erted into the mixture a Motion which beginning from extream Tardity goeth encrea&longs;ing in Velocity according to the continuation of the Time, it is nece&longs;&longs;ary that the quantity of the Time do &longs;hew us the quantity of the degree of Velocity in the a&longs;&longs;igned point: for, as to the re&longs;t, the Impetus compounded of the&longs;e two (as in Uniform Motions) is potentia equal to both the others compounding. But here again I will better explain my meaning by an example. In A C the Perpendicular to the Horizon let any part be taken A B; the which I will &longs;uppo&longs;e to &longs;tand for the Mea&longs;ure of the Space of the Natural Motion made along the &longs;aid Perpen­dicular, and likewi&longs;e let it be the Mea&longs;ure of the Time, and al&longs;o of the degree of Velocity, or, if you will, of the Impetus's. It is ma­nife&longs;t in the fir&longs;t place, that if the Impetus of the Moveable in B ex quiete in A &longs;hall be turned along B D parallel to the Horizon in an Equable Motion, the quantity of its Velocity &longs;hall be &longs;uch that in the Time A B it &longs;hall pa&longs;s a Space double to the Space A B, which let be the Line B D. Then let B C be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to B A, and let C E be drawn parallel and equal to B D, and thus by the Points B and E we &longs;hall de&longs;cribe the Parabolick Line B E I. And becau&longs;e that in the Time A B with the Impetus A B the Horizontal Line B D or C E is pa&longs;&longs;ed, double to A B, and in &longs;uch another Time the Per­pendicular B C is pa&longs;&longs;ed with an acqui&longs;t of Impetus in C equal to the &longs;aid Horizontal Line; therefore the Moveable in &longs;uch another Time as A B &longs;hall be found to have pa&longs;&longs;ed from B to E along the Parabola B E with an Impetus compounded of two, each equal to the Impetus A B. And becau&longs;e one of them is Horizontal, and the other Perpendicular, the Impetus compound of them &longs;hall be equal in Power to them both, that is

double to one of them. So that &longs;uppo&longs;ing B F equal to B A, and drawing the Diagonal A F, the Impetus or the Percu&longs;&longs;ion in E &longs;hall be greater than the Percu&longs;­&longs;ion in B of the Moveable fal­ling from the Height A, or than the Percu&longs;&longs;ion of the Horizon­tal Impetus along B D, according to the proportion of A F to A B. But in ca&longs;e, &longs;till retaining B A for the Mea&longs;ure of the Space of the Fall from Re&longs;t in A unto B, and for the Mea&longs;ure of the Time and of the Impetus of the falling Moveable acquired in B, the Altitude B O &longs;hould not be equal to, but greater than A B, taking B G to be a Mean-propor­tional betwixt the &longs;aid A B and B O, the &longs;aid B G would be the Mea&longs;ure of the Time and of the Impetus in O, acquired in O by the Fall from the height B O; and the Space along the Horizontal Line, which being pa&longs;&longs;ed with the Impetus A B in the Time A B would be double to A B, &longs;hall, in the whole duration of the Time B G, be &longs;o much the greater, by how much in proportion B G is greater than B A. Suppo&longs;ing therefore L B equal to B G, and draw­ing the Diagonal A L, it &longs;hall give us the quantity compounded of the two Impetus's Horizontal and Perpendicular, by which the Parabola is de&longs;cribed; and of which the Horizontal and Equable is that acquired in B by the fall of A B, and the other is that acquired in O, or, if you will, in I by the De&longs;cent B O, who&longs;e Time, as al&longs;o the quantity of its Moment was B G. And in this Method we &longs;hall inve&longs;tigate the Impetus in the extream term of the Parabola, in ca&longs;e its Altitude were le&longs;&longs;er than the Sublimity A B, taking the Mean­proportional betwixt them both: which being &longs;et off upon the Ho­rizontal Line in the place of B F, and the Diagonal drawn, as A F, we &longs;hall hereby have the quantity of the Impetus in the extream term of the Parabola.

* Or along which.

And to what hath hitherto been propo&longs;ed touching Impetus's,Blows, or if you plea&longs;e, Percu&longs;&longs;ions of &longs;uch like Projects, it is ne­ce&longs;&longs;ary to add another very nece&longs;&longs;ary Con&longs;ideration; and this it is: That it doth not &longs;uffice to have regard to the Velocity only of the Project for the determining rightly of the Force and Violence of the Percu&longs;&longs;ion, but it is requi&longs;ite likewi&longs;e to examine apart the State and Condition of that which receiveth the Percu&longs;&longs;ion, in the effica­cy of which it hath for many re&longs;pects a great &longs;hare and intere&longs;t. And fir&longs;t there is no man but knows that the thing &longs;mitten doth &longs;o much &longs;uffer violence from the Velocity of the Percutient by how much it oppo&longs;eth it, and either totally or partially checketh its Motion: For if the Blow &longs;hall light upon &longs;uch an one as yieldeth to the Velocity of the Percutient without any Re&longs;i&longs;tance, that Blow &longs;hall be nullified: And he that runneth to hit his Enemy with his Launce, if at the overtaking of him it &longs;hall fall out that he moveth, giving back with the like Velocity, he &longs;hall make no thru&longs;t, and the Action &longs;hall be a meer touch without doing any harm.

But if the Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall happen to be received upon an Object which doth not wholly yield to the Percutient, but only partially, the Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall do hurt, though not with its whole Impetus, but only with the exce&longs;s of the Velocity of the &longs;aid Percutient above the Velocity of the recoile and rece&longs;&longs;ion of the Object percu&longs;&longs;ed: &longs;o that, if v. g. the Percutient &longs;hall come with 10 degrees of Velo­city upon the Percu&longs;&longs;ed Body, which giving back in part retireth with 4 degrees, the Impetus and Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall be as if it were of 6 degrees. And la&longs;tly, the Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall be entire and perfect on the part of the Percutient when the thing percu&longs;&longs;ed yieldeth not, but wholly oppo&longs;eth and &longs;toppeth the whole Motion of the Percu­tient; if haply there can be &longs;uch a ca&longs;e. And I &longs;ay on the part of the Percutient, for when the Body percu&longs;&longs;ed moveth with a contra­ry Motion towards the Percutient, the Blow and Shock &longs;hall be &longs;o much the more Impetuous by how much the two Velocities uni­ted are greater than the &longs;ole Velocity of the Percutient. More­over, you are likewi&longs;e to take notice, that the more or le&longs;s yielding may proceed not only from the quality of the Matter more or le&longs;s hard, as if it be of Iron, of Lead, or of Wooll, &c. but al&longs;o from the Po&longs;ition of the Body that receiveth the Percu&longs;&longs;ion. Which Po­&longs;ition if it &longs;hall be &longs;uch as that the Motion of the Percutient hap­neth to hit it at Right-Angles, the Impetus of the Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall be the greate&longs;t: but if the Motion &longs;hall proceed obliquely, and, as we &longs;ay, a&longs;lant, the Percu&longs;&longs;ion &longs;hall be weaker; and that more, and more according to its greater and greater Obliquity: for an Ob­ject in that manner &longs;cituate, albeit of very &longs;olid matter, doth not damp or arre&longs;t the whole Impetus and Motion of the Percutient, which &longs;lanting pa&longs;&longs;eth farther, continuing at lea&longs;t in &longs;ome part to move along the Surface of the oppo&longs;ed Body Re&longs;i&longs;ting. When therefore we have even now determined of the greatne&longs;s of the Impetus of the Project in the end of the Parabolicall Line, it ought to be under&longs;tood to be meant of the Percu&longs;&longs;ion received upon a Line at Right Angles with the &longs;ame Parabolick Line, or with the Line that is Tangent to the Parabola in the fore&longs;aid point: for although that &longs;ame Motion be compounded of an Horizontal and a Perpendicular Motion, the Impetus is not at the greate&longs;t either upon the Horizontal Plane, or upon that erect to the Horizon, be­ing received upon them both obliquely.

SAGR. Your &longs;peaking of the&longs;e Blows, and the&longs;e Percu&longs;&longs;ions hath brought into my mind a Problem, or, if you will, Que&longs;tion in the Mechanicks, the &longs;olution whereof I could never find in any Author, nor any thing that doth dimini&longs;h my admiration, or &longs;o much as in the lea&longs;t afford my judgment &longs;atisfaction. And my doubt and wonder lyeth in my not being able to comprehend whence that Immen&longs;e Force and Violence &longs;hould proceed, and on what Principle it &longs;hould depend, which we &longs;ee to con&longs;i&longs;t in Per­cu&longs;&longs;ion, in that with the &longs;imple &longs;troke of an Hammer, that doth not weigh above eight or ten pounds, we &longs;ee &longs;uch Re&longs;i&longs;tances to be overcome as would not yield to the weight of a Grave Body that without Percu&longs;&longs;ion hath an Impetus only by pre&longs;&longs;ing and bearing upon it, albeit the weight of this be many hundreds of pounds more. I would likewi&longs;e find out a way to mea&longs;ure the Force of this Percu&longs;&longs;ion, which I do not think to be infinite, but rather hold that it hath its Term in which it may be compared, and in the end Regulated with other Forces of pre&longs;&longs;ing Gravities, either of Lea­vers, or of Screws, or of other Mechanick In&longs;truments, of who&longs;e multiplication of Force I am thorowly &longs;atisfied.

SALV. You are not alone in the admirablene&longs;s of the effect, and the ob&longs;curity of the cau&longs;e of &longs;o &longs;tupendious an Accident. I ruminated a long time upon it in vain, my &longs;tupifaction &longs;till encrea­&longs;ing; till in the end meeting with our Academian, I received from him a double &longs;atisfaction: fir&longs;t in hearing that he al&longs;o had been a long time at the &longs;ame lo&longs;s; and next in under&longs;tanding that after he had at times &longs;pent many thou&longs;ands of hours in &longs;tudying and con­templating thereon, he had light upon certain Notions far from our fir&longs;t conceptions, and therefore new, and for their Novelty to be admired. And becau&longs;e that I already &longs;ee that your Curio&longs;ity would gladly hear tho&longs;e Conceits which are Remote from common Conjecture, I &longs;hall not &longs;tay for your entreaty, but I give you my word that &longs;o &longs;oon as we &longs;hall have fini&longs;hed the Reading of this Treati&longs;e of Projects, I will &longs;et before you all tho&longs;e Fancies, or, I might &longs;ay, Extravagancies that are yet left in my memory of the Di&longs;cour&longs;es of the Academick. In the mean time let us pro&longs;ecute the Propo&longs;itions of our Author.

PROBL. II. PROP. V.

In the Axis of a given Parabola prolonged to find a &longs;ublime point out of which the Moveable falling &longs;hall de&longs;cribe the &longs;aid Parabola.

Let the Parabola be A B, its Amplitude H B, and its prolonged Axis H E; in which a Sublimity is to be found, out of which the Moveable falling, and converting the Impetus conceived in A along the Horizontal Line, de&longs;cribeth the Parabola A B. Draw the Horizontal Line A G, which &longs;hall be Parallel to B H, and &longs;uppo&longs;ing A F equal to A H draw the Right Line F B, which toucheth the Parabola in B, and cutteth the Horizontal Line A G in G; and unto F A and A G let A E be a third Proportional. I &longs;ay, that E is the &longs;ublime Point re­quired, out of which the Moveable falling ex quiete in E, and the Im­petus conceived in A being converted along the Horizontal Line over­taking the Impetus of the De&longs;cent

in H ex quiete in A, de&longs;cribeth the Parabola A B. For if we &longs;uppo&longs;e E A to be the Mea&longs;ure of the Time of the Fall from E to A, and of the Impetus acquired in A, A G (that is a Mean-proportional be­tween E A and A F) &longs;hall be the Time and the Impetus coming from F to A, or from A to H. And becau&longs;e the Moveable coming out of E in the Time E A with the Impetus acquired in A pa&longs;&longs;eth in the Ho­rizontal Lation with an Equable Motion the double of E A; There­fore likewi&longs;e moving with the &longs;ame Impetus it &longs;hall in the Time A G pa&longs;s the double of G A, to wit, the Mean-proportional B H (for the Spaces pa&longs;&longs;ed with the &longs;ame Equable Motion are to one another as the Times of the &longs;aid Motions:) And along the Perpendicular A H &longs;hall be pa&longs;&longs;ed with a Motion ex quiete in the &longs;ame Time G A: Therefore the Amplitude H B, and Altitude A H are pa&longs;&longs;ed by the Moveable in the &longs;ame Time: Therefore the Parabola A B &longs;hall be de&longs;cribed by the De&longs;cent of the Project coming from the Sublimity E: Which was re­quired.

COROLLARY.

Hence it appeareth that the half of the Ba&longs;e or Amplitude of the Semiparabola (which is the fourth part of the Amplitude of the whole Parabola) is a Mean-proportional betwixt its Al­titude and the Sublimity out of which the Moveable falling de&longs;cribeth it.

PROBL. III. PROP. VI.

The Sublimity and Altitude of a Semiparabola being given to find its Amplitude.

Let A C be perpendicular to the

Horizontal Line D C, in which let the Altitude C B and the Sublimity B A be given: It is required in the Horizontal Line D C to find the Amplitude of the Semiparabola that is de&longs;cribed out of the Sublimity B A with the Alti­tude B C. Take a Mean proportional between C B and B A, to which let C D be double, I &longs;ay, that C D is the Amplitude required. The which is manife&longs;t by the precedent Propo&longs;ition.

THEOR. IV. PROP. VII.

In Projects which de&longs;cribe Semiparabola's of the &longs;ame Amplitude, there is le&longs;s Impetus required in that which de&longs;cribeth that who&longs;e Ampli­tude is double to its Altitude, than in any other.

For let the Semiparabola be B D, who&longs;e Amplitude C D is dou­ble to its Altitude C B; and in its Axis extended on high let B A be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the Altitude B C; and draw a Line from A to D which toucheth the Semiparabola in D, and &longs;hall cut the Hori­zontal Line B E in E; and B E &longs;hall be equal to B C or to B A: It is manife&longs;t that it is de&longs;cribed by the Project who&longs;e Equable HorizontalImpetus is &longs;uch as is that gained in B of a thing falling from Re&longs;t in A, and the Impetus of the Natural Motion downwards, &longs;uch as is that of a thing coming to C ex quiete in B. Whence it is manife&longs;t, that theImpetus compounded of them, and that &longs;triketh in the Term D is as the Diagonal A E, that is potentia equal to them both. Now let there be another Semiparabola G D, who&longs;e Amplitude is the &longs;ame C D, and the Altitude C G le&longs;s, or greater than the Altitude B C, and let H D touch the &longs;ame, cutting the Horizontal Line drawn by G in the point K; and as H G is to G K, &longs;o let K G be to G L: by what hath been demon&longs;trated G L &longs;hall be the Altitude from which the Project falling de&longs;cribeth theParabola G D. Let G M be a Mean-proportional betwixt A B and G L; G M &longs;hall be the Time, and the Moment or Impetus in G of the Project falling from L, (for it hath been &longs;uppo&longs;ed that A B is the Mea­&longs;ure of the Time and Impetus.) Again, let G N be a Mean-propor­tional betwixt B C and C G: this G N &longs;hall be the Mea&longs;ure of the Time and theImpetus of the

Project falling from G to C. If therefore a Line be drawn from M to N it &longs;hall be the the Mea&longs;ure of the Impetus of the Project a­long the Para­bola B D, &longs;cri­king in the term D. WhichImpetus, I &longs;ay, is greater than the Impetus of the Project along the Parabola B D, who&longs;e quantity was A E. For becau&longs;e G N is &longs;uppo&longs;ed the Mean-pro­portional betwixt B C and C G, and B C is equal to B E, that is to H G; (for they are each of them &longs;ubduple to D C:) Therefore as C G is to G N, &longs;o &longs;hall N G be to G K: and, as C G or H G is to G K, &longs;o &longs;hall the Square N G be to the Square of G K: But as H G is to G K, &longs;o was K G &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be to G L: Therefore as N G is to the Square G K, &longs;o is K G to G L: But as K G is to G L, &longs;o is the Square K G unto the Square G M, (for G M is the Mean between K G and G L:) Therefore the three Squares N G, K G, and G M are continual proportionals: And the two extream ones N G and G M taken together, that is the Square M N is greater than double the Square K G, to which the Square A E is double: Therefore the Square M N is greater than the Square A E: and the Line M N greater than the Line A E: Which was to be de­mon&longs;trated.

CORROLLARY I.

Hence it appeareth, that on the contrary, in the Project out of D along the Semiparabola D B, le&longs;s Impetus is required than along any other according to the greater or le&longs;&longs;er Elevation of the Semiparabola B D, which is according to the Tan­gent A D, containing half a Right-Angle upon the Hori­zon.

COROLLARRY II.

And that being &longs;o, it followeth, that if Projections be made with the &longs;ame Impetus out of the Term D, according to &longs;everal Elevations, that &longs;hall be the greate&longs;t Projection or Amplitude of the Semiparabola or whole Parabola which followeth at the Elevation of a ^{*} Semi-Right-Angle; and the re&longs;t, made according to greater or le&longs;&longs;er Angles, &longs;hall be greater or le&longs;&longs;er.

* Or, at the Ele­vation of 45 de­grees.

SAGR. The &longs;trength of Nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;trations are full of plea&longs;ure and wonder; and &longs;uch are only the Mathematical. I un­der&longs;tood before upon tru&longs;t from the Relations of &longs;undry Gunners, that of all the Ranges of a Cannon, or of a Mortar-piece, the grea­te&longs;t, &longs;cilicet that which carryeth the Ball farthe&longs;t was that made at the Elevation of a Semi-Right-Angle, which they call, of the Sixth point of the Square: but the knowledge of the Cau&longs;e whence it hapneth infinitely &longs;urpa&longs;&longs;eth the bare Notion that I received upon their atte&longs;tation, and al&longs;o from many repeated Experiments.

SALV. You &longs;ay very right: and the knowledge of one &longs;ingle Effect acquired by its Cau&longs;es openeth the Intellect to under&longs;tand and a&longs;certain our &longs;elves of other effects, without need of repairing unto Experiments, ju&longs;t as it hapneth in the pre&longs;ent Ca&longs;e; in which having found by demon&longs;trative Di&longs;cour&longs;e the certainty of this, That the greate&longs;t of all Ranges is that of the Elevation of a Semi­Right-Angle, the Author demon&longs;trates unto us that which po&longs;&longs;ibly hath not been ob&longs;erved by Experience: and that is, that of the other Ranges tho&longs;e are equal to one another who&longs;e Elevations ex­ceed or fall &longs;hort by equal Angles of the Semi-right: &longs;o that the Balls &longs;hot from the Horizon, one according to the Elevation of &longs;e­ven Points, and the other of 5, &longs;hall light upon the Horizon at equal Di&longs;tances: and &longs;o the Ranges of 8 and of 4 points, of 9 and of 3, &c. &longs;hall be equal. Now hear the Demon&longs;tration of it.

THEOR. V. PROP. VIII.

The Amplitudes of Parabola's de&longs;cribed by Pro­jects expul&longs;ed with the &longs;ame Impetus according to the Elevations by Angles equidi&longs;tant above, and beneath from the ^{*} Semi-right, are equal to each other.

* Or Angle of 45.

Of the Triangle M C B, about the Right-Angle C, let the Ho­rizontal Line B C and the Perpendicular C M be equal; for &longs;o the Angle M B C &longs;hall be Semi-right; and prolonging C M to D, let there be con&longs;tituted in B two equal Angles above and below the Diagonal M B, viz. M B E, and M B D. It is to be demon&longs;trated that the Amplitudes of the Parabola's de&longs;cribed by the Projects be­ing emitted [or &longs;hot off] with the &longs;ame Impetus out of the Term B, according to the Elevations of the Angles E B C and D B C, are equal. For in regard that the extern Angle B M C, is equal to the two intern M D B and M B D, the Angle M B C &longs;hall al&longs;o be equal to them. And if we &longs;uppo&longs;e M B E in&longs;tead of the Angle M B D, the &longs;aid Angle M B C &longs;hall be equal to the two

Angles M B E and B D C: And taking away the common Angle M B E, the remaining An­gle B D C &longs;hall be equal to the remaining An­gle E B C: Therefore the Triangles D C B and B C E are alike. Let the Right Lines D C and E C be divided in the mid&longs;t in H and F; and draw H I and F G parallel to the Ho­rizontal Line C B; and as D H is to H I, &longs;o let I H be to H L: the Triangle I H L &longs;hall be like to the Triangle I H D, like to which al&longs;o is E G F. And &longs;eeing that I H and G F are equal (to wit, halves of the &longs;ame B C:) There­fore F E, that is F C, &longs;hall be equal to H L: And, adding the common Line F H, C H &longs;hall be equal to F L. If therefore we under&longs;tand the Se­miparabola to be de&longs;cribed along by H and B, who&longs;e Altitude &longs;hall be H C, and Sublimity H L, its Amplitude &longs;hall be C B, which is double to HI, that is, the Mean betwixt D H, or C H, and HL: And D B &longs;hall be a Tangent to it, the Lines C H and H D being equal. And if, again, we conceive the Parabola to be de&longs;cribed along by F and B from the Sublimity FL, with the Altitude F C, betwixt which the Mean­proportional is F G, who&longs;e double is the Horizontal Line C B: C B, as before, &longs;hall be its Amplitude; and E B a Tangent to it, &longs;ince E F and F C are equal: But the Angles D B C and E B C (&longs;cilicet, their Eleva­tions) &longs;hall be equidi&longs;tant from the Semi-Right Angle: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is demon&longs;trated.

THEOR. VI. PROP. IX.

The Amplitudes of Parabola's, who&longs;e Altitudes and Sublimities an&longs;wer to each other è contra­rio, are equall.

Let the Altitude G F of the Parabola F H have the &longs;ame proporti­on to the Altitude C B of the Parabola B D, as the Sublimity B A hath to the Sublimity F E. I &longs;ay, that the Amplitude H G is equal to the Amplitude D C. For &longs;ince the fir&longs;t G F hath the &longs;ame propor­tion to the &longs;econd C B, as the third B A hath to the fourth F E; There­fore, the Rectangle

G F E of the fir&longs;t and fourth, &longs;hall be equal to the Rectangle C B A of the &longs;econd and third: Therefore the Squares that are equal to the&longs;e Rectangles &longs;hall be equal to one another: But the Square of half of G H is equal to the Rectangle G F E; and the Square of half of C D is equal to the Rectangle C B A: There­fore the&longs;e Squares, and their Sides, and the doubles of their Sides &longs;hall be equal: But the&longs;e are the Amplitudes G H and C D: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.

LEMMA pro &longs;equenti.

If a Right Line be cut according to any proportion, the Squares of the Mean-proportionals between the whole and the two parts are equal to the Square of the whole.

Let A B be cut according to any proportion in C. I &longs;ay, that the Squares of the Mean-proportional Lines between the whole A B and the parts A C and C B, being taken together are equal to the Square of the whole A B. And this appeareth, a Semi-

circle being de&longs;cribed upon the whole Line B A, and from C a Perpendicular being ere­cted C D, and Lines being drawn from D to A, and from D to B. For D A is the Mean­proportional betwixt A B and A C; and D B is the Mean-proporti­onal between A B and B C: And the Squares of the Lines D A and D B taken together are equal to the Square of the whole Line A B, the Angle A D B in the Semicircle being a Right-Angle: Therefore the Propo&longs;ition is manifest.

THEOR. VII. PROP. X.

The Impetus or Moment of any Semiparabola is equal to the Moment of any Moveable falling naturally along the Perpendicular to the Ho­rizon that is equal to the Line compounded of the Sublimity and of the Altitude of the Se­miparabola.

Let the Semiparabola be A B, its Sublimity D A, and Altitude A C, of which the Perpendicular D C is compounded. I &longs;ay, that the Impetus of the Semiparabola in B is equal to the Moment of the Moveable Naturally falling from D to C. Suppo&longs;e D C it &longs;elf to be the Mea&longs;ure of the Time and of the Impetus; and take a Mean-pro­portional betwixt C D and D A, to which let

C F be equal; and withal let C E be a Mean­proportional between D C and C A: Now C F &longs;hall be the Mea&longs;ure of the Time and of the Mo­ment of the Moveable &longs;alling along D A out of Re&longs;t in D; and C E &longs;hall be the Time and Mo­ment of the Moveable falling along A C, out of Re&longs;t in A, and the Moment of the Diagonal E F &longs;hall be that compounded of both the others, &longs;cil. that of the Semiparabola in B. And becau&longs;e D C is cut according to any proportion in A, and becau&longs;e C F and C E are Mean-Proportionals between C D and the parts D A and A C; the Squares of them taken together &longs;hall be equal to the Square of the whole; by the Lemma aforegoing: But the Squares of them are al&longs;o equal to the Square of E F: Therefore D F is equal al&longs;o to the Line D C: Whence it is manife&longs;t that the Moments along D C, and along the Se­miparabola A B, are equal in C and B: Which was required.

COROLLARY.

Hence it is manife&longs;t, that of all Parabola's who&longs;e Altitudes and Sublimities being joyned together are equal, the Impetus's are al&longs;o equal.

PROBL. IV. PROP. XI.

The Impetus and Amplitude of a Semiparabola be­ing given, to find its Altitude, and con&longs;equently its Sublimity.

Let the Impetus given be defined by the Perpendicular to the Ho­rizon A B; and let the Amplitude along the Horizontal Line be B C. It is required to find the Altitude and Sublimity of the Parabola who&longs;e Impetus is A B, and Amplitude B C. It is manife&longs;t, from what hath been already demon&longs;trated, that half the Amplitude B C will be a Mean-proportional betwixt the Altitude and the Sublimity of the &longs;aid Semiparabola, who&longs;e Impetus, by the precedent Propo&longs;ition, is the &longs;ame with the Impetus of the Moveable falling from Re&longs;t in A along the whole Perpendicular A B: Wherefore B A is &longs;o to be cut that the Rectangle contained by its parts may be equal to the Square of half of B C, which let be B D. Hence it appeareth to be nece&longs;&longs;ary that D B do not exceed the

half of B A; for of Rectangles contained by the parts the greate&longs;t is when the whole Line is cut into two equal parts. Therefore let B A be divided into two equal parts in E. And if B D be equal to B E the work is done; and the Altitude of the Semipara­bola &longs;hall be B E, and its Sublimity E A: (and &longs;ee here by the way that the Amplitude of the Parabola of a Semi-right Elevation, as was demon&longs;trated above, is the greate&longs;t of all tho&longs;e de&longs;cribed with the &longs;ame Impetus.) But let B D be le&longs;s than the half of B A, which is &longs;o to be cut that the Rectangle under the parts may be equal to the Square B D. Upon E A de&longs;cribe a Semicircle, upon which out of A &longs;et off A F equal to B D, and draw a Line from F to E, to which cut a part equal E G. Now the Rectangle B G A, together with the Square E G, &longs;hall be equal to the Square E A; to which the two Squares A F and F E are al&longs;o equal: Therefore the equal Squares G E and F E be­ing &longs;ub&longs;tracted, there remaineth the Rectangle B G A equal to the Square A F, &longs;cilicet, to B D; and the Line B D is a Mean-proportional betwixt B G and G A. Whence it appeareth, that of the Semipa­rabola who&longs;e Amplitude is B C, and Impetus A B, the Altitude is B G, and the Sublimity G A. And if we &longs;et off B I below equal to G A, this &longs;hall be the Altitude, and I A the Sublimity of the Semiparabola I C. From what hath been already demon&longs;trated we are able,

PROBL. V. PROP. XII.

To collect by Calculation of the Amplitudes of all Semiparabola's that are de&longs;cribed by Projects expul&longs;ed with the &longs;ame Impetus, and to make Tables thereof.

It is obvious, from the things demon&longs;trated, that Parabola's are de­&longs;cribed by Projects of the &longs;ame Impetus then, when their Subli­mities together with their Altitudes do make up equal Perpendicu­lars upon the Horizon. The&longs;e Perpendiculars therefore are to be com­prehended between the &longs;ame Horizontal Parallels. Therefore let the Horizontal Line C B be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to the Perpendicular B A, and draw the Diagonal from A to C. The Angle A C B &longs;hall be Semi­right, or 45 Degrees. And the Perpendicular B A being divided into two equal parts in D, the Semiparabola D C &longs;hall be that which is de­&longs;cribed from the Sublimity A D together with the Altitude D B: and its Impetus in C &longs;hall be as great as that of the Moveable coming out of Re&longs;t in A along the Perpendicular A B is in B. And if A G be drawn parallel to B C, the united Altitudes and Sublimities of all other re­maining Semiparabola's who&longs;e future Impetus's are the &longs;ame with tho&longs;e now mentioned mu&longs;t be bounded by the Space between the Parallels

A G and B C. Farthermore, it having been but now demon&longs;trated, that the Am­plitudes of the Semiparabola's who&longs;e Tangents are equidi&longs;tant either above or below from the Semi right Elevation are equal, the Calculations that we frame for the greater Elevations will likewi&longs;e &longs;erve for the le&longs;&longs;er. We choo&longs;e moreover a number of ten thou&longs;and parts for the greate&longs;t Amplitude of the Projection of the Semiparabola made at the Elevation of 45 degrees: &longs;o much therefore the Line B A, and the Amplitude of the Semipa­rabola B C, are to be &longs;uppo&longs;ed. And we make choice of the number 10000, becau&longs;e we in our Calculation u&longs;e the Table of Tangents, in which this number agreeth with the Tangent of 45 degrees. Now, to come to the bu&longs;ine&longs;s, let C E be drawn, contain­ing the Angle E C B greater (Acute neverthele&longs;s,) than the Angle A C B; and let the Semiparabola be de&longs;cribed which is touched by the Line E C, and who&longs;e Sublimity united with its Altitude is equal to B A. In the Table of Tangents take the &longs;aid B E for the Tangent at thegiven Angle B C E, which divide into two equal parts at F. Then find a third Proportional to B F and B C, (or to the half of B C,) which &longs;hall of nece&longs;&longs;ity be greater than F A; therefore let it be F O: Of the Semiparabola, therefore, in&longs;cribed in the Triangle E C B, ac­cording to the Tangent C E, who&longs;e Amplitude is C B, the Altitude B F, and the Sublimity F O is found: But the whole Line B O ri&longs;eth above the Parallels A G and C B, whereas our work was to bound it between them: For &longs;o both it and the Semiparabola D C &longs;hall be de&longs;cribed by the Projects out of C expelled with the &longs;ame Impetus. Therefore we are to &longs;eek another like to this, (for innumerable greater and &longs;maller, like to one another, may be de&longs;cribed within the Angle B C E) to who&longs;e united Sublimity and Altitude B A &longs;hall be equal. Therefore as O B is to B A, &longs;o let the Amplitude B C be to C R: and C R &longs;hall be found,&longs;cilicet the Amplitude of the Semiparabola according to the Elevation of the Angle B C E, who&longs;e conjoyned Sublimity and Altitude is equal to the Space contained between the Parallels G A and C B: Which was required. The work, therefore, &longs;hall be after this manner.

Take the Tangent of the given Angle B C E, to the half of which add the third Proportional of it, and half of B C, which let be F O: Then as O B is to B A, &longs;o let B C be to another, which let be C R, to wit, the Amplitude &longs;ought. Let us give an Example.

Let the Angle E C B be 50 degrees, its Tangent &longs;hall be 11918, who&longs;e half, to wit, B F, is 5959, and the half of B C is 5000, the third proportional of the&longs;e halves is 4195, which added to the &longs;aid B F maketh 10154: for the &longs;aid B O. Again, as O B is to B A, that is as 10154 is to 10000, &longs;o is B E, that is 10000 (for each of them is the Tangent of 45 degrees) to another: and that &longs;hall give us the required Altitude R C 9848, of &longs;uch as B C (the greate&longs;t Amplitude) is 10000. To the&longs;e the Amplitudes of the whole Parabola's are double,&longs;cilicet 19696 and 20000. And &longs;o much likewi&longs;e is the Amplitude of the Parabola according to the Elevation of 40 degrees, &longs;ince it is equal­ly di&longs;tant from 45 degrees.

SAGR. For the perfect under&longs;tanding of this Demon&longs;tration I mu&longs;t be informed how true it is, that the Third Proportional to B F and B I, is (as the Author &longs;aith) nece&longs;&longs;arily greater than F A.

SALV. That inference, as I conceive, may be deduced thus. The Square of the Mean of three proportional Lines is equal to the Rectangle of the other two: whence the Square of B I, or of B D equal to it, ought to be equal to the Rectangle of the fir&longs;t F B multiplied into the third to be found: which third is of nece&longs;&longs;ity to be greater than F A, becau&longs;e the Rectangle of B F multiplied into F A is le&longs;s than the Square B D: and the Defect is as much as the Square of D F, as Euclid demon&longs;trates in a Propo&longs;ition of his Second Book. You mu&longs;t al&longs;o know, that the point F which divi­deth the Tangent E B in the middle, will many other times fall above the point A, and once al&longs;o in the &longs;aid A: In which ca&longs;es it is evident of it &longs;elf, that the third proportional to the half of the Tan­gent, and to B I (which giveth the Sublimity) is all above A. But the Author hath taken a Ca&longs;e in which it was not manife&longs;t that the &longs;aid third Proportional is alwaies greater than F A: and which therefore being &longs;et off above the point F pa&longs;&longs;eth beyond the Paral­lel A G. Now let us proceed.

It will not be unprofitable if by help of this Table we compo&longs;e ano­ther, &longs;hewing the Altitudes of the &longs;ame Semiparabola's of Projects of the &longs;ame Impetus. And the Con&longs;truction of it is in this manner.

PROBL. VI. PROP. XIII.

From the given Amplitudes of Semiparabola's in the following Table &longs;et down, keeping the common Impeius with which every one of them is de&longs;cribed, to compute the Altitudes of each &longs;everal Semiparabola.

Let the Amplitude given be B C, and of the Impetus, which is &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be alwaies the &longs;ame, let the Mea&longs;ure be O B, to wit, the Aggregate of the Altitude and Sublimity. The &longs;aid Altitude is required to be found and di&longs;tingui&longs;hed. Which &longs;hall then be done when B O is &longs;o divided as that the Rectangle contained under its parts is equal to the Square of half the Amplitude B C. Let that &longs;ame divi­&longs;ion fall in F; and let both O B and B C be cut in the mid&longs;t at D and I.

The Square I B, therefore, is equal to the Rectangle B F O: And the Square D O is equal to the &longs;ame Rectangle together with the Square F D. If therefore from the Square D O we deduct the Square B I, which is equal to the Rectangle B F O, there &longs;hall remain the Square F D; to who&longs;e Side D F, B D be­ing added it &longs;hall give the de&longs;ired Altitude Altitude B F. And it is thus compoundedex datis. From half of the Square B O known &longs;ub&longs;tract the Square B I al&longs;o known, of the remainder take the Square Root, to which add D B known; and you &longs;hall have the Altitude &longs;ought B F. For example. The Altitude of the Parabola de&longs;cribed at the Elevation of 55 degrees is to be found. The Amplitude, by the follow­ing Table is 9396, its half is 4698, the Square of that is 22071204,this &longs;ub&longs;tracted from the Square of the half B O, which is alwaies the &longs;ame, to wit, 2500000, the remainder is 2928796, who&longs;e Square Root is 1710 very near, this added to the half of B O, to wit, 5000, gives 67101, and &longs;o much is the Altitude B F. It will not be unprofi­table, to give the Third Table, containing the Altitudes and Sublimi­ties of Semiparabola's, who&longs;e Amplitude &longs;hall be alwaies the &longs;ame.

SAGR. This I would very gladly &longs;ee &longs;ince by it I may come to know the Difference of the Impetus's, and of the Forces that are required for carrying the Project to the &longs;ame Di&longs;tance with Ranges which are called at Random: which Difference I believe is very great according to the different Elevations [or Mountures:] &longs;o that if, for example, one would at the Elevation of 3 or 4 degrees, or of 87 or 88 make the Ball to fall where it did, being &longs;hot at the Ele­vation of gr. 45. (where, as hath been &longs;hewn, the lea&longs;t Impetus is required) I believe that it would require a very much greater Force.

SALV. You are in the right: and you will find that to do the full execution in all the Elevations it is requi&longs;ite to make great Pro­gre&longs;&longs;ions towards an infinite Impetus. Now let us &longs;ee the Con&longs;tru­ction of the Table.

Degrees of Elevation.The Amplitudes of the Semipara-bola's, de&longs;cribed with the &longs;ame Impetus.Gr.Gr.451000046999444479976434899454249990241509848405197823952970438539612375495113655939635569272345791363358898932598829316086593061848129628290286380902764788026657660256674312467719123686944226966922170642820716157197258781873559217745300167550001576469414774383137840671279374611803420108130909822756883241978420796851736586139148710443886982893491
Degrees of Elevation.The Altitudes of the Se-miparabola's, who&longs;e Impetus is the &longs;ame.Gr.Gr.1346517321347534632848552345049569857650586861085160387150526207819453637992455465461030255671017365566873124325770331350658719014585597348156706075021676061764917855627796189556379391910606480782011706582142112856683462214026784742315276885972416856987152517867088302619227189402720617290452822047391442923517492403024997593303126537694153228107794933329677895673431287996363532898096983634568197553736218298063837938398513939628498904041328599244143028699514244778799724346548899874448278999984550009010000
A Table containing the Altitudes and Subli-mities of the Semiparabola's, who&longs;e Am-plitudes are the &longs;ame, that is to &longs;ay, of 10000 parts, calculated to each Deg. of Elevation.Gr.Altit.Sublim.Gr.Altit.Sublim.187286533465177482821751424504753634662326295802485553450243497153149575243455437571425059594106652547573516174404876144071652639930068702355875366353765979231565546882363210881283675571413500119722572056741333721210632351857769932471311542170158800231231412462005659833230041113391866360860028871614341740561902027711715291635562940326581816241538963981325471917221452264102512438201820137366510722233121191913024661122022262220201237667117792122232123117786812375202024222611230691302519192523321072270132371819262439102537114521172127254798147215388162428265894047316354152829277290207417437141330288786597518660133931300883367620054124632312480017721657115433324776997823523106234337374137925723972353501714180283568813636336882813156079237376866358235577702383906639583402226133940496174844757252540419659598557150437414246575286715033494245025553879540526243466253628814318117444482851778928649987455000500090Infinite

PROBL. VII. PROP. XIV.

To find the Altitudes and Sublimities of Semipa­rabola's who&longs;e Amplitudes &longs;hall be equal for each degree of Elevation.

This we &longs;hall ea&longs;ily do. For &longs;uppo&longs;ing the Amplitude of the Semi­par abola to be of 10000 parts, the half of the Tangent of each degree of Elevation &longs;hews the Altitude. As for example, of the Semiparabola who&longs;e Elevation is 30 degrees, and Amplitude, as is &longs;uppo&longs;ed, 10000 parts, the Altitude &longs;hall be 2887, for &longs;o much, very near, is the half of the Tangent. And having found the Altitude the Sublimity is to be known in this manner. For a&longs;much as it hath been demon&longs;trated that the half of the Amplitude of a Semiparabola is the Mean proportional betwixt the Altitude and Sublimity, and the Alti­tude being already found, and the half of the Amplitude being alwaies the &longs;ame, to wit, 5000 parts, if we &longs;hall divide the Square thereof by the Altitude found, the de&longs;ired Sublimity &longs;hall come forth. As in the Example: The Altitude found was 2887; The Square of the 5000 parts is 25000000; which being divided by 2887, giveth 8659, ve­ry near, for the Sublimity &longs;ought.

SALV. Now here we &longs;ee, in the &longs;ir&longs;t place, that the Conje­cture is very true which was mentioned afore, that in different Elevations the farther one goeth from the middlemo&longs;t, whether it be in the Higher, or in the Lower, &longs;o much greater Impetus and Vio­lence is required to carry the Project to the &longs;ame Di&longs;tance. For the Impetus lying in the mixture of the two Motions, Equable, Hori­zontal, and Perpendicular Naturally-Accelerate, of which Impetusthe Aggregate of the Altitude and Sublimity is the Mea&longs;ure, we do &longs;ee in the propounded Table that that &longs;ame Aggregate is lea&longs;t in the Elevation of gr. 45, in which the Altitude and Sublimity are equal, &longs;cilicet each 5000, and their Aggregate 10000. But if we &longs;hould look on any greater Elevation, as, for example, of gr. 50, we &longs;hould &longs;ind the Altitude to be 5959, and the Sublimity 4196, which added together make 10155. And &longs;o much al&longs;o we &longs;hould find the Impetus of gr. 40 to be, this and that Elevation being equally re­mote from the middlemo&longs;t. Where we are to note, in the &longs;econd place, that it is true, That equal Impetus's are &longs;ought by two, and two in the Elevations equidi&longs;tant from the middlemo&longs;t, with this pretty variation over and above that the Altitudes and the Subli­mities of the ^{*} &longs;uperiour Elevations an&longs;wer alternally to the Sub­limities and Altitudes of the Inferiour: &longs;o that whereas in the example propo&longs;ed, in the Elevation of gr. 50. the Altitude is 5959 and the Sublimity 4196, in the Elevation of gr. 40. it falls out on the contrary that the Altitude is 4196, and the Sublimity 5959: And the &longs;ame happens in all others without any difference; &longs;ave only that for the avoyding of tediou&longs;ne&longs;s in Calculations we have kept no account of &longs;ome fractions, which in &longs;o great &longs;ums are of no value, but may without any prejudice be omitted.

* i.e. Tho&longs;e above 45 deg.

SAGR. I am ob&longs;erving that of the two Impetus's Horizontal and Perpendicular in Projections, the more Sublime they are, they need &longs;o much the le&longs;s of the Horizontal, and the more of the Perpendi­cular. Moreover in tho&longs;e of &longs;mall Elevation, great mu&longs;t be the Force of the Horizontal Impetus, which is to carry the Project in a little Altitude. But although I comprehend very well that in the Total Elevation of gr. 90, all the force in the world &longs;ufficeth not to drive the Project one &longs;ingle Inch from the Perpendicular, but that it mu&longs;t of nece&longs;&longs;ity fall in the &longs;ame place whence it was expel­led; yet dare I not with the like certainty affirm that likewi&longs;e in the nullity of Elevation, that is in the Horizontal Line, the Project cannot by any Force le&longs;s than infinite, be driven to any di­&longs;tance: So, as that, for example, a Culverin it &longs;elf &longs;hould not be able to carry a Ball of Iron Horizontally, or, as they &longs;ay, at Point blank, that is at no point, which is when it hath no Elevation. I &longs;ay, in this ca&longs;e I &longs;tand in &longs;ome doubt; and that I do not re&longs;olute­ly deny the thing, the rea&longs;on depends on another Accident which &longs;eems no le&longs;s &longs;trange, and yet I have a very nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;trati­on for it. And the Accident is this, the Impo&longs;&longs;ibility of di&longs;tending a Rope, &longs;o, as that it may be &longs;tretched right out, and parallel to the Horizon, but that it alwaies &longs;wayes and bendeth, nor is there any Force that can &longs;tretch it otherwi&longs;e.

SALV. So then, Sagredus, your wonder cea&longs;eth in this ca&longs;e of the Rope becau&longs;e you have the Demon&longs;tration of it. But if we &longs;hall well con&longs;ider the matter, it may be we &longs;hall find &longs;ome corre­&longs;pondence between the Accident of the Project and this of the Rope. The Curvity of the Line of the Horizontal Projection &longs;eem­eth to be derived from two Forces, of which one, (which is that of the Projicient) driveth it Horizontally, and the other, (which is the Gravity of the Project) draweth it downwards Perpendicu­larly. Now &longs;o in the &longs;tretching of the Rope, there are the Forces of tho&longs;e that pull it Horizontally, and there is al&longs;o the weight of the Rope it &longs;elf, which naturally inclineth it downwards. The&longs;e two effects are very much alike in the generation of them. And if you allow the weight of the Rope &longs;o much &longs;trength and power as to be able to oppo&longs;e and overcome any whatever Immen&longs;e Force, that would di&longs;tend it right out, why will you deny the like to the weight of the Bullet? But be&longs;ides, I &longs;hall tell you, and at once procure your wonder, and delight, that the Rope thus tentered, and &longs;tretcht little or much, doth &longs;hape it &longs;elf into Lines that come very near to Para­bolical, and the re&longs;emblance is &longs;o great, that if you draw a Para­bolical Line upon a plain Superficies that is erect unto the Horizon, and holding it rever&longs;ed, that is with the Vertex downwards and with the Ba&longs;e Parallel to the Horizon, you cau&longs;e a Chain to be held pendent, and &longs;u&longs;tained at the extreams of the Ba&longs;e of the De&longs;cribed Parabola, you &longs;hall &longs;ee the &longs;aid Chain, as you &longs;laken it more or le&longs;s, to incurvate and apply it &longs;elf to the &longs;ame Parabola, and this &longs;ame Application &longs;hall be &longs;o much the more exact, when the de&longs;cribed Parabola is le&longs;s curved, that is more di&longs;tended: So that in Parabola's de&longs;cribed with Elevations under gr. 45, the Chain an&longs;wereth the Parabola almo&longs;t to an hair.

SAGR. It &longs;eems then that with &longs;uch a Chain wrought into &longs;mall Links one might in an in&longs;tant trace out many Parabolick Lines up­on a plain Superficies.

SALV. One might, and that al&longs;o with no &longs;mall commodity, as I &longs;hall tell you anon.

SIMP. But before you pa&longs;s any farther, I al&longs;o would gladly be a&longs;certained at lea&longs;t in that Propo&longs;ition of which you &longs;ay there is a very nece&longs;&longs;ary Demon&longs;tration, I mean that of the Impo&longs;&longs;ibility of di&longs;tending a Rope, by any whatever immen&longs;e Force, right out and equidi&longs;tant from the Horizon.

SAGR. I will &longs;ee if I remember the Demon&longs;tration, for under­&longs;tanding of which it is nece&longs;&longs;ary, Simplicius, that you &longs;uppo&longs;e for true, that which in all Mechanick In&longs;truments is confirmed, not on­ly by Experience, but al&longs;o by Demon&longs;tration: and this it is, That the Velocity of the Mover, though its Force be very &longs;mall, may overcome the Re&longs;i&longs;tance, though very great, of a Re&longs;i&longs;ter, which mu&longs;t be moved &longs;lowly when ever the Velocity of the Mover hath greater proportion to the Tardity of the Re&longs;i&longs;ter, than the Re&longs;i­&longs;tance of that which is to be moved hath to the Force of the Mo­ver.

SIMP. This I know very well, and it is demon&longs;trated by Ari­&longs;totle in his Mechanical Que&longs;tions, and is manife&longs;tly &longs;een in the Lea­ver and in the Stiliard, in which the Roman which weigheth not above 4 pounds, will lift up a weight of 400 in ca&longs;e the di&longs;tance of the &longs;aid Roman from the Center on which the Beam turneth be more than an hundred times greater than the di&longs;tance of that point at which the great weight hangeth from the &longs;ame Center: and this cometh to pa&longs;s becau&longs;e in the de&longs;cent which the Roman maketh pa&longs;&longs;eth a Space above an hundred times greater than the Space which the great weight mounteth in the &longs;ame Time: Which is all one as to &longs;ay, that the little Roman moveth with a Velocity above an hundred times greater than the Velocity of the great Weight.

SAGR. You argue very well, and make no &longs;eruple at all of granting, that be the Force of the Mover never &longs;o &longs;mall it &longs;hall &longs;u­perate any what ever great Re&longs;i&longs;tance at all times when that &longs;hall more exceed in Velocity than this doth in Force and Gravity. Now come we to the ca&longs;e of the Rope. And drawing a &longs;mall Scheme be plea&longs;ed to under&longs;tand for once that this Line A B, re&longs;t­ing upon the two fixed and &longs;tanding points A and B, to have hang­ing at its ends, as you &longs;ee, two immen&longs;e Weights C and D, which drawing it with great Force make it to &longs;tand directly di&longs;tended, it being a &longs;imple Line without any gravity. And here I proceed, and tell you, that if at the mid&longs;t of that which is the point E, you &longs;hould hang any never &longs;o little a Weight, as is this H, the Line A B would yield, and inclining towards the point F, and by con&longs;equence lengthening, will con&longs;train the two great Weights C and D to a&longs;cend upwards: which I demon&longs;trate to you in this manner: About the two points A and B as Centers I de&longs;cribe two Quadrants E F G, and E L M, and in regard that the two Semidiameters AI and B L are equal to the two Semidiameters A E and E B, the exce&longs;­&longs;es F I and F L &longs;hall be the quantity of the prolongations of the parts A F and F B, above A E and E B; and of con&longs;equence &longs;hall

determine the A&longs;cents of the Weights C and D, in ca&longs;e that the Weight H had had a power to de&longs;cend to F: which might then be in ca&longs;e the Line E F, which is the quantity of the De&longs;cent of the &longs;aid Weight H, had greater proportion to the Line F I which de­termineth the A&longs;cent of the two Weights C & D, than the pondero­&longs;ity of both tho&longs;e Weights hath to the pondero&longs;ity of the Weight H. But this will nece&longs;&longs;arily happen, be the pondero&longs;ity of the Weights C and D never &longs;o great, and that of H never &longs;o &longs;mall; for the exce&longs;s of the Weights C and D above the Weight His not &longs;o great, but that the exce&longs;s of the Tangent E F above the part of the Secant F I may bear a greater proportion. Which we will prove thus: Let there be a Circle who&longs;e Diameter is G A I; and look what proportion the pondero&longs;ity of the Weights C and D have to the pondero&longs;ity of H, let the Line B O have the &longs;ame proportion to another, which let be C, than which let D be le&longs;&longs;er: So that B O &longs;hall have greater proportion to D, than to C. Unto O B and D take a third proportional B E; and as O E is to E B, &longs;o let the Dia­meter G I (prolonging it) be to I F: and from the Term F draw the Tangent F N. And becau&longs;e it hath been pre&longs;uppo&longs;ed, that as O E is to E B, &longs;o is G I to I F: therefore, by Compo&longs;ition, as O B is to B E, &longs;o is G F to F I: But betwixt O B and B E the Mean­proportional is D; and betwixt G F and F I the Mean-proporti­onal is N F: Therefore N F hath the &longs;ame proportion to F I that O B hath to D: which proportion is greater than that of the Weights C and D to the Weight H. Therefore, the De&longs;cent or Velocity of the Weight H having greater proportion to the A&longs;cent or Velocity of the Weights C and D, than the pondero&longs;ity of the &longs;aid Weights C and D hath to the pondero&longs;ity of the Weight H: It is manife&longs;t, that the Weight H &longs;hall de&longs;cend, that is, that the Line A B &longs;hall depart from Horizontal Rectitude. And that which befalleth the right Line A B deprived of Gravity in ca&longs;e any &longs;mall Weight H cometh to be hanged at the &longs;ame in E, happens al&longs;o to the &longs;aid Rope A B, &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be of ponderous Matter, without the addition of any other Grave Body; for that the Weight of the Matter it &longs;elf compounding the &longs;aid Rope AB is &longs;u&longs;pended thereat.

SIMP. You have fully &longs;atisfied me; therefore Salviatus may ac­cording to his promi&longs;e declare unto us, what the Commodity is that may be drawn from &longs;uch like Chains, and after that relate unto us tho&longs;e Speculations which have been made by our Accademiantouching the Force of Percu&longs;&longs;ion.

SALV. We are for this day &longs;ufficiently employed in the Con­templations already delivered, and the Time, which is pretty late, would not be enough to carry us through the matters you mention; therefore we &longs;hall defer our Conference till &longs;ome more convenient time.

SAGR. I concur with you in opinion, for that by &longs;undry di&longs;­cour&longs;es that I have had with the Friends of our Academick I have learnt that this Argument of the Force of Percu&longs;&longs;ion is very ob­&longs;cure, nor hath hitherto any one that hath treated thereof penetra­ted its intricacies, full of darkne&longs;s, and altogether remote from mans fir&longs;t imaginations: and among&longs;t the Conclu&longs;ions that I have heard of, one runs in my mind that is very extravagant and odde, namely, That the Force of Percu&longs;&longs;ion is Interminate, if not Infi­nite. We will therefore attend the lea&longs;ure of Salviatus. But for the pre&longs;ent, tell me what things are tho&longs;e which are written at the end of the Treati&longs;e of Projects?

SALV. The&longs;e are certain Propo&longs;itions touching the Center of Gravity of Solids, which our Academick found out in his youth, conceiving that what ^{*} Frederico Comandino had writ touching the &longs;ame was not altogether without Imper&longs;ection. He therefore thought that with the&longs;e Propo&longs;itions, which here you &longs;ee written, he might &longs;upply that which is wanting in the Book of Comandine; and he applyed him&longs;elf to the &longs;ame at the In&longs;tance of the mo&longs;t Illu&longs;trious Lord Marque&longs;s Guid' Vbaldo dal Monte, the mo&longs;t ex­cellent Mathematician of his Time, as his &longs;everal Printed Works do &longs;peak him; and gave a Copy thereof to that Noble Lord with thoughts to have pur&longs;ued the &longs;ame Argument in other Solids not mentioned by Comandine: But he chanced after &longs;ome Time to meet with the ^{*} Book of Signore Luca Valerio, a mo&longs;t famous Geometrician, and &longs;aw that he re&longs;olveth all the&longs;e matters with­out omi&longs;&longs;ion of any thing, he proceeded no farther, although his Agre&longs;&longs;ions were by methods very different from the&longs;e of Signore Valerio.

* Fredericus Co­mandinus.

* De.

SAGR. It would be a favour, therefore, if, for this time, which interpo&longs;eth between this and our next Meeting, you would plea&longs;e to leave the Book in my hands: for I &longs;hall all the while be read­ing and &longs;tudying the Propo&longs;itions that are con&longs;equently therein writ.

SALV. I &longs;hall very willingly obey your Command; and hope that you will take plea&longs;ure in the&longs;e Propo&longs;itions.

AN APPENDIX, In which is contained certain THE OREMS and their DEMONSTRATIONS: Formerly written by the &longs;ame Author, touching the CENTER of GRAVITY, of SOLIDS.

POSTVLATVM.

We pre&longs;uppo&longs;e equall Weights to be alike di&longs;po­&longs;ed in &longs;ever all Ballances, if the Center of Gra­vity of &longs;ome of tho&longs;e Compounds &longs;hall divide the Ballance according to &longs;ome proportion, and the Ballance &longs;hall al&longs;o divide their Center of Gravity according to the &longs;ame proportion.

LEMMA.

Let the line A B be cut in two equall parts in C, who&longs;e half A C let be divided in E, &longs;o that as B E is to E A, &longs;o may A E be to E C. I &longs;ay that B E is double

to E A. For as B E is to E A, &longs;o is E A to E C: there­fore by Compo&longs;ition and by Permutation of Proportion, as B A is to A C, &longs;o is A E to E C: But as A E is to E C, that is, B A to A C, &longs;o is B E to E A: Wherefore B E is double to E A.

This &longs;uppo&longs;ed, we will Demon&longs;trate, That,

PROPOSITION.

If certain Magnitudes at any Rate equally exceed­ing one another, and who&longs;e exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t of them, be &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed in the Balance, as that they hang at equal di&longs;tances, to divide the Center of Gravity of the whole Balance &longs;o, that the part towards the le&longs;&longs;er Magnitudes be double to the remainder.

In the ^{*} Ballance A B, therefore, let there be &longs;u&longs;pended at equal di-&longs;tances any number of Magnitudes, as hath been &longs;aid, F, G, H, K, N; of which let the lea&longs;t be N, and let the points of the Su&longs;pen&longs;ions be A, C, D, E, B, and let the Center of Gravity of all the Magnitudes &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed be X. It is to be proved that the part of the Ballance B X towards the le&longs;&longs;er Magnitudes is double to the remaining part X A.

* Or Beam.

Let the Ballance be divided in two equal parts in D, for it mu&longs;t ei­ther fall in &longs;ome point of the Su&longs;pen&longs;ions, or el&longs;e in the middle point be­tween two of the points of the Su&longs;pen&longs;ions: and let the remaining di­&longs;tances of the Su&longs;pen&longs;ions which fall between A and D, be all divided into halves by the Points M and I; and let all the Magnitudes be divi-

ded into parts equal to N: Now the parts of F &longs;hall be &longs;o many in num­ber, as tho&longs;e Magnitudes be which are &longs;u&longs;pended at the Ballance, and the parts of G one fewer, and &longs;o of the re&longs;t. Let the parts of F therefore be N, O, R, S, T, and let tho&longs;e of G be N, O, R, S, tho&longs;e of H al&longs;o N, O, R, then let tho&longs;e of K be N, O: and all the Magnitudes in which are N &longs;hall be equal to F; and all the Magnitudes in which are O &longs;hall be equal to G; and all the Magnitudes in which are R &longs;hall be equal to H; and tho&longs;e in which S &longs;hall be equal to K; and the Magnitude T is equal to N. Becau&longs;e therefore all the Magnitudes in which are N are equal to one another, they &longs;hall equiponderate in the point D, which divideth the Ballance into two equal parts; and for the &longs;ame cau&longs;e all the Magnitudes in which are O do equiponderate in I; and tho&longs;e in which are R in C; and in which are S in M do equi­ponderate; and T is &longs;u&longs;pended in A. Therefore in the Ballance A D at the equal di&longs;tances D, I, C, M, A, there are Magnitudes &longs;u&longs;pended ex­ceeding one another equally, and who&longs;e exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t: and the greate&longs;t, which is compounded of all the N N hangeth at D, thelea&longs;t which is T hangeth at A; and the re&longs;t are ordinately di&longs;po&longs;ed. And again there is another Ballance A B in which other Magnitudes equal in number and Magnitude to the former are di&longs;po&longs;ed in the &longs;ame order. Wherefore the Ballances A B and A D are divided by the Cen­ter of all the Magnitudes according to the &longs;ame proportion: But the Center of Gravity of the afore&longs;aid Magnitudes is X: Wherefore X divideth the Ballances B A and A D according to the &longs;ame proportion; &longs;o that as B X is to X A, &longs;o is X A to X D: Wherefore B X is double to X A, by the Lemma aforegoing: Which was to be proved.

PROPOSITION.

If in a Parabolical Conoid Figure be de&longs;cribed, and another circum&longs;cribed by Cylinders of equal Altitude; and the Axis of the &longs;aid Co­noid be divided in &longs;uch proportion that the part towards the Vertex be double to that to­wards the Ba&longs;e; the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Figure of the Ba&longs;e portion &longs;hall be neare&longs;t to the &longs;aid point of divi&longs;ion; and the Center of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed from the Ba&longs;e of the Conoid &longs;hall be more remote: and the di&longs;tance of either of tho&longs;e Centers from that &longs;ame point &longs;hall be equal to the Line that is the &longs;ixth part of the Altitude of one of the Cylinders of which the Figures are com­po&longs;ed.

Take therefore a Parabolical Conoid, and the Figures that have been mentioned: let one of them be in&longs;cribed, the other circum­&longs;cribed; and let the Axis of the Conoid, which let be A E, be di­vided in N, in &longs;uch proportion as that A N be double to N E. It is to be proved that the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Figure is in the Line N E, but the Center of the circum&longs;cribed in the Line A N. Let the Plane of the Figures &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed be cut through the Axis, and let the Section be that of the Parabola B A C: and let the Section of the cutting Plane, and of the Ba&longs;e of the Conoid be the Line B C; and let the Sections of the Cylinders be the Rectangular Figures; as ap­peareth in the de&longs;cription. Fir&longs;t, therefore, the Cylinder of the in&longs;cri­bed who&longs;e Axis is D E, hath the &longs;ame proportion to the Cylinder who&longs;e Axis is D Y, as the Quadrate I D hath to the Quadrate S Y; that is, as D A hath to A Y: and the Cylinder who&longs;e Axis is D Y is potentia to the Cylinder Y Z as S Y to R Z, that is, as Y A to A Z: and, by the &longs;ame rea&longs;on, the Cylinder who&longs;e Axis is Z Y is to that who&longs;e Axis is Z V, as Z A is to A V. The &longs;aid Cylinders, therefore, are to one ano­ther as the Lines D A, A Y; Z A, A V: But the&longs;e are equally exceed­ing to one another, and the exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t, &longs;o that A Z is double to A V; and A Y is triple the

&longs;ame; and D A Quadruple. Tho&longs;e Cylinders, therefore, are certain Mag­nitudes in order equally exceeding one another, who&longs;e exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t of them, and is the Line X M, in which they are &longs;u&longs;pended at equal di&longs;tances (for that each of the Cy­linders hath its Center of Gravity in the mia&longs;t of the Axis.) Wherefore, by what hath been above demon&longs;tra­ted, the Center of Gravity of the Mag­nitude compounded of them all divi­deth the Line X M &longs;o, that the part towards X is double to the re&longs;t. Divide it, therefore, and, let X a be double a M: therefore is a the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Fi­gure. Divide A V in two equal parts in e: e X &longs;hall be double to M E: But X a is double to a M: Wherefore e E &longs;hall be triple E a. Buta E is triple E N: It is manife&longs;t, therefore, that E N is greater than E X; and for that cau&longs;e a, which is the Center of Gravity of the in­&longs;cribed Figure, cometh nearer to the Ba&longs;e of the Conoid than N. And becau&longs;e that as A E is to E N, &longs;o is the part taken away e E to the part taken away E a: and the remaining part &longs;hall be to the remaming part, that is, A e to N a, as A E to E N. Therefore a N is the third part of A e, and the &longs;ixt part of A V. And in the &longs;ame manner the Cylinders of the circum&longs;cribed Figure may be demon&longs;trated to be equally exceeding one another, and the exce&longs;s to me equal to the least; and that they have their Centers of Gravity at equal di&longs;tances in the Line e M. If thereforee M be divided in p, &longs;o as that e p be double to the remaining part p M;p &longs;hall be the Center of Gravity of the whole circum&longs;cribed Magnitude. And &longs;ince e p is double to p M; and A e le&longs;s than double EM: (for that they are equal:) the whole A E &longs;hall be le&longs;s than triple E p: Where­fore E p &longs;hall be greater than E N. And, &longs;ince e M is triple to M p,and M E with twice e A is likewi&longs;e triple to M E: the whole A E with A e &longs;hall be triple to E p: But A E is triple to E N: Wherefore the remaining part A e &longs;hall be triple to the remaining part p N. Therefore N p is the &longs;ixth part of A V. And the&longs;e are the things that were to be demon&longs;trated.

COROLLARY.

Hence it is manife&longs;t, that a Conoid may be in&longs;cribed in a Para­bolical Figure, and another circum&longs;cribed, &longs;o, as that the Centers of their Gravities may be di&longs;tant from the point N le&longs;s than any Line given.

For if we a&longs;&longs;ume a Line &longs;excuple of the propo&longs;ed Line, and make the Axis of the Cylinders, of which the Figures are compounded given le&longs;&longs;er than this a&longs;&longs;umed Line, there &longs;hall fall Lines between the Centers of Gravities of the&longs;e Figures and the mark N that are le&longs;s than the Line propo&longs;ed.

The former Propo&longs;ition another way.

Let the Axis of the Conoid (which let be C D) be divided in O, &longs;o, as that C O be double to O D. It is to be proved that the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Figure is in the Line O D; and the Center of the circum&longs;cribed in C O. Let the Plane of the Fi­gures be cut through the Axis and C, as hath been &longs;aid. Becau&longs;e there­fore the Cylinders S N, T M, V I,

X E are to one another as the Squares of the Lines S D, T N, V M, X I; and the&longs;e are to one another as the Lines N C, C M, C I, C E: but the&longs;e do exceed one another equally; and the exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t, to wit, C E: And the Cylinder T M is equal to the Cylinder Q N; and the Cylinder V I equal to P N; and X E is equal to L N: Therefore the Cylin­ders S N, Q N, P N, and L N do equally exceed one another, and the exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t of them, namely, to the Cylinder L N. But the exce&longs;s of the Cylinder S N, above the Cylinder Q N is a Ring who&longs;e height is Q T; that is, N D; and its breadth S que And the exce&longs;s of the Cylinder Q N above P N, is a Ring, who&longs;e breadth is Q P. And the exce&longs;s of the Cylinder P N above L N is a Ring, who&longs;e breadth is P L. Wherefore the &longs;aid Rings S Q, Q P, P L, are equal to another, and to the Cylinder L N. Therefore the Ring S T equalleth the Cylinder X E: the Ring Q V, which is double to S T, equalleth the Cylinder V I; which likewi&longs;e is double to theCylinder X E: and for the &longs;ame cau&longs;e the Ring P X is equal to the Cylinder T M; and the Cylinder L E &longs;hall be equal to the Cylinder S N. In the Beam or Ballance, therefore, K F connecting the middle points of the Right-lines E I and D N, and cut into equal parts in the points H and G, are certain Magnitudes &longs;u&longs;pended, to wit the Cylinders S N, T M, V I, X E; and the Center of Gravity of the fir&longs;t Cylinder is K; and of the &longs;econd H; of the third G; of the fourth F. And we have another Ballance M K, which is the half of the &longs;aid F K, and a like number of points di&longs;tributed into equal parts, to wit, M H, H N, N K, and on it other Magnitudes, equal in number and bigne&longs;s to tho&longs;e which are on the Beam F K, and having the Centers of Gravity in the points M, H, N, and K, and di&longs;po&longs;ed in the &longs;ame order. For the Cylinder L E hath its Center of Gravity in M; and is equal to the Cylinder S N that hath its Center in K: And the Ring P X hath the Center H; and is equal to the Cylinder T M, who&longs;e Center is H: And the Ring Q V ha­ving the Center N is equal to the V I who&longs;e Center is G: And la&longs;tly, the Ring S T having the Center K, is equal to the Cylinder X E who&longs;e Center is F. Therefore the Center of Gravity of the &longs;aid Magnitudes divideth the Beam in the &longs;ame proportion: But the Center of them is one, and therefore &longs;ome point common to both the Beams or Ballance, which let be Y. Therefore F Y and Y K &longs;hall be as K Y and Y M. F Y therefore is double to Y K: and C E being divided into two equal parts in Z, Z F, &longs;hall be double to K D: and for that cau&longs;e Z D triple to D Y: But to the Right Line D O C D is triple: Therefore the Right Line D O is greater than D Y: And for the like cau&longs;e Y the Center of the in&longs;cribed Figure approacheth nearer the Ba&longs;e than the point O. And becau&longs;e as C D is to D O, &longs;o is the part taken away Z D to the part ta­ken away D Y; the remaining part C Z &longs;hall be to the remaining part Y O, as C D is to D O; that is Y O &longs;hall be the third part of C Z; that is, the &longs;ixth part of C E. Again we will, by the &longs;ame rea&longs;on, de­mon&longs;trate the Cylinders of the circum&longs;cribed Figure to exceed one ano­ther equally, and that the exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t, and that their Centers of Gravity are con&longs;tituted in equal di&longs;tances upon the Beam K Z: and likewi&longs;e that the Rings equal to tho&longs;e &longs;ame Cylinders are in like manner di&longs;po&longs;ed on another Beam K G, the half of the &longs;aid K Z, and that therefore the Center of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed Figure, which let be R, &longs;o divideth the Beam, as that Z R is to R K, as K R is to R G. Therefore Z R &longs;hall be double to R K: But C Z is equal to the Right Line K D, and not double to it. The whole C D &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;er than triple to D R: Wherefore the Right Line D R is greater than D O; that is to &longs;ay, the Center of the circum&longs;cribed Figure recedeth from the Ba&longs;e more than the point O. And becau&longs;e Z K is triple to K R; and K D with twice Z C is triple to K D; the whole C D with C Z &longs;hall be triple to D R: But C D is triple to D O: Wherefore the remaining part C Z &longs;hall be triple to the remaining part R O; that is, O Ris the &longs;ixth part of E C: Which was the Propo&longs;ition.

This being pre-demon&longs;trated, we will prove that

PROPOSITION.

The Center of Gravity of the Parabolick Conoid doth &longs;o divide the Axis, as that the part towards the Vertex is double to the re­maining part towards the Ba&longs;e.

Let there be a Parabolick Conoid who&longs;e Axis let be A B divided in N &longs;o as that A N be double to N B. It is to be proved that the Cen­ter of Gravity of the Conoid is the point N. For if it be not N, it &longs;hall be either above or below it. Fir&longs;t let it be below; and let it be X: And &longs;et off upon &longs;ome place by it &longs;elf the Line L O equal to N X; and let L O be divided at plea&longs;ure in S: and look what proportion B X and O S both together have to O S, and the &longs;ame &longs;hall the Conoid have to the Solid R. And in the Conoid let Figures be de&longs;cribed by Cylinders having equal Altitudes, &longs;o, as that that which lyeth between the Center of Gravity and the point N be le&longs;s than L S: and let the exce&longs;s of the Conoid above it be le&longs;s than the Solid R: and that this may be done is clear. Take therefore the in&longs;cribed, who&longs;e Center of Gravity let be I: now I X &longs;hall be greater than S O: And becau&longs;e that as X B with S O is to S O, &longs;o is the Conoid to the Solid R: (and R is greater than the exce&longs;s by which the Conoid exceeds the in&longs;cribed Figure:) the proporti­on of the Conoid to the &longs;aid exce&longs;s &longs;hall be greater than both B X and O S unto S O: And, by Divi&longs;ion, the in&longs;cribed Figure &longs;hall have grea­ter proportion to the &longs;aid exce&longs;s than B X to S O: But B X hath to X I a proportion yet le&longs;s than to S O: Therefore the in&longs;cribed Figure &longs;hall have much greater proportion to the re&longs;t of the proportions than B X to X I: Therefore what proportion the in&longs;cribed Figure hath to there&longs;t of the portions, the &longs;ame &longs;hall a certain other Line have to X I: which &longs;hall nece&longs;&longs;arily be greater than B X: Let it, therefore, be M X. We have therefore the Center of Gravity of the Conoid X: But the Center of Gravity of the Figure in&longs;cribed in it is I: of the re&longs;t of the portions by which the Conoid exceeds the in&longs;cribed Figure the Center of Gravity &longs;hall be in the Line X M, and in it that point in which it &longs;hall be &longs;o terminated, that look what proportion the in&longs;cribed Figure hath to the exce&longs;s by which the Conoid exceeds it, the &longs;ame it &longs;hall have to X I: But it hath been proved, that this proportion is that which M X hath to X I: Therefore M &longs;hall be the Center of Gravity of tho&longs;e pro­portions by which the Conoid exceeds the in&longs;cribed Figure: Which certainly cannot be. For if along by M a Plane be drawn equidi&longs;tant to the Ba&longs;e of the Conoid, all tho&longs;e proportions &longs;hall be towards one andthe &longs;ame part, and not by it divided. Therefore the Center of Gravity of the &longs;aid Conoid is not below the point N: Neither is it above. For, if it may, let it be H: and again, as before, &longs;et the Line L O by it &longs;elf equalto the &longs;aid H N, and divided at plea&longs;ure in S: and the &longs;ame pro­portion that B N and S O both together have to S L, let the Conoid have to R: and about the Conoid let a Figure be circum&longs;cribed con&longs;i­&longs;ting of Cylinders, as hath been &longs;aid: by which let it be exceeded a le&longs;s quantity than that of the Solid R: and let the Line betwixt the Center of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed Figure and the point N be le&longs;&longs;er than S O: the remainder V H &longs;hall be greater than S L. And becau&longs;e that as both B N and O S is to SL, &longs;o is the

Conoid to R: (and R is greater than the exce&longs;s by which the circum­&longs;cribed Figure exceeds the Conoid:) Therefore B N and S O hath le&longs;s pro­portion to S L than the Conoid to the &longs;aid exce&longs;s. And B V is le&longs;&longs;er than both B N and S O; and V H is grea­ter than S L: much greater proporti­on, therefore, hath the Conoid to the &longs;aid proportions, than B V hath to V H. Therefore whatever proporti­on the Conoid hath to the &longs;aid pro­portions, the &longs;ame &longs;hall a Line greater than B V have to V H. Let the &longs;ame be M V: And becau&longs;e the Center of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed Figure is V, and the Center of the Conoid is H. and &longs;ince that as the Conoid to the re&longs;t of the proportions, &longs;ois M V to V H, M &longs;hall be the Center of Gravity of the remaining proportions: which likewi&longs;e is impo&longs;&longs;ible: Therefore the Center of Gravity of the Conoid is not above the point N: But it hath been de­mon&longs;trated that neither is it beneath: It remains, therefore, that it ne­ce&longs;&longs;arily be in the point N it &longs;elf. And the &longs;ame might be demon&longs;trated of Conoidal Plane cut upon an Axis not erect. The &longs;ame in other terms, as appears by what followeth:

PROPOSITION.

The Center of Gravity of the Parabolick Co­noid falleth betwixt the Center of the cir­cum&longs;cribed Figure and the Center of the in­&longs;cribed.

Let there be a Conoid who&longs;e Axis is A B, and the Center of the circum&longs;cribed Figure C, and the Center of the in&longs;cribed O. I &longs;ay the Center of the Conoid is betwixt the points C and O. For if not, it &longs;hall be either above them, or below them, or in one of them. Let it be below, as in R. And becau&longs;e R is the Center of Gravity of the whole Conoid; and the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Figure is O: Therefore of the remaining proportions by which the Conoid exceeds the in&longs;cribed Figure the Center of Gravity &longs;hall be in the Line O R ex­tended towards R, and in that point in which it is &longs;o determined, that, what proportion the &longs;aid proportions have to the in&longs;cribed Figure, the &longs;ame &longs;hall O R have to the Line falling betwixt R and that falling point. Let this proportion be that of O R to R X. Therefore X falleth either without the Conoid or within, or in its

Ba&longs;e. That it falleth without, or in its Ba&longs;e it is already manife&longs;t to be an ab&longs;ur­dity. Let it fall within: and becau&longs;e X R is to R O, as the in&longs;cribed Figure is to the exce&longs;s by which the Conoid exceeds it; the &longs;ame proportion that B R hath to R O, the &longs;ame let the in&longs;cribed Figure have to the Solid K: Which nece&longs;&longs;arily &longs;hall be le&longs;&longs;er than the &longs;aid exce&longs;s. And let another Figure be in&longs;cribed which may be exceeded by the Conoid a le&longs;s quantity than is K, who&longs;e Center of Gravity falleth betwixt O and C. Let it be V. And, becau&longs;e the fir&longs;t Figure is to K as B R to R O, and the &longs;e­cond Figure, who&longs;e Center V is greater than the fir&longs;t, and exceeded by the Conoid a le&longs;s quantity than is K; what proportion the &longs;econd Figure hath to the exce&longs;s by which the Conoid exceeds it, the &longs;ame &longs;hall a Line greater than B R have to R V. But R is the Center of Gra­vity of the Conoid; and the Center of the &longs;econd in&longs;cribed Figure V: The Center therefore of the remaining proportions &longs;hall be without the Conoid beneath B: Which is impo&longs;&longs;ible. And by the &longs;ame means we might demon&longs;trate the Center of Gravity of the &longs;aid Conoid not to be in the Line C A. And that it is none of the points betwixt C and O is manife&longs;t. For &longs;ay, that there other Figures de&longs;cribed, greater &longs;omething than the in&longs;cribed Figure who&longs;e Center is O, and le&longs;s than that circum&longs;cribed Figure who&longs;e Center is C, the Center of the Conoid would fall without the Center of the&longs;e Figures: Which but now was concluded to be impo&longs;&longs;ible: It re&longs;ts therefore that it be betwixt the Cen­ter of the circum&longs;cribed and in&longs;cribed Figure. And if &longs;o, it &longs;hall ne­ce&longs;&longs;arily be in that point which divideth the Axis, &longs;o as that the part towards the Vertex is double to the remainder; &longs;ince N may circum­&longs;cribe and in&longs;cribe Figures, &longs;o, that tho&longs;e Lines which fall betweentheir Centers and the &longs;aid points, may be le&longs;&longs;er than any other Lines. To expre&longs;s the &longs;ame in other terms, we have reduced it to an impo&longs;&longs;ibi­lity, that the Center of the Conoid &longs;hould not fall betwixt the Centers of the in&longs;cribed and circum&longs;cribed Figures.

PROPOSITION.

Suppo&longs;ing three proportional Lines, and that what proportion the lea&longs;t hath to the exce&longs;s by which the greate&longs;t exceeds the lea&longs;t, the &longs;ame &longs;hould a Line given have to two thirds of the exce&longs;s by which the greate&longs;t exceeds the middlemo&longs;t: and moreover, that what pro­portion that compounded of the greate&longs;t, and of double the middlemo&longs;t, hath unto that com­pounded of the triple of the greate&longs;t and mid­dlemo&longs;t, the &longs;ame hath another Line given, to the exce&longs;s by which the greate&longs;t exceeds the middle one; both the given Lines taken toge­ther &longs;hall be a third part of the greate&longs;t of the proportional Lines.

Let A B, B C, and B F, be three proportional Lines; and what proportion B F hath to F A, the &longs;ame let M S have to two thirds of C A. And what proportion that compounded of A B and the double of B C hath to that compounded of the triple of both A B and B C, the &longs;ame let another, to wit S N, have to A C. Becau&longs;e therefore that A B, B C, and C F,

are proportionals, A G and C F &longs;hall, for the &longs;ame rea&longs;on, be likewi&longs;e &longs;o. Therefore, as A B is to B C, &longs;o is A C to C F: and as the triple of A B is to the triple of B C, &longs;o is A C to C F: Therefore, what proportion the triple of A B with the triple of B C hath to the triple of C B, the &longs;ame &longs;hall A C have to a Line le&longs;s than C F. Let it be C O. Wherefore by Compo&longs;ition and by Conver&longs;ion of proportion, O A &longs;hall have to A C, the &longs;ame proportion, as triple A B with Sextuple B C, hath to triple A B with triple B C. But A C hath to S N the &longs;ame proportion, that triple A B with triple B C hath to A B with double B C: Therefore, ex equali, O A to NS &longs;hall have the &longs;ame proportion, as triple A B with Sexcuple B C hath to A B withdouble B C: But triple A B with &longs;excuple B C, are triple to A B with double B C. Therefore A O is triple to S N.

Again, becau&longs;e O C is to C A as triple C B is to triple A B with tri­ple C B: and becau&longs;e as C A is to A F, &longs;o is triple A B to triple B C: Therefore, ex equali, by perturbed proportion, as O C is to C F, &longs;o &longs;hall triple A B be to triple A B with treble B C: And, by Conver&longs;ion of proportion, as O F is to F C, &longs;o is triple B C to triple A B with triple B C: And as C F is to F B, &longs;o is A C to C B, and triple A C to triple C B: Therefore, ex equali, by Perturbation of proportion, as O F is to F B, &longs;o is triple A C to the triple of both A B and A C together. And becau&longs;e F C and C A are in the &longs;ame proportion as C B and B A; it &longs;hall be that as F C is to C A, &longs;o &longs;hall B C be to B A. And, by Com­po&longs;ition, as F A is to A C, &longs;o are both B A and B C to B A: and &longs;o the triple to the triple: Therefore as F A is to A C, &longs;o the compound of tri­ple B A and triple B C is to triple A B. Wherefore, as F A is to two thirds of A C, &longs;o is the compound of triple B A and triple B C to two thirds of triple B A; that is, to double B A: But as F A is to two thirds of A C, &longs;o is F B to M S: Therefore, as F B is to M S, &longs;o is the compound of triple B A and triple B C to double B A: But as O B is to F B, &longs;o was Sexcuple A B to triple of both A B and B C: Therefore, ex equa­li, O B &longs;hall have to M S the &longs;ame proportion as Sexcuple A B hath to double B A. Wherefore M S &longs;hall be the third part of O B: And it hath been demon&longs;trated, that S N is the third part of A O: It is mani­fe&longs;t therefore, that MN is a third part likewi&longs;e of A B: And this is that which was to be demon&longs;trated.

PROPOSITION.

Of any Fru&longs;tum or Segment cut off from a Para­bolick Conoid the Center of Gravity is in the Right Line that is Axis of the Fru&longs;tum; which being divided into three equal parts the Cen­ter of Gravity is in the middlemo&longs;t and &longs;o di­vides it, as that the part towards the le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;e hath to the part towards the greater Ba&longs;e, the &longs;ame proportion that the greater Ba&longs;e hath to the le&longs;&longs;er.

From the Conoid who&longs;e Axis is R B let there be cut off the Solid who&longs;e Axis is B E; and let the cutting Plane be equidi&longs;taut to the Ba&longs;e: and let it be cut in another Plane along the Axis erect upon the Ba&longs;e, and let it be the Section of the Parabola V R C: R B &longs;hall be the Diameter of the proportion, or the equidi&longs;tant DiameterL M, V C: they &longs;hall be ordinately applyed. Divide therefore E B in­to three equal parts, of which let the middlemo&longs;t be Q Y: and divide this &longs;o in the point I that Q I may have the &longs;ame proportion to I Y, as the Ba&longs;e who&longs;e Diameter is V C hath to the Ba&longs;e who&longs;e Diameter is L M; that is, that the Square V C hath to Square L M. It is to be de­mon&longs;trated that I is the Center of Gravity of the Fru&longs;trum L M C. Draw the Line N S, by the by, equall to B R: and let S X be equal to E R: and unto N S and S X a&longs;&longs;ume a third proportional S G: and as N G is to G S, &longs;o let B Q be to I O. And it nothing matters whether the point O fall above or below L M. And becau&longs;e in the Section V R C the Lines L M and V C are ordinately

applyed, it &longs;hall be that as the Square V C is to the Square L M, &longs;o is the Line B R to R E: And as the Square V C is to the Square L M, &longs;o is Q I to I Y: and as B R is to R E, &longs;o is N S to S X: There­fore Q I is to I Y, as R S is to S X. Where­fore as G Y is to Y I, &longs;o &longs;hall both N S and S X be to S X: and as E B is to Y I, &longs;o &longs;hall the compound of triple N S and tri­ple S X be to S X: But as E B is to B Y, &longs;o is the compound of triple N S and S X both together to the compound of N S and S X: Therefore, as E B is to B I, &longs;o is the compound of triple N S and triple S X to the compound of N S and double S X. Therefore N S, S X, and S G are three proporti­onal Lines: And as S G is to G N, &longs;o is the a&longs;&longs;umed O I to two thirds of E B; that is, to N X: And as the compound of N S and double S X is to the compound of triple N S and triple S X, &longs;o is another a&longs;&longs;u­med Line I B to B E; that is, to N X. By what therefore hath been above demon&longs;trated, tho&longs;e Lines taken together are a third part of N S; that is, of R B: Therefore R B is triple to B O: Wherefore O &longs;hall be the Center of Gravity of the Conoid v R C. And let it be the Cen­ter of Gravity of the Fru&longs;trum L R M of the Conoid: Therefore the Center of Gravity of V L M C is in the Line O B, and in that point which &longs;o terminates it, that as V L M C of the Fru&longs;trum is to the proportion L R M, &longs;o is the Line A O to that which intervenes betwixt O and the &longs;aid point. And becau&longs;e R O is two thirds of R B; and R A two thirds of R E; the remaining part A O &longs;hall be two thirds of the remaining part E B. And becau&longs;e that as the Fru&longs;tum V L M C is to the proportion L R M, &longs;o is N G to G S: and as N G to G S, &longs;o is two thirds of E B to O I: and two thirds of E B is equal to the Line A O: it &longs;hall be that as the Fru&longs;tum V L M O is to the proportion L R M, &longs;o is A O to O I. It is manife&longs;t therefore that of the Fru&longs;tum V L M C the Center of Gravity is the point I, and &longs;o divideth the Axis, [as?] that the part towards the le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;e is to the part towards the grea-ter, as the double of the greater Ba&longs;e together with the Le&longs;&longs;er is to the double of the le&longs;&longs;er together with the greater. Which is the Propo&longs;ition more elegantly expre&longs;&longs;ed.

PROPOSITION.

If any number of Magnitudes &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed to one another, as that the &longs;econd addeth unto the fir&longs;t the double of the fir&longs;t, the third addeth unto the &longs;econd the triple of the fir&longs;t, the fourth addeth unto the third the quadruple of the fir&longs;t, and &longs;o every one of the following ones addeth unto the next unto it the magnitude of the fir&longs;t multiplyed according to the number which it &longs;hall hold in order; if, I &longs;ay, the&longs;e Magnitudes be &longs;u&longs;pended ordinarily on the Ballance at equal di&longs;tances; the Center of the Equilibrium of all the compounding Magni­tudes &longs;hall &longs;o divide the Beam, as that the part towards the le&longs;&longs;er Magnitudes is triple to the remainder.

Let the Beam be L T, and let &longs;uch Magnitudes as were &longs;poken of hang upon it; and let them be A, F, G, H, K; of which A is in the fir&longs;t place &longs;u&longs;pended at T. I &longs;ay, that the Center of the Equi­librium &longs;o cuts the Beam T L as that the part towards T is triple to the re&longs;t. Let T L be triple to L I; and S L triple to L P: and Q L to L N,

and L P to L O: I P, P N, N O, and O L &longs;hall be equal. And in F let a Magnitude be placed double to A; in G another trebble to the &longs;ame; in H ano­ther Quadruple; and &longs;o of the re&longs;t: and let tho&longs;e Magnitudes be taken in which there is A; and let the &longs;ame be done in the Magni­tudes F, G, H, K. And becau&longs;e in F the remaining Magnitude, to wit B, is equal to A; take itdouble in G, triple in H, &c. and let tho&longs;e Magnitudes be taken in which there is B: and in the &longs;ame manner let tho&longs;e be taken in which is C, D, and E: now all tho&longs;e in which there is A &longs;hall be equal to K: and the compound of all the B B &longs;hall equal H; and the compound of C C &longs;hall equal G; and the compound of all the D D &longs;hall equal F; and E &longs;hall equal A. And becau&longs;e T I is double to I L, I &longs;hall be the point of the Equilibrium of the Magnitudes compo&longs;ed of all the A A: and likewi&longs;e &longs;ince S P is double to P L, P &longs;hall be the point of the Equilibri­um of the compost of B B: and for the &longs;ame cau&longs;e N &longs;hall be the point of the Equilibrium of the compo&longs;t of C C: and O of the compound of D D: and L that of E. Therefore T L is a Beam on which at equal di&longs;tances certain Magnitudes K, H, G, F, A do hang. And again L I is another Ballance, on which, at di&longs;tances in like manner equal, do hang &longs;uch a number of Magnitudes, and in the &longs;ame order equal to the former. For the compound of all the A A, which hang on I, is equal to K hanging at L; and the compo&longs;t of all B B, which is &longs;u&longs;pended at P, is equal to H hanging at P; and likewi&longs;e the compound of C C, which hangeth at N do equal G; and the compo&longs;t of D, which hang on O, are equal to F; and E, hanging on L, is equal to A. Wherefore the Ballances are divided in the &longs;ame proportion by the Center of the com­pounds of the Magnitudes And the Center of the compound of, the &longs;aid Magnitudes is one. Therefore the common point of the Right Line T L, and of the Right Line L I &longs;hall be the Center, which let be X. Therefore as T X is to X L, &longs;o &longs;hall L X be to X I; and the whole T L to the whole L I. But T L is triple to L I: Wherefore T X &longs;hall al&longs;o be triple to X L.

PROPOSITION.

If any number of Magnitudes be &longs;o taken, that the &longs;econd addeth unto the fir&longs;t the triple of the fir&longs;t, and the third addeth unto the &longs;econd the quintuple of the fir&longs;t, and the fourth addeth unto the third the &longs;eptuple of the fir&longs;t, and &longs;o the re&longs;t, every one encrea&longs;ing above the next to it, and proceedeth &longs;till to a new multiplex of the fir&longs;t Magnitude according to the con&longs;e­quent odd numbers, like as the Squares of Lines equally exceeding one another do pro­ceed, whereof the exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t, and if they be &longs;u&longs;pended on a Ballance at equal Di&longs;tances, the Center of Equilibrium of all the compound Magnitudes &longs;o divideth the Beam that the part towards the le&longs;&longs;er Magnitudes is more than triple the remaining part; and al&longs;o one may take a di&longs;tance that is to the &longs;ame le&longs;s than triple.

In the Ballance B E let there be Magnitudes, &longs;uch as were &longs;poken off, from which let there be other Magnitudes taken away that were to one another as they were di&longs;po&longs;ed in the precedent, and let it be of the compound of all the A A: the re&longs;t

in which are C &longs;hall be di&longs;tributed in the &longs;ame order, but the greate&longs;t de­ficient. Let E D be triple to D B; and G F triple to F B. D &longs;hall be the Center of the Equilibrium of the compound con­&longs;i&longs;ting of all the A A; and F that of the compound of all the C C. Wherefore the Center of the com­pound of both A A and C C falleth be­tween D and F. Let it be O. It is there­fore manife&longs;t that E O is more than triple to O B; but G O le&longs;s thantriple to the &longs;ame O B: Which was to be demon&longs;trated.

PROPOSITION.

If to any Cone or portion of a Cone a Eigure con­&longs;i&longs;ting of Cylinders of equal heights be in&longs;cri­bed and another circum&longs;cribed; and if its Axis be &longs;o divided as that the part which lyeth be­twixt the point of divi&longs;ion and the Vertex be triple to the re&longs;t; the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Figure &longs;hall be nearer to the Ba&longs;e of the Cone than that point of divi&longs;ion: and the Center of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed &longs;hall be nearer to the Vertex than that &longs;ame point.

Take therefore a Cone, who&longs;e Axis is N M. Let it be divided in S &longs;o, as that N S be triple to the remainder S M. I &longs;ay, that the Center of Gravity of any Figure in&longs;cribed, as was &longs;aid, in a Cone doth con&longs;i&longs;t in the Axis N M, and approacheth nearer to the Ba&longs;e of the Cone than the point S: and that the Center of Gravity of the Circum&longs;cribed is likewi&longs;e in the Axis N M, and nearer to the Vertex than is S. Let a Figure therefore be &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be in&longs;cribed by the Cy­linders who&longs;e Axis M C, C B, B E, E A are equal. Fir&longs;t therefore the Cylinder who&longs;e Axis is M C hath

to the Cylinder who&longs;e Axis is C B the &longs;ame proportion as its Ba&longs;e hath to the Ba&longs;e of the other (for their Alti­tudes are equal.) But this propor­tion is the &longs;ame with that which the Square C N hath to the Square N B. And &longs;o we might prove, that the Cy­linder who&longs;e Axis is C B hath to the Cylinder who&longs;e Axis is B E the &longs;ame proportion, as the Square B N hath to the Square N E: and the Cylinder who&longs;e Axis is B E hath to the Cylin­der who&longs;e Axis is E A the &longs;ame pro­portion that the Square E N hath to the Square N A. But the Lines N C, N B, E N, and N A equally exceed one another, and their exce&longs;s equalleth the lea&longs;t, that is N A. Therefore they are certain Magnitudes, to wit, in­&longs;cribed Cylinders having con&longs;equently to one another the &longs;ame proporti­on as the Squares of Lines that equally exceed one another, and the ex-ce&longs;s of which is equal to the lea&longs;t: and they are &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed on the Beam T I that their &longs;everal Centers of Gravity con&longs;i&longs;t in it, and that at equal di&longs;tances. Therefore by the things above demon&longs;trated it appeareth that the Center of Gravity of all &longs;o compo&longs;ed Magnitudes do &longs;o divide the Balance T I, that the part to wards T is more than triple to the remain­der. Let this Center be O. T O therefore is more than triple to O I. But T N is triple to I M. Therefore the whole M O will be le&longs;s than a fourth part of the whole M N, who&longs;e fourth part was &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be M S. It is manife&longs;t, therefore, that the point O doth nearer approach the Ba&longs;e of the Cone than S. And let the circum&longs;cribed Figure be com­po&longs;ed of the Cylinders who&longs;e Axis M C, C B, B E, E A and A N are equal to each other, and, like as in tho&longs;e in&longs;cribed, let them be to one another as the Squares of the Lines M N, N C, B N, N E, A N, which equally exceed one another, and the exce&longs;s is equal to the lea&longs;t A N. Wherefore, by the premi&longs;es, the Center of Gravity of all the Cy­linders &longs;o di&longs;po&longs;ed, which let be V, doth &longs;o divide the Beam R I, that the part towards R, to wit R V, is more than triple to the remaining part V I: but T V &longs;hall be le&longs;s than triple to the &longs;ame. But N T is triple to all I M: Therefore all V M is more than the fourth part of all M N, who&longs;e fourth part was &longs;uppo&longs;ed to be M S. Therefore the point V is nearer to the Vertex than the Point S. Which was to be demon&longs;tra­ted.

PROPOSITION.

About a given Cone a Figure may be circum&longs;cri­bed and another in&longs;cribed con&longs;i&longs;ting of Cylin­ders of equal height, &longs;o, as that the Line which lyeth betwixt the Center of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed, and the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed, may be le&longs;&longs;er than any Line given.

Let a Cone be given, who&longs;e Axis is A B; and let the Right Line given be K. I &longs;ay; Let there be placed by the Cylinder L equal to that in&longs;cribed in the Cone, having for its Altitude half of the Axis A B: and let A B be divided in C, &longs;o as that A C be tri­ple to C B: And as A C is to K, &longs;o let the Cylinder L be to the Solid X. And about the Cone let there be a Figure circum&longs;cribed of Cylin­ders that have equal Altitude, and let another be in&longs;cribed, &longs;o as that the circum&longs;cribed exceed the in&longs;cribed a le&longs;s quantity than the Solid X. And let the Center of Gravity of the circum&longs;cribed be E; which falls above C: and let the Center of the in&longs;cribed be S, falling beneath C.I &longs;ay now, that the Line E S is le&longs;&longs;er than K. For if not, then let C A be &longs;uppo&longs;ed equal to E O. Becau&longs;e therefore O E hath to K the &longs;ame proportion that L hath to X; and the in&longs;cribed Figure is not le&longs;s than the Cylinder L; and the exce&longs;s with which the &longs;aid Figure is exceeded by the circum&longs;cribed is le&longs;s than the Solid X: therefore the in&longs;cribed Figure &longs;hall have to the &longs;aid exce&longs;s

greater proportion than O E hath to K: But the proportion of O E to K is not le&longs;s than that which O E hath to E S with E S. Let it not be le&longs;s than K. Therefore the in&longs;cribed Figure hath to the exce&longs;s of the circum&longs;cri­bed Figure above it greater propor­tion than O E hath to E S. Therefore as the in&longs;cribed is to the &longs;aid exce&longs;s, &longs;o &longs;hall it be to the Line E S. Let E R be a Line greater than E O; and the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Figure is S; and the Center of the cir­cum&longs;cribed is E. It is manife&longs;t there­fore, that the Center of Gravity of the remaining proportions by which the circum&longs;cribed exceedeth the in &longs;cribed is in the Line R E, and in that point by which it is &longs;o termina­ted, that as the in&longs;cribed Figure is to the &longs;aid proportions, &longs;o is the Line included betwixt E and that point to the Line E S. And this propor­tion hath R E to E S. Therefore the Center of Gravity of the remain­ing proportions with which the circum&longs;cribed Figure exceeds the in­&longs;cribed &longs;hall be R, which is impo&longs;&longs;ible. For the Plane drawn thorow R equidi&longs;tant to the Ba&longs;e of the Cone doth not cut tho&longs;e proportions. It is therefore fal&longs;e that the Line E S is not le&longs;&longs;er than K. It &longs;hall therefore be le&longs;s. The &longs;ame al&longs;o may be done in a manner not unlike this in Pyra­mides, as ne could demon&longs;trate.

COROLLARY.

Hence it is manife&longs;t, that a given Cone may circum&longs;cribe one Figure and in&longs;cribe another con&longs;i&longs;ting of Cylinders of equal Altitudes &longs;o, as that the Lines which are intercepted betwixt their Centers of Gravity and the point which &longs;o divides the Axis of the Cone, as that the part towards the Vertex is tri­ple to the le&longs;t, are le&longs;s than any given Line.

For, &longs;ince it hath been demon&longs;trated, that the &longs;aid point dividing the Axis, as was &longs;aid, is alwaies found betwixt the Centers of Gravityof the Circum&longs;cribed and in&longs;cribed Figures: and that it's po&longs;&longs;ible, that there be a Line in the middle betwixt tho&longs;e Centers that is le&longs;s than any Line a&longs;&longs;igned; it followeth that the &longs;ame given Line be much le&longs;s that lyeth betwixt one of the &longs;aid Centers and the &longs;aid point that divides the Axis.

PROPOSITION.

The Center of Gravity divideth the Axis of any Cone or Pyramid &longs;o, that the part next the Vertex is triple to the remainder.

Let there be a Cone who&longs;e Axis is A B. And in C let it be divided, &longs;o that A C be triple to the remaining part C B. It is to be proved, that C is the Center of Gravity of the Cone. For if it be not, the Cone's Center &longs;hall be either above or below the point C. Let it be fir&longs;t beneath, and let it be E. And draw the Line L P, by it &longs;elf, equal to C E; which divided at plea&longs;ure in N. And as both B E and P N to­gether are to P N, &longs;o let the Cone be to the Solid X: and in&longs;cribe in the Cone a Solid Figure of Cylinders that have equal Ba&longs;es, who&longs;e Center of Gravity is le&longs;s di&longs;tant from the point C than is the Line L N, and the exce&longs;s of the Cone above it le&longs;s than the Solid X. And that this may be done is manife&longs;t from what hath been already demon&longs;trated. Now let the in&longs;cribed Figure be &longs;uch as

was required, who&longs;e Center of Gravity let be I. The Line I E therefore &longs;hall be greater than N P together with L P. Let C E and I C le&longs;s L N be equal: And be­cau&longs;e both together B E and N P is to N P as the Cone to X: and the exce&longs;s by which the Cone exceeds the in&longs;cribed Figure is le&longs;s than the Solid X: Therefore the Cone &longs;hall have greater proportion to the &longs;aid X S than both B E and N P to N P: and, by Divi&longs;ion, the in&longs;cribed Figure &longs;hall have greater proportion to the exce&longs;s by which the Cone exceeds it, than B E to N P: But B E hath le&longs;s proportion to E I than to N P with I E. Let N P be greater. Then the in&longs;cribed Fi­gure hath to the exce&longs;s of the Cone above it much greater proportion than B E to E I. Therefore as the in&longs;cribed Figure is to the &longs;aid exce&longs;s, &longs;o &longs;hall a Line bigger than B E be to E I. Let that Line be M E. Becau&longs;e, therefore, M E is to E I as the in&longs;cribed Figure is to the exce&longs;s of the Cone above the &longs;aid Figure, and D is the Center of Gravity of the Cone, and I the Center of Gravity of the in&longs;cribed Figure: ThereforeM &longs;hall be the Center of Gravity of the remaining proportions by which the Cone exceeds the in&longs;cribed Figure. Which is impo&longs;&longs;ible. Therefore the Center of Gravity of the Cone is not below the point C. Nor is it above it. For if it may be, let it be R. And again a&longs;&longs;ume L P cut at plea&longs;ure in N: And as both B C and N P together are to N L, &longs;o let the Cone be to X. And let a Figure be, in like manner, circum&longs;cribed about the Cone, which exceeds the &longs;aid Cone a le&longs;s quantity than the Solid X. And let the Line which intercepts bet wixt its Center of Gravity and C, be le&longs;&longs;er than N P. Now take the circum&longs;cribed Figure, who&longs;e Center let be O; the remainder O R &longs;hall be greater than the &longs;aid N L. And becau&longs;e, as both together B C and P N is to N L, &longs;o is the Cone to X: And the exce&longs;s by which the circum&longs;cribed exceeds the Cone is le&longs;&longs;er than X: And B O is le&longs;&longs;er than B C and P N together: And O R grea­ter than L N: The Cone therefore &longs;hall have much greater proportion to the remaining proportions by which it was exceeded by the circum&longs;cribed Figure, than B O to O R. Let it be as M O is to O R. M O &longs;hall be greater than B C; and M &longs;hall be the Center of Gravity of the pro­portions by which the Cone is exceeded by the circum&longs;cribed Figure. Which is inconvenient. Therefore the Center of Gravity of the Cone is not above the point C. But neither is it below it; as hath been proved. Therefore it &longs;hall be C it &longs;elf. And &longs;o in like manner may it be demon­&longs;trated in any Pyramid.

PROPOSITION.

If there were four Lines continual proportionals; and as the lea&longs;t of them were to the exce&longs;s by which the greate&longs;t exceeds the lea&longs;t, &longs;o a Line taken at plea&longs;ure &longs;hould be to 3/4 the exce&longs;s by which the greate&longs;t exceeds the &longs;econd; and as the Line equal to the&longs;e (viz. to the greate&longs;t, double of the &longs;econd, and triple of the third) is to the Line equal to the quadruple of the fourth, the quadruple of the &longs;econd, and the quadruple of the third, &longs;o &longs;hould another Line taken be to the exce&longs;s of the greate&longs;t above the &longs;econd: the&longs;e two Lines taken together &longs;hall be a fourth part of the greate&longs;t of the propor­tionals.

For let A B, B C, B D, and B E be four proportional Lines. And as B E is to E A, &longs;o let F G be to 3/4 of A C. And as the Line equal to A B and to double B C and to triple B D is to the Line equal to the quadruples of A B, B C, and B D, &longs;o let H G be to A C. It is to be proved, that H F is a fourth part of A B. Fora&longs;much therefore as A B, B C, B D, and B E

are proportionals, A C, C D, and D E &longs;hall be in the &longs;ame proportion: And as the quadruple of the &longs;aid A B, B C, and B D is to A B with the double of B C and triple of B D, &longs;o is the quadruple of A C, C D, and D E; that is, the quadruple of A E; to A C with the double of C D, and triple of D E. And &longs;o is A C to H G. Therefore as the triple of A E is to A C, with the double of C D and triple of D E, &longs;o is 3/4 of A C to H G. And as the triple of A E is to the triple of E B, &longs;o is 3/4 A C to G F: Therefore, by the Conver&longs;e of the twenty fourth of the fifth, As triple A E is to A C with double C D and tri­ple D B, &longs;o is 3/4 of A C to H F: And as the quadruple of A E is to A C with the double of C D and triple of D B; that is, to A B with C B and B D, &longs;o is A C to H F. And, by Permutation, as the quadruple of A E is to A C, &longs;o is A B with C B and B D to H F. And as A C is to A E, &longs;o is A B to A B with C B and B D. Therefore, ex æquali, by Perturbed proportion, as quadruple A E is to A E, &longs;o is A B to H F. Wherefore it is manife&longs;t that H F is the fourth part of A B.

PROPOSITION.

The Center of Gravity of the Fru&longs;tum of any Py­ramid or Cone, cut equidi&longs;tant to the Plane of the Ba&longs;e, is in the Axis, and doth &longs;o divide the &longs;ame, that the part towards the le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;e is to the remainder, as the triple of the greater Ba&longs;e, with the double of the mean Space be­twixt the greater and le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;e, together with the le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;e is to the triple of the le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;e, together with the &longs;ame double of the mean Space, as al&longs;o of the greater Ba&longs;e.

From a Cone or Pyramid who&longs;e Axis is A D, and equidi&longs;tant to the Plane of the Ba&longs;e, let a Fru&longs;tum be cut who&longs;e Axis is V D. And as the triple of the greate&longs;t Ba&longs;e with the double of the mean and lea&longs;t is to the triple of the lea&longs;t and double of the mean and greate&longs;t, &longs;o is \ O to O D. It is to be proved that the Center of Gra­vity of the Fru&longs;tum is in O. Let V M be the fourth part of V D. Set the Line H X by the by, equal to A D: and let K X be equal to A V: and unto H X K let X L be a third proportional, and X S a fourth. And as H S is to S X, &longs;o let M D be to the Line taken from O towards A: which let be O N. And becau&longs;e the greater Ba&longs;e is in proportion to that which is mean betwixt the greater and le&longs;&longs;er as D A to A V; that

is, as H X, to X K, but the &longs;aid mean is to the lea&longs;t as K X to X L; the greater, mean, and le&longs;&longs;er Ba&longs;es &longs;hall be in the &longs;ame proportion as H X, X K, and X L. Wherefore as triple the greater Ba&longs;e, with double the mean and le&longs;&longs;er, is to triple the lea&longs;t with double the mean and grea­te&longs;t; that is, as V O is to O D; &longs;o is triple H X with double X K and X L to triple X L, with double X K and X H: And by Compo&longs;ition and Converting the proportion, O D &longs;hall be to V D, as H X, with double X K and triple X L, to quadruple H X, X K, and X L. There are, therefore, four proportional Lines, H X, X K, X L, and X S: And as X S is to S H, &longs;o is the Line taken N O to 3/4 of D V, to wit, to D M; that is, to 3/4 of H K: And as H X with double X K and triple X L is to quadruple H X, X K and X L; &longs;o is another Line taken O D to D V; that is, to H K. Therefore, by the things demon&longs;trated, D N &longs;hall be the fourth part of H X; that is, of A D. Wherefore the point N &longs;hall be the Center of Gravity of the Cone or Pyramid who&longs;e Axis is A D. Let the Center of Gra­vity of the Pyramid or Cone who&longs;e Axis is A V be I. It is therefore manife&longs;t that the Center of Gravity of the Fru&longs;tum is in the Line I N inclining towards the part N, and in that point of it which with the point N include a Line to which I M hath the &longs;ame proportion that the Fru&longs;tum cut hath to the Pyramid or Cone who&longs;e Axis is A V. It remaineth therefore to prove that I N hath the &longs;ame proportion to N O, that the Fru&longs;tum hath to the Cone who&longs;e Axis is A V. But as the Cone who&longs;e Axis is D A is to the Cone who&longs;e Axis is A V, &longs;o is the Cube D A to the Cube D V; that is, the Cube H X to the Cube X K: But this is the &longs;ame proportion that H X hath to X S. Wherefore, by Divi&longs;ion, as H S is to S X, &longs;o &longs;hall the Fru&longs;tum who&longs;eAxis is D V be to the Cone or Pyramid who&longs;e Axis is V A. And as H S is to S X, &longs;o al&longs;o is M D to O N. Wherefore the Fru&longs;tum is to the Pyramid who&longs;e Axis is A V, as M D to N O. And becau&longs;e A N is 3/4 of A D; and A I is 3/4 of A V; the remainder I N &longs;hall be 3/4 of the remainder V D. Wherefore I N &longs;hall be equal to M D. And it hath been demon&longs;trated that M D is to N O, as the Fru&longs;tum to the Cone A V. It is mani­fe&longs;t, therefore, that I N hath likewi&longs;e the &longs;ame proportion to N O: Wherefore the Propo­&longs;ition is manife&longs;t.

FINIS.